CLEARWATER BEACH FAMILY AQUATIC CENTER SPECIFICATIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\d-.,-\.91
~~~
CLEARWATER BEACH FAMILY AQUATIC CENTER
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
SPECIFICATIONS
October 17, 1997
Owner:
CITY OF CLEARWATER
PARKS & RECREATION DEPARTMENT
:>
l<l
'j;
-t
I'
~
(\
:>
-t
a
z
"
'j;
z
/'--"
r
~
N
~
~.
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Description
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
01000
01030
01100
Advertisement of Bids and Notice to Contractors
Alternates
Instructions to Bidders
CONTRACT BID DOCUMENTS
Contract Bond ........................................ 1 thru 3
Contract ............................................. 4 thru 6
Contractor's Contract Completion Affidavit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 & 8
Proposal Bond .............................................. 9
Affidavit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Non-Collusion Affidavit ..................................... 11
Proposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 12 thru 16
01200
01300
01730
General Conditions
Supplementary Conditions
Operation and Maintenance Instructions
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02210
02220
Earthwork
Structure Excavation and Backfill
Boring Data
Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting for Utility Systems
Erosion Control
Soil Treatment
Concrete Sidewalk
Concrete Curb, Curb and Gutter, and Traffic Separator
Pavement Removal and Replacement
Water Distribution System
Tree Protection, Trimming and Transplanting
Storm Drainage Structures, Pipes and Fittings
Sanitary Sewage System
Solid Sodding
02221
02270
02280
02510
02528
02574
02660P
02710
02720
02730P
02934
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03000
03100
Concrete (Site Work)
Concrete Formwork
TC -1
60-954.00
I
I 03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03250 Concrete Accessories
I 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
I DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04000 Unit Masonry
I
I DIVISION 5 - METALS
05500 Miscellaneous Metals
I DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTIC
,I 06100 Rough Carpentry
06190 Plate Connected Wood Trusses
I 06410 Countertops
I DIVISION 7 - MOISTURE PROTECTION
07100 Roof Coating
I 07212 Building Insulation
07410 Sheet Metal Roofing
07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal
I 07920 Caulking and Sealants
I DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
I 08110 Hollow Metal Work
08200 Bi-Fold Wood Doors
08210 Wood Doors
I 08520 Aluminum Windows
08710 Finish Hardware
08800 Glass and Glazing
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
I
I TC-2 60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
09111
09200
09205
09250
09780
09900
Metal Stud Framing System
Plaster And Stucco
Furring and Lathing (Interior Plaster)
Gypsum Wallboard
Special Flooring
Painting
DIVISION 10- SPECIAL TIES
10170
10201
10400
10500
10800
Solid Plastic Toilet Partitions
Louvers
Identifying Devices
Lockers
Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13150
13152
Swimming Pools
Swimming Pool Umbrella
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15010
15094
15100
15160
15190
15250
15400
15440
15770
15890
15936
15990
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Supports and Hangers
Piping and Specialties
Equipment Pads and Vibration Isolation
Mechanical Identification
Mechanical Insulation
Valves
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment
HV AC Equipment
Ductwork
Air Distribution Devices
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HV AC Systems
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010
Basic Electrical Requirements
TC - 3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
16110
16120
16130
16140
16150
16160
16170
16180
16181
16190
16450
16510
Raceways
Wires, Cables and Connectors
Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes
Switches and Receptacles
Motor Auxiliaries
Panel boards
Disconnects
Overcurrent Protective Devices
Fuses
Equipment and Raceway Support Systems
Grounding
Interior Lighting
TC -4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01000
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS AND
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
CLEARWATER BEACH FAMILY AQUATIC CENTER
CONTRACT # 98-4
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida, at the
Purchasing Office. located at the Municipal Services Building. 3rd Floor. 100 South Myrtle Avenue.
Clearwater. Florida 33756-5520 until 1:30 P.M. on Wenesday, November 5, 1997, and publicly
opened and read at that hour and place for Clearwater Beach Family Aquatic Center, located at
51 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Beach, Florida (# 98-4).
The work for which proposals are invited consists of the new construction of an approximately 2,000
square foot one-story concrete masonry unit building; swimming pool; pool deck; and site work; together
with necessary appurtenances.
A Pre-Bid conference isRECOMMENDED for all prospective bidders to be held on Monday, October
27,1997 at 10:00 A.M., on site at 51 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Beach, Florida. Representatives
of the Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss this project. A tour of the project will be conducted
following the pre-bid conference.
Copies ofthe Contract Documents, all bound together, and the plans therefore, are on file and available
for inspection by prospective bidders at the Municipal Services Building, Central Permitting Counter,
Engineering Section, 2nd Floor, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida, between the hours of
8:30 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday, on Monday, Octobe 20,1997, until no later than close
of business three days preceding the bid opening. A charge of $ 80.00, none of which will be refunded,
will be made for each set.
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and
proposal form is available only to pre-qualified contractors in the construction category of
COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS with a minimum pre-qualification amount of$550.000.00. NOTE:
Section 13150-Swinnimg Pools, 1.03 Qualifications for Pool Contractor.
Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be interested as a possible
subcontractor, supplier, etc., may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications,
and pay items worksheet.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
Elizabeth Deptula, City Manager
01000-1
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01030
ALTERNATES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. If so decided by the Owner, solely at his option, provide the alternative materials, equipment
or systems described in the Alternate Items listed hereunder instead of those included in the
Base Bid.
B. Enter for each Alternate Item in the Proposal, the difference in cost between that Alternate
Item and the work or system in the Base Bid which it replaces. If an item is accepted, the
Base Bid price will be adjusted by the amount, added or deducted as applicable, entered for
that Alternate Item.
1.02 ALTERNATES
A. Alternate Item No.1: Provide one Raindrop water feature and pump as shown on the
Drawings. The water feature is manufactured by Sonar International. The roughed in water
service for this slide is provided as a part of the Base Bid. The piping shall be extended to
the location in the pool and capped below the pool floor.
B. Alternate Item No.2: Provide one Kiddie Slide as shown on the Drawings. The slide is a
Front Frog slide as manufactured by New Braunfels General Store. The roughed in water
service for this slide is provided as a part of the Base Bid.
C. Alternate Item No.3: Provide one drop slide as shown on the Drawings. The slide is a
Model 1628 by Natural Structures, Inc. The water service for the slide is provided as a part
of the Base Bid.
D. Alternate Item No.4: Provide three Lemon Drop sprays as shown on the Drawings. The
Lemon Drops are manufactured by Sonar International. The roughed in water service for
these water features are provided as a part of the Base Bid.
E. Alternate Item No.5: Provide one Funbrella as shown on the Drawings. The Funbrella is
manufactured by Anchor Industries, Inc. Provide the anchor and install the umbrella in its
ground sleeve in concrete.
F. Alternate Item No.6: Provide marcite plaster in lieu of special aggregate plaster for the pool
finish.
END OF SECTION
01030-1
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01100
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PART 1 - COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available for the sum stated in the
Advertisement for Bid from the Office of the Purchasing Manager. This amount represents
reproduction costs and is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans,
specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only
to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who
may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a
"Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
1.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. (For the purpose
of clarification, Post Buckley Schuh & Jernigan is the engineering firm for the City of
Clearwater. Post Buckley acts on behalf of the City of Clearwater, within the context of this
document. )
1.03 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only
for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any
other permission to use the documents for any other purpose.
PART 2 - QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.01 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department,
Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 34618-4748 (mailing
address); Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue (street address only) or by
phone at 813-562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the
Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the
time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to
make reapplication.
01100-1
60-954.00
01100-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
PART 3 - EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may
in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and 10callaws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.02 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been
utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon
the accuracy ofthe technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data,
interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes
of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of
existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or
contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the
Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in
such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or
construction.
3.03 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.04 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible
conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions
appear in the General Conditions.
3.05 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.06 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
I
I
I
I
I
I
!I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.07 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided
by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.08 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
PART 4 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.01 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all
parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents.
Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and
other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
4.02 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
PART 5 - BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.01 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidders's maximum Bid price and in the form
of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting
the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
5.02 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the
Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Commission, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will
01100-3
60-954.00
be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
5.03 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
PART 6 - CONTRACT TIME
6.01 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set
forth inSection 01300, under 1.03 B.
PART 7 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
7.01 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement.
PART 8 - SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.01 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
PART 9 - SUBCONTRACTORS
9.01 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
Contractor in the completion of the Work. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has
reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization,
he may, before recommending award of the Contract Agreement to the City Commission,
request the
01100-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price
or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City
may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use
acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to
make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to
the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by
the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the
recommendation of award to the City Commission will be deemed acceptable to the City
subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement
as provided in the General Conditions.
9.02 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
PART 10 - BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.01 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder
must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineations, alterations
or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract
Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump
sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for
completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be
found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the
work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the
work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct
proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items.
10.02 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
. the corporation or partnership.
10.03 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
10.04 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
011 00-5
60-954.00
01100-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 11 - SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.01 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in the bid envelope provided with the bid
documents. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the
notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention
Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until
the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing
Manager will not be accepted.
PART 12 - MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.01 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.02 More than one Bid received for the same work from an individual, firm or partnership, a
Corporation or Association under the same or different names will not be considered.
Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder is interested in more than one Bid for the
same work will cause the rejection of all such Bids in which the Bidder is interested. If there
are reasonable grounds for believing that collusion exists among the Bidders, the Bids of
participants in such collusion will not be considered.
12.03 After a Bid is received by the City, the Bidder may request to modify the Bid for
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The Bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the Bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error and what the adjusted Bid amount will be ifthe correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any Bid.
PART 13 - REJECTION OF BIDS
13.01 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
PART 14 - DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.01 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the Bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposals for the same work. Each Bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit and the
Sworn Statement on Public Entity Crimes contained in the Contract Documents.
PART 15 - OPENING OF BIDS
15.01 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
PART 16 - LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.01 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit and
impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.02 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
16.03 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
PART 17 - IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.01 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
011 00-7
60-954.00
01100-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
A. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the
workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for
violations of such prohibition.
B. Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's
policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling,
rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be
imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations.
C. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services
that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
D. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition
of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the
employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any
conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893,
or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a
violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
E. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse
assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community,
by any employee who is so convicted.
F. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 18 - AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.01 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies
in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit
prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct
sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.02 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not
the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be
requested in the BidIProposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience
of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor
for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to
assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and
financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and
organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.03 lfthe Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best
interest of the City.
18.04 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in
the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be
awarded to only one Contractor.
PART 19 - BID PROTEST
19.01 Right to Protest: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or
award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing
Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures
set forth in this section.
19.02 Protest Procedure:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposal. Opening dates for bids or
due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
01100-9
60-954.00
01100-10
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite
specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should
be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five
business days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully
coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City
Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five business days of receipt of that
response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original
formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten work
days of receipt of the appeal.
19.03 Stay of Procurement During Protest: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing
Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative
remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that
. the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City.
PART 20 - TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.01 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections
553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions ofthe Occupational Safety and Health
Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.S 1926.650 Subparagraph
P, or current revisions of these laws.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
BOND NOMl3ER:
CONTRACT BOND
STAXE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
KNOW ALL HE:N BY TRESE PRESENTS: That we
as principal
and
( Surety )
whose home address is
HEREINAFTER. O-T.T.1=.:n THE -Surety-, are held and fiJ:m.ly bound into
the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the -Owner-)
in the penal sum of:
Dollars ($
for the payment of which we bind ourselves;. our heirs,
anministrators, successors, and assigns for the
perfo~ce of a certain written contract, dated the
day of 19 I entered into between the Pri..~cipa1
and the City of Clearwater for:
)
executors,
faithful
a copy ~f which said contract is incorporated herein by reference
and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if
the Principal shall in all respects comply with the teDnS and
condi tions of said contract, includinq the one-year guarantee of
material and labor, and his obliqations thereunder, includinq the
contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Fo:cn
of Proposal, Fo:m of Contract, Fo:cn of Surety Bond, Instructions
to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and
the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part
thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and
Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and
save ha:cnless the said Owner aqainst and from all costs, expenses,
damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or
default, including patent infringements on the part of the said
Principal agents or employees, in the execution or perfo~ce of
said contract, includinq errors in the plans fu:rn.ished by the
Principal, and further, if such · Contractor- or · Contractors.
shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or
it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by
said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-contractor, or Sub-Contractors,
in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this
obliqation shall be void, otherwise, the Principal and Surety
jointly and severally aqree to pay to the Owner any difference
between the sum to which the said Principal would be entitled on
the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be
obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or
-
- 1 -
CONTRACT BOND
( 2 )
otherwise, and any damages, direct or indirect, or conseqUential,
which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on
account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in
all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract.
And the said Principal and Surety hereby further bind themselves,
the~ successors, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly
and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said
Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs
and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner
may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason
of any damages arising from the perfoJ:mance of said work, or of
the repa~ or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same
or the neglect of the said Principal or hi~ agents or servants or
the ~proper perfo~ce of the said work by the Principal or his
agents or servants, or the infringements of any pe:ent rights by
reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as
aforesaid, or otherwise.
And the said Principal and Surety hereby further bind themselves,
the~ successors, he~s, executors, administrators, and assigns,
jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner
may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material
furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract.
And the said Surety,. for the value received, hereby stipulates and
agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition
to the te1:m.S of the contract or to the work to be perfo:cned
thereunder or the specifica tions accompanying the same shall in
any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby
waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or
addi tion to the te:cns of the contract or to the work or to the
specifications.
- 2 -
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I~/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
CONTRACT BOND
( 3 )
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties
hereto this day of , 19
ATTEST:
WITNESS:
COUNTERSIGNED:
CONTRACTOR
By:
.
SURETY
By:
ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
-
- 3 -
CONTRACT
day of
Florida,
I
This CONTRACT made and entered into this
19 by and between the City of Cl earwa ter ,
corporation,
,
a municipal .
I
hereinafter designated as the "City", and
, of the City of
I
County of
designated as the "Contractor".
and State of Florida,
hereinafter I
..
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of thel
undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein
contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: I
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or
admini. . .strators, in consideration of.the sums of money as herein after I
set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will
at own cost and expense perfoJ:m all labor, furni.sh all
materials, tools and equipment for the following:
I
In accordance with such proposal and technical sUPPlementall
) specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any,
.~ which will be submitted by' the City, together with any advertisement, I
instructions to bidders, general condi tions , proposal and bond, which
may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein
referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of. said I
work to be perfor.med and completed by the contractor and its successors.
and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner
to the satisfaction of the City. I
If the Contractor should fail .to comply wi th any of the teJ:mS , .
conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the
time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the I
Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or
all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed
to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform inl
accordance with the provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE-I
TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST
THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS
CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS
AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND I
HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS
OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE ONDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST
THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, I
SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED
CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES.
- 4 -
07/87
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
(2)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to
conform to the following requirements:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the
Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or
applicant for emploYment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national oriqin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be
limited to, the following: emploYment, upgrading, demotion, or
transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or
termination; rates of payor other forms of compensation; and
selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor
agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for
employees or applicants for emploYment, notices to be provided by the
contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the
non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in
all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor
unions and/or workerls representatives, except sub-contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the
essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be
performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time
stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct
from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the
sum of $500.00 Der day for each day that the work to be performed
by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified
herein, which sum of $500.00 oer day shall only and solely
represent damages which the Ci ty has sustained by reason of the
failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time
stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be
construed as a penal ty but is only to be construed as liquidated
damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all
work within the time period as specified in this contract.
It:~s further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor
that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety
bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the
terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the
ci ty shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such
performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said
bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the
work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10)
days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish
an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such
surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the city. If such an
event occurs, no ?urther paYment shall be made to the Contractor
under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or
additional security bond guaranteeinq the faithful performance of the
work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the
City in a form satisfactory to it.
- 5 -
11/95
CONTRACT
( 3 )
(Seal)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set
their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate,
the day and year first above written.
CITY.OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By:
Elizabeth M. Deptula,
City Manager
Countersigned:
By:
Rita Garvey, Mayor-Commissioner
(Contractor must indicate whether
Corporation, Partnership, Company
or Individual.)
(The person signing shall, in his
own handwriting, sign the Principal's
name, his own name, and his title;
where the person is signing for a
corporation, he must, by Affidavit,
show his authority to bind the
corporation).
- 6 -
Attest:
cynthia E. Goudeau,
City Clerk
Approved as to form and
legal sufficiency:
John C. Carassas
Assistant City Attorney
(Contractor)
By:
(SEAL)
09/95
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
(CORPORATION FORM)
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF PINELLAS
On this day personally
authority, duly authorized
acknowledgments,
duly sworn, disposes and says:
appeared before me, the undersigned
to administer oaths and take
who after being
That he is the (TITLE) of
, a Florida Corporation,
with its princpal place of business located at
herein, the "Contractor).
That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract
executed on the day of , 1994, with the CITY OF
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as Owner, and that the
Contractor was to perform the construction of:
That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid
and discharged
connection with
nature nor any
encumbrance in
property.
all Sub-contractors, laborers and material men in
said work and there are no liens outstanding of any
debts or obligations that might become a lien or
connection with said work against the described
That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of
chapter 713, Florida statutes, and upon consideration of the paYment of
(Final full Amount of contract) in full satisfaction and
discharge of said contract.
That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise
out of said contract.
The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all
arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set
forth in Chapter 713, Florida statutes.
Sworn and subscribed to
this day of , 19
AFFIANT
NOTARY PUBLIC
By:
PRESIDENT
Notary's Printed Signature
My Commission Expires:
_ "7 _
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
(PARTNERSHIP FORM)
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority,
duly authorizeu to administer oaths and take acknowledgements,
and , who after being duly sworn, deposes and
says:
That he is the
(TITLE)
, a Florida Corporation, with its
of
principal place of business located at
(herein, the ~Contractor~).
That the Contractor was
executed on the day of
CLEARWAXER., FLORIDA, a III11I11cipal corporation,
was to perform the construction of:
the general contractor under a contract
19 , with the CITY OF
as Owner,-and that the Contractor
That said work has nOW been c~pleted and the Contractor bas paid and
discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with
said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or
obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said
work against the described property.
That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of
Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of
(Final lull Amount of Contract) in full
satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
That the OWner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out
of said Contract.
The word ~l1ens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all
arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in
Chapter 713, Florida Statutes.
Sworn and subscribed to before me
AFFIANT
This
day of
19
BY
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires:
PRESIDENT
- 8 -
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL BOND
(Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted)
KNOWN ALL HEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned,
as Principal, and
as Surety, are held
and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of
Dollars ($
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the paYment
of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.
The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached
Proposal of as Principal, and
as Surety, for work
specified as:
all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto,
in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all
within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above
named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of
said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required
Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City
Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in
full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this proposal Bond
will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages.
Signed this
day of
, 19
(Principal must indicate whether
corporation, partnership, company
or individual)
Principal
The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's By:
name, his own name and his title; Title
the person signing for a corporation
must, by affidavit, show his authority
to bind the corporation.
Surety
- 9 -
Affiant further says that
is
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
COUNTY OF
)
)
STATE 01' P'LORIDA
being duly sworn, deposes and says
that he/she is Secretary of
a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of
the state of Florida, and having its principal office at:
street & Number
City
County
state
Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books
and by-laws of
(Name of corporation)
(Officer's Name)
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign
(Title)
to sign the Proposal for
for said corporation by virtue of
.. (state whether a provision of by laws
or a Resolution of the Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date
of adoption.)
Affiant
Sworn to before me this
day of
, 19
Notary Public
Type/print/stamp name of Notary
Title or rank, and Serial No., if ar.y
-
\
j
- 10 -
I
,I
I
I
I~
I
I
I
I
I._:.L
. I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I -
I
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF FLORIDA
)
)
COUNTY OF
be~g, first duly sworn,
deposes and says that he is
of
the party making the foregoing proposal or Bid; that such Bid is
genu~e and not collusive or sh~: that said bidder is not financially
interested ~ or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other
bidder on the s~e contract; that said bidder has not colluded,
conspi.red, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, wi th any
bidders or person, to put in a sh~ bid or that such other person shall
refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or
indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or
conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any
other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said
bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage
against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons
interested ~ the proposed contract; and that all statements contained
in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not
directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or
divulged info~tion or data relative thereto to any association or to
any member or agent thereof.
Affiant
Sworn to and subscribed before me this
19
day of
,
Notary Public
..
- 11 -
PROPOSAL
(1 )
TO THE CITY OP CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with
the contract documents, marked
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal
be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is
made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the city of
Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a
binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that
funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without
the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the
contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been
approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with
this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only
person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are
named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement,
Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental
Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract
Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is
necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he
proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract
with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto
annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment,
tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract
within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the
requirements of the city of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and
hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the
following prices to wit:
- 12 -
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I..,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I..
I
I I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
PROPOSAL
(2)
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the city of Clearwater,
Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory
contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City
may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the
contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the
certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to
become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full
amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal
Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the city as
stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check
accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be
returned to the undersigned as specified herein.
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on
Bank, for the sum of
($
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in
the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and
Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the
members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also
the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby
such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit,
whether sub-contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is
contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
NAMES:
ADDRESSES:
signature of Bidder:
(The bidder must indicate whether Corporation, Partner,ship, Company or
Individual) .
- 13 -
Dated at
, this
day of
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL
(3)
The person signing shall, in. his own handwriting, sign the Principal's
name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a
corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by
affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
By:
Title:
Business Address of Bidder:
City and state:
Zip Code
, A.D., 19
- 1.. -
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL
(4)
PROJECT:
ITEM
NO.
Clearwater Beach Family Aquatic Center (98-4)
UNIT
PRICE
UNIT
TOTAL
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY.
1 Provide labor and materials to LS
construct a swimming pool;
one-story concrete masonry unit
building: pool decking; drainage
improvements and site work.
2 Removal of rubble and backfill 250 cu. yd.
with suitable material
3 Removal of peat material and 250 cu. yd.
backfill with suitable material
TOTAL BASE BID
TOTAL BASE BID NUMBERS $
(WORDS)
1
PROVIDE ONE RAINDROP WATER
FEATURE AND PUMP AS SHOWN ON
DRAWINGS
PROVIDE ONE KIDDIE SLIDE AS
SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
PROVIDE ONE DROP SLIDE AS
SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
PROVIDE ONE THREE LEMON DROP
SLIDE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
PROVIDE ONE FUNBRELLA
AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
PROVIDE MARCITE PLASTER IN LlUE
OF SPECIAL AGGREGATE PLASTER
FOR THE POOL FINISH
ALTERNATES-SEE SECTION 01030 FOR DESCRIPTION
2
3
4
5
6
CONTRACTOR:
LS
1
LS
1
LS
1
LS
1
LS
1
LS
1
THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND
LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE IS
FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE
TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN
ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT
PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN.
-15-
LIST PROJECT
NAME/ADDRESS
COMPLETION
DATE
REFERENCE NAME
AND PHONE NUMBER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROJECT Clearwater Beach Family Aquatic Center (98-4)
QUALIFICATION OF SUB-CONTRACTOR MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH THIS BID AS STATED
IN SECTION 13150 SWIMMIN POOLS 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF POOL CONTRACTOR.
POOL COORDINATOR:
ADDRESS:
OCCUPATIONAL LICENSE NUMBER:
OTHER FICTITIOUS NAMES:
LIST ANY JUDGEMENTS PAST OR PRESENT:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURE:
-lSa-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01200
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1- DEFINITIONS
Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or
change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agreement The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be
performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided
therein.
Application for Payment The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in
requesting progress or fmal payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation
as is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve The word approve is defmed to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods
for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents.
It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with
the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the
work to be performed.
Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on
or after the effective date of the Agreement.
City The City of Clearwater, Florida.
Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's
Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to
the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to
Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings,
any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution
of the Agreement.
Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
01200-1
60-954.00
Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
I
I
Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement.
I
I
Day A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty
or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any
inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been
damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment.
I
Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which
show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by
Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
I
I
I
Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer or his duly appointed representative Post, Buckley, Schuh, and
Jernigan, Inc..
Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's
independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such
in the Supplementary Conditions, as Post, Buckley, Schuh, and Jernigan, Inc.
I
Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning
shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and
ready for service" .
I
I
Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure
that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not
be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing.
Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of
any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
I
Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property.
I
I
I
Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion
date or time prior to the final completion date.
Notice to Proceed A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under
the Contract Documents.
01200-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida
Person A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be
the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which
is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures,
standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a
supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain
administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where,
in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineers's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion,
it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part)
can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work
is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of [mal payment.
The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer
to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General
Conditions.
Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor having a direct contract
with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the
Work by the Contractor.
Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment
Bond.
Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or
other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials electricity, gases, steam, liquid
petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal
or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water.
Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
01200-3
60-954.00
I
Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be
furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor
and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and
furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents.
I
I
Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or
emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence
that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be
incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect,
if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.
I
I
PART 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
I
I
I
I
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Certificates of Insurance When Contractor delivers the executed
Agreements to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as
Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract.
2.02 Copies of Documents Engineer shall furnish to Contractor five copies of Contract Documents for
execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.03 Commencement of Contract Time/Notice to Proceed; Starting the Project The Contract Time will
commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on
the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date which
the Contact Time commences to run.
I
2.04 Before Starting Construction Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully
study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all
applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error
or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification
from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable
to Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless
Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof.
I
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of Owner or Engineer,
either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations
herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance
required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
I
I
I
I
2.05 Preconstruction Conference Within twenty days of Award of Contract and before the start of the
Work, the Engineer may schedule a conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer and others as
appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the
schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
I
I
01200-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.01 Intent The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the Owner and the
Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract
Documents are complementary; What is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent
of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed
in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably
be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required
to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for.
When words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are
used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance
with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the
Engineer. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization
or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference
be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or
Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the
Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code
(whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set
forth in the Contract Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or
Engineer, or any of their agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by Engineer.
Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract
documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were
included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly
inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically
amended to make such insertion.
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows in ascending or descending order: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda,
Supplementary Conditions, General Conditions, Drawings, Technical Specifications. In a series of
Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern.
3.02 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor
discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the
Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of
the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier,
Contractor shall report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the
Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents
has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that
Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity
or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof.
01200-5
60-954.00
PART 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS
I
I
4.01 Availability of Lands Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon
which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands
which are designated for the use of contractor. Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not
of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have
to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
facilities will be obtained and paid for by Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
I
4.02 Investigations and Reports Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical
Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been
relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not
guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall
promptly notify Engineer in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an
existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents.
Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary.
Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the
Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer fmds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there
are subsurface or latent physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the contract
Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or
Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.03 Physical Conditions, Underground Facilities The information and data shown or indicated in the
Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based
on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or
by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not
be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the
following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or
indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground
Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and
repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL
PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to
notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION
CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an
agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available
in local telephone directory.
I
I
I
01200-6
I
I
I
I
I
4.04 Reference Points Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for
construction which in Engineer's judgement are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work.
Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor
shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because
of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. The Contractor is referred to the
Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have
been set, as determined by the Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $75.00 per hour.
Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one hour increments
with a minimum charge of one hour.
PART 5-BONDSAND INSURANCE
5.01 Performance and Payment Bond/Contract Bond Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond
and Payment Bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful
performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds
shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer
period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also
furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form
prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current
list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of
Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be
accompanied by a certified copy of such agents authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all
of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within
the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the Sta.te of Florida. The Owner
reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared
bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the
Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable
to the Owner.
5.02 lnsurance Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is
appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set
forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work
and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by
any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable
for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee
benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death
of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death
of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal
injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly
related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property
wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily
injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any
motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified
in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by
Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in
01200-7
60-954.00
01200-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased
and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of
professional liability) City of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective
officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii)
include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for
Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not
be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been
given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental
Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished
by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at
all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations
insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in effect for at least
two years after [mal payment. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified
in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory
to Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year
thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract A ward
Amount Under
$1,000,000.
Contract Award
Amount $1,000,000.
and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation
(2) Employer's Liability
Statutory
$500,000.
Statutory
$1,000,000.
PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground
Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors;
Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
Contract A ward
Amount Under
$1,000,000.
Contract Award
Amount $1,000,000.
and Over
(1) Bodily Injury:
$500,000.
Each Occurrence
$1,000,000.
Each Occurrence
$1,000,000.
$1,000,000.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Annual Aggregate
(2) Property Damage
$500,000.
Each Occurrence
$1,000,000.
Annual Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted.
$1,000,000.
Annual Aggregate
Annual Aggregate
$1,000,000.
Each Occurrence
$1,000,000.
Annual Aggregate
$1,000,000
Annual Aggregate
Comprehensive Automobile Liability including all owned (private and others), hired and non-
owned vehicles:
Contract A ward
Amount Under
$1,000,000.
Contract A ward
Amount $1,000,000.
and Over
(1) Bodily Injury
$500,000.
Each Person
$1,000,000.
Each Person
$500,000.
Each Accident
(2) Property Damage
$500,000.
Each Occurrence
$1,000,000.
Each Accident
$1,000,000.
Each Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's Certificate ofInsurance, or other similar
document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages which may be less
than required by these Contract Documents. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the
Work. The Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance
policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of
exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from the
Owner.
5.03 Waiver of Rights Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with
Article on Insurance will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or
additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused
by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of
payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or
additional insured thereunder, Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their
01200-9
60-954.00
respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of
or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable
to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's
Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as
insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above
waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance
otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any
of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond
direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from
fire or other peril, whether or not insured by Owner and; (2) loss or damage to the completed Project or
part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property
insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization, after
substantial completion or after final payment.
I
I
I
I
I
PART 6 - CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
I
I
I
I
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work
competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may
be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but Contractor
shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly
required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work
complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during
its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to Owner and
Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative
at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor.
I
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever Engineer shall notify
Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or
otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed
on it except with the written consent of Engineer.
I
I
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat
accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
and sanitary condition, such sanitary
may be necessary to comply with the
I
I
I
I
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as
a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner's normally approved
holidays. At Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the Contractor's monthly
payment request or deducted from the Contractor's retention prior to release of final payment or the
Engineer may elect to receive a montWy check from the Contractor in the amount of the overtime costs.
Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours.
The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $40.00 per hour.
01200-10
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.02 Labor, Materials and Equipment Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel
to survey, layout and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all
times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or
protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise
indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any
legal holiday without Owner's consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery,
tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and
all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and
completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors, shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The
Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their
quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored may be rejected by the
Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned
in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor,
except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
6.03 Substitutes and "Or Equal" Items Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or
described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular
Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required.
Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or
equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of
material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar
so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in
the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify
as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit
sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of
material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute
therefor. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer
from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be
submitted in writing to Engineer and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item
will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or
submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability.
6.04 Responsibility for Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others Contractor shall be fully responsible to
Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons
01200-11
60-954.00
I
performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as
Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents
shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship
between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any
obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to payor to see to the payment of any moneys due any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person.
I
I
Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors,
Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract
with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing
or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
I
I
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be
performed by any specific trade.
I
I
I
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the
Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit
of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not payor employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection.
Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
to furnish or perfoIin any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.
I
I
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
I
I
6.05 Use of Premises Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and
equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements,
and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or
equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the
owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work.
Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work,
Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by
arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted
by Laws and
I
I
I
Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their
officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising
out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon
Contractor's performance of the Work.
I
I
01200-12
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
, I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at
intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from
and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus
materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the
Contract Documents.
6.06 License and Patent Fees, Royalties and Taxes Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties
and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work
of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held
by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract
Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer
its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. To the fullest
extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer,
Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any
of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any
infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting
from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in
the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of
such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies which
are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.07 Laws and Regulations Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring
Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or
having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs,
losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary
responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and
Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to Owner to report and resolve
discrepancies as described above.
6.08 Pennits Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and
pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining
such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary
for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay
all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and Owner shall pay all charges of such utility
owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City of Clearwater Building Permit and
Impact Fees will be waived.
01200-13
60-954.00
I
6.09 Safety and Protection Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising
all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shaIl take all necessary
precautions for the safety of, and shaIl provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss
to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and
equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other property at
the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities
and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of
construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever
Engineer may direct; Contractor shaIl, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and
materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work
or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any
Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the
expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which
shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education
and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts.
Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop
and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the
site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition.
Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure
to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger
to Owner's employees, equipment or of property damage exists. This provision shall not shift
responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to the Owner, and the
Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety
of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his
employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe
handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists
from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall
erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners
of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may
affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their
property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by
Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed
by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,
shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of
the W Qrk shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and. Engineer has issued a notice to
Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
I
I
I
I
I
6.10 Emergencies In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property
at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner
or Engineer, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt
written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the
Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract
I
I
01200-14
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a
Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
6.11 Shop Drawings and Samples Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and
approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the
Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design
criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to
Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have
determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria,
installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all
materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation
pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (Hi) all information relative to Contractor's sole
responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and
safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated
each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's
review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific
written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the
requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the
submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample
submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the
information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will
not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a
particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly
called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review
and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item
functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number
of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval.
Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by
Engineer on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has
in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has
given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or
accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field
measurements by the Contractor.
01200-15
60-954.00
6.12 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner,
Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and
will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused
by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or
Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care
of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof
by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution
of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or
damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance
by the Owner.
I
I
I
I
I
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work which has
been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's
obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute.
N one of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract
Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents: (i) observations by Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by
Engineer, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to
contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by
Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop
Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer.
I
I
I
I
6.13 Continuing the Work Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule
during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending
resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in
writing.
I
6.14 Indemnification Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's
Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them
from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that
any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to
injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting
therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or
furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not
caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether
liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of
any such person.
I
I
I
I
I
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor
by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other
Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against Owner on such account of any damage alleged
I
I
01200-16
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
to have been sustained, Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless Owner
against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective
consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal
representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any
of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way
by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor
or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts,
disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under
this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors,
employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them.
PART 7 - OTHER WORK
7.01 Related Work at Site Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the site by Owner's
own forces, or let other direct contracts therefor which shall contain General Conditions similar to these,
or have other work performed by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was
not noted in the Contract Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to
starting any such other work, and (ii) Contractor may make a claim therefor if Contractor believes that
such performance will involve additional expense to Contractor or requires additional time and the parties
are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof.
Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each
utility owner (and Owner, if Owner is performing the additional work with Owner's employees) proper
and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and
equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and coordinate the work with
theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and
patching of the work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate
with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or
otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and
the others whose work will be affected. The duties and Responsibilities of Contractor under this paragraph
are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable
provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and
other contractors. Should the Contractor cause damage to any other contractor on the Project, the
contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement or arbitration, if he will
so settle. If such other contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so
sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend such proceedings at his own expense,
and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall payor satisfy the judgement
and pay all costs incurred by the Owner.
If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's work depends upon work performed
by others under this Article. Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in
writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for
the proper execution and results of Contractor's work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an
acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's work except for latent
or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in such other work.
01200-17
60-954.00
I
7.02 Coordination If Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at
the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii)
the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent
of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary
Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination.
I
I
PART 8 - OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
I
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to
Contractor through Engineer.
I
Owner shall furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make
payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions.
I
I
I
I
Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work.
Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on
Tests and Inspections.
In connection with Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the
Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with Owner's right to terminate services
of Contractor under certain circumstances.
The Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions
and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations
applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's
failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
PART 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.01 Owners Representative Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period.
The duties and the responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative
during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
I
I
I
I
9.02 Clarifications and Interpretations Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written
clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings
or otherwise) as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and
reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be
binding on Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation
justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the
amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefor as provided in the Articles
for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
01200-18
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9.03 Rejecting of Defective Work Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which
Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that
conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have
authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated,
installed or completed.
9.04 Shop Drawings, Change Orders, and Payments In connection with Engineer's authority as to
Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Engineer's
authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time.
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to
Contractor and Completion.
9.05 Decisions on Disputes Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters
relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents
pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of
Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract
Price will be referred initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be
delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later
than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data
will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or
event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate
data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to
Engineer and the claimant within thirty days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer
allows additional time). Engineer will render a formal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt
of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision
on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor unless (i) an
appeal from Engineer's decision is taken within thirty days of the Engineers decision, or the appeal time
which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between the Owner and Contractor for the
settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written
notice of intention to appeal from Engineer's written decision is delivered by Owner or Contractor to the
other and to Engineer within thirty days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted
by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the
appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable
Laws and Regulations within sixty days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by
Owner and Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or
Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith
in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such claim, dispute or other
matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies
as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any
such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
01200-19
60-954.00
I
9.06 Limitations on Engineer's Responsibilities Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under
this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer
in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise
or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty
owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to
any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.
I
I
I
Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and
Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be responsible for
Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
I
I
Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work.
I
I
Engineer's review of the fmal Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests
and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine
generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of
certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the
Contract Documents.
I
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Engineer's Consultants and assistants.
I
PART 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
I
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time
to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be
authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any
such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under
the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
I
If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price
or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a
claim may be made therefor as provided in these General Conditions.
I
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time
with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified
and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided
or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work.
I
I
Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended
by Engineer covering:
I
I
01200-20
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective
work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the
article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision
rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such
decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws
and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the
progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the
Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by
the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be
Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
PART 11 - CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.01 Changes in the Contract Price The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to
authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and
obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment.
Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the
general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to
Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving
rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty
days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to
submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's
written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled
as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if
not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or
of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work
involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices
to the quantities of the items involved, (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained
in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead
and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work.
11.02 Allowances and Final Contract Price Adjustment It is understood that Contractor has included
in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so
covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade
discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all
01200-21
60-954.00
01200-22
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs,
overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing
will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer
to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work
actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.
11.03 Lump Sum Contract Contract Documents provide for all of the Work to be Lump Sum. The
Lump Sum price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover
Contractor's overhead and profit for all work identified in the Contract Documents. Owner or Contractor
may make a claim for an adjustment in the Lump Sum price in accordance with part 11.01 above. It is the
intent of the City of Clearwater to enter into a contract with one (1) contractor for the seven (7) items listed
in the proposal, page CB-14, provided the Grand Total Lump Sum is within acceptable City budget
limitations. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to award the contract in the best interest of the City
of Clearwater and may be left to award the contract without a portion of individual lump sum items.
PART 12 - CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment.
Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice
delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later
than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature
of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days
after such occurrence (unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data
in support of the claim) and shall be,accompaniedby the claimant's written statement that the adjustment
claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the
occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be
determined by Engineer. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid
if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or
Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be
extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefor as provided in
the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be
limited to, acts by Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as
contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts
of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to
be delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or
Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract
Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising
out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the
control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions,
acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by
paragraph for Other Work.
PART 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
13.01 Tests and Inspection Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for
all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to
facilitate required inspections or tests. .
Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all
inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents or perform these testing services with
the Owner's and/or Engineer's staff except for inspections, tests or approvals as otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Owner except
as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body
including all City Building Departments and City Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection
therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated
in the Contract Documents, City permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be
responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or
approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated
in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's
purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for
observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contract's expense unless
Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has
not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.02 Uncovering the Work If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must,
if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or
inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make
available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in
question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction
01200-23
60-954.00
I
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be
entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties
are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefor as provided in the article for
Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be
allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both,
directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and
reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may
make a claim therefor as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
I
I
I
13.03 Engineer May Stop the Work Ifthe Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient
skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way
that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop
the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right
of Engineer to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to exercise
this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Engineer stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price.
I
13.04 Correction or Removal of Defective Work If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly,
as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the
Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or
removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
I
I
I
I
13.05 Warranty/Correction Period If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such
longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable
special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract
Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in
accordance with Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected
by Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily
correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If
Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay
would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected.
Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such
removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others)
will be paid by Contractor.
I
I
I
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an
earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment.
I
I
I
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will
be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been
satisfactorily completed.
I
I
01200-24
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
13.06 Acceptance of Defective Work If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of
defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to Owner's evaluation of and
determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness).
If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will
be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and
Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to
agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefor as provided in article for Change of
Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final payment an
appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner.
13.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written
notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by
Engineer in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor
fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with
any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor,
correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph Owner
shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, Owner may exclude
Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's
services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and
machinery at the site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for
which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's
representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's
Consultants access to the site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.
All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising such rights and
remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an
appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
Owner may make a claim therefor as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims,
costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of
others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work.
Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay
in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies
hereunder.
PART 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed.
14.01 Application for Progress Payment Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month)
to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required
by the Engineer and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment
will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made
for that portion of the Work which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A
01200-25
60-954.00
I
retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work
completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract
Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under
contract.
I
I
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to produce for the Owner, within fifteen days of the approval of any progress payment,
evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums
then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in
further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided.
I
I
14.02 Contractor's WalTanty of Title Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials
and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will
pass to Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the
Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor
warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens,
claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from all claims growing
out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's
of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the
performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all
obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails
to do so, then Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills,
of which Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of
money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is
furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed
in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be
construed to impose any obligations upon Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid
bills of the Contractor, Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by
Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall
not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.03 Review of Applications for Progress Payments Engineer will within twenty days after receipt of
each Application for payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to
Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend
payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to the Owner. Engineer may
also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results
of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may
be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or
completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been
reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) Owner has been required to correct defective Work or
complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated
in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full
amount recommended by the Engineer because: (i) claims have been made against Owner on account of
Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the
I
I
I
I
I
I
01200-26
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the
satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the
amount recommended, or (iv) Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this
paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the
Engineer, stating the reasons for such actions, and the Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount
so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to
Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.04 Partial Utilization Use by Owner at Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the
Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer and
Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by
Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor I s performance of the
remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the
following:
Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use any such part of the
Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor
agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer
that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing
that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete
and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a
reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of
that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the
Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the
articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of
Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and
access thereto.
14.05 Final Inspection Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion
thereof is complete, Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify
Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or
defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or
remedy such deficiencies.
14.06 Final Application for Payment After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the
satisfaction of Engineer and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and
operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required
by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents as may
be required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final
. payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be
accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract
Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and
Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to fmal payment, and (iii) complete and legally
effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with
01200-27
60-954.00
I
the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish
receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor ,
services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and
equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property
might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier
fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien.
I
I
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable
manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work,
and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
I
I
14.07 Final Payment and Acceptance If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work
is significantly delayed and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining
balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated
in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the
written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed
and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such
payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment
shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during
construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the
Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been
fulfilled, Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to
Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work
is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application to
Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case
Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and
accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, Owner shall, within sixty-five days
after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Engineer.
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
14.08 Waiver of Claims The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all
claims by Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work
appearing after fmal inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract
Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in
writing and still unsettled.
I
I
I
PART 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.01 Owner May Suspend the Work At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Work
or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to Contractor which
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed.
I
I
01200-28
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or
both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefor as
provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
15.02 Owner May Terminate Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the following events;
if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents
(including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment
or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer;
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents;
or
if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is
sublet, without the previous written consent of Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is
assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Engineer certifies in writing to
Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any
part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the
extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from
the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment
and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without
liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment
stored at the site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the
Work as Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further
payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs,
losses and damages sustained by Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess
will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance,
Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by Owner
will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated
in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph Owner shall
not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any
rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any
retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.
Upon seven days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case,
Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed
01200-29
60-954.00
I
in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and
reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
I
I
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and
furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with
uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with
Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.
I
I
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic
loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.03 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is
suspended for a period of more than ninety days by Owner or under an order of court or other public
authority, or Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within sixty days after it is submitted
or Owner fails for sixty days to pay Contractor any sum fmally determined to be due, then Contractor may,
upon seven days' written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy
such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from Owner payment on
the same terms as provided in the article for Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended
under an order of court through no fault of the Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment
except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other
right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty days after it is
submitted, or Owner has failed for thirty days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due,
Contractor may upon seven day's written notice to Owner and Engineer stop the Work until payment of
all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to prelude Contractor from
making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise
for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article.
I
I
I
I
I
PART 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION
I
I
I
I
If and to the extent that Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving
disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure
will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been
reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, Owner and Contractor may
exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws
or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to
be submitted to binding arbitration.
PART 17 - MISCELLANEOUS
17.01 Submittal and Document Forms The form of all submittals, notices, change orders and other
documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be
determined by the Engineer subject to the approval of the Owner.
,I
I
01200-30
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
17.02 Giving Notice Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written
notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a
member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice.
17.03 Notice of Claim Should Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property
because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers,
employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing
to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any
applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.04 Professional Fees and COUlt Costs Included Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses
and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.05 Assignment of Contract The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any
rights thereunder without the approval of the Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety
has waived its rights to notice of assignment.
END OF SECTION
01200-31
60-954.00
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01300
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. The work for which proposals are invited consists of the new construction of an
approximately 2,000 s.f. one-story concrete masonry unit building with exterior stucco
finish and metal standing seam roof over plywood deck on wood trusses, aluminum
windows and louvers. The interior spaces shall consist of men and women toilet
facilities, office and cashier areas. The finish material shall be plaster ceiling in all areas.
Interior finishes shall be exposed painted block walls in the toilets with epoxy flooring
system; the finish in the office and cashier areas shall be painted gypsum wallboard walls
with epoxy flooring. Also, included in the work will be electrical, plumbing, and wall
air-conditioning. The work of this Contract comprises the general construction of the
new facility, swimming pool, pool deck; and site work; together with necessary
apputenances as shown and specified.
1.02 NOTICES
A. In conformance with the requirements of Part 9 of the General Requirements, Giving
Notice, of the General Conditions all notices or other papers required to be delivered
by the Contractor to the Owner shall be delivered to the office of the Engineer of
Record for the City of Clearwater, Post, Buckley, Schuh & Jernigan, Inc., 5300 West
Cypress Street, Suite 300, Tampa, Florida 33607.
1.03 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE:
A. It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days
after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed, which notice shall be given as
outlined in Part 2 - General Conditions.
B. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within 150
calendar days. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the
Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain
the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract
remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and
approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on
Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the
opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall
01300-1
60-954.00
01300-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Three Hundred Twenty Dollars
($320.00) per eight-hour day for each Inspector given such assignment.
C. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for
any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one
year from the date of final acceptance.
1.04
STANDARD DOCUMENTS
A. Construction shown on the Drawings shall conform to the technical portions of the
standard specifications, manuals and attachments thereto for the local government
in whose jurisdiction this project is located. The standards of these specifications
shall apply for material and installation not .covered under criteria established by
local government.
B. The Drawing reference Index Sheets and Standards which refer to FDOT Roadway
and Traffic Design Standards current edition (English Units).
1.05
CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an office with telephone facilities where
he or a responsible representative of his organization may be reached at any time
during normal working hours while work is in progress. Such office may be at any
location the Contractor considers desirable within 40 miles of the site.
1.06
FIELD OFFICE
Not used.
1.07
USE OF EXPLOSIVES
A. No blasting shall be done except upon approval by the Owner and the governmental
agency or political subdivision having jurisdiction. When the use of explosives is
approved by the Owner as necessary for the execution of the work, the Contractor
shall use the utmost care so as not to endanger life or property, and assume
responsibility for any such damage resulting from his blasting operations, and
whenever directed, the number and size of the charges shall be reduced. All
explosives shall be stored in a secure manner and all such storage places shall be
marked clearly, "DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES" and shall be in care of competent
watchmen. All permits required for the use of explosives shall be obtained by the
Contractor at his expense. All requirements of the governmental agency issuing
permit shall be observed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.12
USE OF PUBLIC STREETS
A. The use of public streets and alleys shall be such as to provide a minimum of
inconvenience to the public and to other traffic. Any earth or other excavated
material spilled from trucks shall be removed immediately by the Contractor and the
streets cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner.
CARE OF TREES, SHRUBS AND GRASS
A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for maintaining in good condition all
cultivated grass plots, trees and shrubs. Where maintained shrubbery, grass strips or
area must be removed or destroyed incident to the construction operation, the
Contractor shall, after completion of the work, replace or restore to the original
condition all destroyed or damaged shrubbery or grass areas. Tree limbs which
interfere with equipment operation and are approved for pruning shall be neatly
trimmed and the tree cut coated with a tree paint. The Contractor shall be legally
responsible for any violation, including fines imposed in accordance with local
governmental tree codes due to his activities.
ADJUSTMENTS OF UTILITY CASTINGS, COVERS AND BOXES
A. All existing utility castings, including valve boxes, junction boxes, manholes, hand
holes, pull boxes, inlets and similar structures in the areas of construction that are to
remain in service shall be adjusted by the Contractor to bring them flush with the
surface of the finished work.
RELOCATION OF LOCAL GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES WATER LINES
A. Where government owned water lines are encountered which conflict with the lines
and grades of the proposed construction requiring the cutting or relocation of the
lines, the Contractor shall notify and make arrangements with the representatives of
the local government agency. The Contractor shall make the necessary relocation of
the lines as directed by the local governmental agency. The cost of such work shall
be subject to the necessary adjustment of the Contract Price in accordance with Part
10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK of the General Conditions. No water lines shall be
cut without prior approval of the local government agency.
NOTIFICATION TO UTILITY COMPANIES
A. The Contractor shall comply with Florida Statute 553.851 regarding notification of
existing gas and oil pipeline company owners and shall also notify "SUNSHINE"
(800) 432-4770 prior to excavating. Evidence of such notice shall be furnished to the
Engineer prior to excavating.
01300-3
60-954.00
01300-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.13
RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During the entire construction operation, the Contractor shall maintain records of all
deviations from the Drawings and Specifications and shall utilize such records to
prepare "record" drawings showing correctly and accurately the work as it was
actually constructed. (Record drawings for water and sewer (storm water) system
installations shall show exact locations of all improvements as actually surveyed
upon completion of construction and shall include rim and invert elevations of all
sanitary sewer manholes (storm sewer inlets) and other structures together with top
of pipe elevations for all water lines (storm water pipes and elevations of bottom of
french drain trenches) at 25-foot intervals. Two sets of blueprints shall be submitted
to the Engineer for each utility and storm water system. These drawings shall
conform to recognized standards of drafting, shall be neat and legible. Final
acceptance of the project will be withheld until delivery of the set of "record"
drawings is made to the Engineer.
1.14
PAYMENT FOR UTILITIES
A. The Owner will not furnish gratuitously to the Contractor any utility service whether
water, sewerage, telephone, electricity, gas, or other if such services are available
from the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall obtain the necessary utility services required for construction
by making application for the service and paying such fees and charges required by
the utility companies.
1.15
WORK ZONE TRAFFIC AND PEDESTRIAN CONTROL
A. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC AND
PEDESTRIAN CONTROL - The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate,
maintain and remove all work zone traffic and pedestrian control associated with the
Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings,
temporary walkways, and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work
site and as may be necessary at outlying points.
B. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN - The Contractor shall prepare a
detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined
in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued
by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project,
incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides
for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and
Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.16
published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the
Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition.
C. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN - The Contractor is
invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project,
with the Office of the Traffic Engineer, Municipal Services Building, 100 South
Myrtle Avenue, telephone 813-562-4772, for the purpose of approval of the
Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan.
D. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION - The Office
of the Traffic Engineer may inspect and monitor the traffic control scheme and
devices of the Contractor and shall, through the City's Construction Inspector
assigned to the project, make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments
to the control plan or traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction only
as appropriately expressed by the Project Inspector or Project Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall protect his work by the erection of suitable barricades and
handrails, where required. He shall further indicate the work at night by the
maintenance of suitable lights or flares, especially along or across thoroughfares.
Wherever it is necessary to cross a public walk, he shall provide a suitable safe
walkway with hand railings. He shall also comply with all laws or ordinances
covering the protection of such work and the safety measures to be employed therein.
The Contractor shall carry out his work so as not to deny access to private property.
All utility access manholes, valves, fire hydrants and letter boxes shall be kept
accessible at all times.
COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS AND CITY WORK CREWS
A. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, the following shall apply:
B. The Engineer's coordination of the work to be performed under the various contracts
shall permit him to direct the operations of two contractors or City work crews at
junctions in their work so as to reduce disturbance to the respective operations and
reduce conflicts as to the responsibility for placement and maintenance of plugs,
caps, or bulkheads, etc., at such locations.
C. Construction activities in one or more adjacent parcels of land may be underway at
the time of the contract letting. , The Contractor shall coordinate his activities with
those on adjacent parcels to minimize delays and prevent damage or delays resulting
from such adjacent work, except as may otherwise be provided for herein.
01300-5
60-954.00
01300-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.17
CONTRACTOR PREPARED PROGRESS SCHEDULING
A. General: The Contractor shall develop and submit for approval by the Engineer a
progress schedule and phasing plan demonstrating complete fulfillment of all
contract requirements including all activities of subcontractors, equipment vendors
and suppliers. The Schedule shall be in the form of a bar-chart and arrow diagram
or, the Contractor may, at his option, prepare a network plan utilizing CPM.
B. Submittal:
1. Immediately after award of contract, the Contractor shall submit for the
Owner's review the progress schedule describing the activities to be
accomplished and their dependency relationships, showing starting and
completion dates for each activity in terms ofthe number of days after receipt
of Notice to Proceed. All completion dates shown shall be within the period
specified for contract completion. In preparing his progress schedule, the
Contractor shall keep in mind that the sequence of construction will be
affected and restricted by the work of other contractors and other site specific
considerations.
2. After receipt and initial review, the Owner shall meet with the Contractor for
joint review, correction or adjustment of the proposed plan and schedule.
Within five calendar days after the joint review, the Contractor shall revise
the schedule in accordance with agreements reached during the joint review
and shall submit two copies ofthe revised schedule to the Owner. After the
Contractor has received both the Notice to Proceed and the approved copy of
the schedule, he shall immediately add calendar dates in lieu of the number
of days from the date of Notice to Proceed and shall furnish two copies of the
revised schedule to the Owner.
C.
Schedule Requirements:
1. The schedule shall show the sequence and interdependence of activities
required for complete performance. In preparing the schedule, the Contractor
shall break up the work into activities of a duration of no longer than fifteen
working days each, except as to non-construction activities (such as
procurement of materials, delivery of equipment and concrete curing) and any
other activities for which the Owner may approve the showing of longer
duration. The diagram shall show not only the activities for actual
construction work for each trade category of the project, but also such
activities as the Contractor's work of submittal of shop drawings, equipment
schedules, coordination drawings, templates, fabrication, delivery and the
like, and review and approval of shop drawings. Activities related to a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.18
specific physical area of the project shall be grouped on the diagram for ease
of understanding and simplification. Activity duration (i.e. the single best
estimate, considering the scope of the activity, and the resources planned for
the activity) shall be shown on each activity on the diagram. To the extent
that the schedule or any revised schedule shows anything not jointly agreed
upon or fails to show anything jointly agreed upon, it shall not be deemed to
have been approved by the Owner. The schedule shall contain a minimum
of200 activities unless otherwise approved by the Owner. Failure to include
any element of work required for the performance of this Contract shall not
excuse the Contractor from completing all work required within any
applicable completion date, notwithstanding the Owner's approval of the
schedule.
2. For lump sum projects, the progress schedule shall include a cost estimate for
each activity which cumulatively equals the total Contract cost. Estimated
overhead and profit shall be prorated throughout all activities. The partial
payments as defined under the General Conditions will be based on these
approved activity costs.
3. With each request for a partial payment, the Contractor shall submit a copy
of the schedule marked to show the activities completed and partially
completed, for which payment is requested.
a. The initial submission, and every periodic project schulde update
throughout the life of the contract shall be made on 3.5 disk, formatted
to hold (1.44 MB) of data, under the MS-DOS version 5.0
operating system.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. General progress meetings shall be held periodically as requested by the Owner at
which every entity then involved in the planning, coordination and performance of
work shall be properly represented, including, when applicable, the Owner, Owner's
representative, principal subcontractors, consultants, separate contractors, if any,
suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, special supervisory personnel and others with
an interest or expertise in the progress of the work. Each entity's present and future
needs shall be reviewed, including interface requirements, time, sequences,
deliveries, access, site utilization, temporary facilities and services, hours of work,
hazards and risks, housekeeping, change orders and documentation of information
for payment requests. The progress of each element of current work shall be
discussed as to whether it is ahead of schedule, on time or behind time in relation to
the updated progress schedule. Methods to expedite behind-time work shall be
determined and commitments secured for doing so from the entities involved.
01300-7
60-954.00
Everything of significance which could affect the progress of the work, including
schedule revisions, shall be discussed to ensure that current and subsequent work will
be completed within the Contract time. Within three days after each meeting, copies
of the minutes of the meeting, including a brief summary of progress of the work
since the previous meeting, shall be distributed to each entity present or who should
have been present. Whenever revisions to the progress schedule have been made or
recognized at the progress meeting, a copy of the revised schedule shall accompany
the minutes distributed. At least once per month copies of the revised and updated
progress schedule, showing actual progress of the work in relation to the latest
revision shall be distributed to all involved entities and shall also accompany each
request for partial payment.
1.19
REPORTS
A. The contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer at regular intervals not
exceeding weekly intervals, a daily report recording information concerning events
at the site. The reports shall contain the following and any other significant
information:
1. General weather conditions, high/low temperatures.
2. List of subcontractors on site.
3. List of separate contractors at the site, if any.
4. Meetings and significant decisions.
5. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.
6. Emergency procedures, field orders.
7. Orders/requests by governing authorities.
8. Change orders received, implemented.
9. Other events or activities.
10. Partial completions.
1.20
SUBCONTRACTOR'S/SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATION
A. When required by the Owner, each partial payment and final payment request from
the Contractor shall be accompanied with Subcontractor's/Supplier's Certifications
01300-8
60-954.00
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.21
from designated subcontractors and/or suppliers stating payments for all billings to
the Contractor for the work under this Contract are current, and the Contractor has
been making satisfactory payment for services, equipment, supplies and materials
received. Subcontractor's/ Supplier's Certifications are to be dated within ten (10)
days prior to or after date of Application F or Payment. The
Subcontractor's/Supplier's Certificate form is included hereinafter in Appendix A.
LA YING OUT THE WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR's responsibility under this contract consists of supplying the
field staking necessary for the construction of the improvements shown on the
construction plans.
B. The Contractor shall endeavor to make site accessible to and remove obstacles that
may impede survey activities (i.e., equipment, earth stockpiles, debris, etc.).
C. The Engineer sliall provide horizontal and vertical control points adjacent to the
project to facilitate field staking by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
01300-9
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
APPENDIX A
SUBCONTRACTOR'S/SUPPLIER'S CER TIFICA nON
According to the best of my knowledge and belief, I certify that payment for all billings to
Contractor) for work under the Contract entitled
County, Florida, is current and the Contractor has been making
satisfactory payment for services, equipment, supplies and materials.
Date:
Subcontractor
and/or Supplier
Signed
(Type Name)
(Company)
(Address)
(City, State)
(Telephone No.)
Subcontractors and/or Suppliers to complete, and Contractor to return with each
Application For Payment.
01300-10
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare Operating and Maintenance (0 & M) Manual covering all equipment and systems
provided under this Contract.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems
provided under this Contract.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review and approval by the NE and Owner two copies of a preliminary draft of
the 0 & M Manual, showing the proposed format and an outline of the contents.
B. Throughout construction, prepare 0 & M sections for equipment and systems when such
equipment and systems, and shop drawings and technical data therefor, are approved. Within
30 days following receipt of the AlE's approval of the final shop drawing submittal, submit,
in duplicate, draft of complete 0 & M Manual for review and approval.
C. Upon receipt of NE's and Owner's review comments, make required revisions and resubmit
in final form two copies of the 0 & M Manual for final approval.
D. Simultaneously with the Application for Final Payment and Project Record Documents,
deliver to the Owner six sets of the approved 0 & M Manuals. The Final Payment
Application will not be processed until receipt of the 0 & M Manuals by the Owner.
E. Upon start-up of equipment and systems and completion of instruction of Owner's personnel
under operating conditions, submit, in the form of an addendum, six copies of all necessary
amendments to the 0 & M Manual, together with all required certificates for incorporation
in the Manuals;
1.03 FORM AND FORMAT
A. Prepare the 0 & M Manual in the form of bound volume or volumes consisting of
commercial quality 3-post binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers, maximum
thickness 3-inches, containing catalog cuts, bulletins, shop drawings, wiring diagrams,
schedules, parts lists, procedures and other data showing the equipment installed. When
01730-1
60-954.00
multiple volumes are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings with each
volume having the title of the project and volume number printed on the cover and
containing a typewritten table of contents for that volume, arranged in systematic order.
B. Include in the 0 & M Manual the following information:
1. Schedule of products and systems showing system layout and controls.
2. Approved wiring and control diagrams, with data to explain the detailed operation
and control of each component.
3. A control sequence describing startup, operation and shutdown.
4. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment, including
lubrication instructions.
5. Copies of each warranty, bond and service contract issued, if any.
6. Parts lists and recommended spare parts.
7. Other data and instructions as specified under the various Sections.
C. Prepare all data furnished to conform to the installation as constructed. Delete cuts showing
other equipment and data not applicable to the installation and where practical omit from the
manual. Assemble the manual in a logical manner with each section indexed in the Table
of Contents.
D. Provide an outline of the maintenance procedures for each manufacturer's equipment and
compile these procedures in a logical manner to provide a procedure for the operating
personnel of the Owner to follow in their day to day operation of the equipment.
E. Bind the materials permanently into volumes approximately 9-inches by 12-inches with the
diagram volume being large enough to contain the drawings without excessive folding so
that they may be easily opened.
F. Furnish the volume covers with a descriptive title, the name of the job, the location, year of
installation, Owner, Manufacturer, Contractor and AlE. Prepare copies of drawings in black
on white background, easily legible. The arrangements of the booklets, materials to be
included and the composite text will all be reviewed and approved by the AlE and Owner.
01730-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.04 FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS
A. Post approved wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of entire systems,
including equipment and control sequence, framed under glass or in approved laminated
plastic, where directed by the AlE. In addition, prepare in typed form condensed operating
instructions explaining preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system,
frame as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and post beside the diagrams.
Submit proposed diagrams, instructions and other sheets for approval prior to posting. Post
the framed instructions before acceptance testing of the systems.
1.05 FIELD INSTRUCTIONS
A. Upon completion and testing of the work and at a time designated, provide the services of
one or more project engineers to work in conjunction with the service engineers and
suppliers' representatives to instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation and
maintenance of the equipment. Give the instruction period at the time the facility is
operating under normal conditions and cover all the items contained in the bound
instructions. In addition to these requirements, provide field instructions as specified under
the various Sections of the Specifications.
END OF SECTION
01730-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02210
EARTHWORK
SITE GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all necessary labor, equipment,
material and transportation necessary to bring the roads, drives, building sites,
paved areas and open areas to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.
The work includes clearing and grubbing and removal of existing pavement,
sidewalks and debris.
B. The Contractor must determine for himself the volume of material required for the
site.
C. Definitions:
1. Open Areas: Open areas shall be those areas that do not include building
sites, paved areas, street right-of-way and parking areas.
2. Maximum Density: Maximum weight in pounds per cubic foot of a specific
material.
3. Optimum Moisture: Percentage of water in a specific material at maximum
density .
4. Rock Excavation: Excavation of any hard natural substance which requires
the use of explosives and/or special impact tools such as jack hammers,
sledges, chisels or similar devices specifically designed for use in cutting
or breaking rock, but exclusive of trench excavating machinery.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Suitable: Suitable materials for fills shall be classified as A-I, A-3 or A-2-4 in
accordance with AASHTO Designation M 145 and shall be free from vegetation
and organic material. (N ot more than 10 % by weight of fill material shall past the
No. 200 sieve.)
2210-1
60-954.00
B. Suitable Material To Be Placed In Water: Suitable material for fills to be placed in
water shall be classified as A-lor A-3 in accordance with AASHTO Designation
A-145.
C. Unsuitable: Unsuitable materials are classified as A-2-5, A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5,
A-6, A-7 and A-8 in accordance with AASHTO Designation M 145.
D. Suitable material to be placed as muck and topsoil: Suitable materials to be placed
as muck and topsoil shall be suitable for plant growth and free from appreciable
quantities of hard clods, stiff clay, hardpan, gravel, brush, large roots, refuse or
other deleterious materials and shall be reasonably uniform quality. Samples shall
be taken from stockpiles and tested for organic content and pH value. The organic
content (as determined in accordance with AASHTO Designation T-194) of
stockpiled material shall be at least 1.5 % . The characteristics of the stockpiled
materials shall be such that it can be adjusted to have a pH value, as determined in
accordance with ASTM E-70, between 5.0 and 7.0.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clearing and grubbing:
1. Safeguard trees indicated to remain, removal and disposal of other trees,
brush, stumps, roots, grass, weeds, rubbish and all other obstructions
resting on or protruding through the surface of the existing ground and the
surface of the excavated areas.
2. Clearing and grubbing shall be accomplished within all areas of the
roadway right-of-way, except where otherwise designated on the Drawings
or directed by the Engineer. Areas designated for site grading shall also be
cleared and grubbed; however, selective clearing will be performed in some
areas by retaining selected trees. The trees selected by the Owner for
saving shall be protected from construction equipment by the Contractor in
a manner approved by the Engineer.
3. Where excavation is done within the roadway and paved area, all stumps,
roots, etc., protruding through or appearing on the surface of the completed
excavation shall be removed to a depth of not less than 2 feet below the
excavated surface. All stumps within building site areas shall be grubbed
to a depth of 2 feet below existing grade and replaced with compacted
backfill before the area is filled.
2210-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
fl
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.02
4. Within all other areas where clearing and grubbing is to be done, all
stumps, roots, and other debris projecting through or appearing on the
surface of the ground shall be removed to a depth of i-foot below the
completed surface.
5. As an exception to the above provisions, where so directed by the Owner,
desirable trees shall be trimmed, protected and left standing.
6. Areas to be excavated or filled upon shall be stripped of grass and roots to
a depth of 6-inches. Stripped material suitable for topsoil shall be
stockpiled for later use and all other material shall be disposed of as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Removals: Complete all removals prior to excavation and/or filling. Pavement
shall be saw cut to true lines at the limits of removal, and the remaining work shall
remain undisturbed during removal work.
C. Debris Disposal: All clearing and grubbing debris and other debris shall be
removed from the project site and disposed of by the Contractor.
PERFORMANCE
A. Excavation:
1. Excavation shall conform to the limits indicated on the plans or specified
herein. This work shall include shaping and sloping and other work
necessary in bringing the earthwork to the required grade, alignment and
cross section.
2. All suitable materials removed from the excavation shall be used as far as
practicable in the formation of the embankments, subgrades, shoulders,
building sites and other places as directed. No excavated material shall be
wasted without permission, and where necessary to waste such material it
shall be at the direction of the Engineer. Unsuitable material shall be
removed to the required depth and replaced to the satisfaction of the
Engineer with suitable material. Unsuitable material existing in open areas
may remain, and these open areas may be used for disposal areas for the
unsuitable material as directed by the Owner's Engineer.
3. All waste and excess unsuitable excavated material shall be considered
property of the Owner and disposed of outside the limits of the project.
2210- 3
60-954.00
B.
5.
Fills:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I '
I
I
I
1.
Fills shall be formed of suitable material placed in layers of not more than
eight (8") inches in depth measured loose and rolled and/or vibrated with
suitable equipment until compacted. Thickness of layers may be increased
provided the equipment and methods used are proven by field density
testing to be capable of compacting thicker layers to specified densities.
Layer thickness shall be decreased if equipment and methods used are
proven to be incapable of compacting layers to specified densities.
2.
Rock that will not pass through a 6-inch diameter ring shall not be placed
within the top 12 inches of the surface of the completed fill. Rock that will
not pass through a 3-inch diameter ring shall not be placed within the top
4 inches of the completed fill. Broken concrete or asphaltic pavement shall
not be used in fills.
3.
Fill within the walkways, parking areas, shall be compacted to a density of
not less than 100 % of its maximum density as determined by AASHTO
Method T -99 Method C, and fill within building site and other areas shall
be compacted to a density of not less than 95 % of Modified Proctor, unless
specified otherwise in the general requirements.
4.
Muck or other unsuitable material may be used in areas designated in the
drawings oras directed by the Owner's Engineer. Muck material used as
fill shall be placed in layers of not more than 12 inches in depth measured
loose. When dry or as directed by the Owner, this layer shall be disced and
harrowed to break up large pieces of the material. The above density
requirements shall not apply to unsuitable material placed.
Final elevations shall be within 0.1 foot of the required elevation and
surfaces shall be sloped to drain as shown on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
2210-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02220
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, equipment, material and transportation and perform all work necessary to
complete excavation, backfilling and grading as required for the construction of the buildings
and structures as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Plan For Excavation: Prior to the submission of bid, determine the conformation of the
ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantities of materials to be
encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions, the prosecution of the work, the
general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work
under this Contract. Prior to commencing the excavation, submit a plan of proposed
operations identifying the equipment and methods to be employed in the excavation. No
claims for extras based on substrata or groundwater table conditions will be allowed.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02210, Site Preparation and Earthwork
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. A testing laboratory, retained by the Owner in accordance with Article 13 of the General
Conditions will make such tests as are deemed necessary by the Engineer to verify the
quality of the materials and the work. Schedule work so as to permit a reasonable time for
testing fill compaction before placing succeeding lifts and keep the laboratory informed of
progress.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Test borings made on the site are included at the end of this section and are for the
Contractor's information only. This report is not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness
and is for information only. Reference Foundation and Soils Study, Florida as prepared by
Driggers Engineering Services, Inc. dated September 18, 1997.
02220-1
60-954.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Suitable Materials: As specified in Section 02210.
B. Suitable Material To Be Placed In Water: As specified in Section 02210.
C. Unsuitable: As specified in Section 02210.
D. Graded Limerock: 3/4-inch graded limerock equal to FDOT Section 901, Grade 6.
E. Select Material: As specified in Section 02210.
F. Washed Rock: Coarse concrete aggregate with a minimum offme material equal to FDOT
Section 901, Grade 3 or 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clearing: Perform clearing, grubbing and stripping as specified in Section 02210. Clear the
construction site of all obstructions and vegetation, including large roots and undergrowth,
to within 10- feet outside of the lines of excavation.
B. Removals: Complete all removals prior to beginning excavation.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Perform all excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered, by open
cut to the dimensions required for construction and as specified herein.
B. Maintain walls of the excavation vertical and, if required to protect the safety of workmen,
the general public, this or other work or structures, or excavation walls, properly sheet and
brace the excavation. Extend excavations sufficiently to provide a clearance between their
outer surfaces and the face of the excavation, sheeting, or bracing, of not less than 2-feet.
Foundations entirely in rock may, at the Contractor's option and after removal of all loose
rock and other deleterious matter, be poured directly against the rock, omitting formwork.
Support materials encountered in the excavation which have a tendency to slough or flow
into the excavation, undermine the banks, weaken the overlying strata, or are otherwise
rendered unstable by the excavation operation by sheeting, stabilization, grouting or other
approved methods.
02220-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Extend excavations for structures constructed or cast in place in dewatered excavations only
to the bottom of the structure where dewatering provides a dry excavation bottom and the
naturally occurring material is leveled and ready to receive construction. Replace material
disturbed below the founding elevation in dewatered excavations with concrete (3000 psi).
D. Footings: Do not excavate for cast-in-place concrete footings until ready to form the footing
sides immediately after excavation.
3.03 DEWATERING
A. Promptly remove any water which accumulates in the excavations for cast-in-place concrete
structures by well point system or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer in such a
manner as to not create a nuisance to adjacent property or public thoroughfare. Operate
pumps and engines for well point systems with mufllers and at a minimum noise level
suitable to a residential area Dispose of water resulting from dewatering in accordance with
any applicable permit conditions, and correct any nuisance created due to the disposal of that
water.
3.04 RUNNING WATER
A. When running water is encountered in excavations for foundations, provide a layer of
limerock, properly compacted for foundation bearing, below the structural concrete to control
the flow of water.
3.05 STOCKPILED MATERIALS
A. Store and dispose of materials removed from the excavation in a manner which will not
interfere with traffic at the site. Stockpile material suitable for backfill, not needed for
backfill at the structure but needed elsewhere, until moved and used elsewhere. Remove and
dispose of material unsuitable for use in backfill immediately after backfill is placed.
3.06 BACKFILL
A. Below Structures: Backfill the space between the proposed outside bottom of the structure,
and the bottom of the excavation with graded limerock and screed level to receive the
proposed structure. If the excavation is not dewatered, after placing and screeding, sound
the backfill with a rigid pole with 6-inch diameter foot piece to indicate, to the satisfaction
of the Engineer, that the backfill has been placed to the proper elevation, is level throughout
and is ready to receive the structure. Perform this final sounding of the material immediately
before setting of the structure.
B. Remainder Of Backfill: Use select material from the excavation for backfilling around the
structure. Remove all trash that accumulates in spaces to be backfilled. Place backfill
02220-3
60-954.00
around the structure in uniform layers to the level of the water table. Above the water table,
place backfill material in 8-inch layers and compact to a minimum of 95 percent of
maximum density as determined by AASHTO T 180. Complete backfilling to the finished
grades shown on the Drawings.
C. Backfill For Structures Constructed Or Cast-In-Place: Place no backfill until the structure
has been completed above the natural water table, is stable against hydrostatic uplift, exterior
form work has been removed and any necessary patching and grouting has been completed.
Dewatering operations may then be stopped and backfilling placed as specified in B. above.
Do not commence backfilling until concrete to be covered has been inspected and approved.
3.07 FOUNDATION PREPARATION
A. Structures On Grade: Cut, fill and compact subgrades for concrete slabs on-grade, ramps and
stairs to the required grade. Compact the top 8-inches of concrete slab subgrade in cut
sections and all fill.material to a density of not less than 95 percent of its maximum density
as determined by AASHTO T 180. For subgrade fill, use material that contains no rock
larger than 6 inches and, in the top 6 inches, no rock larger than 3 inches in any dimension.
END OF SECTION
02220-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
,
II
ai,
II
II
.
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II,
II
II.
,_.:,'
....-::_~...:~.:
PLATE I - BORINGLOCATIONPLAN
Driggers Engineering Services_I!:!~orporated
0::
0
CD
<X f-
U U (f)
(f) w
a... f-
~ Z
f- 0
I
I
I
~
)
(
\
\
,
\
\"
'\.
'\..
,
",
"-
'\. ......- ..........
--===';;-====~
~~ --='-- II
....::::===-- II
\\
\\
II
~
\\
\\
\1
\\
\\
\\
\\ 1
\\
\1 ......""\
1\ .... .)
,\( .,... /'
I .>,'c-....
I / 1\
I I 1\
\ \\
\ \\
\ \ I~I
'I "
" \\
/ I \\
f", \\
I:::' I \\
" II
" II
" II
, \ II
, \ "
\ \1
\ \ II
I I II
II '\~
<:::--
II -
\ I
I \
-- - - -~ - ':::::. =
----
----
I
I
I
I
~
...J
<X
~
W
o
I I
I I I
I I I
'-- -l I
I I (/)
I: (!}
z
I: I- (!}
I I (/) Z
I x 0
i) :
II ~
II g,
I 0::
II a...
I :
I :
I'
I :
I :
I :
I:
II
I
I~_____----
.J ....___ _ ___ __,
-- ---, I
- - ------ - I I
Z /1 n___ _____ , "
<( ( ,r r--- -- _____, '"
...Ja... II I --- -- I I I I
r I I I I
U}I ", , "
UJ ", , 1 " ,
I' , '" , , ': ~_
lil" II- 1 " 'II
lD 10:: III
I " , 5 L___ - I , h
" I U - - - -- - - ~ ,\ \1
I " , '" r- - " IlL,
I I I I I I I Ir..l
,I , Z I , '"
I II I ~ I I I III
I I- .J 'I I 'I
", , "I
I II I (!} L_____ I II
" I Z _ _ n , " ,l _ _ "'
I " 1 l;; ,- i ,'- " \
" , " ' , , I' \
I I w I I I I \
", I , \ '
I ", I _"', ,
I ", L_____ ------r', ::;-, ____
II I J l__.JLJL___-_______
I II L_____ ___ ____
II _____:______
\~ ~::= = = = - ~ ~ - - -:;:"'l"'ON"'~
'l...J.. - - 3nN3^V
I I I I
I I I
I I I I
I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I II
I I I I
1,1 I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I
I I I I
I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I
I I I I
I I I
I I I I
I I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I
I I I I
I I I
I I I I I
, , I
\J11.l =)
~
U
W
o
~
W
Z
Z
<(
:c
u
o
Z
<X
...J
o
o
a...
>-
<(
~
<(
o
z
<(
~
o
w
(/)
o
a...
o
0::
a...
I-
...J
<X
:I:
a...
(/)
<X
.
(!}
Z
l-
(/)
X
W
r
z
00
W-O
(/)I-Z
OZO
a...Wa...
01-
O::w
a... 0::
w 0
I- Z
<Xu..(!}~
::EOZO
x (/)-0::
Ol-I-(!}
-(/)~
O::::E-<X
~-X...J
<X...Jwa...
.
I-
<X
0::
f-
W
Z
W
a...
o
0::
<X
o
Z
,et
l-
(/)
e
~
U
o
o
o
o
o
~
(!}
Z
f-
(/)
x
w
f-
(/)
Wz
1-0
z-
01-
-<X
I-U
<XO
0::...J
I-(!}
::z
u..~
~O
CD
(!}
Zo::
-w
0::C)
I~
wet,
...J
IDO
~z~,
g~
IB
...J
...J
<X
~
<X
W
(/)
~
.0::
:<t
a..
U<t
-0
1--
<to::
:JO
0-1
<tlJ...
>-:c
~U
~<(
<lW
\J..m
:co::
UW
<(~
~~
0::0::
W~
~-1
3:U
0::
<(
W
-1
U
W
I-
W
0::
U
Z
o
u
(!}
z
l-
(/)
x
w
I
I
,
,
I
t.
I
I
I
I
,
I
i
-','.' .
l"
I'.
. .
l";~;"".'.:
'-,,'-. .
4..._..:
'-.,.-'.
,.:.,..
, J.:.....
..
I.....
.-..' ,
f~
. ;'~.'
~;~~'-~':'-"
1- "~::~;,
..;~::
~;~}::c
~'~ ..,f _ "'C .__
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..'1
I
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS
_,. .........._._, .,.._-,~"'''''''. 'r-"-
.4_.. ........:...~~'io.o..4-.-,....._--.....-'....,~..
.; ,~' <.,~'~:~~~).~'::~..~~~'.,; ': :.. '-'" .
Driggers Engineering Services,.lnco!,porate.d
. (~-~,t;;;':i::;~.~1::~;'~~t~1~~~":~{'
: ,", ',..'.,
,.,^~,,;:';~;{jl~i:.'
. .;.~r;mf~QCt;.~'-;h::
,
It
'I
II
II
II
'I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 972766 BORING NO. B-1
Project Clearwater Beach Family Aquatic Park, Clearwater Beach, Florida
Location See Sketch Foreman A.G.
Completion Depth To
Depth 31.5' Date 9/5/97 Water 4.5' Time Date 9/8/97
o::e:: STANDARD
~ ..J CI) wt; PENETRATION TEST
LL w zCL. .
0 SOIL DESCRIPTION BLOWS/FT. ON 2" 0.0.
x OJ ..J 00::2
~ := a.. en~~ SAMPLER-140 LB.
a.. > :E HAMMER, 30" DROP
w <C ::a..o::
c en CI) 0:=0
SURF. EL: ..J <C :
lDCI)CD 10 20 40 6080
0 ~.~.- Dark gray slightly organic Fine SAND
d~~
~~i>:.-i \with roots (SP)
",:.t:y: Loose light gray Fine SAND with shell (SP)
:v.:<< .~
.:=!t
:<l:9: ..
7::V:V: 4/4/4
5 ~:v:.t .
:~:I;t: /
;.; :".: .,
~:";" Very loose dark brown slightly organic Fine SAND /
iP~;:
. ~.~ with fibrous plant matter (SP-SMlPt) 1/1/1 ~
~.;
Q:V:~ Loose to medium dense light gray Fine SAND ...... """"-
:..... .
.~ar.
.... :i with shell (SP) ""
fi'v.:r. 10/11/11 foe
10 ~:v:
~v:;,;.:i
"'.g' J
:'l:r.~ /
'((~~.
. :7:?
:~:'f."! /
.;<;>:v. /
.v.:v. .~
:v: v:
:v.:v: i
15 ~:q:;;: /
. .. ':'i
:,,!:?:'. 4/4/3
:~T~
);! :9: .
.~:l:r.
~;v:~
.~:v:
'~;f:'~
:'l:~~
20 '((~~.
:l-:7:?
:~: <>'.1 5/4/4
bo: '" .. \
.;<;>:v.
. ... :.~
l;:V.. \
~:v:
~~i:.~ \
: ."?:'f:
:"!:?:~ \
:~~i
25 .~:Y.:.
.~:l:r. 12/11/10 .
~;v:~ I
~:v:
'.v:;';.:i /
It~:v:
Y5 Firm green sandy CLAY (CH) /
~ /
" .
30 ,
3/3/4
~
.-. .
Remarks
Casing Length
ENGINEERING SERVICES
INCORPORA TED
Project No. DES 972766 BORING NO. B-2
Project Clearwater Beach Family Aquatic Park, Clearwater Beach, Florida
Location See Sketch Foreman A.G.
Completion Depth To
Depth 31.5' Date 9/5/97 Water 6.1' Time Date 9/8/97
0::0:: STANDARD
to- ..J (I) wt; PENETRATION TEST
~ 0 w zo. .
::I: OJ ..J SOIL DESCRIPTION Oc::z BLOWS/FT. ON 2" 0.0.
t- :E 0. (I)~~ SAMPLER-140 LB.
:E
a. > ct 3:0.0:: HAMMER, 30" DROP
w (I)
c (I) O:EO
SURF. EL: ..J ct -
aJ(I)CD 10 20 40 6080
0 ;.~~~ Grayish-brown Fine SAND with some shell
:9:~: and surficial roots (SP)
.. . :',
:o;z:v.
..:?:Y: Gray Fine SAND with some shell (SP)
;v.:v. ;.
~:9:~
.. ':',
:o;z:v.
Xl:V: ~ Very loose to medium dense light gray Fine SAND 4/4/4 .
5 7~" .' .
.,..:~: with shell fragments (SP)
~:~:~ /
~:~
.......:s /
.'9.:'f:
~o:
v.~v.i 6/211 ,
':+:y:
~~?::~ "'-
.:or:~ "'-
10 :-l;'?: .. 5/8/11
Z"~:~ /
~:V:
:~:~: /
~;t~~
'Q'9' /
~~?::~
.,..:~~ I
~:*:
i'" " f
~:t7:
15 . Q:V:~
;.~v.
v.~v.i 10/4/5 ~
:!-:,?:y: \
:'I;r.:7..~
11: '" .. \
.:7: v:
OQ :9:~.~
~';" .. .. \
:v: t7:
~;v:'~ '\
:~:v:
20 .9.;v:~
7.'9:<7: 6/11/10 .
~~?::~
.,..:~~
~~:.
~:t7:
Cream colored silty, clayey LIMESTONE
25 ~
1 0/11/6
/
/
/
30 ,
" 3/3/4
Remarks Borehole Grouted
Casing Length
I
II
I
II
It
--I-I ~
I DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
I Project No. DES 972766 BORING NO. B-3
Project Clearwater Beach Family Aquatic Park, Clearwater Beach, Florida
Location See Sketch Foreman
I Completion Depth To
. . Depth 31.5' Date 9/5/97 Water
I
....
u.
~
t-
o.
w
C
o S;:5::
'C..."":;
.. :':':),:
.v.:v. .~
~:~:
*Z :ir.' i:
'.:?Pii
,,=:v~,~
'::i:y]
5 i;i:~;~
fi,~:ii
;:t :;.: ~
I:f~:v:
'.'i":V.:;'
'~'v'
,~:~.~
2-:7:?
:.:V01
~:~if:
1 0 ;v.:v. ,~
p.~:\?:
*Z:ir.' i:
:7:q:":
.. .. ?:
,'=:V"~
7::i: v:
i;i:<>:t
'.i:;-:n:
;:t:y:~
i ~:V:
','i":V:'T,
'~:ti
'tf;O', ...
':7:~
:~~?:'i
..~:?:
,v.:v. ,~
~:~:
*Z :ir.' t
~:<7:Y:
:~;~:;~
:~~:.
);;I:\?:~
1 ~1tj
~ '~fh
e ~~:~..:
'l%'O'.~
E=25 ~~+
'v.'", .0;
l '--- '..:r..
I :-.:v:v.
~:v..i;
..~:~:
J30 -;;-j
I
I
I
I r 15
I~
1120
1=
3.9'
.J U)
o w
m .J
:i: Il.
>- :E
U) ~
SOIL DESCRIPTION
SURF. EL:
Dark gray slightly organic Fine SAND with roots
\(SP)
Very loose to medium dense light gray Fine SAND
with shell fragments (SP)
Cream colored silty, clayey LIMESTONE
=
~arkS Borehole Grouted
I
"
Time
o::f:
WU)
zll. .
Oo::z
U)~~
3:1l.a:::
O:EO
.Jet.
mU)(g
3/3/1
1/3/6
7/9/8
3/213
13/10/9
7/5/3
3/3/3
A.G,
Date 9/8/97
STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST
BLOWS/FT. ON 2" 0.0.
SAMPLER-140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10
20
40 60 80
.
\
'\
uti
'\.
\..
7
7
7
/
,
'\
\
\
'\
/
/
/
V
,
.
Casing Length
I
-
I
Project No. DES 972766 BORING NO. B-4
Project Clearwater Beach Family Aquatic Park, Clearwater Beach, Florida
Location See Sketch Foreman A.G.
Completion Depth To
Depth 31.5' Date 9/8/97 Water 3.5' Time Date 9/8/97
0::0: STANDARD
t- ..J UJ wt; PENETRATION TEST
u.. w z"- .
0 SOIL DESCRIPTION BLOWS/FT. ON 2" 0.0.
::r: m ..J Oo::z
t- :i: "- UJ~~ SAMPLER-140 LB.
0. >- ~ HAMMER, 30" DROP
w < ~"-o::
c UJ UJ O~O
SURF. EL: ..J<:
mUJCD 10 20 40 6080
0 ;:~ Dark gray slightly organic Fine SAND with roots
..
. :'f:?: \(SP)
:v.:<< .~ Light gray Fine SAND with shell fragments (SP)
::C;:~
:cl:?:.
I;t':v:v:
~: .
5 Very loose dark brown organic Fine SAND 1/1/1 .
with fibrous plant matter (Peat) (Pt) '"
. .v. Medium dense light gray Fine SAND "-
:v.~v.-i
'~:9: with shell fragments (SP) 3/5/7 .
!i:<< .~
::C;:V:
:cl;?: .)
:i :v: v: 11/5/6
10 ~:y:t
:~:"':
:v.:v:~
7..... .
.q.q.
~~~~
i .'l:!'Z:
~ :~:(
Ii'" ..
:7:~
'fPii;
15 ~~~
~~v.~
.:~:9: 11/8/5
~~~:~ \
.:"l:V:
3':'.:?:.~ \
:v: v:
:9. :~:) \
:~:';t:
:9.:v:..
20 ':~:?: ~
:sz::?:~ 5/1 0/7
.'l:sz:
~:t:~ J
:7:~ /
'.~:Y.:;
~:v. /
:v.~v.~
. :~:9:
25 ~:<<.~
7.... .. ..
.:"l:V: I
~:?:.~ 7/4/4
Z' :v: v:
:9.:~:j
:~:';t:
:9.:v:~
;: Cream colored silty, clayey LIMESTONE
30 ~
2/3/6
......
Remarks Borehole Grouted
II Casing Length
ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
Ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
" 1=I~~:i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED
Project No. DES 972766 BORING NO. B-S
Project Clearwater Beach Family Aquatic Park, Clearwater Beach, Florida
Location See Sketch Foreman
~mp~on ~~~
Depth 20.4' Date 9/8/97 Water 4.0' Time
t-
u.
~
t-
o.
W
c
..J t/)
o W
CD ..J
:E Q.
>- :E
t/) ~
SOIL DESCRIPTION
o:~
Wt/)
zo. .
oo:Z
t/)~~
~Q.a:::
O:EO
..J <C -
CDt/)CD
O 2~Jl::'
Ii: :;-
,!~v.
v.:v.~
;!o:.to: . :
. ... Y,
:'l;t:<<.,
::i:f..
~:~:.~
~:~~
5 ~;t:. ~
.!;7.~.
:.i:v:~
:;.q:Q:
l;Z:V:t
:r.;;.:Sz:
t:;1 :(;:t,
:i~:~
. <i~y:~
;t~~
1 0 v.:v"~
~'i~~~~
~..o. ..
.:'l':V:
~:(;:"~
~':"""
~:~
~;r-~
.!;7.~o
:v.:v:~
15 'oq:Q:
l;Z:V:t
'.;;.:~i
t:;1 :(;:<;
.~:~
. fi~v:~
';':':~
"7.~v.~
. :Y~Y:
20 :v.:<<.~
~.... ..
.:'l:V:
:<iI.:~.~
~:v:
:9.iv:~
:!;7:~:
:v.:v
25
555
~
30 fi
SURF. EL:
Dark gray slightly organic Fine SAND
with some roots (SP)
Loose to medium dense light gray Fine SAND
with shell fragments (SP)
4/4/3
2/2/3
8/9/10
I
6/4/4
A.G.
Date 9/8/97
STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST
BLOWS/FT. ON 2" 0.0.
SAMPLER-140 LB.
HAMMER, 30" DROP
10
20
40 60 80
.
I
I
-""
"'-
"-.
/
-;
/
/
1/
.
4/4/5
~
'-----
'-....r---..
.....
50* U.4" t- enetraton
Cream colored silty, clayey LIMESTONE
50*
Remarks Borehole Grouted
u.~ t enelrat on
Casing Length
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02221
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR
UTILITY SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this Section consists of clearing, excavating, grading and
backfilling as required for the construction of the utility systems consisting of
piping and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL
A. Bedding material for use below the water table or in wet trenches shall be pea rock,
drainfield limerock or similar material as approved by the Owner's Engineer. Pipe
bedding material for use in dry trenches shall be limerock screenings, sand or other
fine inorganic material as approved by the Owner's Engineer.
2.02 ADDITIONAL BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Additional backfill material shall be classified as A-I, A-3 or A-2-4 in accordance
with AASHTO Designation M 145 and shall be free from vegetation and organic
material. No stones or rocks shall be larger than 6-inches in diameter, and when
placed within I-foot of piping and appurtenances stones or rocks shall be no larger
than 2-inches in diameter (I-inch for PVC).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEARING
A. The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary for the proper installation of
all piping and appurtenances in the locations shown on the Drawings. Plantings,
shrubbery, trees, utility poles or structures subject to damage resulting from the
excavation shall be transplanted, relocated, braced, shored, or otherwise protected
and preserved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
02221-1
60-954.00
3.02
EXCA V A nON
A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever
substances encountered, to the dimensions and depth shown on the Drawings, or
as directed. All excavations shall be made by open cut. All existing utilities such
as pipes, poles and structures shall be carefully supported and protected from
injury, and in case of damage, they shall be restored at no cost to the Owner.
B. Trench walls shall be kept vertical, and, if required to protect the safety of
workmen, the general public, this or other work or structures, or to maintain trench
widths within the limits hereinafter specified, shall be properly sheeted and braced.
Where wood sheeting or certain designs of steel sheeting are used, the sheeting
shall be cut off at a level 2-feet above the top of the installed pipe and that portion
below that level shall be left in place. If interlocking steel sheeting is used, it may
be removed providing removal can be accomplished without disturbing the
bedding, pipe or alignment of the pipe. Any damage to the pipe bedding, pipe or
alignment of the constructed utility caused by removal of sheeting shall be cause
for rejection of the affected portion of the work. Not more than 100-feet of trench
shall be opened ahead of pipe laying operations at one time unless a greater length
of open trench is approved by the Owner's Engineer.
C. In areas where trench widths are not limited by right-of-way, and/or easement
widths, property line restrictions, existing adjacent improvements, including
pavements, structures and other utilities, and maintenance of traffic, the trench
sides may be sloped to a stable angle of repose of the excavated material. A
substantially and safely constructed movable shield, "box" or "mole" may be used
in place of sheeting when the trench is opened immediately ahead of the shield and
closed immediately behind the shield as pipe laying proceeds inside the shield.
D. Ladders or steps shall be provided for and used by workmen to enter and leave
trenches.
E. Pipe trenches for utility lines shall be excavated to a width within the limits of the
top of the pipe and the trench bottom so as to provide a clearance on each side of
the pipe barrel, measured to the face of the excavation or sheeting, if used, of the
dimensions. All pipe trenches shall be excavated to a depth below the outside
bottom of the proposed pipe barrel as shown on the drawings depending upon the
type of material encountered.
F. Excavation for appurtenances shall be sufficient to provide a clearance between
their outer surfaces and the face of the excavation or sheeting, if used, of not less
than 12 inches.
02221-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03
3.04
G. Materials removed from the trenches shall be stored and disposed of in such a
manner that they will not interfere unduly with traffic on public streets and
sidewalks and they shall not be placed on private property. In congested areas,
such materials as cannot be stored adjacent to the trench or used immediately as
backfill shall be removed to convenient places of storage.
H. All suitable material in excess of backfill requirements shall be hauled to and used
in areas where not enough suitable material is available from the excavation.
I. All unsuitable material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the work and disposed of by the Contractor at his expense.
REMOVAL OF WATER
A. It is a basic requirement of these specifications that excavations shall be free from
water before pipe or structures are installed.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary pumps, underdrains, well-point
systems, and other means for removing water from trenches and other parts of the
work. The CONTRACTOR shall continue dewatering operations until the backfill
has progressed to a sufficient depth over the pipe to prevent flotation or movement
of the pipe in the trench so that it is above the natural water table.
C. Water from the trenches and excavation shall be disposed of in such a manner as
will not cause injury to public health, to public or private property, to the work
completed or in progress, to the surface of the streets, or cause any interference
with the use of the same by the public.
PIPE BEDDING
A. As described above, all pipe trenches shall be excavated to a depth as indicated
below the outside bottom of the proposed pipe barrel. The resulting excavation
shall be backf1lled with approved pipe bedding material, up to the level of the lower
one- third of the proposed pipe barrel. This backfill shall be tamped and
compacted to provide a proper bedding for the pipe and shall then be shaped to
receive the pipe. Bedding shall be provided under the branch of all fittings to
furnish adequate support and bearing under the fitting. Bedding material for piping
shall be pea rock, drainfield limerock, or similar materials as approved by the
Engineer. Limerock screenings, sand or other fine inorganic material from the
excavation may be used for bedding material when pipe is installed above the
natural water table.
02221-3
60-954.00
B. Any excavation below the levels required for installation of the pipe bedding,
except for "Additional Excavation", as hereinafter specified, shall be backfilled
with approved bedding material, tamped, compacted and shaped to provide proper
support for the proposed pipe, at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.05
BACKFILL UNDER MANHOLES AND METER VAULTS
A. Any excavation below the levels required for the proper construction of manholes
or meter vaults shall be filled with Class C concrete. The use of earth, rock, sand
or other materials for this purpose will not be permitted.
3.06
TRENCH STABILIZATION
A. No claim for extras, or additional payment will be considered for cost incurred in
the stabilization of trench bottoms. which are rendered soft or unstable as a result
of construction methods, such as improper or inadequate sheeting, dewatering or
other causes. In no event shall pipe be installed when such conditions exist and the
Contractor shall correct such conditions so as to provide proper bedding or
foundations for the proposed installation at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.07
SPECIAL PIPE FOUNDATION
A. General: When shown on the Drawings or when directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall provide the special type of pipe foundation in lieu of the pipe
bedding as specified above and provide the additional excavation required.
B. Type A Pipe Foundation: Type A pipe foundation shall be used when and where
directed by the Engineer. Foundation material shall be crushed, graded, local
limestone suitable for use as concrete aggregate. Gradation shall be such that 95
- 100 percent of the material will pass a I-inch square opening laboratory sieve.
Material shall be placed from 1 foot below the barrel of the pipe to 6 inches above
the pipe and the width of the foundation material as placed around the pipe shall not
be less than the outside diameter of the pipe, plus 12 inches. Construction of Type
A pipe foundation shall be as shown or indicated on the Drawings. Foundation
material shall be placed in the bottom of the trench and compacted to an elevation
which will provide firm bedding for the full pipe length, after which material shall
be placed and compacted evenly on both sides of the pipe and above the pipe to an
elevation 6 inches above the top of the pipe barrel. Pipe shall not be displaced or
damaged during placement and compaction of the foundation material.
02221-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.08
3.09
C. Type B Pipe Foundation: Where soft, yielding, unstable or other unsatisfactory
material exists at the bottom of the trench, the Engineer may direct the use of Type
B Pipe Foundation. Only the pipe foundation ordered by the Engineer will be paid
for. Construction shall be in accordance with the details shown or indicated on the
Drawings. Concrete shall be Class C.
BACKFILL
A. Backfilling of utility trenches will not be allowed until the work has been approved
by the Engineer, pressure tested if required, and the Engineer indicates that
backfilling may proceed. Any work which is covered or concealed without the
knowledge and consent of the Engineer shall be uncovered or exposed for
inspection at no cost to the Owner. Partial backfill may be made to restrain the
pipe during pressure testing.
B. Backfill material shall be noncohesive, non-plastic material free of all debris,
organic material, lumps, clods and broken paving. Backfill material placed within
I-foot of piping and appurtenances shall not contain any stones or rocks larger than
2 inches in diameter (1 inch for PVC) and no stones or rocks larger than 6 inches
in diameter will be permitted in any backfill. Backfill material placed within 1 foot
of piping shall be bedding material as specified above.
C. Selected backfill material shall be placed in 6-inch layers and thoroughly tamped
to a depth of 12 inches and over the pipe. Particular attention and care shall be
exercised in obtaining thorough support for the branch of all service connection
fittings. Care shall be taken to preserve the alignment and gradient of the installed
pIpe.
D. After the backfill has been placed to a level 12 inches over the pipe, the remainder
of the backfill shall be placed in lifts, thickness to depend upon materials,
equipment and compaction methods used, but in no case shall they exceed limits
established by local government agency having jurisdiction. Backfill shall be
compacted to a density as shown on drawings.
E. Within paved areas of trench excavation, the base and surfacing shall be
reconstructed as specified under Section 02574 Pavement Removal and
Replacement.
COMPACTION AND DENSITIES
02221-5
60-954.00
A. Methods of control and testing of backfill construction to be employed in this work
are:
1. Maximum density of the material in trenches shall be determined by
AASHTO Designation T -99 Method C, unless specified otherwise in the
general requirements.
2. Field density of the backfill material in place shall be determined by
AASHTO Designation T-99 Method C, unless specified otherwise in the
general requirements.
B. Laboratory and field density tests which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are
necessary to establish compliance with the compaction requirements of these
specifications, will be conducted at the Owner's expense. Tests will be taken in
accordance with the governmental agency having jurisdiction requirements, or as
may be required by the Owner's Engineer.
C. Trench backfill which does not comply with the specified densities, as indicated by
such tests, shall be reworked and re-compacted until the required compaction is
secured, at no additional cost to the Owner. The costs for retesting such work shall
be paid for by the Contractor.
3.10
ADDITIONAL EXCA VA TION AND BACKFILL
A. Where organic material, such as roots, muck, or other vegetable matter, or other
material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, will result in unsatisfactory
foundation conditions, is encountered below the level of the proposed pipe bedding
material, it shall be wholly or partially removed as directed by the Engineer and
wasted. Sheeting shall be installed if necessary to maintain pipe trenches within the
specified limits. The resulting excavation shall be backfilled with suitable backfill
material, placed in 6-inch layers, tamped and compacted up to the level of the
bottom of the proposed pipe bedding material. Sufficient compaction of this
material shall be performed to protect the proposed pipe against settlement.
Construction shall then proceed in accordance with the provisions of Article 3.04
Pipe Bedding.
B. Additional excavation shall be performed only when ordered by the Owner's
Engineer. Where organic or other unsuitable material is encountered in the
excavation, the Contractor shall bring the condition to the attention of the Owner's
Engineer and obtain his determination as to whether or not the material will require
removal, prior to preparing the pipe bedding.
02221-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
3.11
RESTORATION OF EXISTING SURFACES
A. Paved and grassed areas disturbed by the operations required under this Section
shall be restored as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
END OF SECTION
02221-7
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02270
EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all necessary labor, equipment,
material and transportation necessary to provide temporary and permanent erosion
and sediment control as required by appropriate government agency permits, the
plans and as noted in this specification.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install temporary erosion and sediment control items prior to clearing and
commencing earthwork or as soon as practical as sitework progresses.
2.02 PROTECTION
A. Stabilization of Denuded Areas: No disturbed area may be denuded for more than
thirty (30) calendar days, (excluding rights-of-way) unless otherwise authorized by
the Owner's Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, filter, seed and mulch, sod or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any
portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established
permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by
impervious surface or landscaping.
B. Protection and Stabilization of Stockpiles: Fill material stockpiles shall be
protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the
stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will
be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30)
calendar days.
C. Protection of Existing Storm Sewer Systems: During construction, all storm sewer
inlets shall be protected by approved sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod,
60-954.00
02270-1
F.
G.
stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction
progress, and which must be approved by the Owner's Engineer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Sediment Trapping Measures: Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter
fences, berms, sediment barriers (hay bales), vegetative buffers and other measures
intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transportation of sediment onto
adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies, must be installed, constructed or,
in case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land
alteration process.
E.
Working in or Crossing Waterways or Waterbodies: Land alteration and
construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and
the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access.
Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize
the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize
erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they
must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is
completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the
downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to
increased turbidity. Whenever stream crossings are required, properly sized
temporary culverts shall be provided by the Contractor and removed when
construction completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition
as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
Swales, Ditches and Channels: All swales, ditches and channel leading from the
site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales,
etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of as Certificate of
Occupancy.
Underground Utility Construction: The construction of underground utility lines
and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards:
1. No more than 500 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any time;
2. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated
material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench
material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream,
channel, road ditch or waterway.
60-954.00
02270-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Maintenance: All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly,
especially after each rainfall and will cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
B. Compliance: Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result
in a fme and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as, but not limited to,
issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
END OF SECTION
60-954.00
02270-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02270
EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all necessary labor, equipment,
material and transportation necessary to provide temporary and permanent erosion
and sediment control as required by appropriate government agency permits, the
plans and as noted in this specification.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install temporary erosion and sediment control items prior to clearing and
commencing earthwork or as soon as practical as sitework progresses.
2.02 PROTECTION
A. Stabilization of Denuded Areas: No disturbed area may be denuded for more than
thirty (30) calendar days, (excluding rights-of-way) unless otherwise authorized by
the Owner I s Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, filter, seed and mulch, sod or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any
portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established
permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by
impervious surface or landscaping.
B. Protection and Stabilization of Stockpiles: Fill material stockpiles shall be
protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the
stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will
be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30)
calendar days.
C. Protection of Existing Storm Sewer Systems: During construction, all storm sewer
inlets shall be protected by approved sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod,
02270-1
60-954.00
stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction
progress, and which must be approved by the Owner's Engineer.
D. Sediment Trapping Measures: Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter
fences, berms, sediment barriers (hay bales), vegetative buffers and other measures
intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transportation of sediment onto
adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies, must be installed, constructed or,
in case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land
alteration process.
E. Working in or Crossing Waterways or Waterbodies: Land alteration and
construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and
the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be .used to prevent access.
Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize
the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize
erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they
must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is
completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the
downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to
increased turbidity. Whenever stream crossings are required, properly sized
temporary culverts shall be provided by the Contractor and removed when
construction completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition
as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
F. Swales, Ditches and Channels: All swales, ditches and channel leading from the
site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales,
etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of as Certificate of
Occupancy.
G. Underground Utility Construction: The construction of underground utility lines
and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards:
1. No more than 500 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any time;
2. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated
material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench
material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream,
channel, road ditch or waterway.
2.03 PERFORMANCE
02270-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Maintenance: All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly,
especially after each rainfall and will cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
B.
Compliance: Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result
in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as, but not limited to,
issuance of a "Stop Work Order".
END OF SECTION
02270-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02280
SOIL TREATMENT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide soil treatment under buildings as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. 02210, Site Preparation and Earthwork
R 02220, Structure Excavation and Backfill
C. 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following for review in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions,
before commencing work:
1. Properly identified soil treatment chemical manufacturer's product data, including
chemical analysis.
2. Manufacturer's recommended dilution, application directions and safety precautions.
R Submit sample copy of warranty for review.
C. Submit evidence of applicator's experience with local and state license numbers.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Do not apply chemicals when soil or fill is excessively wet or after heavy rains, to avoid
surface flow or overspray of toxicant from application site.
RUnless treated areas are to be immediately covered, take precautions to prevent disturbance
of treatment by human or animal contact.
02280-1
60-954.00
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work shall be done by a bonded Contractor whose principal business is extermination and
termite treatment and who can show evidence of at least five years of successful operation
in his field.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of soil treatment and as a condition offinal acceptance, furnish Owner with
a written warranty which shall provide that:
I. Application was made at concentration, rates, and methods which comply with these
Specifications.
2. Effectiveness of treatment is warranted for not less than 5 years without additional
cost to Owner, by means of a 5-year repair and replacement bond.
3. Upon evidence of subterranean termite activity, retreat area at no additional charge
to Owner. Additional treatment shall be sufficient to prevent termites from attacking
building or its contents.
4. Upon occurrence of damage to building or to its contents within warranty period,
retreat soil and replace damage at no cost to Owner.
5. Warranty bond shall be drawn in favor of Owner, successor, or assigns and shall be
non-cancelable by all parties to contract except Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Use one of the following water based emulsions, uniform in composition throughout,
containing a dye readily discemable to the eye after application to the soil, and containing
following concentrations by weight:
I. Chlordane, 1.0 percent.
2. Heptachlor, 0.5 percent.
02280-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Do not proceed with the work of this Section until conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
3.02 GENERAL
A. Apply soil treatment chemical to soil and earth which will be covered by or lie adjacent to
buildings. Treat masonry foundations. Treat areas around pipes and conduits penetrating
slabs on fill to provide a lethal barrier to subterranean termites.
B. Apply chemical solution after subgrade has been made ready for placement of any floor slab
vapor barrier, and as soon as practical prior to placement of concrete slabs and caps on
masonry piers. Apply treatment only after all piling, pile caps, grade beams, foundation
walls, and below grade waterproofing shall have been completed.
C. Apply treatment at least 12 hours prior to placement of concrete slabs during normal working
hours in order to be subject to inspection. Notify applicator at least 24 hours prior to time
application of chemical will be required.
3.03 SOIL CONDITIONS
A. Apply chemical when moisture content of soil is sufficiently low to allow uniform
distribution of chemical throughout specified areas.
3.04 APPLICATION UNDER SLABS ON FILL
A. Apply chemical uniformly to all areas beneath concrete slabs-on-grade, including beneath
walkways and entrance platforms and beneath sidewalks within 5 feet of buildings. Apply
a minimum of one gallon of chemical uniformly to each 10 sq. ft. of area to be treated, to
ground areas beneath concrete slabs-on-grade and paving which abut building slabs for a
distance of not less than 3 feet from building.
3.05 APPLICATION ALONG FOUNDATION WALLS, PIPES, AND CONDUITS
A. Treat critical areas along both sides of exterior and interior foundation walls, columns, and
around utility pipes, conduits, ducts and other such items extending through soil beneath and
adjacent to new construction, to a depth of one foot in a strip 6 inches wide, at a rate of 4
gallons of soil poison to each 10 sq. ft. Mix chemical with soil as it is placed against walls
and utility lines. Apply at least one gallon of chemical around each pipe.
02280-3
60-954.00
3.06 APPLICATION TO MASONRY FOUNDATION WALLS
A. Treat voids of unit masonry foundation walls, top of course occurring at or just above grade
level, with additional treatment of not less than two gallons of chemical for each 5 !in. ft.
3.07 RETREATMENT OF DISTURBED SOIL
A. Retreat soil surfaces that are disturbed after treatment and before placement of slabs and
covering structures.
END OF SECTION
02280-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02510
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, material
equipment and transportation for the construction of the sidewalks to the lines and
grades as shown on the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. All materials specified shall be certified by the producer or manufacturer that the
furnished material meets the specific requirements of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Concrete shall be Class B that conforms to the requirements of Section
03000.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: Welded wire fabric shall conform to the requirements of
Section 03000.
C. Preformed Joint Filler: Preformed joint filler shall be non-extruding and resilient
bituminous type and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Designation
M 153 or AASHTO Designation M 213.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Subgrade Condition:
1. The finished subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compact condition
and any areas which are disturbed prior to placing of the concrete shall be
restored at the Contractor's expense. The sub grade shall be moist at the
02510-1
60-954.00
02510-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
time the concrete is placed. Water shall be uniformly applied ahead of the
pouring operations as directed by the Engineer. Large boulders and other
obstructions shall be removed to a minimum depth of 6 inches below the
finished subgrade elevation, and the space shall be backfilled with sand,
base course material or other suitable material which shall be thoroughly
compacted by rolling or tamping.
2. The subgrade shall be accurately trimmed to the required elevation with a
1/4-inch tolerance. High areas shall be trimmed to proper elevation. Low
areas may be filled with suitable material and compacted to the specified
density or filled with concrete integrally with the placing of the pavement.
B. Setting Forms: The forms shall be accurately set to line and grade and such that
they rest firmly, throughout their entire length upon the compacted subgrade
surface. Forms shall be joined neatly and tightly and braced to resist the pressure
of the concrete and the finished operations. The alignment and grade of all forms
shall be approved before and immediately prior to the placing of concrete.
C. Slipforming: The slipforming method will be allowed, provided that an acceptable
finished product, true to line, grade, and cross section is consistently produced.
D. Mixing Concrete: Concrete shall be mixed in accordance with the requirements of
Section 03000.
3.02
INST ALLA TION
A. Placing Concrete:
1. The concrete shall be distributed on the sub grade to such depth that, when
it is consolidated and finished, the thickness required by the Drawings will
be obtained at all points and the surface will at no point be below the grade
specified for the finished surface. The concrete shall be deposited on the
subgrade in a manner which will require as little rehandling as possible.
Placing of the concrete shall be continuous between transverse joints,
without the use of intermediate bulkheads.
2. Reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and shall be
maintained at this location during the placing and finishing operations.
3. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of all
forms by means of vibrators. Vibrators shall not be permitted to come in
contact with the sub grade or a side form. Vibration at anyone location
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
shall not continue so long as to produce puddling or the accumulation of
excessive grout on the surface. In no case shall the vibrator be operated
longer than 15 seconds in anyone location.
B.
Striking-off, Consolidating And Finishing Concrete: Immediately after the placing,
the concrete shall be struck off, consolidated and finished, to produce a finished
product conforming to the cross section, width and surface finish required by the
Drawings and Specifications.
c.
Straightedging And Surface Corrections:
1. After floating has been completed and the excess water removed, but while
the concrete is still in a plastic state, the surface of the concrete shall be
tested for trueness with an accurate 10-foot straightedge. The straightedge
shall be furnished by the Contractor. The straightedge shall be held in
successive positions parallel to the walk center line, in contact with the
surface, and the whole area tested from one side of the slab to the other as
necessary. The advance along the walk shall be in successive stages of not
more than one-half the length of the straightedge. Any depressions shall be
immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete and struck-off, consolidated
and refinished. High areas shall be cut down and refinished. Straightedge
testing and surface correction shall continue until the entire surface appears
to conform to the required grade and cross section. All surface
irregularities exceeding 1/4 inch in a 10 foot shall be corrected.
D.
Final Finish: As soon as the water sheen has disappeared and just before the
concrete becomes non-plastic, all edges, including expansion joint edges, shall be
finished with an edging tool having a radius of 1/4 inch. Finally the top shall be
given a light broom finish perpendicular to the forms.
E.
Joints:
1. Transverse Construction Joints: Transverse construction joints shall be
constructed at the end of all pours and at other locations where the pouring
operation are stopped for as long as 30 minutes. Construction joints,
however, shall not be placed within five feet of any other transverse joint
or of either end of a section of walk. If sufficient concrete has not been
placed to form a slab at least five feet long, the excess concrete, back to the
last preceding joint, shall be removed. The joints shall be formed by
placing a wood or metal bulkhead accurately and securely in place, in a
plane perpendicular to the profile and center line of the walk. Construction
joints shall have tooled edges with a 1/4-inch radius.
02510- 3
60-954.00
2. Transverse Contraction Joints: Transverse contraction joints shall be
formed at five foot intervals and shall consist of planes of weakness created
by an edging tool. The cut in the fresh concrete shall be perpendicular to
the surface of the walk, shall extend to a depth of Ih-inch the thickness
below the top surface and shall have ~-inch radius tooled edges.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
3. Transverse Expansion Joints: One half-inch expansion joints shall be
formed by placing preformed joint filler around all structures and at
intervals not exceeding 100 feet.
F.
Curing:
1. After the finishing operations have been completed and as soon as the
concrete has hardened sufficiently that marring of the surface will not
occur, the entire surface and the edges of the newly placed concrete shall
be water cured by misting or covering with a double thickness of burlap,
cotton mats, or other approved material kept thoroughly saturated with
water.
2. The forms shall be kept wet until removed and upon removal, the curing
specified herein shall be started immediately.
3. Concrete shall be cured for a period of 7 days for normal Portland cement
or 4 days for high early strength cement.
4. Concrete poured in the dry shall not be submerged until it has attained
sufficient strength to adequately sustain the stress involved, nor shall it be
subjected to flowing water across the surface for 4 days.
G.
Form Removal: After the concrete has sufficiently set a minimum of 12 hours, the
Contractor shall remove the forms and shall backfill the space on each side. The
earth shall be compacted and graded in a satisfactory manner without damage to the
concrete work. Honeycombs shall be filled with sand cement mortar. Plastering
will not be allowed on the face of the walk. Rejected walk shall be removed and
replaced without additional compensation.
END OF SECTION
02510-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02528
CONCRETE CURB, CURB AND GUTTER, AND TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, material
equipment and transportation for the construction of the curb, curb and gutter, and
traffic separator to the lines and grades as shown on the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. All materials specified shall be certified by the producer or manufacturer that the
furnished material meets the specific requirements of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Concrete shall be Class B that conforms to the requirements of Section
03000.
B. Reinforcing Steel And Welded Wire Fabric: Reinforcing steel bars and welded wire
fabric shall conform to the requirements of Section 03000.
C. Preformed Joint Filler: Preformed joint filler shall be non-extruding and resilient
bituminous type and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO 153 or
AASHTO Designation M 213.
D. Joint Sealer For Gutters:
1. Hot Poured Type: Joint sealer shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO Designation M 173.
2. Cold Applied Type: In lieu of the hot poured type, joint sealer shall be a
one or two part poly sulfide base self leveling sealant for horizontal surfaces
that has been developed for foot and vehicular traffic. The sealant shall be
listed on the Thiokol approved product list.
02528-1
60-954.00
02528-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Subgrade Condition:
1. The finished subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compact condition
and any areas which are disturbed prior to placing of the concrete shall be
restored at the Contractor's expense. The subgrade shall be moist at the
time the concrete is placed. Water shall be uniformly applied ahead of the
pouring operations as directed by the Owner's Engineer.
2. The subgrade shall be accurately trimmed to the required elevation with a
1/4 inch tolerance. High areas shall be trimmed to proper elevation. Low
areas may be filled with suitable material and compacted to the specified
density or filled with concrete integrally with the placing of the pavement.
B. Setting Forms: The forms shall be accurately set to line and grade and such that
they rest firmly, throughout their entire length upon the compacted sub grade
surface. Forms shall be joined neatly and tightly and braced to resist the pressure
of the concrete and the finished operations. The alignment and grade of all forms
shall be approved before and irhmediately prior to the placing of concrete.
C. Slipforming: The slipforming method will be allowed, provided that an acceptable
finished product, true to line, grade, and cross section is consistently produced.
D. Mixing Concrete: Concrete shall be mixed in accordance with the requirements of
Section 03000.
3.02 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
A. Placing Concrete:
1. The concrete shall be distributed on the subgrade to such depth that, when
it is consolidated and finished, the thickness required by the Drawings will
be obtained at all points and the surface will at no point be below the grade
specified for the finished surface. The concrete shall be deposited on the
sub grade in a manner which will require as little rehandling as possible.
Placing of the concrete shall be continuous between transverse joints,
without the use of intermediate bulkheads.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and shall be
maintained at this location during the placing and finishing operations.
3. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of all
forms by means of vibration. Tamping or vibration at anyone location
shall not continue so long as to produce puddling or the accumulation of
excessive grout on the surface.
B.
Striking-Off, Consolidating And Finishing Concrete:
1. Immediately after the placing, the concrete shall be struck off, consolidated
and finished, to produce a finished product conforming to the cross section,
width and surface finish required by the Drawings and Specifications.
2. After the concrete has sufficiently set a minimum of 12-hours, the
Contractor shall remove the forms and shall backfill the space on each side.
The earth shall be compacted and graded in a satisfactory manner without
damage to the concrete work. Honeycombs shall be filled with sand
cement mortar. Plastering will not be allowed on the face of the curb.
Rejected curb, curb and gutter or valley gutter shall be removed and
replaced without additional compensation.
C.
Final Finish: As soon as the water sheen has disappeared and just before the
concrete becomes non-plastic, a light broom finish shall be given to the surface.
D.
Joints:
1. Transverse Construction Joints: Transverse construction joints shall be
constructed at the end of all pours and at other locations where the pouring
operation are stopped for as long as 30 minutes. Construction joints,
however, shall not be placed within ten feet of any other transverse joint or
of either end of a section of curb. If sufficient concrete has not been placed
to form a slab at least ten feet long, the excess concrete, back to the last
preceding joint, shall be removed. The joints shall be formed by placing
a wood or metal bulk-head accurately and securely in place, in a plane
perpendicular to the profile and center line of the pavement. Construction
joints shall be sawed, in a manner similar to contraction joints, so that a
groove will be formed for holding the joint sealing compound.
2. Transverse Contraction Joints: Transverse contraction joints shall be
constructed at ten foot intervals and shall consist of planes of weakness
created by sawing the surface of the hardened concrete. The cut shall be
perpendicular to the surface of the pavement, and shall extend to a depth of
02528-3
60-954.00
six inches below the top of the curb and one and one-half inches below the
gutter.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that the sawing
equipment does not damage the curb and to saw the transverse
contraction joints as soon as the curb, curb and gutter has hardened
to the degree that tearing and raveling are not excessive and before
uncontrolled shrinkage cracking begins. If, at any time,
uncontrolled cracking occurs, the Contractor will be required to
modify his methods.
3.
Transverse Expansion Joints: One half-inch expansion Jomts shall be
formed by placing preformed joint filler at the ends of each radius return,
around all structures, and at intervals not exceeding 500 feet.
4.
Cleaning And Sealing Joints: Joints in gutters which are to be sealed, shall
be filled with joint sealing material before the roadway is opened to traffic
and as soon after completion of the curing period as is feasible. Just prior
to sealing, each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material
(including any membrane curing compound) and the joint faces shall be
clean and surface-dry when the sealer is applied.
a. The sealing material shall be applied to each joint to conform to the
details shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation. The pouring shall be done in such
manner that the material will not be spilled on the exposed surfaces
of the concrete. Any excess material on the surface of the concrete
gutter shall be removed immediately and the gutter surface cleaned.
b. All cracks occurring in the gutter prior to its acceptance shall be
cleaned out and sealed as specified above, except that the cracks and
fractures shall be completely filled with joint sealer and any excess
filler material cut down level with the gutter surface.
02528-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
Curing:
1. After the finishing operations have been completed and as soon as the
concrete has hardened sufficiently that marring of the surface will not
occur, the entire surface and the edges of the newly placed concrete shall
be water cured by misting or covering with a double thickness of burlap,
cotton mats, or other approved material kept thoroughly saturated with
water.
2. The forms shall be kept wet until removed and upon removal, the curing
specified herein shall be started immediately.
3. Concrete shall be cured for a period of seven (7) days for normal Portland
cement or four (4) days for high early strength cement.
4. Concrete poured in the dry shall not be submerged until it has attained
sufficient strength to adequately sustain the stress involved, nor shall it be
subjected to flowing water across the surface for four (4) days.
END OF SECTION
02528-5
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02574
PAVEMENT REMOV AL AND REPLACEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work included under this Section consists of cutting, removing, protecting and
replacing existing pavements of the various types encountered, driveways,
sidewalks, curb and combination curb and gutter.
B. Permits: The Contractor shall maintain copies of all applicable permits on-site and
shall be responsible to adhere to all permit conditions during construction.
Additionally, the Contractor shall provide advance notice to the appropriate
authority, as required, prior to construction operations.
C. Protection Of Existing Improvements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the
protection of all pavements, sidewalks and other improvements within the work
area. All damage to such improvements, as a result of the Contractor's operations,
beyond the limits of the work of pavement replacement as described herein, shall
be repaired by the Contractor at his expense.
1.02 JURISDICTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work within the rights-of-way of public thoroughfares shall conform to the
requirements of the Governmental agency having jurisdiction. Specifically, work
within state highway right-of-way shall be in full compliance with all requirements
of the permit drawings, and to the satisfaction of the Florida Department of
Transportation.
B. Portions of the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction of the
Florida Department of Transportation, latest edition and Supplement thereto
hereinafter referred to as the FDOT Specifications, are referred to herein and
amended, in part, and the same are hereby made a part of this Contract to the
extent of such references, and shall be as binding upon the Contract as though
reproduced herein in their entirety.
02574-1
60-954.00
02574-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials, including limerock, shell, soil cement, bituminous prime and tack coat,
and asphaltic concrete for the above work shall meet the requirements established
therefor by the FDOT Specifications.
1. Base material shall be selected which generally conforms with the existing
base material. The base material shall be limerick, shell, or soil cement as
appropriate.
a. Limerock can be of either Miami or Ocala formation, but Limerock
of only one of these formations may be used.
b. Shell materials shall consist of naturally occurring deposits formed
essentially of broken mollusk shell, corals and the skeletal remains
of other marine invertebrates. Live or steamed shell, or man-made
deposits as a by-product of the shellfish industry will not be
permitted. The material shall have an average LBR value of not
less than 100. Material represented by any individual LBR value of
less than 90 is unacceptable.
c. Soil Cement
1). Cement: The cement used in the work shall be domestic
Portland cement that conforms to the requirements of
AASHTO Designation M 85, Type I. The cement may be
delivered in bags or in bulk.
2). W ater: Water for use with cement shall be cleaned and
practically free of oil, acid, alkali, chlorides, organic matter,
and other substances deleterious to the hardening of the Soil-
Cement mixture.
Water from city water or other sources which are approved
by a public health department may be accepted without being
tested. Water from all other sources shall be tested and
approved before use and shall not contain impurities in
excess of the following:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Acidity or alkalinity calculated in terms
of calcium carbonate
Total organic solids
Total inorganic solids
Total cWorides as sodium chloride
0.05%
0.05%
0.08%
0.05%
3). Soil: The soil for the base course shall consist of the natural
material in the roadway or select soil placed in the roadbed,
as shown on the Drawings, or a combination of these
materials, proportioned as directed. The soil shall not
contain gravel or stone retained on a two-inch sieve or more
than 45 percent retained on a No. 4 sieve.
2. Bituminous prime coat material shall be cutback asphalt Grade RC-70.
3. Bituminous tack coat material shall be emulsified asphalt Grade RS-2.
4. Asphaltic concrete shall be Type S-I.
'PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Pedestrian or school crossings: Where the work crosses or interferes with school
or pedestrian crossings, extreme care shall be taken by the Contractor to insure the
safety of school children or other pedestrians.
3.02 PERFORMANCE
A. Removals:
1. Pavement Removal:
a. Where existing pavement is to be removed, the surfacing shall be
mechanical saw cut prior to trench excavation, leaving a uniform
and straight edge, with minimum disturbance to the remaining
adjacent surfacing. The width of cut for this phase of existing
pavement removal shall be minimal.
b. Immediately following the specified backfilling and compaction, a
temporary sand seal coat surface shall be applied to the cut areas.
02574-3
60-954.00
This temporary surfacing shall provide a smooth traffic surface with
the existing roadway and shall be maintained until final restoration.
Said surfacing shall remain for 10 days in order to assure the
stability of the backfill under normal traffic conditions. Following
this period and prior to 15 days after application, the temporary
surfacing shall be removed and final roadway surface restoration
accomplished.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. In advance of final restoration, the temporary surfacing shall be
removed and the existing pavement mechanically sawed straight and
clean to the stipulated dimensions. Following the above operation,
the Contractor shall proceed immediately with final pavement
restoration in accordance with (the requirements set forth in the
Orange County, "Right-of-Way Utilization Regulations", and) these
requirements.
2. Sidewalk, Drive, & Curb Removal: Concrete sidewalks, curbs,
combination curb and gutter, walks, drive ribbons, or driveways shall be
removed by initially sawing the structure, with a suitable power saw, as
specified above for pavement. When a formed joint in the concrete exists
within 3-feet of the proposed saw cut and parallels the proposed saw cut,
the removal line shall be extended to the formed joint. After sawing, the
material shall be removed.
B.
Restorations:
1. General: Street or roadway pavement cut and removed in connection with
trench excavation shall be replaced or restored in equal or better condition
than the original and as shown on the Drawings. The Drawings indicate
minimum requirements.
2. Pavement Restoration - Asphalt:
a. Limerock base course shall be compacted for its full thickness to not
less than 100 percent of maximum density as determined by
AASHTO Designation T 180. Field density of limerock base in
place shall be determined by AASHTO Designation T 238.
b. As soon as proper conditions of moisture are attained, the shell base
course shall be compacted to a density of not less than 98 percent of
the maximum density as determined by AASHTO Designation T
180.
02574-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. Compaction of the soil-cement mixture shall begin immediately after
mixing is completed. In no case shall more than 60 minutes elapse
between the last pass of moist-mixing and the start of compaction of
the soil-cement mixture at a particular location.
d. Construction methods and equipment shall generally meet the
requirements therefore as established in the FDOT Specifications,
but shall be modified to meet the relatively narrow strip construction
conditions. Any such modification shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to their use.
e. After the application of the prime coat on the base, the prime coat
shall be allowed to cure without sanding for a period of 24-hours.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the
primed surface against damage during this interval. If, at the end
of 24-hours, it is not proposed to proceed at once with the
application of the surface course, primed surface shall be given a
light application of clean sand and opened to traffic.
d. Joints with existing surface and base shall be straight and neat. If
necessary to obtain a straight neat joint, the Contractor shall cut out
sufficient existing material and replace it with new material.
-
e. The upper surface of the completed base course shall be compacted
to an elevation to permit the full depth of the surface course to be
constructed without deviating from the grade of the pavement
surface. The completed surface shall match the line and grade of the
existing surface. When pavement is removed to the edge of the
roadway, the replaced base course shall extend not less than
6-inches beyond the edge of the surfacing.
3.
Driveway Restoration - Asphalt: Driveway pavement with limerock base
cut and removed in connection with trench excavation shall be replaced or
restored as specified above for street or roadway pavement, except the new
limerock base course shall equal the existing base course in thickness,
except that in no case shall new driveway base course be less than 6-inches
in thickness. Muck or unsuitable material found under existing driveway
construction will not be removed and replaced.
4.
Concrete Sidewalk, Walkway, Driveway Ribbon And Curb Restoration:
a. Concrete sidewalks, walkways, driveways, driveway ribbons and
curbs required to be removed for the installation of facilities under
02574-5
60-954.00
this Contract shall be restored. Class B concrete shall be used in all
cases.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Replaced portions of these items shall conform to the lines, grades
and cross sections of the removed portions. Concrete sidewalks and
walkways shall be of 4-inch thickness; concrete driveways and
driveway ribbons shall be 6-inch thickness. Replaced concrete curb
and/or gutter shall joint neatly to the remaining section.
5.
Pavement Restoration - Concrete: Rigid pavement shall be replaced in kind
with Class B concrete, using high early strength cement. The base course
for rigid pavement shall be replaced with limerock base material and
compacted to a thickness to match the existing base.
6.
Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course Overlay:
a. The work under this section includes asphaltic concrete surface
course overlay paving as and where directed by the Engineer.
Where this paving is directed it shall take the place of asphaltic
concrete pavement restoration as specified herein above. This
surface course overlay shall extend over the reconstructed base
course and the existing pavement to the limits directed by the
Engineer, which generally shall be full width of the roadway, or as
shown on the drawings.
b. After the base course construction in the trench area has been
completed and primed, the surface shall be tack coated and a I-inch
compacted thickness of Type S-I asphaltic concrete shall be
constructed in accordance with the requirements specified above for
pavement restoration.
7.
Non-surfaced streets, alleys and driveways shall be restored with 6-inches
of compacted limerock base material placed in the top of the trench.
END OF SECTION
02574-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02660P
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
The work under this Section includes providing a complete system of water distribution pressure
piping and appurtenant items.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Requirements:
1. Water mains shall be laid with a minimum separation of 10 feet from a parallel sewer
pipe line.
2. Water mains shall be laid with a minimum cover of 36 inches below finished grade,
unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Water mains shall be constructed of the materials specified on the drawings.
4. All water mains, fittings, etc., shall be clearly marked with the name or trademark of
the manufacturer, the batch number, the location of the plant, and strength
designation, as applicable.
5. Changes in horizontal alignment of 45 degrees or less may be achieved through use
of allowable pipe deflection in lieu of fittings shown on the Drawings at the
Contractor's option, but subject to approval of the Owner's Engineer as to layout.
Said deflection shall not exceed limits set forth in applicable A WW A Standards.
B. Storage:
1. Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand, free
of sharp objects which could damage the pipe. Stacking of the polyvinyl chloride
pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause excessive deformation of the
bottom layers of pipes under anticipated temperatures conditions. Where necessary
due to ground conditions the pipe shall be stored on wooden sleepers, spaced suitably
and of such width as not to allow deformation of the pipe at the point of contact with
the sleeper or between supports.
02660P-l
60-954.00
02660P-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Polyvinyl chloride pipe may be damaged by prolonged exposure to direct sunlight
and the Contractor shall take necessary precautions during storage and installation
to avoid this damage. Pipe shall be stored under cover to shield it from the sun and
sufficient backfill shall be placed as the pipe is installed.
C.
Pipe Inspection: The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturers a certificate of
inspection stating that the pipe and fittings supplied for this Contract have been inspected at
the plant and that they meet the requirements of these specifications. All pipe and fittings
shall be subjected to visual inspection at time of delivery by rail or truck, also just before
they are lowered into the trench to be laid, and joints or fittings that do not conform to these
specifications will be rejected and must be removed immediately by the Contractor. The
entire product of any plant may be rejected when, in the opinion ofthe Owner's Engineer,
the methods of manufacture fail to secure uniform results, or where the materials used are
such as to produce inferior pipe or fittings.
D.
Prevention of Electrolysis:
1. Where deemed necessary, electrolytic action through the contact of dissimilar metals,
shall be prevented by either:
a. The separation of one material from the other by means of an insulating or
dielectric coupling, or
b. The use of alternative materials, as directed by the Design Engineer.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1. In general, 6 copies of the following shop drawings shall be submitted to the Design
Engineer for approval prior to construction:
a. Mill test certificates or certified test reports on pipe
b. Details of restrained and flexible joints
c. Fire hydrant assemblies
d. Meter vault and boxes
e. Valves and valve boxes
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f. Service connection assemblies
B. Acceptance Of Material:
1. The Contractor shall furnish an Affidavit of Compliance certified by the pipe
manufacturer that the pipe, fittings and specials furnished under this Contract comply
with all applicable provisions of A WW A Standard C301 and these Specifications.
No pipe or fittings will be accepted for use in the work on this project until the
Affidavit has been submitted and approved by the Design Engineer.
2. The Owner's Engineer reserves the right to sample and test any pipe or fitting after
delivery and to reject all pipe and fittings represented by any sample which fails to
comply with the specified requirements.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Water in Excavation: Water shall not be allowed in the trenches while the pipes are being
laid and/or tested. The Contractor shall not open more trench than the available pumping
facilities are able to dewater to the satisfaction of the Owner's Engineer. The Contractor
shall assume responsibility for disposing of all water so as not to injure or interfere with the
normal drainage of the territory in which he is working. In no case shall the pipelines being
installed be used as drains for such water, and the ends of the pipe shall be kept properly and
adequately blocked during construction by the use of approved stoppers and not by
improvised equipment. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent the entrance of
mud, sand, or other obstructing matter into the pipelines. If on completion of the work any
such material has entered the pipelines, it must be cleaned as directed by the Owner's
Engineer so that the entire system will be left clean and unobstructed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERlALS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe And Fittings:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of A WW A
Standard CI51-76 and CIII-79, Class 50, unless specified otherwise on the drawings
or in the general requirements.
02660P-3
60-954.00
02660P-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Fittings:
a. Cast iron mechanical joint fittings: All fittings must be short body and shall
conform to the requirements of A WW A Standard C 11 0 and ANSI Standard
A21.10, 150 psi minimum pressure rating, and be supplied with accessories.
b. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings: All fittings must be short body and
shall conform to the requirements of A WW A Standard C 153 and ANSI
Standard A21.53, 350 psi minimum pressure rating, and be supplied without
accessones.
c. Ductile iron mechanical joint accessory kits with Cor-Ten bolts and nuts:
Accessory kit shall be Class 350 ductile iron and contents of kit should be
clearly printed on outside of box; number and size of bolts, size of gaskets
and gland, and type of gasket. Accessory kits shall consist ofT-bolts, rings
and gaskets.
3. Joints: Push on and mechanical joints shall conform to the requirements of ANSI
Standard A21.11 and A WW A Standard C 111.
4. Coatings and Linings: Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be cement mortar lined
with a standard thickness cement and bituminous coated in accordance with A WW A
Standard CI04-80.
5. Gaskets: Gaskets shall be of vulcanized crude rubber or polyvinyl chloride plastisol.
Gaskets shall have plain tips unless otherwise specified.
B.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe And Fittings:
1. Pipe:
a. All PVC pipe shall bear the approval seal of the National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) for potable water pipe.
b. Schedule 80 plastic pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
designation D 1784 and D 1785 respectively.
c. Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM designation D 1785.
d. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe 2 inches in diameter shall be SDR 21, Type
1, Grade 1, and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM designation D
1784 and D 2241 respectively, 200 psi minimum pressure rating.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Polyvinyl cWoride pipe 4 inches and larger in diameter shall be DR 18, and
shall conform to the requirements of A WW A standard C900, 150 psi
minimum pressure rating. It shall have the same G.D. as cast and ductile iron
pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with ductile iron
fittings. The pipe shall be color coded blue for inground identification as a
water distribution pipe, in conformance with the utility marking code.
2.
Fittings:
a. All PVC pipe fittings shall bear the approval seal of the National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) for potable water pipe.
b. Schedule 40 PVC fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
designation D 2466.
c. Schedule 80 plastic fittings with solvent weld or threaded joints shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation D 2464 and D 2466
respectively.
d. Fittings for PVC pipe 2 inches in diameter shall be SDR 21, Type 1, Grade
1, and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation D 1784, 200
psi minimum pressure rating.
e. Ductile iron fittings for PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI
standard A21.1O, A WWA Standard CllO, with 150 psi minimum pressure
rating. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined as specified above.
3.
Joints:
a. Joints in PVC pipe smaller than 2 inches shall be solvent welded in
accordance with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer using the
solvent welding compound furnished with the pipe, or shall be threaded.
Threaded joints shall be used only with Schedule 80 pipe, or better. At
threaded joints between PVC and metal pipes, the metal shall contain the
socket end and the PVC side the spigot. A metal spigot shall not, under any
circumstances, be screwed into a PVC socket.
b. PVC pipe 2 inches and larger shall have provision for expansion and
contraction provided in the joints. All joints shall be designed for push on
make up connection. A push on joint may be a coupling manufactured as an
integral part of the pipe barrel consisting of a thickened section with an
expanded bell with a groove to retain a rubber sealing ring of uniform cross
section similar and equal to Johns-Manville Ring- Tite and Ethyl Bell Ring,
02660P-5
60-954.00
02660P-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
or may be made with a separate twin-gasketed coupling similar and equal to
Certainteed Fluid- Tite. Rubber ring gaskets shall consist of synthetic
compounds meeting the requirements of ASTM designation D 1869 and
provide for the pressure rating of the pipe.
c. Retaining joints utilizing set screws bearing directly on pipe barrel or
utilizing grooves cut in pipe will not be permitted on PVC pipe installations.
C.
Plastic Tubing: Polybutylene tubing shall conform to the requirements of A WW A Standard
C902, PB designation 2110, ASTM designation D2666. 3/4" and 1" tubing shall be DR 9.0,
and 1 W' and 2" tubing shall be DR 13.5.
D.
Gate Valves:
1. Gate valves for pipe less than 2 inches in diameter unless otherwise noted on the
drawings, shall be all bronze valves and shall conform to the requirements of Federal
Specification WW-V-541 for Class A, Type I, 150 psi minimum pressure rating.
2. Gate valves 2 inches to 12 inches in diameter and larger shall be iron body, nonrising
stem, bronze mounted, mechanical joint and/or single gasket push on type,
conforming to requirements of the A WW A Standard C509 and shall be provided
with a 2-inch square operating nut. Valves shall be of the resilient wedge type and
shall turn to the left (counter clockwise) to open. All valves shall be provided with
O-ring seals. The design and machining of valves shall be such as to permit
replacing the O-ring seals while in service without undue leakage.
3. Valves larger than 12 inches in diameter shall be butterfly valves conforming to the
requirements of A WW A Standard C504.
E.
Butterfly Valves:
1. General: All butterfly valves shall be of the tight-closing, rubber-seat type with
rubber seats that are securely fastened to the valve body or disc. No metal-to-metal
seating surfaces will be permitted. Valves shall be bubble tight at rated pressures
with flow in either direction; and shall be satisfactory for applications involving
frequent operation and for applications involving valve operation after long periods
of inactivity and for buried installation. Valve discs shall rotate 900 from the full
open position to the tight shut position and shall turn to the left (counter clockwise)
to open. Valves shall meet the full requirements of A WW A Standard C504.
2. Valve body, valve discs, valve seats, valve bearings, valve seals, position indicators
and appurtenances shall be as required and furnished by the valve manufacturer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
Valves Boxes: Cast iron valve boxes shall be provided for all valves installed underground.
The valve boxes shall be adjustable to fit the depth of earth cover over the valve and shall
be designed so as to prevent the transmission of surface loads directly to the valve or piping.
Valve boxes shall have an interior diameter of not less than 5 inches. The valve boxes shall
be provided with covers marked WATER which shall be so constructed as to prevent tipping
or rattling. Boxes shall be as manufactured by Russco, Opelika, Tyler, or approved equal.
Extension sections shall be ductile or cast iron. The protective ring shall be constructed of
Class B concrete.
G.
Hydrants: Fire hydrants shall be of the compression type with break away upper sections
capable of ready replacement without water loss in the event of traffic damage. They shall
be designed for a working pressure of 150 pounds per square inch and shall conform to
A WW A Standard C503-82 "Wet Barrel Fire Hydrants". Each hydrant shall have a 6-inch
bottom inlet connection and valve opening at least 5 I14-inches in diameter. Hydrants shall
turn to the left (counterclockwise) to open. Each hydrant shall be fitted with one 4 I12-inch
pumper connection, and two 2 I12-inch hose connections, both having threads that conform
to the Fire Division Standard for the area. Hose caps shall be chained to the hydrant barrel
and fitted with nuts similar to the hydrant operating nuts. Each hydrant shall have a barrel
of sufficient length to bring the bottom of the 6-inch pipe connection 36-inches below the
surface of the finished ground unless otherwise indicated. Each hydrant shall be made in at
least two sections bolted together. All interior working parts of the hydrant shall be
removable from the top of the hydrant to allow repairs without removing the hydrant barrel
after it has been installed. Hydrants shall have renewable O-ring stem seals and Waterous
WB67 (P.e. Spec.), Clow Medallion 2546-4B, U.S. Pipe Metropolitan, Kennedy Guardian,
American B-B4-B, Mueller A423, M & H 929 or approved equal. Hydrant barrels shall be
painted as required by Pinellas County.
H.
Tapping Sleeves And Valves:
1. Tapping sleeves and tapping valves used to make "wet" taps into existing mains shall
be provided and installed at locations as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor
shall determine the outside diameter of the existing main before ordering the sleeve.
02660P-7
60-954.00
02660P-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Tapping sleeves (all stainless steel): tapping sleeves for 4" through 12" diameter pipe
shall be manufactured from 304 (18-8) stainless steel, ANSI ISO-lb. drilling and
recessed for tapping valve MSS-SP60. Separate (not welded to sleeve) 304 stainless
steel bolts and nuts must be provided with sleeves. (LUBRICANT
IMPREGNA nON TO PREVENT GALLING IS REQUIRED). Sleeve design shall
provide for the bolts to be on 3" center when sleeve is installed.
3. Tapping sleeves (fabricated steel/epoxy-coated): tapping sleeves for 4" through 24"
diameter pipe shall be manufactured to meet material specification ASTM 285
GRADE C for the body. The flange shall conform to A WW A C207 CLASS D, have
ANSI ISO-lb. drilling and be recessed for tapping valve (MSS-SP60). All sleeves
shall be fusion epoxy coated. Bolts and nuts shall be manufactured from 304
stainless steel (LUBRICANT IMPREGNA nON TO PREVENT GALLING IS
REQUIRED).
4. Tapping valves: Tapping valves shall conform to A WW A Standard C509 for
resilient seated gate valves with non-rising stems, applicable to the requirements as
specified above for gate valves. Valves shall have full port opening to allow passage
of tapping cutter and have a laying length sufficient to allow complete retraction of
A.P. Smith Tapping Machine when valve is in fully closed position. Valve shall be
epoxy coated on entire ferrous surface of waterway. Inlet flange design with tapping
alignment ring. Tapping valves shall have one end mechanical joint in accordance
with A WW A C 111- 79 . Valves shall come with bolts, nuts and gaskets for flanged
side only.
1.
Service Connections:
1. Service Connections: Including corporation stops, curb stops, fittings and
accessories, shall be provided in accordance with the details shown on the drawings.
2. Water Meters: Shall be supplied and installed by City of Clearwater unless otherwise
noted.
J.
Concrete: Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 03000.
K.
Tie Rods: Steel for tie rods and tie bolts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
Designation A 242, and rods shall be galvanized in conformance with requirements of
ASTM Designation A 123.
L.
Retainer Glands with Cor-Ten bolts and nuts: Retainer glands shall conform to A WW A
C 11 0 (ANSI A21.10) and A WW A C 111 (ANSI A21.11) or latest revision thereof. Set
screws must be shear type torque design. All restraints furnished under this specification
must be U.L. listed or F.M. approved for fire service.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
M. Joint restraints and adapters: Four types will be required: restraint adapter for plain end PVC
to flange, restraint adapter for plain end PVC to mechanical joint, restraint adapter for push-
on PVC joint, and restraint adapter for plain end ductile iron pipe to flange. All restraints
furnished under this specification must be U.L. listed or F .M. approved for fire service.
N. Miscellaneous Items: Other items necessary for the complete installation and not specified
herein shall conform to the details and notes shown on the drawings and to the local
governmental agency having jurisdiction regulations. All minor items implied, usually
included, or required for the construction of a complete operating system shall be installed
whether shown on the detail drawings or not.
PART 3 - CONSTRUCTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Bedding:
1. Pipe Cradle: Upon satisfactory installation of the pipe bedding material as specified
in Section 02221, a continuous trough for the pipe barrel and recesses for the pipe
bells or couplings shall be excavated by hand digging. When the pipe is laid in the
prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall receive continuous,
uniform support and no pressure will be exerted on the pipe joints from the trench
bottom.
2. Cleanliness: The interior of the pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign
matter before being gently lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during
laying operations by means of plugs or other approved methods. During suspension
of work for any reason at any time, a suitable stopper shall be placed in the end of the
pipe last laid to prevent mud or other foreign material from entering the pipe.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Pipe:
1. Gradient: Lines shall be laid straight, and depth of cover shall be maintained uniform
with respect to finish grade, whether grading is completed or proposed at time of pipe
installation. When a grade or slope is shown on the Drawings, batter boards with
string line paralleling design grade, or other previously approved means, shall be
used by the Contractor to assure conformance to required grade.
02660P-9
60-954.00
02660P-10
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Pipe Joint Deflection: Whenever it is desirable to deflect pipe, the amount of
deflection shall not exceed the maximum limits as shown in A WW A Standard C600
for ductile iron pipe and the maximum limits as established by the manufacturer of
PVC pipe.
3. Rejects: Any pipe found defective shall be immediately removed and replaced with
sound pipe at the Contractor's expense.
4. Joint Compounds: No sulphur base joint compound shall be used.
5. Anchors: Concrete thrust blocks shall be placed at all bends, tees, plugs and other
fittings to provide lateral support, except when restrained joints are specified. Thrust
blocks shall conform to the details shown on the Drawings.
B.
Ductile Iron Pipe Joints:
1. Type: The joints of all pipelines shall be made absolutely tight. The particular joint
used shall be approved by the Design Engineer prior to installation. Where shown
on the Drawings or where, in the opinion of the Owner's Engineer, settlement or
vibration is likely to occur, all pipe joints shall be bolted.
2. Mechanical Joints: All types of mechanical joint pipes shall be laid and jointed in
full conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, which shall be submitted
to the Design Engineer for review and approval before work is begun. Only
especially skilled workmen shall be permitted to make up mechanical joints. Torque
wrenches set as specified in A WW A Standard C 111, shall be used; or spanner type
wrenches not longer than specified therein may be used without the permission of the
Design Engineer.
3. Push On Joints: Push on joints shall be made in strict, complete compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Lubricant, if required, shall be an inert, nontoxic,
water soluble compound incapable of harboring, supporting, or culturing bacterial
life. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be submitted to the Design Engineer for
review and approval before work is begun.
4. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints shall be provided at changes in direction of all
ductile iron pipe water mains 24 inches in diameter and larger in lieu of concrete
thrust blocks. All pipe joints within the distance shown in the following table from
the PI of the fitting shall be restrained type. These distances shall apply to lengths
of pipe on each side of the fitting. Tees and dead ends valved or capped shall be
considered equivalent to 900 bends (Lengths are based on cohesive granular, sand
and/or silt backfill and 150 (l00) psi test pressure).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Fittings (Length in Feet)
(3-Ft. Cover; 100 psi Test Pressure)
Pipe Size 900 Bend 450 Bend 22 Y2 0 Bend 111/40 Bend
(inches)
20 36 22 14 8
24 45 24 16 8
30 56 30 18 10
36 66 34 20 12
42 68 36 20 12
48 72 42 22 12
54 80 44 24 14
I (3-Ft. Cover; 150 psi Test Pressure) I
20 54 33 21 12
24 68 36 24 12
30 84 45 27 15
36 99 51 30 18
42 102 54 30 18
C.
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Joints: The joints of all piping shall be made absolutely tight, and
joints in polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be made in conformity with the recommendations of
the pipe manufacturer. Joints for threaded PVC pipe shall have the male threaded end
wrapped with Teflon pipe tape when the joint is made up. At threaded joints between pve
and metal pipes, the metal shall contain the socket end and the PVC side the spigot. A metal
spigot shall not, under any circumstances, be screwed into a pve socket.
D.
Installing Valves And Boxes:
1. Valves: Valves shall be carefully inspected, opened wide and then tightly closed and
the various nuts and bolts shall be tested for tightness. Special care shall be taken to
prevent any foreign matter from becoming lodged in the valve seat. Gate valves,
unless shown otherwise, shall be set with their stems vertically above the center line
of the pipe. Butterfly valves shall have the disc shaft installed horizontally. Any
valve that does not operate correctly shall be removed and replaced.
02660P-ll
60-954.00
2. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes shall be carefully centered over the operating nuts of the
valves so as to permit a valve key to be fitted easily to the operating nut. In areas to
be paved, valve boxes shall be set to conform to the level of the finished surface and
held in position by a ring of concrete placed under the support flange as shown on the
Drawings. The valve box shall not transmit surface loads to the pipe or valve. Care
shall be taken to prevent earth and other material from entering the valve box. Any
valve box which is out of alignment or whose top does not conform to the finished
ground surface shall be dug out and reset. Before final acceptance of the work all
valve boxes shall be adjusted to finish grade.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
Installing Hydrants: All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with,
or at right angles to, the edge of pavement with the pumper nozzle facing the edge of
pavement. They shall be securely braced against the end of the trench (undisturbed soil) with
concrete thrust blocks, or other approved restraining method. Hydrants shall be set to the
established grade, with nozzles pointing as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Owner's Engineer. Care shall be taken to insure the free draining of the hydrant barrel and,
to this end, coarse material shall be placed around the drain outlet. Backfilling around
hydrants shall be carefully done so as not to disturb the hydrant and shall be thoroughly
compacted so as to support the hydrant securely.
F.
Concrete Encasement:
1. Concrete encasement shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the
Drawings and shall be constructed of Class C concrete. Encasement shall be
constructed where:
a. Indicated on the Drawings.
b. The Owner's Engineer shall order the line encased.
2. The points of beginning and ending of pipe encasement shall be not more than 6
inches from a pipe joint to protect the pipe from cracking due to uneven settlement
of its foundation or the effects of superimposed live loads.
G.
Blow-off Connections (temporary as permanent): Blow-off connections shall be installed at
the locations and in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
H.
Service Connections: Service connections shall be installed at the locations and III
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
02660P-12
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03
B.
1.
Backfilling:
1. After pipe has been laid, inspected, and found satisfactory, sufficient backfill shall
be placed along the pipe barrel to hold the pipe securely in place during the
conduction of the preliminary hydrostatic test. No backfill shall be placed over joints
until the preliminary test is satisfactorily completed, leaving them exposed to view
for the detection of visible leaks.
2. Upon satisfactory completion of the preliminary hydrostatic test, backfilling of the
trench shall be completed.
J.
Concrete Protective Slabs: Where waterways, canals, ditches or other cuts are crossed,
protective concrete slabs shall be installed across and to 10 feet each side of the bottom.
Approved utility crossing signs shall be placed on the pipe alignment at each side of the
canal, waterway, etc.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Flushing: All water mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter. The
velocity of the flushing water shall be at least 4 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated
at the direction of the Owner's Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water
without causing a nuisance or property damage.
Hydrostatic Tests:
1. All components of the water distribution system, including fittings, hydrants,
connections and valves of the water distribution system shall remain uncovered until
tested and accepted; provided, however, that pipe trenches under traveled streets or
roads or in unstable soil conditions may be backfilled with the permission of the
Owner's Engineer. No testing shall be done until all concrete thrust blocking is in
place and set. If high-early strength concrete is used, testing may be conducted 48
hours after the concrete is placed; otherwise thrust block concrete must cure 5 days
before pressure testing commences. In testing, the part of the system under test shall
be filled with water and subjected to a sustained pressure of 150 pounds per square
inch. The piping shall be tested in sections, thereby testing each valve for secure
closure. While the system is being filled, air shall be carefully and completely
exhausted. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, the Contractor
shall install corporation stops or fittings and valves at such points so the air can be
expelled as the pipe system is slowly filled with water.
02660P-13
60-954.00
2.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Test pressure shall be maintained by pumping for at least 2 hours and until all
sections. under test have been checked for evidence of leakage. Rate of loss shall not
exceed that specified hereinafter. Visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of total
leakage shown by test. The test shall proceed as follows:
a. The contractor will pump his line to a pressure greater than 150 psi. At no
time shall the test or line pressure exceed 190 psi. If required by Pinellas
County, pump test equipment shall be equipped with pressure relief valves
pre-set to 190 psi.
b. Throughout the duration of the test, the contractor is required to maintain a
minimum pressure in excess of 150 psi. The contractor is advised that,
should the line pressure fall to or below 150 psi any time during the 2 hour
test, the test will be considered invalid and a retest, according to this
procedure, will be required. Therefore, he is advised to pump water into the
line as the line pressure approaches 150 psi.
c. At the end of the 2 hour test period, the contractor will be required to pump
the pipe lines back up to the highest pressure obtained during the duration of
the test period. If chart records are required by the local governmental
agency or utility company for hydrostatic test, the contractor shall furnish
flow and/or pressure charts to the local governmental agency or utility
company as a condition of concluding the test.
d. The allowable leakage; as specified below, will be defined as any volume of
water required to maintain a minimum pressure in excess of 150 psi during
the duration of the test period plus that volume of water required at the
conclusion of the test to bring the line pressure back up to the highest
pressure obtained during the duration of the test period.
3.
The system as a whole, or any part, shall be retested after completion of backfilling.
Such retest will be required for final acceptance.
4.
All pumps, gauges and measuring devices shall be furnished, installed and operated
by the Contractor and all such equipment and devices and their installation shall be
approved by the Owner's Engineer. All pressure and leak age testing shall be done
in the presence of a representative of the Owner.
5.
Water for testing and flushing shall be potable water provided by the Contractor from
a source approved by the Owner's Engineer.
6.
Preliminary pressure testing may be waived by the Owner's Engineer for pipe 24
inches in diameter and larger.
02660P-14
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Allowable Limits For Leakage:
1. The hydrostatic pressure tests shall be performed as hereinabove specified and no
installation, or section thereof, will be acceptable until the leakage is less than the
number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula:
L=SD .fP
133200
in which,
L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour
S = Length of pipe being tested, in feet
D = Nominal pipe diameter; in inches
p = Average test pressure during the test, in psi gauge.
2. For a 1000-foot segment of main with an average test pressure of 150 psi the
following table may be used.
Pipe Diameter ("D")
in inches
Allowable Leakage ("L")
Gallons per Hour
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
0.19
0.37
0.55
0.74
0.92
1.10
1.29
1.47
1.66
1.84
2.21
2.76
3. Water shall be supplied to the main during the test period as required to maintain the
test pressure as specified. The quantity used, which shall be compared to the above
allowable quantity, shall be measured by pumping from a calibrated container. A
5/8-inch meter installed on the discharge side ofthe pump may be used to measure
the leakage for large mains when approved by the Owner's Engineer.
02660P-15
60-954.00
02660P-16
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Correction Of Work: Where leakage exceeds the allowable limit, as specified hereinbefore,
the defective pipe or joints shall be located and repaired. If the defective portions cannot be
located, the Contractor shall remove and reconstruct as much of the work as is necessary in
order to conform to the specified limits. Any visible leaks or any defective pipe or joint shall
be repaired or replaced as directed by the Owner's Engineer even though the total leakage is
within the specified allowable limits. No additional payment will be made for the correction
of defective work, or to damage to other parts of the work resulting from such corrective
work.
E.
Disinfection:
1. Before any portion of water distribution system is to be placed in service it shall be
disinfected in accordance with the requirements of A WW A Standard C601; and its
disinfection shall be demonstrated by bacteriological test conducted in accordance
with "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater" for the
coli-aerogenes group, by an approved laboratory, acceptable to the Owner's Engineer
and the County Department of Health having jurisdiction.
2. Disinfecting Agent: The disinfecting agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium
hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification O-S-602b, Grade D, or dry
hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron".
3. Flushing System: Prior to the application of the disinfecting agent, all mains shall be
thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until clean water flows from the
hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be
accomplished at the closest point available to the ends of the lines.
4. Disinfection Procedure: All piping, valves, fitting and all other appurtenances shall
be disinfected with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm
at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system
for a minimum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed out. All valves in
the lines being disinfected shall be opened and closed several times during the
contact period.
5. Residual Chlorine Tests: After the disinfection outlined above has been
accomplished, flushing shall continue until residual chlorine tests less than 0.2 ppm.
Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard
orthotolodine test set.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.04
6. Bacterial Tests:
a. After the water system has been disinfected and thoroughly flushed as
specified herein, the Contractor shall take samples of water from remote
points of the distribution system in sterile containers. The Contractor shall
forward the samples to the County Department of Health for bacterial
examination. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform
organisms, the disinfection as outlined above shall be repeated until tests
indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be
satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall
be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain satisfactory samples.
b. Ifmethods of disinfection differ materially from those outlined above, such
methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Department of Health
and all methods employed shall have the approval of the agency. Definite
instruction as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from
the Department of Health prior to disinfection and shall be followed in all
respects. The Contractor shall secure final approval of the bacterial samples
from the Department of Health before the water distribution system is put
into operation.
SCHEDULE
A.
Connection To Existing System:
1. All connections to existing mains shall be made after complete disinfection of the
proposed system and shall be made under the direction of the owners of the existing
system. Valves separating the mains being installed from existing mains shall be
operated by or under the direction of said owner's representative. The cost of the
work in making the connections shall be paid for by the Contractor.
2. In the event the proposed main is to be connected to a main which has one or more
active services between the point of connection and the first existing line valve, a
temporary plug or cap shall be installed on the new main until the pressure tests and
disinfecting are completed. Upon satisfactory completion, the cap or plug shall be
removed from both mains and the connection made with pipe which has been
swabbed out with a solution of chlorine and water. The connection shall be made as
swiftly as possible and any water in the ditch shall be kept below the level of the
pipe. The pipeline shall then be placed in service by the owners' personnel.
02660P-17
60-954.00
3.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
In the event any existing users will be without water while a connection is being
made, the Contractor shall notify them when the water will be turned off and when
he estimates service will be resumed. In some instances, these connections may have
to be made at night. No user shall be without water service for more than two hours.
END OF SECTION
02660P-18
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02710
TREE PROTECTION, TRIMMING AND TRANSPLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. All areas outside the limits of construction shall remain in their existing conditions
and shall not be disturbed by the Contractor.
B. Trees within the limits of construction which are to remain and be protected and
those which are to be transplanted, are shown on the drawings. If the status of any
tree is in question, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Engineer prior
to any disturbance of the tree or its root system area. The City of Clearwater shall
remove the trees and/or shrubs marked on the construction drawings and any other
trees and/or shrubs necessary to perform the work described in the drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Tree and shrub transplanting manual, International Society of Agriculture, Latest
Edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The City of Clearwater shall protect trees and other plants from damage by providing
temporary barricades in accordance with local governmental agency having
jurisdiction, and as otherwise delineated in the Contract Documents.
B. The Contractor shall protect root systems. Construction materials, debris, or
excavated materials shall not be stored within the drip line, which is the outer
perimeter of branches. Vehicles shall not be parked nor operated within the drip line.
Foot traffic shall be restricted to prevent excessive compaction of soil over root
systems.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The City of Clearwater shall engage a licensed, qualified tree surgeon to perform the
following work:
02710-1
60-594.00
02710-2
60-594.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Remove branches from the trees which are to remain, if required to clear new
construction.
2. Pruning shall not be required to compensate for loss of roots where roots are
removed to accommodate new construction.
3. Perform tree repair work for damage incurred by new construction.
4. Limb up existing trees to remain, and transplanted trees, to an eight-foot clear
trunk condition, except over roads.
5. Remove or prune limbs extending over roadway to a clearance of 14 feet 6
inches (14.5') from the surface ofthe road to the lowest branch.
6. Root prune existing trees to be retained in the right-of-way when excavation
occurs with the canopy drip line or as directed by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Drainage Fill: Selected non-alkaline stone or gravel, graded to pass a 3" sieve and
less than 5% retained on a 1: sieve; or lightweight aggregate conforming to ASTM
C-330, equal to "Solite", manufactured by Solite, Inc., Green Cove Springs, Florida.
B. Topsoil: Topsoil shall be friable loam, typical of cultivated topsoils locally,
containing at least 5 per cent of decayed organic matter (humus). It shall be taken
from a well drained, arable site. It shall be reasonably free of weeds, subsoil, stones,
clods, sticks, roots or other objectionable extraneous matter or debris. It shall not
contain toxic materials and shall have an acidity range of pH 6.0 to 7.0. Topsoil from
nut grass infested areas will not be acceptable.
C. Timber: 6" x 8" pine treated in accordance with A WPB Standard LP22.
D. PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2241, Schedule 40, solid pipe and pipe perforated
with 360 degree hole spacing.
E. Sidewalk and Curb Root Barrier: Equal to Typar "Bio barrier", by Reemay, Inc.
G. Tree Pruning Compound: Waterproof, antiseptic, elastic and free of kerosene, coal
tar, creosote, and other similar substances.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall protect tree root systems from damage due to noxious materials
in solution, caused by runoff or spillage during mixing and placement of construction
materials, or drainage from stored materials. Root systems shall be protected from
flooding, erosion, or excessive wetting resulting from dewatering operations.
B. Fires shall not be allowed under or adjacent to trees or other plants which are to
remam.
C. Branches shall be removed from trees which are to remain, if required to clear new
construction, and meet project sigh clearance of 8-foot clear trunk, as measured from
the ground to the lowest limb.
D. Pruning shall be used only to balance limb weight oftree or for clearance as stated
in 1-02.A. 4 & 5.
E. Branches and roots shall be cut, if required, with sharp pruning instruments; and shall
not be broken or chopped. Cuts over 1/2" in size shall be painted with tree pruning
compound.
3.02 EXCAVATION AROUND TREES
A. Excavation shall be accomplished within the drip line of trees only where indicated.
Root pruning shall be required when excavation occurs with the canopy drip line or
as directed by Engineer.
B. Where trenching for utilities is required within the drip line, the Contractor shall
tunnel, in accordance with paragraph 3.03, or hand excavate under or around roots.
Main lateral roots or tap roots shall not be cut. Smaller roots which interfere with
installation of new work may be cut if permission is granted by the Engineer.
C. Exposed roots shall not be allowed to dry out before permanent backfill is placed.
The Contractor shall provide temporary earth cover, or pack with peat moss and wrap
with burlap. Roots shall be watered and maintained in a moist condition, temporarily
supported, and protected from damage until permanently relocated and covered with
earth.
02710-3
60-594.00
02710-4
60-594.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03
TUNNELING TO PRESERVE TREE ROOT SYSTEMS
A. Where trees are shown to remain in place and are to be saved, the Contractor shall
install water and wastewater pipelines, and other utility conduits, through the root
system by tunneling. Tunneling shall be accomplished by either pushing an 18-foot,
minimum, length of carrier pipe, or conduit, through the roots and leave in place or
by pushing a steel casing, of the same minimum length, beneath the tree and
withdrawing it to form a tunnel. The utility pipeline can then be installed through the
tunnel. The tunnel length shall be the same on each side of the center of the tree.
3.04
LOWERING GRADES AROUND TREES
A. Where new finish grade around trees is shown to be lower than existing grade, a tree
retaining wall or a slope of2:1 shall be constructed as shown on the drawings. Roots
exposed by excavation shall be pruned by a tree surgeon prior to the excavation
activity.
3.05
RAISING GRADES AROUND TREES
A. Minor Fills: Where proposed finish grade is shown to be up to four inches or less
existing grade, a clean course sand fill material shall be used to bring the area to
grade. Sand shall be placed in a single layer without compaction, hand graded to
required finish elevations.
B. Moderate Fills: Where proposed finish grade is shown to be more than four inches,
but less than twelve inches, above existing grade elevation, the City of Clearwater
shall place an eight-inch layer of drainage fill on existing grade, covered by a layer
of filter fabric, prior to placing topsoil. Stone or gravel layers shall not be
compacted. Topsoil layers shall be lightly compacted utilizing hand operated.
equipment. Hand grade to required elevations. Where required, tree retaining walls
shall be installed as shown on the drawings. The system shall be inspected and
approved by the Engineer before placing fill or topsoil over the filter fabric.
C. Major Fills: Where proposed finish grade is shown to be more than 12 inches above
existing grade elevation, the City of Clearwater shall construct a "Tree Well Aeration
System", to protect the root system from damage during and after construction.
Stone or gravel layers shall not be compacted. Topsoil layers shall be lightly
compacted utilizing hand operated equipment. The system shall be inspected and
approved by the Engineer prior to placing fill or topsoil over the layer of filter fabric.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.06
3.07
3.08
DISPOSAL
A. Excess displaced trees, trimmings, or other debris are the property of the City of
Clearwater and are to be removed from the site. Burning or burial of trees or
trimmings on site shall not be allowed.
TRANSPLANTING TREES
A. The City of Clearwater shall utilize whatever means he deems necessary to ensure
the proper transplanting and viability of the indicated trees. The City of Clearwater
shall utilize the largest commercial tree spading equipment available, minimum 84-
inch, that will remove at least 60% more root material than container grown or balled
and burlapped trees of equal size. Transplanting trees shall include:
1. Locating and verifying all existing underground utilities before any trees are
removed or installed and coordinating closely with any utilities with facilities
in those specific areas. The Contractor and the City of Clearwater shall call
Public Utility Notification Center at (800) 432-4770 prior to any excavation.
2. Pruning major roots to a depth of 3 feet at the exact location where the tree
spade will later be inserted to cut remainder of roots. This initial root pruning
shall be accomplished 75 days prior to tree spading transplanting.
3. Scheduling tree spading operations in an area before walks or non-passable
structures are installed.
4. Water and fertilize all transplanted trees. Provide fertilizer with 3% to 5%
total nitrogen with not less than 10% available phosphoric acid and 3% to 5%
soluble potash. Apply at the rate of lIb/caliper inch of transplanted tree to
incorporate thoroughly into planting pit and round root ball.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF TREES
A. Repair trees and vegetation damaged by construction operations. Make repair
promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive deterioration of damaged trees.
Repairs shall be made at the Contractor's expense.
B. The City of Clearwater shall remove and replace dead, damaged, or unhealthy trees
and vegetation which are determined by the Engineer to be incapable of restoration
to normal growth pattern.
02710-5
60-594.00
02710-6
60-594.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.09
WARRANTY
The City of Clearwater shall warranty all new and existing transplanted trees. Any dead
plants or plants showing indication of probable non-survival or lack of health and vigor, or
which do not exhibit the characteristics to meet specifications, shall be replaced within two
weeks of notice from Owner or Engineer. All replacements shall meet original
specifications.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02720
STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work covered and described in this Section includes the furnishing and
construction of culverts, storm sewers, inlets and other drainage structures as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Construction of storm culverts, storm sewer, inlets and other drainage structures
shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, 1991, of the Florida Department of Transportation, and
Supplemental Specifications thereto, hereinafter referred to as FDOT
Specifications, except as amended herein. The FDOT Specifications are hereby
made a part of this Contract as though reproduced herein in their entirety.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Six (6) shop drawings for the following items shall be submitted
for approval.
1. Grates and castings
2. Precast structures
3. Radius pipe
B. Pipe certification of quality by producer shall be delivered to Engineer ten days
prior to installation.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing Drainage System: Maintain operational, prevent siltation.
02720-1
60-954.00
02720-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Cleanup: Maintain surface grade within 400 feet of pipe laying operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 MATERIALS
A. General: The Contractor must furnish reinforced concrete culvert pipe unless
specified otherwise on the drawings or in the general requirements.
B. Concrete Pipe (RCP): Concrete pipe shall conform to the requirements of FDOT
Specifications, Section 941.
C. Corrugated Steel Pipe (CMP) and Pipe Arch (CMPA): Corrugated steel pipe and
pipe arch shall conform to the requirements of FDOT Specifications, Section 943.
D. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe (CAP) and Pipe Arch (CAPA): Corrugated aluminum
pipe and pipe arch shall conform to the requirements of FDOT Specifications,
Section 945.
E. Polyvinylchloride Pipe (PVC) and Acrylonitrate - Butadiene - Styrene Plastic Pipe
(ABS): PVC and ABS shall conform to the requirements of FDOT Specifications,
Section 948-4.
F. Pipe Gasket: Pipe gaskets shall conform to the requirements of FDOT
Specifications, Section 942.
G. Joint Materials: Joint materials shall be as specified in FDOT Specifications Section
430-7 through 430-11 for the particular type of pipe and conditions of usages as
specified.
H. Brick: Brick for drainage structures shall be dense, hard burned, shale or clay
brick conforming to ASTM Designation C 32, Grade MM or C 62, Grade MW,
except that brick absorption shall be between five and twenty-five grams of water
absorbed in one minute by dried brick, set flat face down, in lI8-inch of water.
I. Cement Mortar: Cement mortar for manhole construction shall be one part cement
and two parts clean sharp sand to which may be added lime in the amount of not
over fifteen (15) percent volume of cement. It shall be mixed dry and then wetted
to proper consistency for use. No mortars that have stood for more than one hour
shall be used.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J. Concrete: Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 03000 Concrete
and unless otherwise specified all concrete shall be Class B.
K. Precast Concrete Units: Precast concrete inlets shall conform to applicable
requirements of Section 03000 Concrete of these Specifications. Concrete for use
in precast units shall be Class A.
L. Castings: Castings for inlets and other items shall conform to the ASTM
Designation A 48, Class 30. Castings shall be true to pattern in form and
dimensions and free of pouring faults and other defects in positions which would
impair their strength or otherwise make them unfit for the service intended. No
plugging or filling will be allowed. Casting patterns shall conform to those shown
or indicated on the Drawings.
M. Plastic Filter Fabric: Plastic filter fabric shall conform to Section 985 of the FDOT
Standard Specifications, unless otherwise designated on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Pipe Trenches:
1. Pipe trenches shall be of necessary widths for the proper laying of the pipe
and the banks shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. In paved areas the
trench shall be vertical and sheeted, if required; the clearance between the
pipe and trench wall or back of sheeting shall not exceed 18 inches. The
bottom of the trenches shall be excavated to a depth of the outside bottom
of the pipe barrel. Any over excavation shall be replaced with suitable
compacted material. Excavation for inlets and other appurtenances shall be
sufficient to provide a clearance between their outer vertical surfaces and
the face of the excavation or sheeting, if used, of not less than 12-inches.
2. Soft, spongy, or otherwise unstable material encountered below the
established grade of the excavation which will not provide a firm foundation
for subsequent work shall be removed and replaced as directed. Unless
otherwise directed, all such unstable materials shall be removed for the full
width of the excavation and replaced with approved fill material.
3. Where sheeting and bracing are necessary to prevent caving of the trench
sidewalls or sidewalls of excavation for other structures, and to safeguard
the workmen, the trench or excavation for other structures shall be dug to
02720-3
60-954.00
such width that the proper allowance is made for the space occupied by the
sheeting and bracing to provide clearance as specified above.
3.02
INST ALLA TION
A. Laying Concrete Pipe:
1. All pipe shall be carefully laid true to the line and grade shown on the
Drawings. Any deviation from true alignment or grade which would result
in a displacement from the normal position of the gasket of as much as 1/4
inch, or which would produce a gap exceeding 1/2 inch between sections
of pipe for more than 1/3 of the circumference of the inside of the pipe, will
not be acceptable and where such occurs, the pipe shall be relayed without
additional compensation. No mortar, joint compound, or other filler which
would tend to restrict the flexibility of the gasket joint shall be applied to
the gap. Pipes having defects that have not caused their rejection are to be
so laid that these defects will be in the upper half of the sewer.
2. Before installation of the pipe gasket, the gasket and the surface of the pipe
joint, including the gasket recess shall be clean and free from grit, dirt, or
other foreign matter at the time the joints are made. In order to facilitate
closure of the joint, application of an approved vegetable soap lubricant
immediately prior to closing of the joint will be permitted.
3. All pipes shall be laid with ,bells or grooves uphill. As the pipes are laid
throughout the work, they must be thoroughly cleaned and protected from
dirt and water. No length of pipe shall be laid until the two preceding
lengths have been thoroughly embedded in place so as to prevent any
movement or disturbance of the [mished joint. No walking on or working
over the pipes after they are laid, except as may be necessary in tamping
earth and refilling, will be permitted until they are covered to a depth of
I-foot. No pipe shall be laid except in the presence of the authorized
inspector. Fill placed around the pipe shall be deposited on both sides
simultaneously to approximately the same elevation and uniformly
compacted. Whenever the pipe laying is discontinued, as at night, the
unfmished end is to be securely protected from displacement due to caving
of the banks or from other injury and a suitable stopper is to be inserted
therein.
B. Laying Corrugated Pipe:
02720-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. All corrugated pipe shall be carefully laid, true to the line and grade shown
on the Drawings. The pipe gasket and coupling band shall be centered over
the joint with the coupling band bolts securely tightened without cutting the
gasket.
2. Fill placed around the pipe shall be deposited on both sides simultaneously
to approximately the same elevation and uniformly compacted. Whenever
the pipe laying is discontinued, as at night, the unfinished end is to be
securely protected from displacement due to caving of the banks or from
other injury and a suitable stopper is to be inserted therein.
C.
Drainage Structures: Drainage structures shall be constructed at points shown on
the drawings or designated by the Design Engineer and in strict accordance with
the drawings.
1. Brick Masonry Structures: Brick masonry for manholes, inlets or other
structures shall be built of brick or mortar of the specified quality. Every
fifth course of brick shall be laid as stretches, the remainder being laid as
header. Every brick shall have full mortar joint on the bottom and sides
which shall have been formed at one operation by placing sufficient mortar
on the head and forcing the brick into it. Horizontal joints shall not exceed
1/4 of an inch. All brick shall be thoroughly drenched with water
immediately before being laid. In the walls of manholes a limited amount
of half brick may be used, not exceeding 1/3 of the whole, if properly
bonded with whole brick.
2. Cast-in-Place Structures: Concrete manholes, inlets, connections collars or
other structures shall be constructed in conformity with the drawings.
Forms shall be designed and constructed so that they may be removed
without injury to the concrete, and shall be left in place for at least twenty-
four (24) hours after concrete is poured. Concrete shall be thoroughly
tamped and shall be cured for at least five (5) days after removal of forms.
Honeycomb areas shall be thoroughly cleaned, saturated with water and
pointed up with mortar or treated in a manner as directed by Owner's
Engineer.
3. Precast Structures: Precast manholes, inlets or other structures may be used
in lieu of brick masonry or cast-in-place structures, unless otherwise shown
on drawings. Castings and frames and grates of all structures where
applicable shall be placed in fmal grade by use of level course of brick and
mortar if necessary or may be set in mortar only provided the depth of
mortar is not more than the depth of a course of brick and water.
02720-5
60-954.00
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Backfilling for Pipe Culverts and Drainage Structures:
1. After the pipe has been installed, approved selected material form
excavation at a moisture content which will facilitate compaction shall be
placed along side the pipe in layers not exceeding 6-inches loose measure
in depth. Care shall be taken to insure thorough compaction of the fill of
the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by
rolling or tamping with mechanical rammers. This method of filling and
compacting shall be continued until the fill is 12-inches above the pipe, then
the remainder of the backfill shall be placed in lifts not exceeding 9 inches.
The operation of heavy equipment shall be conducted so that no damage to
the pipe will result. backfill material 12 inches and above the top of the
pipe shall be compacted to a density as shown on the drawings. Selected
material for backfill shall not contain any stones or rocks larger than 3
inches.
2. Backfill for drainage structures shall be placed and compacted int he same
manner as specified above for pipe, except the concrete shall be permitted
to cure for not less than five (5) days before the backfilled is placed.
E.
Backfilling in Wet Trenches: After the installation of the pipe and drainage
structures, backfill material shall carefully and uniformly be simultaneously placed
on both sides of the pipe or structure by carefully lowering the material into the
trenches down to the water surface and then releasing it to settle through the water.
Under no circumstances shall backfill material be dumped, pushed or shoved into
the wet trench. Backfill shall be carefully and uniformly rammed around both sides
of the pipe to properly bed and support the pipe. No specified density requirement
shall apply to backfill carefully placed in wet trenches until the fill has reached a
level I-foot above the water, at which elevation and above the backfill densities
specified in Paragraph 3.02.D.
END OF SECTION
02720-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02730P
SANIT ARY SEWAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this section consists offumishing all labor, equipment and
materials necessary for the construction of sanitary sewers, sewer connections and
appurtenances as shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Requirements:
1. Design Requirements: Sewer pipe shall be laid with a minimum separation ofl 0 feet
from a parallel water pipe line.
2. Sanitary sewer mains shall be constructed ofthe materials specified on the
drawings.
3. PVC pipe shall not be used when the depth of cover measured to the pipe invert is
less than 4.0 feet or exceeds 12.0 feet.
B. Storage:
1. Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand,
free of sharp objects which could damage the pipe. Stacking of the polyvinyl
chloride pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause excessive
deformation of the bottom layers of pipes under anticipated temperatures
conditions. Where necessary due to ground conditions the pipe shall be stored on
wooden sleepers, spaced suitably and of such width as not to allow deformation of
the pipe at the point of contact with the sleeper or between supports.
2. Polyvinyl chloride pipe may be damaged by prolonged exposure to direct sunlight
and the Contractor shall take necessary precautions during storage and
installation to avoid this damage. Pipe shall be stored under cover to shield from
the sun and sufficient backfill shall be placed as the pipe is installed.
C. Pipe Inspection: The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturer a certificate of
inspection stating that the pipe and fittings supplied for this Contract have been
inspected at the plant and they meet the requirements of these specifications. All pipe
02730P-1
60-954.00
02730P-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
and fittings shall be subjected to visual inspection at time of delivery by rail or truck,
also just before they are lowered into the trench to be laid, and joints of fittings that
do not conform to these specifications will be rejected and must be removed immediately
by the Contractor. The entire product of any plant may be rejected when, in the opinion
of the Owner's Engineer, the methods of manufacture fail to secure uniform results, or
where the materials used are such as to produce inferior pipe or fittings.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. In general, 6 copies of the following data or shop drawings shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval prior to construction:
a. Precast manholes
b. Manhole frames, covers and other castings
c. Manufacturer's Certified Test Report on castings
d. Mill Test Certificates or certified test reports on polyvinyl chloride
pIpe.
e. Mill Test Certificates on ductile iron pipe
f. Pipe adapters
B. Record Information: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or
right offsets of all services (terminal ends) as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the center line of the sewer, along with the elevations of the north edge of
the manhole covers and inverts of all pipes in the manholes.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1. Ductile iron sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI StandardA21.50,
Class 52, unless specified otherwise on the Drawings or in the General
Requirements. Pipe smaller than 12 inches shall be double cement-lined and
bituminous coated on the inside, and pipe 12 inches and larger shall be
polyethylene lined. Bituminous coating shall be applied to the outside of the
pipe as specified in ANSI Standard 21.51. Joints shall be mechanical or push-on
and conform to ANSI A21.11. Gaskets shall be of neoprene and shall have plain tips
unless otherwise specified.
2. Virgin polyethylene for pipe lining shall comply with ASTM Designation C-418 and
D 1248 and shall be compounded with enough carbon black during manufacture to
resist ultra violet rays during above ground storage. The polyethylene lining
shall be fused in place, approximately 20 mils t.02-inches) in thickness, shall
be tightly adherent to the pipe wall and shall extend from the spigot end to the
gasket seat in the bell socket. The inside surface of the pipe to be lined with
polyethylene shall be thoroughly ground and cleaned of oil, dirt and foreign
matter.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: Plastic gravity sewer pipe and fittings shall be polyvinyl
chloride(pVC) SDR-35 and conform to the requirements ofASTM DesignationD 3034, F794 and
D 1784.
Elastomeric gasket joints shall conform to ASTM Designation F 477. PVC pipe and fittings
shall be as manufactured by Johns-Manville, CertainTeed or approved equal. Standard
laying length shall be 20 feet and 12.5 feet plus/minus 1 inch. The pipe shall be colored
green for inground identification as sewer pipe, in conformance with the utility marking
code.
C. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel: Concrete and reinforcing steel shall conform to the
requirements of Section 03000. Concrete classes for the various purposes shall be as
follows:
1. Manhole bottoms, Class A
2. Precast manholes, Class B minimum
3. Pipe and riser encasement, Class C
02730P-3
60-954.00
4. Protective slabs, Class C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Drop manhole pipe encasement, Class C
D.
Castings: All castings for manhole frames and covers shall be U.S. Foundry and
Manufacturing Corporation # 170 with 165-pound cover, or approved equal. Castings shall
be true to pattern in form and dimensions and free of pouring faults and other defects in
positions which would impair their strength, or otherwise make them unfit for the service
intended. The seating surfaces between frames and covers shall be machined to fit true.
No plugging or filling will be allowed. Two lifting or "pick" holes shall be provided, but
shall not penetrate the cover. Casting patterns shall conform to those shown or indicated
on the drawings. The words "City of Clearwater Sanitary Sewers" with the year of
construction shall be cast in all manhole covers. All manhole frames and covers shall be
traffic bearing unless otherwise specified.
E.
Brick: Brick for manhole construction shall be dense, hard burned, shale or clay brick
conforming to ASTM Designation C 32, Grade MA, except that brick absorption shall be
between five and twenty-five grams of water absorbed in one minute by dried brick, set flat
face down, in lI8-inch of water.
F.
Cement Mortar: Cement mortar for manhole construction shall be two parts Type II Portland
cement and three parts clean sharp sand. It shall be mixed dry and then wetted to proper
consistency for use. No mortars that have stood for more than thirty minutes shall be
used.
G.
Pipe Adapter:
1. Donut pipe adapter shall be manufactured from virgin polyvinyl cWoride (pVe) or
polyurethane adaptable to similar or dissimilar pipes of the same or different
sizes. Donuts shall be as manufactured by Femco Joint Sealer Company, Dickey
Company or approved equal.
2. Flexible couplings shall be manufactured from virgin polyvinyl cWoride (pVe) or
polyurethane adaptable to dissimilar pipes of the same or different sizes. The
flexible coupling shall be as manufactured by Femco Joint Sealer Company, Can- Tex
or approved equal and supplied with #300 stainless steel bands.
02730P-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Flexible manhole sleeves for connecting sewer pipe to precast manholes shall be
of a synthetic rubber compound resistant to ozone, weather, acid and water. The
sleeve shall have a cast-in-place water stop and accommodate settlement up to 15
degrees. The binding of the sleeve to the pipe shall be a non-corrosive,
non-magnetic type 300 stainless steel strap.
H. Coal Tar Epoxy: Coal tar epoxy shall be Koppers BitumasticNo. 300M, Tnemec Tneme- Tar No.
46-413 or approved equal.
PART 3 - CONSTRUCTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Bedding:
1. Pipe Cradle: Upon satisfactory installation of the pipe bedding, as specified in
Section 02221, a continuous trough for the pipe barrel and recesses for the pipe
bells or couplings shall be excavated by hand digging. When the pipe is laid in
the prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall receive
continuous uniform support and no pressure shall be exerted on the pipe joints
from the trench bottom.
2. Cleanliness: The interior of all pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign
material before being lowered in the trench and shall be kept clean during laying
operations by means of plugs, or other approved methods. During suspension of
work for any reason at any time, a suitable stopper shall be placed in the end of
the pipe laid to prevent mud or other foreign material from entering the pipe.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Pipe:
1. Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends pointing in the direction of
flow. Before pipe is joined, gaskets shall be cleaned of all dirt and stones and
other foreign material. The spigot ends of the pipe and/or pipe gaskets shall be
lubricated lightly with a lubricant as specified by the pipe manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer. Sufficient pressure shall be applied to the pipe so as
to properly seat the socket into the bell of the pipe. All pipe shall be laid
straight, true to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings in each manhole
section.
02730P-5
60-954.00
2. Under no circumstances shall pipe be laid in water, and no pipe shall be laid when
trench conditions or the weather is unsuitable for such work, except by permission
of the Owner's Engineer. At all times when work is not in progress, the exposed
ends of all pipes shall be fully protected by a board or other approved stopper to
prevent earth or other substances from entering the pipe.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Any pipe which is disturbed or found to be defective after laying shall be taken
up and relayed or replaced.
4. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe:
a. Transportation: Care shall be taken during transportation of the pipe
that it is not cut, kinked or otherwise damaged.
b. Handling Pipe Lengths: Ropes, fabric or rubber protected slings and
straps shall be used when handling pipes. Chains, cables or hooks
inserted into the pipe ends shall not be used. Two slings spread apart
shall be used for lifting each length of pipe. Pipe or fittings shall not
be dropped onto rocky or unprepared ground.
c. Handling Pipeline: The handling of the joined pipe line shall be in such
a manner that the pipe is not damaged by dragging it over sharp and cutting
objects. Sections of the pipes with deep cuts and gouges shall be removed.
d. Lowering Pipe Into Trench: Care shall be exercised when lowering pipe
into the trench to prevent damage to or twisting of the pipe.
e. Special Precautions: Polyvinyl chloride pipe connected to heavy
fittings, manholes and rigid structures shall be supported in such a
manner that no subsequent relative movement between the pipe and the joint
with the rigid structures is possible.
B.
Service Connections:
1. Service connections, of the type called for on the Drawings, shall be provided in
accordance with the details therefor as shown or indicated on the Drawings.
2. Where called for on the Drawings, sewer pipe of the size and type noted shall be
extended to the street right-of-way line and plugged with an approved removable
plastic plug. All connections and changes of direction shall be made using
standard fittings designed for the purpose.
02730P-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Where deep house connections or shallow connections are called for, but no service
line is to be installed under this contract, all unused branches of such fittings
shall be plugged watertight with a specified plug.
C.
Concrete Encasement:
1. Class C concrete encasement shall be constructed in accordance with details shown
on the Drawings. Encasement shall be constructed where:
a. The sewer or service pipe shall have less than 30 inches of cover between
the top of the pipe and the final top of pavement or ground line.
b. The PVC sewer or service pipe crosses over, or at a depth which provides
less than 18 inches clear distance between pipes when crossing under water
mains. Encasement shall extend a minimum of 1 0 feet on each side of the
point of crossing.
c. The lateral separation of the PVC sewer pipe and potable water piping is
less than 10 feet.
d. The Owner's Engineer shall order the line encased.
2. If, through failure to provide suitable trench sheeting, or other causes, the
maximum width for trench excavations, as specified elsewhere in these
specifications, is exceeded, the Contractor shall construct concrete encasement
around the pipe for the length of the excessive excavation. No payment will be
made for the concrete encasement required due to excessive trench widths.
3. The points of beginning and ending of sewer, or service pipe encasement shall be
not more than 6 inches from a pipe joint to protect the pipe from cracking due to
uneven settlement of its foundation or the effects of superimposed live loads.
02730P-7
60-954.00
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Manholes:
1. Brick Manholes:
a. All brick manholes shall be constructed of brick, concrete and cement
mortar, with cast iron frames and covers in accordance with the details
shown on the Drawings. All brick shall be thoroughly wet before laying up
and shall be laid with a shove joint in full mortar beds and shall be
thorougWy slushed up with mortar at every course. Standard manholes
shall have a depth measured from manhole frame top to lowest invert of not
more than 6 feet. Standard manholes with extra depth shall be over, or in
excess of 6 feet from manhole frame top to lowest invert.
b. Where shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall place stub-outs for
future extensions. Both the manhole and exterior ends of all such
stub-outs shall be closed with watertight plugs removable without damage
to the pipe. One section of pipe 2 feet long shall be laid at each manhole
stub-out.
c. Outside drop connections shall be made in accordance with the details
therefor shown on the Drawings.
d. The invert channels shall be smooth and accurately shaped to a
semicircular bottom conforming to the inside of the adjacent sewer
section. Steep slopes outside the invert channels shall be avoided.
Changes in size and grade shall be made gradually and evenly. Changes in
the direction of the sewer or entering branch shall be a smooth curve with
radius as long as practicable. Invert channels shall also be formed for
pipe stub-outs.
e. All manhole exterior surfaces shall be plastered with 5/8-inch thickness
of cement mortar. The manhole exterior surface shall be coated with two
applications of coal tar epoxy (15 mils dry total thickness). The cement
mortar shall be permitted to cure not less than 3 days before application
of the coating. All drop manholes shall have the inside surfaces coated
as specified herein for precast manholes.
f. Frames and covers shall be set accurately to grade to conform to the
finished grade ofthe adjacent areas.
g. Manholes shall be completed as the work progresses so that testing as
prescribed in Article 3.03 may be completed.
02730P-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Precast Concrete Manholes:
a. Precast concrete manholes may only be used in lieu of brick manholes when
the following conditions are satisfied:
(1) Details and shop drawings of the manholes, proposed to be
furnished for this work, are submitted to and approved by the
Engineer prior to the manufacture of the units. Manholes which
are not manufactured in strict compliance with the approved shop
drawings and these specifications will be rejected.
(2) The design and manufacture of the manholes and special pipe
construction at manholes shall conform to these specifications.
(3) Manhole excavation, bedding and pipe trench excavation and
bedding at manhole junctions shall be performed in accordance
with the provisions of Section 02221.
b. Precast manholes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation C
478 with the following modifications thereto:
(1) The minimum shell thickness shall be 6 inches for manholes up to
12 feet in depth, and 8 inches for manholes over 12 feet in depth.
(2) Cement to be used in precast manholes shall be Type II, 4,000 PSI.
(3) Joints shall be a rubber gasket to provide a watertight joint
between whose sections of vertically installed manholes. The
section joint and gasket shall conform to ASTM Designation C 433,
for concrete sewer pipe.
(4) Lifting holes through the structures are not permitted.
(5) The design of the structure shall include a precast base of not
less than 8 inches in thickness for manholes up to 12 feet in
depth, and 12 inches in thickness for manholes over 12 feet in
depth, poured monolithically with the bottom section of the
manhole walls.
(6) All grout used for sealing around pipe opening shall be of a type
acceptable to the Owner's Engineer and designed for use in water.
All openings and joints shall be sealed watertight.
02730P-9
60-954.00
(7) Precast manhole tops, if used, shall terminate at such elevations
as will permit laying up brick courses under the manhole frame to
make allowance for future street grade adjustments.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(8) Drop connections, where required on precast manholes, shall be
manufactured with the manhole elements at the casting yard. The
manufacturer shall submit for approval the method of drop manhole
construction.
c. The interior and exterior surfaces shall be coated with two applications
of coal tar epoxy applied as recommended by the coating manufacturer to
form a 15 mil dry film thickness.
d. The invert channels shall be smooth and accurately shaped to a semi-
circular bottom conforming to the inside of the adjacent sewer section.
Step slopes outside the invert channels shall be avoided. Changes in size
and grade shall be made gradually and evenly. Changes in the direction of
the sewer or entering branch shall be a smooth curve with radius as long
as practicable. Invert channels shall also be formed for pipe stub-outs.
E.
Connections To Existing Structures And Sewers:
1. Various sewer lines shall be connected to existing manholes and structures.
Provisions have been made in some of the existing structures for future
connections and may require only the removal of a plug and the connection of the
proposed line, while other connections will require cutting into the existing
structure. The Contractor shall exercise care in cutting into the existing
structure and any damage done to the structure shall be repaired as required by the
Engineer and at the Contractor's expense. Drop connections to existing manholes
shall be installed as detailed on the Drawings for new construction.
2. The drop connection for existing Manhole shall be constructed ofSDR 35 polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) pipe. Anchor straps shall be not less than 3/16 inches by 1-1/2
inches and constructed of ANSI 304 stainless steel. Wall anchor bolts shall not
be less than 5/8 inch and constructed of corrosion resistant metal. The
Contractor shall provide an approved adapter for the connection between the PVC
fitting and clay pipe.
F.
Additional Work: Additional items of construction such as clean outs, terminal lamp holes,
special manholes and other items necessary for the complete installation of the system
shall conform to specific details on the Drawings and shall be constructed of first-class
materials conforming to the applicable portions of these specifications.
02730P-I0
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests, Inspections and Acceptance of Materials and Workmanship:
1. Workmanship: It is imperative that all sewers and appurtenances be built
practically watertight and that the Contractor adhere rigidly to the
specifications for materials and workmanship. All of the sewage must be pumped
for disposal and special care and attention must be paid to securing watertight
construction. Upon completion, the sewers, or sections thereof, will be tested
and gauged and ifleakage is above the allowable limits specified, the sewer will
be rejected.
2. Inspection:
a. On completion of each block or section of sewer, or such other times as the
Engineer may direct, the block or section of sewer shall be cleaned,
tested and inspected. Each section of the sewer shall be TV -Camera
inspected and shall show, on examination from either end, a full circle of
light between manholes.
b. Each manhole or other appurtenance to the system shall be of the specified
size and form, be watertight, neatly and substantially constructed, with
the top set permanently to exact position and grade. All repairs shown
necessary by the inspection shall be made; broken or cracked pipe
replaced; all deposits removed and the sewer left true to line and grade,
entirely clean, and ready for use.
02730P-ll
60-954.00
3.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Television Tape Report:
a. Standard VHS format in color with data view (accurate footage displayed
on video)
b. All pertinent data will be recorded in audio on the tape and will include:
1. Subdivision name and phase number.
2. Manhole numbers (these numbers must match manhole numbers on "as
built" drawings).
3. Date.
4. Size and material of pipe.
5. Service connection locations, right or left.
6. All distances between manholes.
7. Locations of suspected and obvious pipe deficiencies (i.e., bad
joints, breaks or leaks, etc.).
c. PVC pipe shall have a deflection test using a 7-1/2% (go no go) test
mandrel of appropriate size which shall be visible on video at all times.
d. The contractor will also provide a written television report (indicating
manhole numbers) which will accompany the video tape. This written report
must include:
1. Manhole numbers (these numbers must match manhole numbers on "as
built" drawings).
2. Service connection locations, right or left.
3. Reference to service connection locations out of manholes.
4. Locations of suspected and obvious pipe deficiencies (i.e., bad
joints, breaks, or leaks, etc.).
5. Depth of each manhole.
6. Actual measured distance (on ground) between manholes.
02730P-12
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Television tapes must clearly show details of structural defects, mis-
alignments and infiltration.
f. All repairs shown as necessary by the TV inspection shall be performed by
the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. All known or indicated
breaks and faulty sections of sewer lines or manholes rejected by the
Engineer shall be removed and relaid by the Contractor. Sunken manholes
will not be accepted.
4. All visual and television inspections shall be completed and approved by the Sewer
System prior to the placing of any asphalt.
B.
Limits Of Infiltration, Exfiltration And Testing:
1. The allowable limits of infiltration or exfiltration or leakage for the entire
system or any portion thereof, including house service lines, shall not exceed a
rate of 50 gallons per mile of pipe per 24 hours per inch or nominal pipe diameter.
The allowable limits of infiltration or exfiltration of manholes shall not exceed
a rate of four gallons per manhole per 24 hours.
2. Infiltration, if taken between any two adjacent manholes, shall not exceed 0.1
gallon per 24 hours per foot of sewer for all sizes and all locations. This
testing oflines between adjacent manholes will not be required except to localize
the position of a leak in a portion of the system that exceeds the allowable
leakage limit, or as directed by the Owner's Engineer.
3. Any part or all of the system may be tested for infiltration or exfiltration, as
directed by the Owner's Engineer. Prior to testing for infiltration, the system
shall be pumped out so that normal infiltration conditions exist at the time of
testing. The amounts of infiltration or exfiltration shall be determined by
pumping into or out of calibrated drums, or by other approved methods.
4. The exfiltration test will be conducted by filling the portion of the system being
tested with water to a level which will provide: a minimum head on a service
lateral connected to the test portion of 3 feet; or in the event there are no
service laterals in the test portion, a minimum difference in elevation of 5 feet
between the crown of the highest portion of the sewer and the test level.
5. Tests shall be conducted on portions of the system not exceeding three manhole
runs or more than 1,000 feet of main sewer, or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Tests shall be run continuously for three hours. Where infiltration
or exfiltration exceeds the allowable limits also specified herein, the defective
pipe, joints, or other faulty construction shall be located and repaired by the
02730P-13
60-954.00
Contractor. If the defective portions cannot be located, the Contractor shall
remove and reconstruct as much of the work as is necessary in order to conform to
the specified allowable limits. Testing shall be performed as the job progresses
and shall be started after 2,000 feet of pipe are laid.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.
The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials and shall conduct
all testing required, under the direction of the Engineer. No separate payment
will be made for this work and the cost for this work shall be included in the unit
price quoted in the proposal for the applicable item of work.
END OF SECTION
02730P-14
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02934
SOLID SODDING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work specified in this section consists of the establishing of a stand of grass,
within the areas indicated on the Drawings, by the furnishing and placing of grass
sod, fertilizing, watering and maintaining the sodded areas to assure a healthy stand
of grass.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. A certification of sod quality by the producer shall be delivered to the Engineer ten
(10) days prior to use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GRASS SOD
A. Grass sod shall be either Centipede, Bahia grass, St. Augustine or Bitter Blue and
shall be well matted with grass roots. The sod shall be taken up in rectangles,
preferably 12-inch by 24-inch, shall be a minimum of 2-inches in thickness and
shall be live, fresh and uninjured at the time of planting. It shall be reasonably free
of weeds and other grasses and shall have a soil mat of sufficient thickness adhering
firmly to the roots to withstand all necessary handling. The sod shall be planted
as soon as possible after being dug and shall be shaded and kept moist until it is
planted.
2.02 FERTILIZER
A. Commercial fertilizers shall comply with the state fertilizer laws.
B. The numerical designations for fertilizer indicate the minimum percentages
(respectively) of (1) total nitrogen, (2) available phosphoric acid and (3)
water-soluble potash contained in the fertilizer.
02934-1
60-954.00
02934-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. The chemical designation of the fertilizer shall be 12-8-8. At least 50 percent of
the phosphoric acid shall be from normal super phosphate or an equivalent source
which will provide a minimum of two units of sulfur. The amount of sulfur shall
be indicated on the quantitative analysis card attached to each bag or other
container.
2.03 WATER FOR GRASSING
A. The water used in the sodding operations may be obtained from any approved
spring, pond, lake, stream or municipal water system. The water shall be free of
excess and harmful chemicals, acids, alkalies, or any substance which might be
harmful to plant growth or obnoxious to traffic. Salt water shall not be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF GROUND
A. The area over which the sod is to be placed shall be scarified or loosened to a
suitable depth and then raked smooth and free from rocks or stones. Where the soil
is sufficiently loose, the Engineer, at his discretion, may authorize the elimination
of ground preparation.
3.02 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER
A. Before applying fertilizer, the soil pH shall be brought to a minimum range of 6.0
- 7.0.
B. The fertilizer shall be spread uniformly over the area to be sodded at the rate of
400-500 pounds per acre, by a spreading device capable of uniformly distributing
the material at the specified rate. Immediately after spreading, the fertilizer shall
be mixed with the soil to a depth of approximately 4-inches.
C. On steep slopes, where the use of a machine for spreading or mixing is not
practicable, the fertilizer shall be spread by hand and raked in and thoroughly
mixed with the soil to a depth of approximately 2 inches.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03
3.04
3.05
PLACING SOD
A. The sod shall be placed on the prepared surface, with edges in close contact and
shall be firmly and smoothly embedded by light tamping with appropriate tools.
B. Where sodding is used in drainage ditches, the setting of the pieces shall be
staggered so as to avoid a continuous seam along the line of flow. Along the edges
of such staggered areas, the offsets of individual strips shall not exceed 6 inches.
In order to prevent erosion caused by vertical edges at the outer limits, the outer
pieces of sod shall be tamped so as to produce a featheredge effect.
C. On steep slopes, the Contractor shall, if so directed by the Engineer, prevent the
sod from sliding by means of wooden pegs driven through the sod blocks into firm
earth, at suitable intervals.
D. Sod which has been cut for more than 72 hours shall not be used unless specifically
authorized by the Engineer after his inspection thereof. Sod which is not planted
within 24 hours after cutting shall be stacked in an approved manner and
maintained and properly moistened. Any pieces of sod which, after placing, show
an appearance of extreme dryness shall be removed and replaced by fresh,
uninjured pieces.
E. Sodding shall not be performed when weather and soil conditions are, in the
Engineer's opinion, unsuitable for proper results.
WATERING
A. The areas on which the sod is to be placed shall contain sufficient moisture, as
determined by the Engineer, for optimum results. After being placed, the sod shall
be kept in a moist condition to the full depth of the rooting zone for at least 2
weeks. Thereafter, the Contractor shall apply water as needed until the sod roots
and starts to grow for a minimum of 60 days (or until final acceptance, whichever
is latest).
MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall, at his expense, maintain the sodded areas in a satisfactory
condition until final acceptance of the project. Such maintenance shall include
repairing of any damaged areas and replacing areas in which the establishment of
the grass stand does not appear to be developing satisfactorily.
02934-3
60-954.00
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Replanting or repair necessary due to the Contractor's negligence, carelessness or
failure to provide routine maintenance shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Replanting necessary due to factors determined to be beyond the control of the
Contractor shall be paid for under the appropriate contract pay items.
END OF SECTION
02934-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03000
CONCRETE
(Site Work)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included under this section consists of furnishing all materials, forms,
transportation and equipment, and performing all necessary labor to do all the plain
and reinforced concrete work shown on the Drawings, or incidental to the proper
execution of the work, or as herein specified.
B. Composition: Concrete shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse
aggregate, and water, so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic workable
mixture in accordance with all requirements under this section suitable to the
specific conditions of placement.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. All materials specified shall be certified by the producer or manufacturer that the
furnished material meets the specific requirements of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement:
1. Cement: Cement for all concrete shall be domestic Portland cement that
conforms to the requirements of ASTM Designation C 150, Type I, Type
II or Type ill. Type ill cement for high early strength concrete shall be
used only for special locations and only with the approval of the Engineer.
Type II cement shall be used in the construction of sanitary sewer
manholes, wet wells and pump stations.
03000-1
60-954.00
H.
1.
2. Only one brand of cement shall be used in any individual structure unless
approved by the Engineer. Cement which has become damaged, partially
set, lumpy or caked shall not be used and the entire contents of the sack or
container which contains such cement will be rejected. No salvaged or
reclaimed cement shall be used.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of Section 902
of the Florida Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction", latest edition and supplements thereto.
C.
Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of Section
901 of the Florida Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction", latest edition and supplements thereto, except that slag
shall not be used and the gradation shall be grade 5 or grade 9 as approved by the
Owner's Engineer.
D.
Water: Water shall be taken from a potable water supply and shall be fresh, clean
and free from injurious amount~ of oil, acid, alkali or organic matter.
E.
Admixtures: No admixtures shall be used except by specific approval of the
Owner's Engineer.
F.
Membrane Curing Compound: Membrane curing compound shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO Designation M 148, Type I-clear, or Type 2-white
pigmented.
G.
Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Preformed expansion joint filler shall be of the non-extruding and resilient
bituminous type and conform to the requirements of AASHTO Designation
M 213 or AASHTO Designation M 153.
2. Expansion joint filler shall be gray neoprene sponge rubber that conforms
to AASHTO Designation M 153, Type 1.
Separation Board: Separation board shall be closed cell, non-extruding, PVC foam
Grade #327 as manufactured by AC Horn, Inc., with a 20 psi maximum
compressive strength to compress to 75% of thickness.
Membrane: Membrane shall be a 6 mil polyethylene film.
03000-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
Reinforcing Steel:
1. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation
A 615, Deformed Grade 60, except where otherwise indicated.
a. The name of the manufacturer of the reinforcing steel shall be called
out in the shop drawings together with a sketch showing the pattern
of the deformation, including the mill mark.
b. Bar reinforcement shall be accurately fabricated in accordance with
the latest CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. The Contractor shall
have prepared and shall submit to the Engineer in sextuplet,
necessary shop drawings and bar lists. The Contractor shall be
responsible for errors made in shop drawings even though approved
by the Engineer.
2.
Welded wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM Designation A 185 and shall be formed with smooth
cold-drawn wire.
3.
Cold-drawn wire for spirals shall be plain and shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM Designation A 82 with a minimum yield strength of
70,000 psi.
4.
Bar Supports:
a. Bar supports for reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements
of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Chapter 3 and shall be of a
height to furnish the concrete cover called for on Drawings. High
chairs shall be furnished for bent or top bars in solid slabs. Bar
supports to be in contact with exterior surfaces of concrete shall be
Class C with plastic caps at least I-inch in length on the leg tips, or
Class E with stainless steel legs . Bar supports shall be spaced not
more than 100 times the diameter of the bars to be supported, with
not more than 1/4 spacing from the end of the supported bars to the
first chair.
b. Bar supports for slabs on grade shall be plain concrete blocks, 3
inches high by 4 inches square with tie wires embedded in support.
Concrete strength shall be at 3,000 psi at time of use.
03000- 3
60-954.00
K. Forms: Forms shall be of wood, steel or other approved materials. The sheeting
for all exposed surfaces shall be 5-ply plywood, unless otherwise specifically
authorized. Forms of like character shall be used for similarly exposed surfaces
in order to produce a uniform appearance. Forming for exposed exterior concrete
from I-foot below finished exterior grade to top of structure shall be carefully
fabricated so as to provide a smooth finish without defects. The type, size, shape,
quality and strength of all materials of which the forms are made shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer. If it is his opinion that the interior surfaces of the
forms are too irregular to produce the specified finish, they shall be lined with
smooth, dense, moisture resistant hardboard or other material of which he
approves.
L. Non-shrink Grout: Non-shrink grout shall be nonmetallic, pre-mixed type and shall
be Sauereisen F-100 Level Fill, Master Builders Masterflow 713, Burke
N on-Ferrous, Non-Shrink Grout or approved equal.
2.02
CLASSIFICATION AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
A. Class and minimum strength requirements for concrete shall be as tabulated below.
Unless otherwise specified, Class B concrete shall be used.
B. Strength Requirements: Concrete class and strength shall meet the minimum
compressive strength requirements at the age of 7 and 28 days as shown in the
following table. The compressive strengths shall be as determined by standard
laboratory cylinder tests in accordance with the procedure set forth in ASTM
Designation C 31 and C 39. (See Article 3.03 of this Section for quantity and
testing of cylinders.)
Com,pressive Strength In Pounds Per Square Inch
.class
For Design
Purposes
3 Consecutive
Cylinder Average
7 days 28 days
Low
Cy linder
7 days 28 days
A
B
C
4000
3000
2500
2950
2100
1800
4250
3200
2700
2600
1850
1550
3750
2800
2300
03000-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.03 PROPERTIES AND DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIX
A. Tests And Design Mix:
1. The Contractor, 30 days before the beginning of concrete work, shall advise
the Owner's Engineer of the proposed sources of the materials, or
ready-mixed concrete, which the Contractor intends to use in the work. A
design mix which has been used by the concrete supplier before, may be
submitted for approval provided the proportions and strengths meet the
requirements of this specification.
2. The source and manufacturer of material after once having been approved
shall not be changed by the Contractor, except as approved by the
Engineer, and additional laboratory tests may be required by the Engineer
to prove conformance with specification requirements.
3. If during the progress of the work, tests indicate that concrete is not being
produced in accordance with these Specifications, the Engineer may order
changes in the materials or their proportions so as to secure concrete as
specified.
B. Slump: Slumps shall be as low as possible consistent with proper placing. Low
slump concrete shall be used for footing and slabs on grade. Medium slump
concrete shall be used for walls, columns and suspended slabs. Concrete shall
conform to the limits specified in the following schedule:
Class of Medium Low
Concrete Slump Slump
A 4 to 5 in. 2 to 3 in.
B 4 to 5 in. 2 to 3 in.
C 5 to 6 in. 3 to 4 in.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Concrete Mixing:
1. Equipment: The concrete shall be ready-mixed and the equipment shall
conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM Designation C 94.
03000-5
60-954.00
03000-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Measurement: Equipment necessary to positively determine and control the
actual amounts of all materials entering the concrete shall be provided by
the Contractor or the concrete manufacturer. All materials shall be
measured by weight, except that water may be measured by volume. A bag
of cement weighs 94 pounds.
3.02
INST ALLA TION
A. Forms:
1. Construction:
a. Forms shall be built true to line and grade, and shall be mortar tight
and sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement or sagging between
supports. Particular attention shall be given to adequacy of supports
and shoring, which is the Contractor's responsibility. The surfaces
of forms used for permanently exposed surfaces shall be smooth and
free from irregularities, dents, sags, or holes. Forms for surfaces
to receive stucco finish shall be suitable for its application. Bolts
and rods used for internal ties shall be so arranged that, when the
forms are removed, all metal is at least 1-1/2 inches from any
concrete surface. Form ties shall be removed immediately after
removal of forms, and holes shall be thoroughly plugged with grout
within 24 hours after form removal and kept damp for 4 days to
preven,t shrinking.
b. Wire ties will notbe permitted. All forms shall be so constructed
that they can be removed without hammering or prying against the
concrete. Unless otherwise indicated, suitable moldings shall be
placed to bevel or round exposed edges at expansion joints or at any
other corners that are to remain. Beams below grade shall have
forms at both sides.
2. Coating: Prior to the placing of steel reinforcement or concrete, forms for
exposed surfaces shall be coated with a nonstaining paraffin base oil or
mineral oil. Forms for unexposed surfaces may be thoroughly wetted in
lieu of oiling, immediately before the placing of concrete.
3. Removal: Forms and/or form supports shall not be removed from any
concrete until it has obtained sufficient strength to support itself and any
live loads it may be subjected to, and then only with the approval of the
Engineer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Reinforcing Steel: When placed in the forms, reinforcement shall be clean and free
of all rust, scale, dust, dirt, paint, oil or other foreign material and shall be
accurately and securely positioned in the forms as shown on the Drawings before
the placing of concrete. Reinforcing steel shall be wired or otherwise fastened
together at intersections and shall be supported by concrete or metal supports,
spacers or hangers. Bar supports, where adjacent to the ground, shall be set on
pre-cast concrete pads compressed into the subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain
the Engineer's approval before fastening reinforcing steel at intersections by
welding methods.
1. Splicing of reinforcement shall be held to a minimum and shall be placed
at points of minimum stress. Bars shall be lapped at splices a minimum of
24 bar diameters unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed by
the Engineer, and shall be rigidly wired or clamped.
2. Wire fabric shall be straightened before placing and shall overlap one full
space of mesh at ends and edges and shall be securely fastened. Fabric
shall be supported so as to occupy its proper location in the concrete as
shown on the Drawings. Fabric shall not cross any expansion joints.
C.
Embedded Items: In addition to steel reinforcement, pipes, inserts and other metal
objects as shown, specified or ordered shall be built into, set in or attached to the
concrete. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent these objects from
being displaced, broken or deformed. Before concrete is placed, care shall be
taken to determine that all embedded parts are firmly and securely fastened in place
as indicated. They shall be thoroughly clean and free from paint or other coating,
rust, scale, oil, or any foreign matter. No wood shall be embedded in concrete.
The concrete shall be packed tightly around pipes and other metal work to prevent
leakage and to secure perfect adhesion. Drains shall be adequately protected from
intrusion of concrete.
D.
Concrete:
1. General: Reinforcement shall be secured in position, inspected and
approved before placing concrete. Runways for transporting concrete shall
not rest on reinforcing steel. Concrete not placed within 90 minutes from
the time mixing is started will be rejected and shall be removed from the
job by the Contractor. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable
in final position. Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely more than six
feet. All concrete shall be placed in daylight and (excepting seal concrete)
shall be placed in the dry unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer in
writing.
03000- 7
60-954.00
2. Slabs Placed On Subgrade: Slab concrete placed on earth or fill subgrade
shall be separated from direct contact with the sub grade by 6 mil
polyethylene film or other approved material. Sidewalks and walkways will
not require a separation sheet. Polyethylene film shall be lapped 4 inches
on sides and 12 inches on ends.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Compaction: Concrete shall be compacted by internal vibrating equipment,
supplemented by hand rodding and tamping as required. Vibrators shall in
no case be used to move the concrete laterally inside the forms. Internal
vibrators shall maintain a speed of at least 5000 impulses per minute when
submerged in concrete. (At least one spare vibrator in working condition
shall be maintained at the site during concrete placing operations.)
Duration of vibration shall be limited to time necessary to produce
satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation. Vibrator shall be
moved constantly and placed in each specific spot only once.
4. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has
set, the surfaces of the set concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned so as to
expose the coarse aggregate and be free of laitance, coatings, foreign matter
and loose particles. Forms shall be retightened. The cleaned surfaces shall
be dampened, but not saturated, and then thoroughly covered with a coat
of cement grout of similar proportions to the mortar in the concrete. The
grout shall be as thick as possible on vertical surfaces and at least 1/2 inch
thick on horizontal surfaces. The fresh concrete shall be placed before the
grout has attained its initial set.
5. Protection: Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the ratio of mixing
water nor to damage the surface finish. Concrete shall be protected from
disfigurement, damage, vibration, internal fractures and construction
overloads.
E.
Curing:
1. All concrete, including gunite, shall be water cured by covering with a
double thickness of clean burlap, cotton mats, or' other approved material
kept thoroughly saturated with water. The forms shall be kept wet until
removed and upon removal, the curing specified herein shall be started
immediately. Concrete shall be cured for a period of 7 days for normal
Portland cement or 4 days for high early strength cement. Concrete poured
in the dry shall not be submerged until it has attained sufficient strength to
adequately sustain the stress involved nor shall it be subjected to flowing
water across its surface until it has cured 4 days. Curing of gunite shall be
03000-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
started as soon as possible without damaging surface and not later than 2
hours after placing.
2. In lieu of wet burlap or cotton mats as specified above, concrete slabs may
be covered with wet sand and kept moist for the specified curing period.
The initial curing period of not less than 24 hours shall consist of the wet
burlap or cotton mat method, then the wet sand method may be utilized
until the end of the curing period.
3. Concrete surfaces which will not be coated, painted, plastered, stuccoed,
covered with tile or floor covering or requiring a bonding surface may be
cured by means of a membrane curing compound in lieu of the wet cure
method. The curing compound shall be applied immediately after a
satisfactory surface finish has been completed or forms have been removed.
The rate of application of membrane curing compound shall be at least one
gallon to every 200 square feet of exposed surface to be cured. The
membrane curing compound and impervious covering shall be continuous
and without defects and shall retain the required moisture in the concrete.
Membrane curing compound that becomes damaged by rain, foot traffic or
other conditions within 5 days of application shall be re-applied.
F.
Finishes:
1. As soon as forms can safely be removed, all irregular projections shall be
chipped off flush with the concrete surfaces. All voids produced by spacers
or any honeycombing shall be pointed up with grout and troweled flush
with the concrete surface immediately after removal of forms and water
cured to prevent shrinkage. Honeycombing shall be cut out to expose a
sound concrete surface prior to pointing. The use of mortar pointing or
patching shall be confmed to the repair of small defects in relatively green
concrete. Where in the opinion of the Engineer substantial repairs are
required, the defective concrete shall be cut out to sound concrete and
repaired with gunite or the concrete shall be removed and reconstructed as
directed.
2. Floor slabs shall be brought to a true and even finish by power or hand
floating in a manner that will not bring excess fines to the surface. The
consistency of the concrete shall be such that water does not accumulate at
the surface. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the surface shall be
floated with a wood float and shall be steel troweled to a smooth finish.
Troweling shall be the minimum to obtain a smooth, dense surface and shall
not be done until the mortar has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess [me
03000-9
60-954.00
03000-10
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I i
I
material from being worked to the surface. If so directed, the surface shall
be brushed lightly with a push broom so as to produce a nonslip surface.
3. Concrete surfaces that are not exposed in the completed work will require
no special finish other than such pointing up and rubbing as is necessary to
leave them smooth and impervious.
4. Other surfaces which will be exposed in the completed work shall be
finished by being rubbed smooth with a float and water or a Carborundum
brick. The final surface shall be smooth and dense, without pits,
irregularities, blow holes or bubbles.
G. Grout:
1. Grout for pointing and patching shall consist of cement and fine aggregate
mixed in the proportions used in the concrete and a minimum amount of
water to produce a workable grout.
2. Material for grouting column base plates, anchor bolts, reinforcing bars,
pipe sleeves and pump base plates shall be of the non-shrink type and shall
be mixed and placed as recommended by the manufacturer. Machinery set
on grout pads shall not be operated until the grout has cured for at least 24
hours.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: The quality of the concrete as to conformance to the specifications is the
entire responsibility of the Contractor until it is accepted in place in the structure
and verified by the final cylinder tests made by the laboratory. Arrangements for
field testing shall be made by the Contractor with the laboratory as selected by the
Owner. All testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Compressive Tests: Standard laboratory compressive test cylinders will be
obtained by the laboratory when concrete is discharged from the mixer at the site
of the work. A set of 6 cylinders will be obtained for each 60 cubic yards or
fraction thereof placed each day, for each type of concrete. The cylinders will be
cured under laboratory conditions and will be tested in two groups of three at 7 and
28 days of age, respectively.
C. Slump Tests: The laboratory of the Owner or their representative will make slump
tests of Class A and Class B concrete as it is discharged from the mixer at the site
of the work. Slump tests will be made for each 25 cubic yards or "pour" of
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
concrete placed. Slump tests may be made on any batch and failure to meet
specified slump requirements will be sufficient cause for rejection of that batch.
D.
Reports: Proper reports of all tests performed by the laboratory will be prepared
by the laboratory and submitted promptly to the Engineer. Such reports shall be
properly labeled so as to identify the portions of the project into which the
materials have been placed, and the results of the test indicating whether or not the
test met the requirements of these specifications.
END OF SECTION
03000-11
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide formwork for cast-in-place concrete.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement
B. Section 03250, Concrete Accessories
C. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
I. Standard Building Code.
2. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
3. Local codes and regulations.
B. Contractor's Responsibility: For design of the formwork and for safety in its construction,
use and removal.
C. Tolerances: Construct formwork to insure that finished concrete surfaces will be in
accordance with the tolerances listed in ACI 347. Provide camber as necessary to
compensate for anticipated deflection in formwork and concrete due to weight and pressure
of fresh concrete and other construction loads.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, product data and other manufacturer's literature
on form ties, spreaders, comer formers, form coatings and bond breakers.
03100-1
60-954.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Douglas Fir or Larch, No.2 grade, seasoned and surfaced on four sides.
B. Plywood: Plyform, Class 1, BB-Exterior type, mill oiled and edge sealed, with thickness not
less than 3/4-inch.
C. Medium Density Overlay (MDO) Plywood Forms: PS-l, B-B High Density Concrete Form
Overlay, Class I, unoiled.
1. Butt form panels, make contact surface fully flush and seal butting holes with sponge
form tape. Chamfer edges of beams and ceilings.
2. Where MDO plywood is used to form beams, use no piece ofMDO plywood that has
been patched or damaged.
D. Drip Forms: Varnished ponderosapine or equally rigid non-staining plastic, 1/2 inch wide
on each leg.
E. Steel Forms: Uncoated steel, 3/16 inch minimum thickness, fabricated to close tolerances,
protected only by the specified release agent, braced so as not to bend, dent or dimple under
wet concrete loads, vibrator impact, and tool impact. Maintain steel forms in rust-free
condition by use of steel wool and light grinding, followed by coats of specified release
agent. Use forms that can be adjusted into true alignment without stops or ridges.
F. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Forms: Smooth coated forms, braced so as not to bend,
dent or dimple under wet concrete loads, vibrator impact and tool impact, and at least 0.11
inch thick. Design forms for external bracing at piers and columns, without use of form ties.
G. Plugged Cone Form Ties: Rod type, with ends or end fasteners which can be removed
without spalling the concrete and which leave a hole equal in depth to the required
reinforcement clearance. Form ties shall be of a design in which the hole left by the removed
end or end fastener is easily filled to match the surface of the hardened concrete. Provide
removable cones 1 1/4 inches in diameter by 1 1/2 inches deep. Provide preformed mortar
plugs to match the color of the concrete, recessed 1/4 inch, adhered with an approved two
part epoxy.
H. Weep Hole Forms: PVC, polyethylene, or ABS pipe, matching color of the concrete, 4 inch
inside diameter, with outlet projecting 1 1/2 inches from wall and cutoff in a plane parallel
to it.
03100-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Circular and Elliptical Column Forms: Fabricate of two pieces, clamped watertight using
gaskets and without horizontal joints. Install horizontal construction joints only where
indicated or as directed by the Engineer.
J. Beam Forms: Provide in one length without form joints and suitable for cambering up to
1/160 of span without distortion of profile or opening of seams.
K. Forms for Hammerhead Pier Caps: Provide in one length with adjustable soffits, bulkheads
and screeds as necessary to accommodate different hammerhead beam configurations.
Provide no construction joints in hammerhead pier caps. Where three or fewer identical
hammerhead pier caps occur within a line section, steel braced lIDO plywood forms may be
substituted for steel forms if:
1. Working drawings of formwork are submitted.
2. Internal form ties are regularly spaced no less than 48 inches each way, and are made
watertight.
3. Form ties have removable cones, which are filled to match concrete.
4. Joints in panels are fully watertight.
5. The resulting surface matches the appearance of steel formed hammerhead caps, with
no visible discoloration due to form leakage.
L. Styroform Board: Expanded polystyrene extruded into board form, closed cell, moisture
resistant, capable of maintaining indicated clear space between concrete structures.
M. Control Joint Filler: Use epoxy joint filler equal to BurkEpoxy Joint Filler to fill voids left
by saw cuts and to resist against spalling caused by vehicle traffic in concrete slabs.
N. Inserts: Galvanized cast steel or galvanized welded steel, complete with anchors to concrete
and fittings such as bolts, wedges and straps. Provide hanger inserts spaced to match grid
of suspended ceilings.
O. Shoring: As designed and executed by Contractor to support all loads.
P. Chamfer Strips: Polyvinyl strips designed to be nailed in the forms to provide a 3/4-inch
chamfer at exposed edges of concrete members.
Q. Form Release Agent: A blend of natural and synthetic chemicals that employs a chemical
reaction to provide quick, easy and clean release of concrete from forms, and equal to
03100-3
60-954.00
Eucoslip, by the Euclid Chemical Company, or Release #1, by The Burke Company. Use
a non-staining release agent that leaves the concrete with a paintable surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DESIGN
A. Contractor's Responsibility: The design, engineering, and construction of the formwork.
B. Design watertight formwork in accordance with ACI 347 Chapter 1, to withstand the
pressure resulting from the placement and vibration of the concrete, and which is sufficiently
hard and rigid to resist indentation and scratching while maintaining tolerances, and with
maximum deflection between form supports of 1/240 span length.
3.02 INSTALLATION/ERECTION
A. Construction Of Formwork: Construct forms sufficiently strong to withstand the pressure
resulting from the placement and vibration of concrete, sufficiently rigid to maintain
specified tolerances, and sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar. Brace forms against
lateral, upward or downward movement.
B. Form Facing Materials: Use form facing materials that produce a hard uniform texture on
the concrete. Do not use facing materials with raised grain, tom surfaces, worn edges,
patches, dents or other defects. Use facing materials with maximum deflection, as reflected
in concrete surfaces not in excess of 1/240 of the span between structural members. Prevent
formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects of finished concrete.
C. Preparation Of Form Surfaces: After each use and prior to placing reinforcing, clean forms
of mortar, grout and other foreign material and apply the form release agent. Do not allow
the form release agent to stand in puddles in the forms, to come in contact with hardened
concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed, or with reinforcing steel and items to
be embedded. Reuse only forms which maintain a uniform surface texture on exposed
concrete surfaces. Apply light sanding between uses to obtain such uniform texture. Plug
unused tie rod holes with corks, shave flush and sandpaper on the concrete surface side.
D. Adjustment: Provide positive means of adjustment of shores and struts to take up all
settlement during concrete placing.
E. Temporary Openings: Provide temporary openings in wall forms to limit the free fall of
concrete to a maximum of 6-feet unless an elephant trunk is used. Locate such openings to
facilitate placing and consolidation, and space no more than 8-feet apart. Provide temporary
03100-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
openings in the bottom of wall and column forms and elsewhere as necessary to facilitate
cleaning and observation immediately prior to placing.
F. Construction Joints: At construction j oints, overlap the contact surfaces of the form sheathing
over the hardened concrete by not more than I-inch. Hold forms against the hardened
concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar.
G. Chamfers: Provide chamfers where indicated on the Drawings.
H. Do not embed any form-tying device or part thereof other than metal in concrete.
1. Form all surfaces of concrete members except where placing concrete against ground.
Dimensions of concrete members shown on Drawings apply to formed surfaces, except
where otherwise indicated. Add at least 2 inches of concrete where concrete is placed against
trimmed undisturbed ground in lieu of forms. Limit placement of concrete against ground
to footings and then only where ground can be trimmed to required lines and will stand
securely without caving or sloughing.
J. Runways: Provide smooth and rigid runways (if needed) for moving equipment and
concrete. Support runways directly on formwork or on grade and in no case on reinforcing
steel or bar supports.
K. Form Removal:
1. Remove formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams and other parts not supporting
the weight of the concrete only after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist
damage from removal operations. Remove forms and shoring supporting the weight
of concrete in beams, slabs and other members only after the concrete has attained
its specified 28 day compressive strength. After last concrete is placed, do not
remove forms, shoring and wall bracing before the following minimum periods:
a. Sides of footings and encasements: 24 hours.
b. Walls not supporting load: 48 hours.
c. Vertical sides of beams, girders and similar members: 48 hours.
d. Slabs, beams and girders: 10 days (forms only).
e. Shoring for slabs, beams and girders: When concrete reaches specified 28
day strength.
f. Wall bracing: When top or roof slab concrete reaches 2500 psi.
03100-5
60-954.00
2. Do not remove forms from concrete placed when outside air temperature is below
50 of without first determining if concrete has properly set without regard to time.
Do not apply heavy loading on green concrete.
L. Embedded Items: Set anchor bolts and other embedded items accurately and hold securely
in position in the forms until the concrete is placed and set. Check all special castings,
channels, or other metal parts that are to be embedded in the concrete prior to and again after
concreting. Check all nailing, blocks, plugs and strips necessary for the attachment of trim,
finish and similar work prior to concreting. Coordinate with other trades for items to be
embedded in the concrete and not shown on Structural Drawings.
M. Pipes and Wall Spools Cast in Concrete:
1. Install wall spools, wall flanges and wall anchors before placing concrete. Do not
weld, tie or otherwise connect the wall spools to the reinforcing steel.
2. Support pipe and fabricated fittings to be encased in concrete on concrete piers or
pedestals. Carry concrete supports to firm foundations so that no settlement will be
possible during construction.
N. Form Tolerances:
1. Tolerances or allowable variations from dimensions or positions of structural
concrete work:
a.
b.
Sleeves and Inserts
Projected ends of anchors
Anchor bolt setting
Finished concrete, all locations
+1/4" to -1/4"
+ 1/4" to -0.0"
+1/4" to -1/4"
+ 1/4" to -1/4"
in 10 feet of length
c.
d.
2. Planes or axes from which above tolerances are measured:
Sleeves and Inserts
Projected ends of anchors
Anchor bolt setting
Finish concrete
Centerline of sleeve or insert
Plane perpendicular to end of anchor
Centerline of anchor bolt
Concrete surface
3. Comply with equipment manufacturer's tolerances ifmore severe than above.
END OF SECTION
03100-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide steel reinforcement for cast-in-place and precast concrete structures.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03250, Concrete Accessories
C. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1. Standard Building Code.
. 2. ACI 315, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
3. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
4. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, MSP-l.
5. Local codes and regulations.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, the following:
1. Mill test certificates identifying chemical and physical analyses for each load of
reinforcing steel delivered.
2. Bending lists and placing drawings for reinforcement. Indicate openings
(mechanical, electrical, equipment), including additional reinforcing at openings and
intersecting wall, beam and footing arrangements. Coordinate placing drawings with
03200-1
60-954.00
concrete placing schedule. Submit complete bending lists and placing drawings
together for each element of structure (grade slabs, footings, walls, deck, floor or roof
slabs), including all dowels and other bars.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Ship reinforcement with bars of same size and shape fastened in bundles with metal
identification tags giving size and mark securely wired on. Label identification tags with
same designation as shown on bar lists and shop drawings.
B. Store bars off ground. Protect from moisture and keep free from dirt, oil and injurious
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed bars ofa USA manufacture.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM AI85, gauges, spacing and dimensions as indicated.
C. Metal Bar Supports: CRSI MSP-I, Chapter 3, Class 2, Type B, Stainless Steel Protected Bar
Supports, or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. Use concrete supports for
reinforcement in concrete placed on grade.
D. Tie Wire: 16 gauge minimum, black, soft annealed.
E. Coupler Splice Devices: Cadweld tension couplers, capable of developing the ultimate
strength of the bar as manufactured by Erico Products, Incorporated, Solon, Ohio, or equal.
2.02 F ABRICA nON
A. Do not commence fabrication until receipt of the shop drawings approval. Fabricate
reinforcing steel in accordance with all requirements of the specified standards and within
CRSI tolerances, and unless otherwise indicated, with the following:
1. Provide standard hooks.
2. Extend bottom bars a minimum of 6-inches into supporting members.
3. Provide cover indicated to the outermost stirrup, tie or bar.
03200-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Provide splices only where indicated on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Before placing, clean reinforcement of loose mill scale and rust, dirt and other coatings and
contaminants that reduce or destroy bond.
B. Supporting Reinforcement: Provide bar supports as required by CRSI MSP-l. Support top
and bottom bars in slabs formed on earth on precast concrete block supports except where
such bars are properly supported from formwork. Precast concrete block supports are not
required in slabs formed on tremie concrete but may be used at the Contractor's option.
C. Placing Reinforcement: Place reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric as indicated on the
Drawings and as recommended by CRSI MSP-l and ACI 315. Securely tie and support
reinforcement to prevent displacement during concrete placement.
D. Welded Wire Fabric: Splice welded wire fabric such that the overlap between outermost
cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than the spacing of the cross wires, plus 2-inches.
Do not extend fabric through expansion joints or construction joints in slabs on grade except
as otherwise indicated.
E. Where splices are indicated on the Drawings, splice bars in slabs, beams and girders
according to ACI 315. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, lap splices in reinforcement
not less than 30 bar diameters. Splice horizontal bars in circular structures 40 bar diameters.
Provide splices and laps in columns, piers and struts in a manner sufficient to transfer full
stress bond. When splicing bars of different diameters, length of lap is based on larger bar.
Stagger splices in adjacent bars.
F. Coupler Splice: Unless indicated on the Drawings, provide full positive tension connections.
Install such devices in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
G. Dowels: Wire dowels in position prior to placing concrete.
H. Field Bending: Do not use heat to bend bars. Do not bend bars after being embedded in
concrete.
I. Welding: Welding of reinforcing will not be permitted.
J. Place reinforcement a minimum of2-inches clear of any metal pipe or fitting.
03200-3
60-954.00
K. Unless otherwise shown, install reinforcement with the following clearances for concrete
coverage.
1.
Beams and Girders
2" outside of stirrups or ties
2.
Solid Slabs and Joists
1" cover when there is no exposure to moisture
2" cover when placed against working slab at
grade
3" cover when placed against earth
3.
Columns
2" outside of ties
4.
Wails
1-1/2" on interior face, 2" on exterior face, 2" at
water
5.
Grade Beams and Footings
3" outside of steel, side and bottom, 2" top
6.
Formed Structures in
contact with soil or
exposed to weather,
water, sludge or sewage
2" outside of steel
END OF SECTION
03200-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03250
CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide accessories for cast-in-place concrete.
1.02 RELATEDWORK
A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement
C. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and samples in accordance with Section 01340.
B. Submit product data on the following items.
1. Water Stops
2. Tongue and Groove Joint Forms
3. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers
C. Submit samples on the following items:
1. Water Stops
2. Precast Concrete Block Supports for Reinforcing Bars
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Precast Concrete Block Supports For Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ACI 315. Provide
blocks with No.4 dowels bent 900 to support top bars.
03250-1
60-954.00
B. Membrane: 6 mil polyethylene film.
C. Water Stops: Polyvinyl chloride meeting all requirements of U.S. Army Corps of Engineer's
Specification CRD-C-572 and equal to Burke Water Stops as manufactured by The Burke
Company. Provide flat dumbbell type and center bulb type, 9 inches x 3/8-inch at wall
thickness of 12-inches or greater, and 6-inches x 3/8-inch at wall thickness less than
12-inches. Provide 6-inch split-ribbed with center bulb type at connections of new concrete
structures with existing concrete. Provide water stops as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Bituminous type conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 994.
2. Nonextruding type, self-expanding cork, 3/4-inch thick or as otherwise shown on the
Drawings, conforming to the requirements of ASTM D1752, Type III, and
compatible with the specified joint sealant compound.
E. Joint Sealant: A multipart, gray, polyurethane sealant meeting U.S. Federal Specification
TT-S-00227E (3) Type 1, Class A self-leveling for horizontal joints, and Type II, Class A,
non-sag for vertical joints, and recommended by the manufacturer for continuous immersion
in water. Provide sealants as manufactured by Products Research and Chemical Corporation,
Mameco International, The Burke Company, W.R. Meadows, or equal.
F. Tongue And Groove Joint Forms: 24 gauge steel forms complete with steel stakes and splice
plates, designed for joints not to receive a poured seal, and equal to Burke Keyed Kold Joint
as manufactured by The Burke Company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Precast Concrete Block Supports For Reinforcing Bars: Provide in sufficient quantity to
support reinforcing bars in slabs formed on earth at a spacing not to exceed 4- feet on centers
in both directions. Provide blocks with dowels to support top bars. Block supports are not
required in slabs formed on tremie concrete, but may be used at the Contractor's option.
Blocks are not required for reinforcing bars properly supported from formwork. At other
locations, refer to ACI 315 and CRSI MSP-l.
B. Membrane: Provide polyethylene film under all slabs formed on earth, except for liquid
containment structures. Lap membrane sheets 6-inches in the direction of spreading
concrete. Do not puncture film.
C. Water Stops:
03250-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Installation: Protect water stops from dirt, oil and concrete spatter and rigidly secure
in position by means of split bulkheads and by fastening to reinforcing bars in two
directions at not more than 12 inches on centers. Install water stops in construction
joints in hydraulic structures required to contain liquid or to resist the entry of
groundwater.
2. Splices: Butt-splice water stops using a thermostatically controlled electric splicing
iron as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints of size and at locations as shown on the
Drawings. Place expansion joint fillers every 30 feet in straight runs of walkways, at right
angle turns and wherever concrete butts into vertical surfaces, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
E. Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants where indicated on the Drawings. Prepare surfaces,
prime, prepare materials, all in complete compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
03250-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
P ART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide cast-in-place concrete as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03100, Concrete Form Work
B. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement
C. Section 03250, Concrete Accessories
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1. Standard Building Code.
2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
3. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
4. Local codes and regulations
B. Plant Qualification: Comply with all requirements of the Check List for Certification of
Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities of the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association and ASTM C 94.
C. Worker Qualification: Workers with at least 5 years experience in performing concrete work
of high quality, including forming, color, texture and finishing and of the size and
complexity of this project.
D. Testing:
1. Provide testing in accordance with Section 01410. Keep the laboratory informed of
testing schedule.
03300-1
60-954.00
03300-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Obtain standard laboratory compressive test cylinders as required by the laboratory
when concrete is discharged from the mixer at the point of placing. Test cylinders
will be made and cured by the laboratory in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM C 31, including a set of 6 cylinders for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof
placed each day, for each type of concrete. The cylinders will be cured under
laboratory conditions and will be tested in two groups of three at 7 and 28 days of
age, respectively in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 39.
3. Air entrainment tests will be made by the laboratory when concrete is discharged
from the mixer at the point of placing, for each pour or other volume of concrete for
which a set of test cylinders is required in accordance with the previous paragraph.
The amount of air entrained will be determined by either the pressure method or the
volumetric method in accordance with ASTM C231 or ASTM C173, respectively.
4. The laboratory will make slump tests of Class A and Class B concrete as it is
discharged from the mixer at the point of placing. Slump tests will be made of every
batch of concrete placed, and failure to meet specified slump requirements will be
sufficient cause for rejection of that batch.
E. Evaluation And Acceptance Of Concrete: Evaluation and acceptance of concrete will be in
accordance with ACI-318, Chapter 5.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01340.
1. Plant Qualification: Submit satisfactory evidence indicating compliance with the
specified qualification requirements.
2. Materials: Submit satisfactory evidence indicating that materials to be used,
including cement, aggregates and admixtures meet the specified requirements.
3. Design Mix: Submit the design mix to be used as prepared by qualified persons.
The design of the mix is the responsibility of the Contractor subject to the limitations
of the Specifications.
4. Submit, at least 24 hours before placing concrete, signed certification providing the
following:
a. Exact location and portion of structure to be placed.
b. Date and time concrete is to be placed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. Type of concrete to be used (mix), and the method to be used in placing the
concrete.
d. Estimated quantity of concrete to be placed.
e. That line and grade have been checked and grade properly compacted.
f. That location, type, size and spacing of reinforcement has been checked and
conform to the Drawings.
g. That any water stops, construction joints, or seals have been placed and
conform to the Drawings.
h. That any embedded pipes have been placed, are the correct size and type and
conform to the Drawings.
1. That any embedded conduits, grounding wires or receptacles have been
placed and conform to the Drawings.
J. That any embedded anchor bolts, bearing plates, dowels etc. are in place, are
of the correct size and are located as indicated on the Drawings.
k. That forms are properly located and adequately braced.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement:
1. Domestic Portland cement conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 150 Type I,
Type II or Type III. Construct all structures exposed to water with Type II cement.
Use Type III cement for high early strength concrete only for special locations and
only with the approval of the Engineer. Use Type I cement for tremie concrete.
2. Use only one brand of cement in any individual structure unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer. Do not use cement which has become damaged, partially set, lumpy
or caked and discard the entire contents of the sack or container which contains such
cement. Do not use salvaged or reclaimed cement.
B. Aggregates:
03300-3
60-954.00
03300-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. ASTM C 33. Coarse aggregates shall be size No. 67, 3!4-inch to No.4 or No. 57,
I-inch to No.4, as shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Use size No.8 for filling of cells of masonry units.
2. In addition to requirements of ASTM C 33, apply the following criteria for structures
exposed to sewage:
a. Soft particles: Not more than 2.0 percent
b. Chert as a soft impurity (defined in Table 3 of ASTM C 33): Not more than
1.0 percent
c. Total of soft particles and chert as a soft impurity: Not more than 2.0 percent
d. Flat and elongated particles (long dimension more than 5 times short
dimension): Not more than 15.0 percent
C. Water: -Potable quality, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious materials.
D. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture:
1. Concrete Without Superplasticizer:
a. Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C494 Type A, equal to Eucon WR-75
by the Euclid Company, Pozzolith 200N by Master Builders, Plastocrete 161
by Sika Chemical Corporation, and containing no calcium chloride.
b. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixtures: ASTM C494 Type D, equal to
Eucon Retarder-75 by the Euclid Company, Pozzolith 100 XR by Master
Builders, Plastiment by Sika Chemical Corporation, and containing no
calcium cWoride.
c. Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C494 Type CorE, equal to Accelguard 80
by the Euclid Company, Darex Set Accelerator by W.R. Grace, and
containing no calcium chloride.
2. Concrete With Superplasticizer:
a. Water Reducing, High Range Admixtures: ASTM C494, Type F or G, equal
to Eucon 37 by the Euclid Company, Rheobild 716 by Master Builders,
Daracem 100 by W.R. Grace, Sikament by Sika Chemical Corporation, and
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
consisting of a second-generation admixture, free of chlorides and alkalis
(except for those attributable to water) composed of a synthesized sulfonated
complex polymer, enabling the concrete to maintain its rheoplastic state in
excess of two hours if necessary.
b. Manufacturer's Job Site Representation: Provide the services of a competent
field service representative from the manufacturer of each of the admixtures
selected for use to provide at the job site advice and consultation on the use
of the admixture materials, including the effect on the concrete in place,
including recommending maximum discharge time for superplasticizer
method and procedure to induce superplasticizer into mixer, quantities of
admixtures to be used if variations are required because of
temperature/humidity, wind, or other environmental considerations, and to
be available on short call at any time requested by the Owner, Contractor, or
concrete producer.
F. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1 and Type ID, Class A and Class B, containing no
ingredient which would adversely affect the bond of coatings or toppings.
1. For exposed concrete not to receive special finishes, protective coatings and/or
concrete toppings, provide curing and sealing compound equal to Super Rez- Seal,
by Euclid Chemical Co., or Burke Spartan-Cote Cure-Seal Hardener by The Burke
Company.
2. For exposed concrete to receive special finishes, protective coatings and/or concrete
toppings, provide curing compound equal to Kurez-DR, by Euclid Chemical Co., or
Burke Rez-X Curing Compound by The Burke Company.
G. Mortar for Repair of Concrete: Same materials as used for concrete, except omit coarse
aggregate and use not more than one part cement to two and one-half parts sand by damp
loose volume. Use no more mixing water than is necessary for handling and placing.
H. Burlap Mats: Conform to AASHTO Specification M182.
1. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Euco #452, BurkEpoxy MY, Sikadur Hi Mod, Concresive 100 l-LPL,
or equal.
J. Powdered Epoxy Coating For Anchor Bolts: Powdered epoxy resin as manufactured by the
3M Company, Scotchkote No. 213, Armstrong No. R349, or equal.
03300-5
60-954.00
03300-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.02 MIXES
A. General Requirements:
1. Mix Design: Conform to ACI 318, Section 5.3. Submit data on consecutive tests
and standard deviation.
2. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio:
.37 (lbs/lb)
.45 (lbs/lb)
.55 (lbs/lb)
.65 (lbs/lb)
Concrete with superplasticizer
Class A concrete without superplasticizer
Class B concrete without superplasticizer
Class C concrete without superplasticizer
3. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent (Class A and B).
4.
Slump:
4-inches plus or minus I-inch for Class A and B without
superplasticizer.
7-inches plus or minus I-inch for Class A and B with
super - p lasti cizer.
8-inches plus or minus I-inch for tremie concrete.
5. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days:
Tremie, 4000 psi
Class A, 4000 psi, structural and precast, water retaining structures
Class B, 3000 psi, slabs on grade, pipe supports, concrete fill, curbs and
sidewalks
Class C, 2500 psi thrust blocks and pipe encasement
B. Production Of Concrete:
1. General: Use ready mixed concrete, batched, mixed and transported in accordance
with ASTM C 94, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Air Entraining Admixture: Add admixture into the mixture as a solution measured
by means of an approved mechanical dispensing device, and as a part of the total
mixing water.
3. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: Measure and add water reducing and
retarding admixture as recommended by the manufacturer. Complete the addition of
the admixture within one minute after addition of water to the cement has been
completed, or prior to the beginning of the last three-quarters of the required mixing,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
whichever occurs first. Store, handle and batch admixtures in accordance with the
recommendations of ACI 68.
C. Delivery Tickets: Conform to ASTM C94, including cement content and water/cement ratio.
Furnish ticket for each batch of ready-mixed concrete delivered to the site.
D. Temperatures: Deliver concrete to site at temperature not higher than 90oF, otherwise, add
ice to reduce the temperature, as recommended by ACI.
E. Modifications To The Mix: Do not make modifications to the mix in the plant or on the job
which will decrease the cement content or increase the water-cement ratio beyond that
specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Preparations Before Placing: Place no concrete until the approval of the Engineer has been
received. Ensure that forms are thoroughly clean and reinforcing and all other items required
to be set in concrete have been placed and thoroughly secured. Notify Engineer 24 hours
before concrete is placed~
B. Conveying:
1. General: Transport concrete from the truck to the place of final deposit as rapidly as
practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients to
maintain the quality of the concrete. Place no concrete more than 90 minutes after
mixing has begun for that batch.
2. Buckets and Hoppers: Provide buckets and hoppers having discharge gates with a
clear opening equal to no less than one-third of the maximum interior horizontal area
or five times the maximum aggregate size being used, and having side slopes no less
than 60 degrees. Provide controls on gates to permit opening and closing during the
discharge cycle.
3. Runways: Provide runways as specified in Section 03100. Use extreme care to
avoid displacement of reinforcement during the placing of concrete.
4. Elephant Trunks: Use hoppers and elephant trunks to prevent the free fall of concrete
for more than 6- feet.
03300-7
60-954.00
03300-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Chutes: Provide metal or metal lined chutes having a slope not exceeding one
vertical to two horizontal and not less than one vertical to three horizontal. Use
chutes more than 20-feet long and chutes not meeting the slope requirements only if
they discharge into a hopper before distribution.
6. Pumping Equipment: If required, provide pumping equipment and procedures
conforming to ACI 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. Measure slump
at the point of discharge. Do not allow loss of slump in pumping to exceed 1
ll2-inches.
7. Conveying Equipment Construction: Do not use aluminum or aluminum alloy pipe
for tremies or pump lines and chutes, except for short lengths at the truck mixer.
8. Cleaning: Clean conveying equipment at the end of each concrete operation.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Placing:
1. General: Deposit concrete continuously, or in layers of such thickness (not
exceeding 2-feet in depth) that no concrete will be deposited on concrete that has
hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. Repair
any such seams or planes of weakness with injected epoxy grout and patch to match
adjacent surfaces.
2. Supported Elements: Allow at least two hours to elapse after depositing concrete in
columns or walls before depositing in beams, girders, or slabs supported thereon.
3. Segregation: Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid
segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject the concrete to procedures
which cause segregation.
4. Concrete Under Water: Place all concrete in the dry except for Tremie concrete.
5. Concrete Fill at Tank Bottom Slab: Where shown on the Drawings, place concrete
fill for the tank bottoms within the tolerances described herein and in accordance
with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations for the clearance required by
the mechanical equipment. Do not operate the mechanical equipment ofthe tanks
as a primary screed for moving the concrete fill, except in the final scree ding
operation, provided any damage to the equipment is repaired at no additional cost to
the Owner.
B. Seals And Tremie Concrete:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
General:
a. Wherever practicable, dewater all foundation excavations and deposit the
concrete in the dry. Where conditions are encountered which render it
impracticable to dewater the foundation before placing concrete, place a
concrete foundation seal as shown on the Drawings. Then dewater the
foundation and place the balance of the concrete in the dry.
b. Place seal concrete in a manner to ensure satisfactory performance of the seal
in providing a watertight excavation for subsequent placing of structural
concrete. Repair or replace any seal concrete which subsequently fails to
perform properly, as necessary to perform its required function, at no cost to
the Owner.
2.
Method of Placing: Deposit concrete under water by means of a tremie, a
closed-bottom dump bucket of not less than one cubic yard capacity, or other
approved method, in one continuous pour. Do not place concrete in running water.
Provide watertight form work and excavation sheeting designed by a Professional
Engineer, registered in the State of Florida, for all form work required to retain
concrete under water.
3.
Use of Tremie: For depositing concrete under water, use a tremie consisting of a
tube having a minimum inside diameter of ten inches, and constructed in sections
having tight joints. Do not use aluminum parts in contact with the concrete. Ensure
that the discharge end is entirely seated at all times and that the tremie tube is kept
full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, slightly
raise the tremie (but not out of the concrete at the bottom) until the batch discharges
to the bottom of the hopper; then stop the flow by lowering the tremie. Support the
tremie in such a manner as to permit the free movement of the discharge end over the
entire top surface of the work, and to permit it being lowered rapidly when necessary
to choke off or retard the flow. Do not interrupt concrete flow until the work is
completed. Use special care to maintain still water at the point of deposit.
4.
Use of Bottom-dump Bucket: When the concrete is placed by means of a
bottom-dump bucket, lower the bucket gradually and carefully until it rests upon the
concrete already placed. Then raise the bucket very slowly during the discharge
travel; the intent being to maintain, as nearly as possible, still water at the point of
discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. Aluminum buckets will not be
permitted.
5.
Time of Beginning Pumping: Do not start pumping to dewater a sealed cofferdam
until the seal has set sufficiently to withstand the hydrostatic pressure, and in no case
earlier than 72 hours after placement of the concrete.
03300-9
60-954.00
03300-10
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Consolidating Concrete:
1. General: Consolidate concrete by means of internal vibrators operated by competent
workmen.
2. Vibrators: Use vibrators having a minimum head diameter of at least 2-inches, a
minimum centrifugal force of 700-pounds and a minimum frequency of 8,000
vibrations per second.
3. Vibrators for Confined Areas: In confined areas, use additional vibrators having a
minimum head diameter of 1 1/2-inches, a minimum centrifugal force of 300-pounds
and a minimum frequency of9,000 vibrations per second.
4. Spare Vibrator: Keep one spare vibrator for each three in use on the site during all
concrete placing operations.
5. Use of Vibrators: Insert and withdraw vibrators at points approximately 18-inches
apart. At each insertion operate vibrator for 5 to 15 seconds. Do not transport
concrete in the forms by means of vibrators.
D. Protection: Do not allow rainwater to increase the mixing water or to damage the surface
finish. Protect concrete from construction overloads and do not apply design loads until the
specified strength has been attained.
E. Construction Joints: Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide horizontal
construction joints at top of f01.lndation members and slabs on grade and at the soffit of
supported slabs and beams. Locate other horizontal and vertical construction joints as
indicated on the Drawings. Except in the locations shown, provide no other joints, unless
otherwise recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
F. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has set, thoroughly
clean the surfaces of the set concrete to expose the coarse aggregate and to ensure they are
free of laitance, coatings, foreign matter and loose particles. Retighten forms. Dampen, but
do not saturate hardened concrete of joints and then thoroughly cover with a coat of cement
grout of similar proportions to the mortar in the concrete. Place the grout as thick as
possible on vertical surfaces and at least 112-inch thick on horizontal surfaces. Place the fresh
concrete before the grout has attained its initial set.
G. Embedded Items: In addition to steel reinforcement, securely place pipes, inserts and other
metal objects as shown, specified or ordered to be built into, set in or attached to the
concrete. Take all necessary precautions to prevent these objects from being displaced,
broken or deformed. Before concrete is placed, take care to determine that all embedded
parts are firmly and securely fastened in place as indicated. Thoroughly clean surfaces free
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
from paint and other coating, rust, scale, oil, and any foreign matter. Pressure test embedded
pipes for leakage, as specified elsewhere, before concrete is placed. Wrap metal rainwater
leaders, firelines and other such piping with at least two thicknesses of 30 lb. roofing felt
before placing concrete. Do not embed wood in concrete. Pack concrete tightly around
pipes and other metal work to prevent leakage and to secure perfect adhesion. Adequately
protect drains from intrusion of concrete.
H. Bonding To Existing Surfaces: Clean existing concrete surfaces that are to have new
concrete bonded thereto of all grease, oil, dust, dirt and loose particles and coat with an
epoxy bonding agent just prior to placing of the new concrete. Apply the bonding agent as
recommended by the manufacturer and allow the agent to become tacky before the new
concrete is placed. Do not allow the bonding agent to overlap or be spilled on the surfaces
to be exposed after the work is completed.
3.03 FORM REMOVAL
A. Maintain formwork in place for the following structural conditions until the concrete has
attained the minimum percentage of indicated design compressive strength or for the period
of time specified in the following table.
Note: Time periods in the table include all days except those in which the temperature falls
below 40 degrees F.
Minimum
Compressive
Normal Strength for
Structural Normal High-Early Form Removal
Member or Strength Strength (% Design
Condition Concrete Concrete Stren~th)
Cantilevers 12 days 7 days 90
Over 20 feet 12 days 7 days 90
between supports
Stairways 10 days 5 days 80
Floor slabs 5 days 3 days 70
Free standing 5 days 3 days 70
walls, column
and piers
Walls, piers, 24-48 hours 12-24 hours 70
03300-11 60-954.00
03300-12
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
columns, sides
of beams, footings,
slabs on grade, and
vertical surfaces
Front face form
of curbs
6-24 hours
6 hours
70
3.04 CONCRETE FINISHINGS
A. Repair Of Surface Defects:
1. General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes immediately after form removal.
Dampen the area to be patched and an area at least 6-inches wide surrounding it to
prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. Notify the Engineer prior to
commencing operations.
2. Removal of Defective Concrete: Remove all honeycombed and other defective
concrete down to sound concrete. Cut edges perpendicular to the surface or slightly
under cut. Sand blast surfaces to receive repair.
3. Bonding Grout: Thoroughly dampen surfaces to be patched and apply a coat of
bonding grout consisting of one part cement to one part fine sand passing a No. 30
sieve and having the consistency of thick cream.
4. Placing Patching Mortar: After the bonding grout begins to lose its water sheen,
apply a premixed patching mortar, thoroughly consolidating it into place and striking
it off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. Leave
mortar undisturbed for one hour to permit initial shrinkage and then finally finish.
5. Tie Holes: After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, fill the tie holes solid with
patching mortar.
B. Concrete Finishes:
1. Formed Surfaces: After removal of forms, chip off all irregular projections, grind
flush with adjacent surfaces and finish concrete surfaces in accordance with the
following schedule:
Finish
Designation
Area Applied
F-l
Exterior walls below grade not exposed to water:
Repair defective concrete, fill depressions deeper than 1/2-inch, and
fill tie holes.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F-2 Exterior and interior walls exposed to water:
Repair defective concrete, remove fins, fill depressions 114-inch
or deeper, and fill tie holes.
F-3 Walls of structures of buildings exposed to view and underside of
formed floors or slabs:
In addition to Finish F-2, fill depressions and airholes with mortar.
Dampen surfaces and then spread a slurry consisting of one part
cement and one and one-half parts sand by damp loose volume on
the surface with clean burlap pads or sponge rubber floats. Remove
any surplus by scraping and then rubbing with clean burlap.
F -4 Tops of walls, beams and similar unformed surfaces occurring
adjacent to formed surfaces:
Strike smooth after concrete is placed and float to a texture
reasonably consistent with that of formed surfaces.
2.
Slab Surfaces:
a. General: After concrete has been consolidated, finish all concrete slabs with
a floated finish. After floating, trowel finish all concrete slabs, except for
areas to receive roofing, insulation, tile or topping, and immediately light
broom finish. Where a finish is not indicated, provide a troweled finish.
Finish
Designation
Area Applied
S-l
Slabs and floors not water bearing:
Smooth steel trowel finish.
S-2
Slabs and floors which are water bearing and slab surfaces on which
mechanical equipment moves:
Steel trowel finish free from trowel marks and all irregularities.
S-3
Slabs, floors and stair treads of structures or buildings exposed to
VIew:
Steel trowel finish without local depressions or high points and
apply a light hair-broom finish. Do not use stiff bristle brooms or
brushes. Leave hair-broom lines parallel to the direction of slab
drainage.
S-4
Slabs and floors at slopes greater than 10%:
03300-13
60-954.00
Steel trowel finish without local depressions or high points. Apply
a stiff bristle broom finish. Leave broom lines parallel to the
direction of slope drainage.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
S-5 Exposed edges of slabs, floors and tops of walls:
Finish with a l/4-inch radius edge if a chamfer is not indicated.
b. Floated Finish: After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and
leveled, do not work the surface further until water sheen has disappeared and
the surface has hardened sufficiently to permit floating. During the first
floating, check the planeness of the slab with a 10-foot straightedge applied
at no less than two angles. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots to
produce a surface having the required tolerance. Then refloat the slab to a
uniform sandy texture.
c. Light Broomed Finish: After floating, power trowel slabs to receive a light
broomed finish to produce a smooth surface, relatively free of defects.
Before the surface sets, pass a soft broom drag over the surface to produce a
surface uniform in texture and appearance.
d. Troweled Finish: After floating, power trowel slabs to receive a troweled
finish to produce a smooth surface, relatively free of defects. Hand trowel
after the surface has hardened sufficiently. When a ringing sound is produced
as the trowel is moved over the surfaces, perform final troweling by hand to
produce a surface which is thoroughly consolidated, free from trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance and plane to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10
feet as determined by a 10- foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in
any direction.
e. Hardener Finish: Where indicated to receive a troweled hardener finish,
water cure slabs without application of curing and sealing agent. When slab
is at least 28 days old and thoroughly dry, apply the hardener in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where dry-shake hardener or
slip-resistant finish is required, apply the hardener or slip-resistant product
prior to complete curing and finishing, in accordance with the requirements
and recommendation of the product manufacturer.
f. Saw Cut Joints: Cut joints that are to be saw cut not sooner than 2 hours after
the concrete is poured and not later than 8 hours after the pour.
3.05 PROTECTING
A. Curing:
03300-14
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Immediately after surface defects have been repaired, apply a spray coat of curing
compound to all exposed surfaces, including slabs, walls, beams and columns in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Protect exposed steel
keyways and other embedded items from the curing compound. Water cure, as
specified in paragraph B hereunder, all concrete surfaces that are to be exposed to
wastewater, surfaces that are to be coated with a coal tar epoxy system, and concrete
floors requiring a bond for special finishes.
2. Do not apply curing compound during periods of rainfall. Should the film become
damaged from any cause within the required curing period, immediately repair the
damaged portions with additional compound. Upon removal of forms, immediately
coat the newly exposed surfaces to provide a curing treatment equal to that provided
for the surface.
3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Use clear compound conforming to Federal
Specification TT-C-800A, 30% solids content minimum, having test data from an
independent laboratory indicating a maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per sq.
cm. when applied at a coverage rate of 300 sq. ft. per gallon, and equal to Super
Floor Coat or Super Pliocure by The Euclid Chemical Company or Masterseal 66 by
Master Builders. Furnish manufacturer's certification as required.
4. Apply specified clear curing and sealing compound to all horizontal areas so noted
on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Apply immediately after final finishing.
Apply this compound to non-structural construction joints of slabs on grade to act as
a bond breaker prior to placement of adjacent concrete.
B. Water Curing Method: Cure all concrete that is to be water cured by either the wet burlap
method, by continuous fogging or by covering with waterproof sheet.
1. Wet Burlap Method: Cover concrete surface with a double thickness of burlap,
cotton mats, or other approved material, kept thoroughly saturated with water. Keep
the forms wet until removed and upon removal, start the curing specified herein
immediately. Cure the concrete for a period of 7 days for normal Portland cement
or 4 days for high early strength cement. Do not submerge concrete poured in the
dry until it has attained.sufficient strength to adequately sustain the stress involved
and do not subject it to flowing water across its surface until it has cured 4 days.
2. Continuous Fogging: Perform continuous fogging by fogging with a nozzle which
so atomizes the flow of water that a mist, and not a spray, is formed. Fog the
concrete surface regularly without allowing any part of the surface to become dry.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent erosion of the concrete surface by the
water.
03300-15
60-954.00
3.
Covering With Waterproof Sheet: Keep the entire area to be cured continuously wet
by fogging, as specified in the fogging paragraph above, for at least 18 hours and
then immediately cover with waterproofing curing sheet conforming to ASTM C 171,
waterproof paper and polyethylene film, free of holes or tears. Keep sheet fully flat,
without wrinkles or air bubbles, held down tautly at all edges. Do not use this
method on slabs which will be exposed to view.
END OF SECTION
03300-16
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 04000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all materials, equipment and labor required to complete the concrete masonry walls
and partitions including concrete masonry units, precast concrete formed units, face brick
and miscellaneous masonry items in accordance with the Drawing and Specifications.
Properly coordinate all work with that of other trades.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04230, Reinforced Unit Masonry
B. Section 07200, Building Insulation_
C. Section 09200, Stucco
D. Section 09900, Painting
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the services of qualified and licensed masons with at least five years experience in
installations of a similar nature.
B. Furnish masonry units obtained from one manufacturer, cured by one process, of uniform
color and texture, without spalls, chips or other deficiencies that impair strength and/or
appearance, and conforming to the physical requirements of the Standard Building Code and
to Florida concrete and Products Association, CM-l Guide Specifications for hollow regular
concrete masonry units, modular dimensions.
C. Perform laying, finishing and grouting of masonry work in accordance with the requirements
of the American Concrete Institute, ACI 530, Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures, and ACI 530.1, Specifications for Masonry Structures.
D. Provide mortar materials and mortar application in compliance with the recommendations
of the National Lime Association and Portland Cement Association.
04000-1
60-954.00
1.04 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation From Plwnb:
1. For vertical lines and surfaces of colwnns, walls and arises, do not exceed the
following:
a. 1/4" in 10 feet.
b. 3/8" in any story height, maximwn 20 feet.
c. 1/2" in 40 feet or more.
2. For external comers, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do
not exceed the following:
a. 1/4" in any story, maximwn 20 feet.
b. 1/2" in 40 feet or more.
3. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed 3/8" in 10 feet.
B. Variations From Level:
1. For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed the following:
a. 1/4" in any bay, maximwn 20 feet.
b. 1/2" in 40 feet or more.
2. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements
in 10 feet or 1/16" within width of a single unit.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of
colwnns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed the following:
1. 1/2" in any bay, maximwn 20 feet.
2. 3/4" in 40 feet or more.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, do not exceed
minus 1/4" or plus 1/2" from dimensions shown.
04000-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed indicated bed joint thickness by more
than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed indicated
head joint thickness by more than plus or minus 1/8".
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver masonry units and mortar materials to the site undamaged, on pallets, stacked to
allow air circulation and covered and protected from rain, ground water, soilage, stainage,
or intermixture with earth or other materials.
B. Store mortar materials off the ground, under cover using tarpaulins, felt paper, or
polyethylene sheets, and in a dry location. Remove damaged materials from the site and
replace at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01340, product data,
manufacturer's technical information and instructions for each manufactured product.
B. Samples: Submit the following samples:
1. Unit masonry samples for each type of exposed masonry unit required in sufficient
quantity to show full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed
work.
2. Precast concrete formed units, approximately 6"x6"x2" thick to illustrate quality,
color and texture of surface finish.
3. Anchors, Ties, Joint Reinforcement: Two of each type proposed for use.
4. Mortar: Two cured mortar samples matching Engineer's color selection.
C. Certification:
1. Submit manufacturer's written certification that the concrete masonry units meet or
exceed all the requirements set forth in this Section.
2. Submit the grout mix design.
D. Shop Drawings, Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
placement of wall reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for
Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures.
04000-3
60-954.00
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of
each days work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roofloading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls
or columns.
C. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
D. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed
or painted. Immediately remove grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect base
of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground
and over wall surfaces.
E. Protect sills, ledges and projections from dropping of mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Provide concrete masonry units having nominal face dimensions of 16" long by 8" high
(thickness 4" or 8" as shown) smooth textured, sound and free from cracks, chipped edges
or other defects that would interfere with proper setting or impair strength or durability of
the construction. Use units of special shapes and sizes for lintels, comers, jambs, sash,
control joints, headers and other special conditions as required to complete the work shown.
Where units are to be exposed on the interior of the building, use units free of surface defects
that would be noticeable and objectionable at a distance of 12-feet from the finished wall.
B. Non-load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: Provide units conforming to ASTM C 129,
Type I, normal weight, with nominal face dimensions of8" by 16", thicknesses as shown on
Drawing and with external comers bullnosed.
C. Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: Provide units conforming to ASTM C90, Type I,
of normal weight.
D. Deliver units to the job site in an air-dry condition and protect them at the job from ground
water and rain prior to and during construction of the walls. Provide units that are suitably
aged at time of delivery to meet linear shrinkage potential requirements of ASTM C 426.
04000-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE FORMED UNITS
A. Design Mixes: Prepare design mixes by independent testing facility or by qualified precast
manufacturing plant personnel, at precast fabricator's option, using mix proportions
determined by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to
be employed on the Project, complying with ACI 318.
B. Provide standard-weight concrete consisting of ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III "white"
portland cement, ASTM C 33 hard, durable, "white" silica aggregate free of material that
causes staining, admixtures, and potable water to produce the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi at 28 days.
2. Total Air Content: Not less than 4 percent nor more than 6 percent.
3. Water Absorption: Not to exceed 5 to 6 percent by weight, except between 3 to 4
percent for sloping surfaces (sills).
2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, non-staining, without air entrainment and of
natural color.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
C. Premix Mortar: ASTM C 387, Type M.
D. Aggregate:
1. For Mortar: ASTM C144.
2. For Grout: ASTM C404.
E. Water: Potable water free of deleterious materials which would impair the strength or bond.
F. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
2.04 ANCHORS AND TIES
A. Zinc coated steel or copper coated steel. Provide anchors and ties as indicated on the
Drawings, or as required for installation of various items. Provide anchors of the type best
suited for the situation.
04000-5
60-954.00
2.05 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Dur-O- Wal Lader, 9-gauge, ladder type, Hohmann & Barnard Lox-All No.8, or equal.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
B. Cold-Applied Asphalt Cut-Back Damproofing Material: Asphalt and solvent compound,
compounded to penetrate substrate and build to firm, moisture-resistant, vapor-resistant,
elastic coating. Provide heavy fibrated-type mastic compound complying with ASTM D
2822, Type I and containing nonasbestos inorganic fibrous reinforcement materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct all work plumb and true and built accurately to dimensions shown. Provide and
place such special units as required to form all comers, returns, offsets and maintain proper
bond. Where interior concrete masonry partitions meet other interior partitions or exterior
walls, provide a masonry bond or the equivalent in approved metal ties.
3.02 BOND
A. Lay all masonry units, except decorative screen masonry units, in running bond by lapping
units in successive courses a distance of one-half a unit. Lay all courses level with joints of
uniform width and finished flush. Provide full mortar coverage of the face shells in both the
horizontal and vertical joints. Point all joints solid with mortar on both sides of wall. Firmly
compact joints in exposed work with a pointing tool when partially set.
3.03 MORTAR MIX
A. Proportion mortar by volume, in accordance with Florida Concrete Products Association
"Mortar Requirements- Table 2" for Type M mortar, as follows:
04000-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Mortar Type
M
M
Portland Cement
Masonry Cement
Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty
Aggregate, Damp, Loose
1
1 (Type II)
1
2 1/2 min. to
1/4
3 max. combined
volumes above
2500
Aver. Compo Strength at 28 days
2500
B. Use all mortar and grout within 30 minutes of initial mixing and discard any that has begun
to set. Retempering of mortar in which setting has started will not be permitted. Mortar may
be retempered as necessary to keep it plastic, providing it has not begun to set or older than
30 minutes.
3.04 CUT UNITS
A. Cut all odd size masonry units in a finally exposed wall with suitable power driven masonry
saw. Chipping of units will not be permitted.
3.05 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement throughout exterior masonry walls, 16-inches o.c.
vertically.
3.06 FRAMES, MULLIONS AND SPACES
A. Fill solidly with grout all hollow metal frames, mullions and spaces around built-in items.
3.07 LINTELS
A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1 foot are shown
without structural steel or other supporting lintels, provide precast or formed-in-place
masonry lintels. Thoroughly cure precast lintels before handling and installation.
Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
B. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units with
reinforcing bars placed as shown and filled with grout of consistency required to complete
fill space between reinforcing bars and masonry unit.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
04000- 7
60-954.00
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect partially completed masonry against the weather, when work is not in progress, by
covering the tops of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane extending at least
2 feet down both sides of walls and held securely in place.
B. Protect exposed masonry surfaces against staining. Remove misplaced mortar immediately.
3.09 REPAIR AND POINTING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or ifunits do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weepholes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints or comers, openings and adjacent work to
provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant
compounds.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean mortar drippings from exposed masonry and adjacent surfaces as soon as possible to
prevent surfaces from being permanently stained. Remove drippings and smears before
mortar sets or hardens. Remove mortar extruded beyond face of walls or partitions.
END OF SECTION
04000-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide miscellaneous metals, sections, shapes and sheets, fittings, fasteners, wirework, etc.,
not specified elsewhere in these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09900, Painting
1.03 SUBMITTALS
_ A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, indicating fabrication, assembly
and erection details, sizes of members, profiles, fastenings, supports and anchors, patterns,
clearances and connection to other work, before fabrication begins.
B. Submit complete materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this Section.
C. Flood Protection Panels:
1. Shop drawings shall include description of pneumatic gasket and full details of all
welds and other connections as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Submit shop drawings describing in detail the method to be used in the installation
of the special jamb angles to be cast in place. These drawings shall include full
description of method to be used to assure alignment of these angles during
construction.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1. Standard Building Code.
2. American Welding Society Code A WS D 1.1.
3. Aluminum Construction Manual.
05500-1
60-954.00
4. OSHA Standards.
5. Local codes and regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide material that is free from defects impairing strength, durability or
appearance, that is of best commercial quality for purposes specified, and that has structural
properties to safely sustain or withstand strains and stresses to which normally subjected.
Throughout the facility, provide materials having the same inherent texture and color of
exposed surfaces for like locations. Insofar as practicable, provide noncorrosive, nonstaining
and concealed fastenings. Where fastenings must be exposed, match materials, color and
finish as material to which applied, countersink and finish flush. Grind exposed welds
smooth to form a neat uniform fillet without weakening base metal. Remove all slag from
welds before applying shop coating. Form molded bent or shaped members with clean, sharp
arrises, without dents, scratches, cracks or other defects. Provide all anchors, bolts, shims
and accessory items as required for building into or fastening to adjacent work. Unless
otherwise specified, use only galvanized ferrous metals.
B. Steel: Provide miscellaneous steel plates, shapes, bars and connections conforming to the
requirements of ASTM A 36, galvanized by the hot dip method after fabrication in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 123.
C. Steel Pipe: Provide steel pipe for miscellaneous members and connections that conforms to
the requirements of ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Anchor Bolts And Fasteners: Use Type 316 stainless steel wedge anchors, as manufactured
by Phillips Drill Company or equal for securing equipment. Provide all other fastenings,
bolts, nuts, washers and anchors as shown in the Drawings. Zinc coated fastenings will not
be approved except at wood nailers, or when other types of corrosion resistant materials are
not available. Use fasteners of adequate strength for purpose intended. When steel anchors
are indicated, use a one-piece design with expander ring consisting of steel zinc-coated and
chrome plated, as manufactured by McCullough Industries, Inc., K wick Bolt, or equal.
E. Welding Electrodes: Provide welding electrodes for structural steel conforming to A WS
A5.5, E70XX. Use 4043 filler metal for aluminum. Use E308 electrode where the base metal
is Type 304 stainless steel and Type E 309 where the base metal is Type 316 stainless steel
or where stainless steel is welded to carbon steel.
05500-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Aluminum Ship's Ladders:
1. Fabricate stringers and framing of aluminum plates or shapes. Bolt, rivet or weld
connections and anchor to supporting construction. Provide treads with non-slip
surface as specified. Provide anchor items of stainless steel. Design assembly,
including tread connections and methods of attachment, to support a live load of 300
pounds per tread. provide railings as specified.
2. Construct aluminum stair as indicated on the Drawings, to support dead loads and
additional live working stresses permitted for materials in Standard Building Code.
Connect stair to the appropriate structural members. Size of various members and
number of parts indicated on the Drawings are minimum. Increase as necessary to
meet requirements. Construct stairs to comply with OSHA Standards.
3. Aluminum Stair Treads: Provide aluminum stair treads of alloy 6063- TS, having a
1 114-inch wide abrasive nosing, and having a standard mill finish.
4. Checkered Plates:
a. Provide checkered plates of aluminum, mill finish as indicated on the
Drawings, and designed for a live load as indicated herein before specified,
with the limits for deflections as specified in Federal Specification
RR-G-661c.
b. Provide checkered plates of standard pattern non-slip plate, of the thickness
and sizes shown on the Drawings, with stiffener angles as required to meet
the load requirements specified above. Cut all checkered plate sections so
that no one section shall weigh more than 100 pounds.
5. Aluminum Handrails: Consists of 1 1/2 inch nominal schedule 40 pipe ASTM B
429. Railings shall be clear anodized. All fasteners shall be Series 300 stainless
steel.
a. Fabrication: Provide jointing by one of the following methods:
(1) Flush-type rail fittings, welded and ground smooth with splice locks
secured with 3/8 inch recessed head set screws.
(2) Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail,
intermediate rail to post, and comers, shall be groove welded and
ground smooth. Splices, where allowed by the AlE, shall be butted
and reinforced by a tight fitting dowel or sleeve not less than 6 inches
05500-3
60-954.00
in length. Tack weld or epoxy cement dowel or sleeve to one side of
the splice.
(3) Fasten fittings to pipe or tube with 114 or 3/8 inch stainless steel
recessed head setscrews. Provide assembled railings with fittings only
at vertical supports. Provide alloy fittings to conform to ASTM B
2618 26M.
G. Miscellaneous Aluminum: Use aluminum shapes, bars and plates of Alloy 606I-T6, except
when otherwise specified.
H. Floor Door:
1. Frame: Constructed of extruded aluminum sections with mitered and welded
comers. Strap-type concrete anchors are bolted to the frame, and a closed-cell rubber
gasket is included on the frame to cushion and make the cover water tight.
2. Covers: Flush cover equal to Model F-3030 by Milcor or accepted equal, 114"
aluminum floor plate with a safety tread pattern on the upper surface, mounted
completely flush with the exposed surface of the frame, and suitably reinforced to
carry the designed loads of300 pounds.
3. Cover Mounting: Mounted to the frame with cast steel hinges equipped with torsion
bars and complete with an automatically locking hold-open arm and with an
automatic snap latch having fixed inside and removable outside handles.
1. Galvanized Steel1l4-inch round ladder run spaced a minimum of II-inches on center or as
otherwise shown.
J. Flood Protection Panels:
1. Panels, jambs, and accessories shall be fabricated in accordance with the
requirements contained herein and the sizes and details indicated on the Drawings.
Drawings, specifications, and written recommendations provided by a specialty flood
protection door fabricator for use in this specific application may be submitted for
approval as an alternate to the details indicated. Design flood elevation shall be as
shown in flood area maps for location where project is located. Finish floor elevation
in this building shall be as shown. Six inches (6") of freeboard above design flood
is required.
2. Aluminum Plate: 6061 - T6.
3. Pneumatic Gasket: Dual Presray Type 1 "Pneuma-Seal," product of Presray
Corporation, Pawling, NY or approved equal inflatable gaskets with extruded
05500-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
aluminum retainer. Each seal shall be equipped with an automotive type air inflation
stem (schraeder valve) and an independent 0-60 psi pressure gauge.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Insofar as possible, fit and shop assemble fabricated material ready for erection. Provide
welding equipment and perform welding in compliance with American Welding Society's
Code for Welding in Building Construction, latest edition. Construct all work to be square,
plumb and true, accurately fitted with tight joints and intersections. Finish exposed work
smooth with welds ground smooth.
B. Painting And Protective Coating:
1. Except for stainless steel and galvanized surfaces, properly clean all ferrous metal
and coat surfaces with one shop coat of primer compatible with coating system
specified in Section 09900, Painting. Coat anchors that are built into masonry with
asphalt paint unless specified to be galvanized. Do not coat metal work to be encased
in concrete unless specified or noted otherwise. Clean castings that are to be left
unpainted and coat with a coal-tar-pitch varnish.
2. Provide products fabricated from rolled, pressed or forged steel shapes, plates, bars
and strips with hot-dip galvanizing or zinc coatings in compliance with ASTM A
123. Provide assembled steel products with hot-dip galvanizing or zinc coatings in
compliance with ASTM A 386. Provide weight of coatings as designated in Table
1 for the class and thickness of material to be coated. Except for bolts and nuts,
perform all galvanizing after fabrication.
3. Provide shop coating of galvanized or zinc coated surfaces only where specifically
specified or shown on the Drawings. Chemically treat such surfaces prior to
applying the coating to provide a bond for the paint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis and where aluminum will
contact concrete, mortar or plaster, separate the contact surfaces of the metals using not less
than one coat of zinc chromate primer and one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented asphalt
paint on each surface; or where deemed necessary by the Engineer, use not less than one
course of asphalt saturated cotton fabric cemented to both metals with flashing cement.
Clean finished works and remove excess cement.
05500-5
60-954.00
B. Adequately anchor all work in place at proper elevations, planes and locations. Provide
anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal
fabrications to in-place construction including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle
bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.
C. Flood Protection Panels:
1. Flood Protection Panel system components to be built-in to poured concrete and
other construction shall be furnished to the trades involved complete with approved
detailed erection drawings and instructions.
2. Modifications required to panels or built-in components to accommodate deviations
in erection shall be approved by NE prior to execution.
D. Cutting, Fitting and Placement:
1. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal
fabrications.
2. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, and make plumb, level,
true, and free from rack, measured from established lines and levels.
3. Provide temporary anchors in form work for items which are to be built into concrete
or similar construction.
4. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints.
5. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations.
6. Grind exposed joints smooth, and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut, or
abrade the surface of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with A WS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc
welding, appearance and quality of weld made, and methods in correcting welding work.
F. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded area of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of2.0 mils.
END OF SECTION
05500-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install rough carpentry work and related hardware for:
1. Wood grounds, nailers, plates and blocking.
2. Plywood sheathing and backing panels.
3. Other elements as indicated.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04200, Unit Masonry
B. Section 06190, Plate Connected Wood Trusses
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1. Provide lumber conforming to American Lumber Standards' Product Standard PS
20-70 and graded by rules of manufacturer's association (SPA, AP A, etc.) under
whose rules lumber is produced, with grade and mill marked on each piece.
2. National Forest Products Association (NFP A).
3. Southern Pine Association (SPA).
4. Western Wood Products Association (WWP A).
5. American Plywood Association (APA).
6. MIL-L-1914-C Lumber and Plywood, Fire Retardant Treated.
B. Moisture Content: Maintain within the requirements of the association under whose grading
rules it is produced. Unless otherwise indicated, provide seasoned lumber with 19%
06100-1
60-954.00
maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2" or less in nominal
thickness.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle materials in a manner to prevent damage. Place lumber and
plywood Wlder cover and off groWld in such manner as to insure proper drainage, ventilation
and protection from the weather.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, certifications, etc. for review in accordance with Article
6.11 of the General Conditions.
B. For pressure treated lumber, submit treatment plant data showing lumber type, certification
by treating plant stating chemicals and process used, net amoWlt of chemical retained and
conformance with applicable standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: For all lumber use Southern Pine No.2 or No.3 Common Yellow Pine or standard
grade Douglas Fir.
B. Plywood:
1. For exterior use, provide APA rated sheathing, exterior grade, conforming to U.S.
Department of Commerce PS 1, with span rating to suit spacing and thickness as
indicated on the Drawings.
2. For backing panels for mOWlting electrical and telephone equipment, provide
fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation APA C-D Plugged
Interior Grade with exterior glue, not less than 15/32" thick.
C. Pressure Treated Lumber:
1. Use lumber impregnated with Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA) conforming to
American Wood Preservers Association Standard P5 in a closed cylinder by vacuum
process in accordance with A WP A Standard C2. Retention of CCA compatible
water repellent, dry salts shall be .25 pOWld per cubic foot for above groWld use.
06100-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Mark each piece of pressure-treated lumber with an identification brand conforming
to the standards of A WP A.
3. All lumber shall be pressure preservative treated in accordance with A WP A Standard
C9.
4. On cut or sawed surfaces in preservative treated members apply two coats of the
same preservative used in the original treatment.
D. Plywood Siding: Provide Texture 1-11, Grade 303, parallel grooves 1/4-inch deep, 3/8-inch
wide; grooves at 4-inch on center and 5/8-inch thick, southern pine surface by Georgia
Pacific or equal.
E. Rough Hardware: Use the most suitable for project requirements. Provide expansion shields
or bolts and toggle bolts as required. All bolts, nails, screws, anchors, straps, clips, etc.,
shall be galvanized or stainless steel.
F. Connecting Hardware:
1. Nails: Galvanized steel common wire for exterior work.
2. Screws: Standard domestic manufacture, galvanized for exterior use.
3. Bolts: For wood fasteners, use galvanized steel conforming to the requirements of
ASTM A 307.
4. Steel Plates and Angles: Carbon steel, ASTM A 36, galvanized after fabrication as
shown on the Drawings.
5. Lag Screws, Shear Plates and Split Ring Connectors: Conform to the requirements
of the National Design Specifications for Stress-Grade Lumber and its Fastenings of
National Forest Products Association.
6. Powder actuated fasteners shall conform to Federal Specification GGG-D-777a, and
shall be installed as per manufacturer's printed directions. Powder charge shall be
powerful enough to prevent spalling of concrete.
G. Panel Edge Clips: Extruded aluminum or galvanized steel, H-shaped clips to prevent
differential deflection of roof sheathing.
06100-3
60-954.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General Work: Erect all work level and/or plumb and meeting required heights, layout and
details precisely. Install all work properly nailed or bolted and adequately braced, in
accordance with the best practices of the trade, by men skilled in the craft. Perform nailing
in accordance with the provisions of the Standard Building Code.
B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Nail plywood to supports with minimum 6-penny annular nails
at 6" on centers at panel edges and 12" on centers at intermediate supports, all in accordance
with local building codes. Allow 1I8-inch spacing at panel ends and 114 inch at panel edges.
C. Decorative Wood Brackets: Install at roof overhang as shown.
D. Plywood Siding: Secure to underside of roof sheathing as shown, use stainless steel or
galvanized fasteners for a permanent installation. Fasteners shall not go through roof
sheathing, but penetrate sheathing to secure the Texture 1-11 plywood.
E. Connections:
1. Subdrill timber for nails where necessary to avoid splitting.
2. Drill bolt holes 1132" larger than bolt diameter. Use square plate or malleable iron
washers under heads and nut where they bear against wood. Retighten exposed bolts
immediately prior to final inspection.
END OF SECTION
06100-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 06190
PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide prefabricated wood trusses for roof framing, including truss girders, bridging,
bracing and anchorages as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Designation Specification for Wood Construction, Latest Edition.
B. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards.
C. ASTM A446 - Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural Quality.
D. A WP A - American Wood Preservers I Association.
E. TPI - Truss Plate Institute.
F. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Roof Live and Dead Load: 20 psf live load on 20 psf superimposed dead load
(excluding truss weight) with deflection limited to 1/240.
B. Wind Load: 110 mph in accordance with the requirements of the Standard Building Code.
C. Design: Conform to requirements of National Design Specification for Wood
Construction.
D. Chord and Web Members: Southern Pine No.2 select structural or better with minimum
allowable stress value as follows:
Fb =
F =
v
F =
t
F =
a
E =
1200
90
625
1000
1600
psi (extreme fiber bending stress)
psi (horizontal shear stress)
psi (tensile stress)
psi (compressive stress parallel to grain)
ksi (modulus of elasticity)
06190-1
60-954.00
06190-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Use only pressure treated wood for all structural wood having exterior exposure and/or in
contact with concrete or masonry.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of prefabricated wood trusses
with minimum three years experience.
B. Design of Prefabricated Trusses and Truss Girders: Perform design under direct
supervision of Professional Engineer registered in State of Florida and experienced in
structural framing design of trusses.
C. Lumber Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
D. Truss Plates: In accordance with Truss Plate Institute.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to South Florida Building Code, for loads and other governing load criteria.
B. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings, design calculations including
rated load capacity of connectors, certification of connector capacities and manufacturer 's
license to fabricate trusses utilizing the proposed connector system, product data, including
wood preservative materials, all signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered
in the State of Florida.
B. Indicate framing system, loads and cambers, bearing and anchor details, bridging and
bracing, framed openings, erection plan and other pertinent details.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Transport and store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends.
B. Protect trusses from moisture, warpage and distortion during transit and when stored.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. Structural Lumber: No.2 Southern Pine (select structural).
B. Steel Connectors: ASTM A446 steel, Grade A, galvanized, die stamped with integral
teeth.
C. Fasteners: Galvanized for exterior, high humidity, and for treated wood locations, and
plain finish elsewhere. Size and type to suit condition.
D. Bearing Plate Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion
shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to hold masonry or concrete.
E. Wood Blocking: Solid block of same size as member or 1 "x3" "X" at intervals not to
exceed depth of members x 12 or 8-feet, whichever is smaller.
2.02 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne
preservative with 0.30 percent retainage.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
B. Cut members accurately to length to achieve tight joint connections.
C. Jig trusses during fabrication to assure accurate configuration. Press connectors into
lumber, both sides of joint simultaneously.
D. Build camber into truss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.
B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.
06190-3
60-954.00
06190-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of bearing and support items.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Place trusses true to line and level.
C. Provide temporary bracing to hold trusses in place until permanently secured.
D. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain trusses straight and in correct
position before inducing loads. Provide solid blocking between members at all support
points. Provide bridging as recommended by truss manufacturer.
E. Do not field cut trusses.
F. Securely fasten trusses to supporting walls or beams with hurricane clips or anchors, 16
gauge galvanized metal tie straps or equal.
G. Frame openings between trusses with lumber.
H. In placing and fastening of sheathing, conform to the Standard Building Code.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 06410
CUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Countertop in Cashier's area
1.02 REFERENCES
A. A WI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) - Quality Standards.
B. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact.
C. NEMA (National Electric Manufacturers Association) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Submit the following under the provisions of Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods,
joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes.
2. Samples: Submit two samples of each color of plastic laminate indicated.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AWl Custom quality.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity
conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy.
06410-1
60-954.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOP- FOR PLASTIC LAMINATE WORK
A. Plywood: Exterior Grade Type A-C for all plastic laminate work, thickness shall be as indicated.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Formica.
2. Nevamar Corp.
3. Wilsonart.
4. Approved Equal
2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, 0.050-inch thick GP-50 general purpose type, color and pattern as
selected. Provide scratch resistant laminate finish for countertops.
B. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD-3, 0.020-inch thick, BK-:-20, backing grade.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive.
B. Fasteners, Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.
C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble countertop units for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.
C. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
06410-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes.
Fit comers and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners.
E. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with concealed steel brackets at 16 inches on
center.
F. Edgings: Shall be tongue and grooved into plywood and set with glue.
PART 3"" EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure countertops in place; rigid, plumb, and level.
B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining and counter tops.
D. Secure countertops to walls using appropriate angles and anchorages.
E. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations.
3.02 ADIDSTING
A. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean countertop surfaces.
END OF SECTION
06410-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07100
ROOF COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof coating for new concrete surface where shown.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Cast-In-Place Concrete - Section 03300.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data, including specifications, surface preparation, mixing
and application directions.
B. Submit 6 inch x 6 inch sample on plywood substrate of the roof coating material.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply coating when there is a threat of rain, when it is raining, or when temperature
is less than 50 degrees F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COATING
A. Product shall be a one component, synthetic-rubber waterproofing coating with a solvent
base vehicle that will form a durable, rubbery, color stable, weather-resistant surface.
B. The standard of quality shall be Karnak #502 RC- W Elasto- Kote by Karnak Corporation (1-
800-526-4236) or accepted equal.
C. Elastomeric Primer: Equal to Karnak #96.
07100-1
60-954.00
07100-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Substrates shall be structurally sound, clean, dry and free of all dust, dirt, bitumens, oil,
pollution deposits, curing, forming and parting compounds and all other foreign matter, with
concrete fully cured and with a surface finish that has been given a steel trowel or light hair
broom finish.
1. Ensure that concrete roof deck has been given a steel trowel finish.
B. Allow fresh masonry to cure for 30 days before application of Karnak #502 RC- W Elasto
Kote. Surface to be coated shall be clean, free from dirt, dust, grease, oil and loose paint.
Patch and repair all cracks or holes with appropriate sealants or caulking materials. All
surfaces should be primed with Karnak #96 Elastomeric Primer prior to the application of
Karnak #502 RC-W Elasto-Kote.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Mix Kamak #502 RC-W Elasto-Kote thoroughly with a mechanical mixer prior to
application of the coating. Karnak #502 RC-W Elasto-Kote may be applied by brush, roller
or spray application.
1. Spray Application: Spray in a cross hatch method so as to achieve a pinhole-free
surface. Utilize a standard spray pump.
2. Roller Application: Roller application shall be made in a two coat application so as
to allow a total dry film thickness of a minimum of 18 mils.
3. Brush Application: When brushing, make sure Karnak #502 RC- W Elasto-Kote is
not applied too thin, and brush out all overlap marks.
4. Color: White.
5. Coverage Rate: Karnak #96 Elastomeric Primer shall be applied at a rate of 1/2
gallon per 100 sq. ft. Apply Karnak #502 RC- W Elasto-Kote in two coats at the rate
of 1 gallon per 100 sq. ft. Film thickness shall be approximately 18 mils dry and 36
mils wet. Karnak #502 RC- W Elasto-Kote will take approximately 24 hours to cure.
6. At parapet walls, extend coating a minimum of 8-inches up the parapet, terminate in
a weatherproof manner.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07212
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work includes building insulation as shown.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, certifications, samples, etc. in accordance with Article 6.11 of the
General Conditions.
1. Manufacturer's material handling and application instructions.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in original factory sealed containers/packages bearing manufacturer's label.
B. Store insulating materials off ground protected from the weather and within temperature
limits established by the manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Batt insulation.
1. Type: Kraft-faced glass fiber insulation complying with ASTM C 665, type II,
Classic "C".
2. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136 test.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics:
a. Maximum flame spread: 25.
b. Maximum smoke developed: 50.
07212-1
60-954.00
4. R-Value of 19.
5. Size: Thickness 6W', width 24", length as required.
B. Glass Fiberboard:
1. Type: Commercial wall insulation board with FRK-faced, Type III, and a density of
3 pounds per cubic feet, equal to 703 by Owens-Coming Fiberglass Corp.
2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics:
a. Max. Flame Spread: 25.
b. Max. Smoke Developed: 50.
4. R-Value of 6.5.
5. Size: thickness 1 ~-inch, width 24", length as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect surfaces to receive insulation to meet manufacturer's requirements.
B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in
each case.
1. Batts shall be installed over wood furring which shall be nailed to bottom chord of
wood trusses. Tightly abut batts to prevent thermal leaks.
2. Board Insulation: Fit each insulation board tight against furring. Apply foil faced
board to face to the interior.
END OF SECTION
07212-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07410
SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exposed Fasteners Ribbed Metal Roofing.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry
B. Section 07920, Sealants
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A-792: A255 Grade D (50,000 ksi) steel.
B. ASTM E 283: Static Air Infiltration.
C. ASTM E 331: Static Water Infiltration.
D. Herr Voss: Tension Leveling.
E. UL Rating: Wind Uplift approval conforming to Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Section 580
Specifications.
F. SMACNA: Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Exposed fastener ribbed metal roofmg over solid substrate.
B. Panels manufactured in continuous lengths up to 40 ft.
07410-1
60-954.00
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittal in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
B. Shop drawings, showing layout of panels, details of edge conditions, joints, comers, panel
profiles, clips, trim, flashing and special details shall be submitted for approval.
C. Samples illustrating gauge, finish, color and texture of materials to be used shall be
submitted for approval.
D. Panel manufacturer shall submit certification that the panels will be tension leveled during
the roll forming process.
E. Provide verification that panels are factory roll formed and UL 90 rated.
F. Distinguish between factory and field assembly work.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Panels adhere to the previously mentioned criteria as proven by the submittals.
B. Underwriters laboratories (UL) wind uplift resistance classification: Roof assembly shall be
classified as class UL 90 as defined by UL 580 specifications.
C. Static Air Infiltration: Completed roof system shall have a maximum of 0.06 CFM/sq. Ft.
with 6.24 PSF air pressure differential as per ASTM E 283.
D. Water Infiltration: No evidence of water penetration at an inward static air pressure
differential of not less than 6.24 PSF and not more than 12.00 PSF as per ASTM E 331.
E. Factory fabricated components shall be crated in cartons marked With the manufacturer's
name or trademark and a UL 90 label where applicable.
F. Prequalification: Submit identification of at least 3 projects of similar scope and complexity
along with the architect, owner and general contractor contacts. Applicator shall have three
years minimum experience in application of similar products.
G. Field measurements shall be taken prior to fabrication to assure symmetry.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.
0741O~2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Stack prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion, scratching and denting.
Elevate one end of each skid to allow for moisture run-off.
C. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration or staining.
D. Store material in a safe, dry, above-ground location.
E. No finished materials with strippable film shall be exposed to direct sunlight or extreme heat.
F. Protect all materials and installations from damage by other trades.
G. Do not allow material storage or traffic on installed panel surface.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Panel applicator shall provide a two-year weather tightness warranty.
B. Panel manufacturer shall provide a 20-year non-prorated warranty for the paint finish
covering cracking, checking blistering, peeling, flaking, chipping, chalking and resistance
to color fade.
C. One year warranty for labor and materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Metal Roofmg: Panels shall be equal to panel Max-Rib by McElroy or accepted equal.
Panel shall be 50,000 psi material in 24 gage steel, with standard Galvalume G-90 finish.
Stainless steel roof fasteners with heads to match the roof panel color.
1. Finish: Kynar 500 finish applied to the surface of G90 galvanized steel to give a
color that resists fading and chalking. Color shall be regal blue by McElroy.
B. Underlayment: 30 lb. Roofmg felt lapped, staggered and applied horizontally from eave to
ridge.
C. Plywood Deck: Per Section 06100.
D. Flashing and Accessories: Fabricated from same material as roof panels and to match finish,
in accordance with standard SMACNA procedures and details.
07410-3
60-954.00
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Panels 40 ft. and less will be in one continuous length.
B. Panels fabricated by a portable roll former will not be approved.
C. Fabricate trim and flashings from same material as the roof system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is even, smooth, sound and free of depressions, waves or
projections and properly sloped.
B. Installer shall examine all substrates on which work is to be applied. Any surface not
suitable for application of metal panel system shall be identified in writing to Owner's
representative.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide horizontal layers of 30# roofing felt parallel to the eave. Shingle rows of felt from
eave to ridge with a 6 in. minimum overlap and stagger felt ends.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to standards set forth in the SMACNA architectural sheet metal manuals.
B. Install panels plumb, level and straight with seams and ribs parallel, conforming to the
design as indicated.
C. Install panels so that they are weather tight - without waves, warps, buckles or distortions _
and allow for expansion and contraction. Exercise care in handling panels and trim to
. prevent surface damage.
D. Caulk all flashing and panel joints that require caulking to prevent water penetration.
E. Ribbed pans will be vertically broken under ridges and hooked at the eaves to insure weather
tightness.
F. Remove masking on trim flashings immediately after installation.
07410-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Hem all raw edges on flashings.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Dispose of excess materials and debris from the job site.
B. Replace damaged units and other components.
C. Leave panels clean and free from fringes, marks, grease and stains.
D. Thoroughly clean and touch-up any areas scarred during installation with a touch-up paint
approved by the panel manufacturer. Only minor scratches and fastener heads shall be
touched-up; any other damaged material shall be replaced.
END OF SECTION
07410-5
60-954.00
!.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07600
FLASIDNG AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide flashing and sheet metal work as shown on the Drawings and as required to provide
a watertight building envelope.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 07410, Sheet Metal Roofing
C. Section 07920, Sealants.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1. Comply with the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual of the Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
2. Standard Building Code.
3. Install and fasten sheet metal work in compliance with Factory Mutual (PM) 1-90
wind uplift requirements.
B. Coordination: Coordinate application of flashings with applications of roofing, protruding
materials and roof accessories, including piping, conduits, lightning protection system,
blocking, nailers, etc. in such a manner that complete installation is weathertight and in
accordance with the specified warranty requirements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, shop drawings, certifications, etc., in accordance with Article 6.11 of
the General Conditions.
07600-1
60-954.00
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data for all materials including all non-
metallic or composite flashings.
C. Samples: Submit 12" long samples of each material to be exposed as flashing or trim.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, shapes, thicknesses and type of materials, finishes,
fabrication details, anchors, connections, expansion joints and relation to adjacent work.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials from damage during transit, storage or installation.
B. Store products in dry secure area
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Furnish a three year warranty covering material and workmanship for all flashings in
conjunction with warranty of roofing systems. Warranty shall cover watertight integrity of
flashings for a period of three years, including repair and replacement of components or
system which become faulty or in disrepair during warranty period, at no cost to the Owner.
B. Faulty components and disrepair includes defects in manufacturer and installations, defects
in materials and leaks of any kind.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 525 with 90 zinc coating, 24 gauge minimum unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Lead Flashing: ASTM B29, 4 pound sheet lead.
C. Solder: ASTM B32, Sn 50.
D. Fasteners:
1. Nails: Flat head, annular ring, 12 gage minimum, of sufficient length to penetrate
backing at least 3/4 inch and of stainless steel or the same material as flashing metal
to prevent dielectric action.
2. Bolts, Screws and Rivets: Stainless steel or the same material as flashing metal to
prevent dielectric action and of sufficient size and strength to accomplish the task.
07600-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
III
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.02 FABRICATIONS
A. General:
1. Fabricate of materials scheduled in accordance with the approved shop dra~gs.
2. If no specific details are required, comply with the recommendations of the
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual of SMACNA.
3. Separate dissimilar metals from each other by painting each metal surface in the area
of contact with a bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as
recommended by the manufacturers of the dissimilar metals.
4. Provide for thermal expansion on running trim in items exposed for more than 15
feet continuous length at a minimum of one joint every ten feet.
5. Locate expansion joints within two feet of each comer or intersection of sheet metal
flashing and trim.
6. Fabricate and install work with lines and comers of exposed units true and accurate.
7. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool
marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal.
8. Provide uniform, neat seams with a minimum of solder, welds, and sealants.
9. Except as otherwise shown, fold back the sheet metal to form a hem on the concealed
side of exposed edges.
B. Seams:
1. Finish flat lock seams not less than one inch wide.
2. Finish solder-lap seams not less than one inch wide.
3. Lap unsoldered Plain-Lap Seams not less than three inches unless otherwise
specified.
C. Gutters:
1. The hung type of shape indicated and supported on underside by brackets that permit
free thermal movement of the gutter. Provide gutters in sizes indicated complete
with mitered comers, end caps, outlets, brackets, and other accessories necessary for
07600-3
60-954.00
installation. Bead with hemmed edge or reinforce the outer edge of gutter with a
stiffening bar not less than 3/4 by 3/16 inch of material compatible with gutter.
Fabricate gutters in sections not less than 8 feet. Lap the sections a minimum of one
inch in the direction of flow or provide with concealed splice plate 6 inches
minimum. Join the gutters, other than aluminum, by riveted and soldered joints.
Aluminum gutters shall be joined with riveted sealed joints. Provide expansion-type
slip joints midway between outlets. Install gutters below slope line of the roof.
Support gutters on adjustable hangers spaced not more than 30 inches on center or
as recommended by the manufacturer. Adjust gutters to slope uniformly to outlets,
with high points occurring midway between outlets. Fabricate hangers and
fastenings from metals compatible with the gutters.
D. Downspouts:
L Types, shapes and sizes are indicated. Provide complete including elbows and
offsets. Provide downspouts in approximately 10 foot lengths. Provide end joints
to telescope not less than 1/2 inch and lock longitudinal joints. Provide gutter outlets
with wire ball strainers for each outlet. Provide strainers to fit tightly into outlets and
be of the same material used for gutters. Keep downspouts not less than one inch
away from walls. Fasten to the walls at top, bottom, and at an intermediate point not
to exceed 5 feet on centers with leader straps or concealed rack-and-pin type
fasteners. Form straps and fasteners of metal compatible with the downspouts.
2. Terminations: Provide downspouts terminating in splash blocks with elbow-type
fittings. Concrete splash block is specified in Section 03300, "Cast-In-Place
Concrete. "
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install the work in accordance with the approved shop drawings.
1. Weatherproofing: Finish watertight and weathertight where so required. Make all
lock seams work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder.
2. Joints: Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength or
stiffness. Provide for thermal expansion.
3. Cleats: Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats, evenly spaced
not over 12 inches on center, without nailing through the metal.
07600-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Size: 2 inches wide x 3 inches long.
b. Secure with two nails folding cleat over nail heads.
c. Lock cleat into seam of sheet metal work.
4. Nailing:
a. Space all nails, rivets and screws not more than eight inches apart and where
exposed to the weather, use lead washers.
b. For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs.
c. Exposed face nailing will not be permitted.
d. Use galvanized nails only.
5. Embedment: Embed all metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of sealant.
Embed metal flashing flanges in roofing a minimum of four inches.
6. Soldering:
a. Thoroughly clean and tin all joint materials prior to soldering.
b. Perform all soldering slowly with a well heated iron in order to heat the
seams thoroughly and to completely fill them with solder.
c. Make all exposed soldering on finished surfaces neat, full flowing, and
smooth.
d. After soldering, thoroughly wash acid flux with a soda solution.
7. Isolate dissimilar materials to prevent electrolysis.
3.03 FINISH
A. To match fmishand color of roof panels.
3.04 SHEET METAL WEIGHTS, THICKNESSES AND GAGES
Sheet Metal Items
Aluminum. Inch
Downspouts and leaders
Downspout clips and anchors
Downspout straps, 2-inch
0.32
0.125 anchor
0.60
07600-5
60-954.00
07600-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Sheet Metal Items
Aluminum. Inch
Strainers, wire diameter or gage
Gutters: Gutter section
Continuous cleat
Hangers, dimensions
.144 diameter
.032
.032
1 inch x .080 inch
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07920
CAULKING AND SEALANTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide sealants and caulking as required, in the locations indicated on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
1.02 DEFINITIONS:
A. Sealant: A weatherproof elastomer used in filling and sealing joints, having properties of
adhesion, cohesion, extensibility under tension, compressibility and recovery, designed to
make joints air and watertight, designed generally for application to joints at exterior of
structures and to other joints subject to movement.
B. Caulking Compound: A material used in filling joints and seams, having properties of
adhesion and cohesion, not required to have extensibility and recovery properties, and
usually applied at joints at interior of structures, not subject to movement or weathering.
C. Caulking: The term is used here to denote the process of filling the joints, without regard to
type of material.
1.03 SUBMIrr ALS
A. Submit product data, samples, certifications, manufacturer's complete instructions for
preparing surfaces, mixing, applying and curing the products, etc.
B. Submit a two year guarantee on sealant type caulking work against joint failure, which is
defined as leaks of air or water, evidence of loss of adhesion between sealant and joint edge,
evidence of loss of cohesion, fading of sealant material, or migration of sealant.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the services of an installer/applicator who has at least 5 years satisfactory,
continuous experience in the application of the types of materials required.
07920-1
60-954.00
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store and handle materials so as to prevent the inclusion of foreign matter or damage of
materials by water or breaking. Store in original containers until ready for use and remove
and discard any material showing evidence of damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Joint Types: For horizontal joints, use self-leveling compounds and, for all other joints, use
non-sag compounds, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
B. Color: For concealed joints, use sealant with manufacturer's standard color which has the
best overall performance qualities for the application indicated. For exposed joints, use
specified sealant with color selected from manufacturer's standard colors, unless special or
custom colors are required or specified.
C. Compatibility: Before purchase, confirm that the specified sealants are compatible with the
materials of the joint surfaces, joint fillers and other materials in the joint system where they
are to be applied.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Primer: Where primer is required by sealant manufacturer, provide a compound designed to
insure the adhesion of sealant, as manufactured by the sealant manufacturer and selected for
compatibility with both the sealant and substrate.
B. Exterior Sealants:
1. Vertical or Inclined Joints: One component low modulus, non sag, polysulfide or
polyurethane sealant with Shore A hardness of 15 to 35, minimum elongation of
100%, meeting ASlM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS and equal to Bostik Chem-
Calk 100 or One-Part Joint Sealant Based on Morton Thiokol's LP Liquid Polysulfide
Polymer.
2. Horizontal Joints: One component, selfleveling, polysulfide or polyurethane sealant
with Shore A hardness of 15 to 45, meeting ASlM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade
P, and equal to Bostik Chern Calk 950 or One-Part Joint Sealant Based On Morton
Thiokol's LP Liquid Polysulfide Polymer.
07920-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Interior Sealants and Caulking:
I. General Use: One component, acrylic latex caulking, meeting ASlM C834 with
minimum 75% recovery per ASlM C736 and equal to Bostik Chern-Calk 600.
2. Exposed Joints with Little Movement: One component, non-sag, mildew resistant,
silicone sealant with Shore A hardness of 25 to 30, meeting ASlM C920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25 and equal to General Electric Silicone Sanitary 1702 Sealant, or
Bostik Silicone Rubber Bathroom Caulk, or one component butyl rubber sealant,
gum grade, for maximum joint movement of :f:5%, meeting Federal Specification TT-
S-1657, and equal to Bostik Chern-Caulk 300.
3. Non-Exposed Acoustical Joints: Sealant as specified in 2. above or one component
acoustical caulking, non-drying, non-hardening, synthetic rubber, normally not
paintable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Joints:
1. Thoroughly clean all joints ofloose particles by blowing out or vacuuming the joints,
and ensure that the sUrfaces to be contacted by sealant are dry, fully free oflaitance,
loose aggregate, form release agents, curing compounds, water repellants and other
surface treatments.
2. Install joint packing sized to require 20 to 50 percent compression upon insertion,
and placed so that sealant depth is approximately 1/2 joint width. In joints not of
sufficient depth to allow packing, install polyethylene bondbreaking tape at back of
joint. Lengthwise stretching of packing materials shall be avoided.
3. Where required to protect adjacent sUrfaces, apply masking tape in continuous strips
in alignment with joint edge and immediately remove after joints have been sealed
and tooled.
4. Where required by sealant manufacturer, prime joints to receive sealant in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. Brush primer uniformly upon all sUrfaces of joint
and allow sufficient drying time before caulking.
07920-3
60-954.00
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Sealant:
1. Mix and apply sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. Do not use material which has exceeded the manufacturer's recommended potential
open time (pOT Life).
3. Apply sealant and caulking material under pressure to fill joints completely without
air pockets or voids and tool joints concave with solvent recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Locations: Apply sealant around penetrations of floor slabs and exterior walls for piping,
conduits, ductwork and similar items, at top of slabs and exterior face of walls, around
exterior perimeter of door frames and windows and at other exterior locations shown on the
Drawings.
C. lbresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of caulking sealant with excess material removed.
D. Protection:
1. Cure sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to obtain maximum
bond to surfaces, cohesive strength, and durability at earliest possible date.
2. Repair and replace sealants damaged or showing evidence of deterioration before
time of final acceptance.
E. Cleaning: Clean adjacent surfaces free of sealant and soiling resulting from this work as
work progresses, using solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by the manufacturer.
Leave all finished work ina neat and clean condition.
END OF SECTION
07920-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08110
HOLLOW METAL WORK.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK. INCLUDED
A. Provide hollow metal work including doors, door frames and necessary accessories as
indicated on Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK.
A. Section 04000, Unit Masonry
B. Section 07920, Caulking and Sealants
C. Section 08710, Finish Hardware
D. Section 09900, Painting
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, certifications, etc., in accordance with Article 6.11 of
the General Conditions.
B. Submit properly identified product data including manufacturer's specifications and
installation directions.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating sizes, elevations, locations, construction
details, gages, finishes, reinforcement, anchors, light openings, glazing stops and hardware
locations.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide hollow metal doors and frames fabricated and installed in accordance with the
following standards except as otherwise indicated:
1. Steel Door Institute's (SDI) Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames.
B. Coat hollow metal doors and frames with a factory applied prime coat in accordance with
the requirements of Section 09900 and compatible with the finish coat specified.
08110-1
60-954.00
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Protect doors and frames during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling,
and deterioration.
B. Ship welded frames in bundles securely strapped or in packages.
C. At the building site, store doors and frames under cover. A void the use of nonvented plastic
or canvas shelters which create a humidity chamber. Store frames in an upright position on
at least 4-inch wood sills or on floors in a manner that will prevent rust or damage. Provide
a 1/4" air space between the doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTED MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide doors and frames from same manufacturer. Subject to the requirements of this
Section, provide doors and frames as manufactured by Allied Steel Products, Firedoor
Corporation, Republic Builders Products Corp., or equal.
2.02 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Fabricate interior frames to profiles indicated of 16 gage bonderized electro-zinc coated sheet
steel in accordance with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 591, Class C.
B. Fabricate exterior frames to profiles indicated of 16 gage bonderized hot-dip zinc coated
sheet steel in accord with ASTM A 525, G90 or ASTM A 526, 1.25 oz. zinc per sq. ft.
C. Frames: Fully welded, custom type, with mitered or butted head and jamb members with
integral stops and with combination buck and trim as shown, and comers having continuous
welds ground flush and smooth without dishing.
D. Hardware Reinforcements and Preparations:
1. Mortise, reinforce and drill/tap the frames for mortised hardware in accordance with
approved finish hardware schedule and templates by hardware supplier.
2. Drill and tap for surface applied hardware in the field.
3. Locate finish hardware in accordance with Recommended Locations for Builder's
Hardware, published by National Builder's Hardware Association or as otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
08110-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Butt (Hinge) Reinforcing: Steel plate 3/16 inch thick by 1-1/4 inches minimum to
1-1/2 inches maximum wide by 10 inches long, offset where required so faces of
butts are flush with door frame edge, secured by not less than six spot welds.
5. Strike Reinforcement: Offset clips of 12 gage steel, 1-1/2 inches x 3 inches long.
6. Closer Shoe Reinforcing: 10 gage steel plates, minimum 14 inches long x 1 inch
wide, in both rabbets (each side of stop) and top of head section near corner of hinge
jamb. Provide styrofoam or treated wood over plates to allow closer foot screws to
seat without interference from grout fill.
E. Silencer (Mute) Provisions: Punch frames to receive silencers on strike jamb as scheduled
in Section 08710.
F. Grout Guards: Provide 26 gage sheet metal covers welded to the back of frames at hinges,
locks, bolts, tapped reinforcements at hardware and silencer locations.
G. Jamb Anchors: Provide in accordance with frame manufacturer's recommendations for
attachment to masonry walls, concrete columns and metal stud system as shown on
Drawings.
H. Floor Anchors: Provide 14 gauge galvanized sheet steel angle shaped anchors on each jamb
which extends to the floor, punched for not less than two 1/4 inch diameter bolts.
1. Spreaders: Provide frames with temporary steel spreader bars tack welded to jambs to
maintain full rigidity and proper alignment during installation.
J. Grout solid all hollow metal door frames.
1. Provide sheet metal covers (grout guards) welded in back of frames at hinges, locks,
bolts and tapped reinforcements at hardware.
2. At silencer locations furnish suitable removable plugs in holes to keep free of grout.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Fabricate exterior doors of 16 gage bonderized hot-dip zinc coated stretcher leveled sheet
steel in accordance with ASTM A 525, G90 or ASTM A 526, 1.25 oz. zinc per sq. ft.
B. Types: Custom flush, seamless hollow construction with louvers or vision panels where
shown.
08110-3
60-954.00
C. Sizes and Thicknesses: Size shall be as indicated and thickness 1-3/4 inches unless
otherwise specified or shown. Provide undercuts where indicated for ventilation, 3/4 inch
maximum undercut.
D. Bottom Clearance: Doors which close against thresholds shall have a bottom clearance of
1/8 to 3/8 inch above finish floor. Doors which do not close against thresholds shall have
a bottom clearance of 1/4 to 1/2 inch above finish floor, except for undercutting of door.
E. Vision Panel: Vision panel openings shall be reinforced and glass mouldings shall be
provided to secure glazing as specified in Section 08800 Glass and Glazing. Mouldings shall
be mitered and welded into a continuous frame with the exterior side frame welded in place
and the loose frame secured with pan head screws.
1. Vision panel for door to the Chlorine Room must be shatter resistant material and gas
tight installation at the factory.
F. Door Perimeters:
1. Stile Edges:
a. Reinforce stile edges full height with 16 gage bonderized zinc coated steel
channels.
b. Bevel for Single Acting Doors: 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
2. Door Tops:
a. Reinforce door tops with full width 16 gage bonderized zinc coated steel
channels.
b. Provide exterior door tops with flush surface.
3. Door Bottoms:
a. Reinforce door bottoms with full width 16 gage bonderized zinc coated steel
channels.
b. Provide weep holes in bottom of exterior doors on each side.
4. Weatherstrips: As per Section 08710.
G. Stiffeners: Provide vertical members spaced not more than 6 inches o.c. with shape standard
to manufacturer.
08110-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H. Core Fill: Provide manufacturer's standard mineral core filler.
1. Hardware Reinforcements and Preparation:
1. Mortise and Reinforce as Follows:
a. Drill/tap for mortised hardware in accordance with accepted finish hardware
schedule and templates furnished by hardware supplier.
b. Perform drilling and tapping for surface applied hardware in the field.
c. Locate finish hardware in accordance with Recommended Locations for
Builder's Hardware, published by National Builder's Hardware Association
or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
2. Butt (Hinge) Reinforcing: Steel plate, 7 gauge and 1-114 inches minimum to 1-112
inches maximum wide by 10 inches long. Offset where required and secure by not
less than six spot welds.
2.04 FINISHING AND SHOP PAINT
A. After.fabrication, grind exposed weld marks smooth and flush, clean and degrease surfaces,
apply metallic filler, sand smooth and shop prime in accordance with Section 09900, with
a primer compatible with the finish coating therein specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Do not proceed with the work until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Frames
1. Install plumb, level and true to line, secured in openings in compliance with the
provisions ofSDI-105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Install frames in accordance with accepted shop drawings and manufacturer's printed
instruction.
08110-5
60-954.00
B. Doors:
1. Install in frames plumb, level and true to line with clearances as specified in SDI-
100.
2. Apply hardware and adjust to achieve smooth and quiet operation.
3. Install weatherstrips and thresholds at all exterior doors.
C. Final Adjustments: Make final adjustments as follows:
1. Door Contact with Silencers: Doors shall strike a minimum of two silencers without
binding lock or latch bolts in the strike plate.
2. Head, Strike and Hinge Jamb Margin: 1/8 inch.
3. Meeting Edge Clearance, Pairs of Doors: :1::1/16 inch.
4. Bolts and Screws: Leave tight and firmly seated.
3.03 PAINTING
A. Touch up any scratches or abrasions in prime coat as necessary to restore quality of original
prime coat.
B. Apply finish paint coats in accordance with Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
0811 0-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08200
BI-FOLD WOOD DOORS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide bi-fold wood doors as shown on the Drawings, in the door schedules and as specified
herein.
1.02 SUBMITI ALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, etc., in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General
Conditions.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit and storage by wrapping to prevent drainage, soiling and
deterioration, and tag to designate opening per door schedule on shop drawings.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Specific Product Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form,
signed by manufacturer and installer, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which
have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction below face
veneers, or which do not conform to tolerance limitations ofNWWDA and A WI.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Bi-Fold Closet Doors: Provide hardboard grade flush doors conforming to NWWDA I.S.l-
A. Doors standard grade, conforming to NWWDA I.S.6. Doors shall be 1-3/8 inch thick.
Equip doors with the manufacturer's standard hardware, including tracks, hinges, guides, and
pulls.
08200-1
60-954.00
08200-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
B. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on
Drawings.
C. Clearances:
1. Provide clearances of lI8-inch at jambs and heads lI2-inch from bottom of door to
top of floor finish or covering.
3.02 FIELD FINISHING
A. Doors to receive field finishing shall be factory primed or sealed, as required, and then shall
be finished in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide wood doors as shown on the Drawings, in the door schedules and as specified
herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, certifications, etc., in accordance with Article 6.11
of The General Conditions.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and
louvers and similar components.
C. Certifications: Include certifications to show compliance with specifications.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit and storage by wrapping to prevent drainage, soiling and
deterioration, and tag to designate opening per door schedule on shop drawings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the applicable requirements
of the following standards:
1. National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA).
2. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWl).
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Specific Product Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard
form, signed by manufacturer and installer, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors
which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction
below face veneers, or which do not conform to tolerance limitations of NWWDA and
AWL
08210-1
60-954.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide flush doors conforming to the requirements of NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.
6, unfinished, solid core, standard grade face veneers, for painted finish. Provide doors
with cores of particle board, vertical edge banding of the same species as the face veneers,
without finger jointing, and face veneers of birch.
B. Adhesives: Craze resistant, non-shrinking, higWy moisture resistant and of a chemically
modified resin for gap filling.
C. Finish all members smooth, ready for painting as specified in Section 09900 Painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
B. Install finish hardware as specified in Section 08710.
C. Seal the top and bottom edges of the doors, and all wood surfaces exposed in making
cutouts, with varnish or shellac to prevent moisture penetration.
D. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on
Drawings.
E. Clearances:
1. Clearances of lI8-inch at jambs and heads, and lI2-inch from bottom of door to top
of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown and/or scheduled,
provide lI4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.
F. Bevel doors lI8-inch in 2-inches at lock and hinge edges.
G. Undercutting of doors is not permitted.
END OF SECTION
08210-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK. INCLUDED
A. The work under this Section includes providing aluminwn windows.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07920, Sealants
B. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements: Windows shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Building Code
for wind pressure and infiltration and as specified hereinafter.
B. Air infiltration shall not exceed the amount established by AAMA 101 for each window type
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
C. Water penetration shall not exceed the amount established by AAMA 101 for each window
type when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547.
1.04 PERFORMANCE AND TESTING
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with air infiltration tests, water resistance
tests, uniform load deflection tests, and uniform load structural tests specified in
ANSI/ AAMA 101-88 for type and classification of window units required in each case. All
units shall meet or exceed the requirements of C60 or C50 as specified for each window and
shall be designed for the loads specified below.
1. Design Load:
a Horizontal Sliding Window: 60 psi.
b. Fixed Window: 50 psi.
2. Test units shall be completely assembled windows constructed in accordance with
the drawings unless otherwise specified. The units shall be certified with the
08520-1
60-954.00
specified glazing and glazing gaskets for this project unless the glazing of the tested
unit is of a heavier type.
B. Air Infiltration:
1. With the window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with
ASTM E-283 at a static air pressure difference of 1.57 psf.
2. Horizontal Sliding Window:
a. Air infiltration shall not exceed a maximum value of 0.19 cfinlft. For sash.
3. Fixed Window:
a. Air infiltration not to exceed 0.01.
C. Water Resistance:
1. With the window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with
ASTM E-331 at static air pressure difference of6.0 psffor horizontal sliding window
and 7.5 psffor fixed window.
2. There shall be no water leakage as defined in ASTM E-331 at this specified static air
pressure difference to meet the performance requirement.
3. Test shall be completed with and without exterior applied screens.
4. No members shall deflect more than L/175 of its span at the specified load.
D. Uniform Load Structural:
1. With window sash and ventilators closed and locked, test unit in accordance with
ASTM E-330 at a static air pressure difference of 60 psf for horizontal sliding
window and 52.5 for fixed window, with high pressure applied first on one side of
the unit and then on the other side.
2. Static air pressure difference shall be 1 ~ times the design load pressure.
3. At conclusion of test, there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to
fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or actuating mechanisms nor any other
damage which would cause the window to be inoperable.
4. Permanent deformation of any window, sash or ventilator member shall not exceed
4% of its span.
08520-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Testing: Where the manufacturer's standard window units comply with requirements and
have been tested in accordance with specified tests, provide certification by manufacturer
showing compliance with such tests; otherwise, perform required tests through a recognized
testing laboratory or agency and provide certified test results.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, requirements of aluminum windows, terminology
and standards of performance, and fabrication workmanship are those specified and
recommended in ANSI/AAMA 101-88.
1.06 SUBMITI ALS
A. Submit in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions. Shop drawings shall
indicate details of sections, connections, fasteners, anchors and relation to surrounding work.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including window schedules showing locations, wall
elevations at W' seals, typical unit elevations at 3/4" scale and full size detail sections of
every typical composite member. Show anchors, hardware, operators, and other components
not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details.
C. Samples: submit samples of each required aluminum finish, on 12" long sections of extrusion
shapes as required for window units.
1. NE reserveS" right to require additional samples which will show fabrication
techniques, workmanship of component parts and design of hardware and other
exposed auxiliary items.
D. Certification: Where manufacturer's standard window units comply with requirements and
have been tested in accordance with specified tests, provide certification by manufacturer
showing compliance with such tests; otherwise, perform required tests through a recognized
testing laboratory or agency and provide certified results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATION
A. Horizontal Sliding Windows: Aluminum shall conform to AAMA HL-40 HP Window
Specifications.
1. The design shall be a sliding sash and fixed lite window.
08520-3
60-954.00
2. Aluminum shall be of commercial quality and of proper alloy for window
construction free from defects impairing strength and durability. All extruded
sections shall be of 5063- T5 alloy temper, and shall have a minimum ultimate tensile
strength of22,000 psi and a yield of 16,000 psi.
3. Window Members: Main frame and sash members shall have a nominal wall
thickness of not less than 0.62" except for fin trim either integral or applied. Frame
sill members shall have a nominal wall thickness of 0.078". The standard wall
thickness tolerances as defmed by the Aluminum Association shall apply. The
master frame shall be no less than 3-5/8" in depth.
4. Fasteners: All screws and other miscellaneous fastening devices incorporated in the
product shall be of aluminum, stainless steel, or other non-corrosive material
compatible with aluminum. Cadmium or zinc plated steel, where used, shall be in
accordance with ASTM A165 or B633. Nickel or chrome plated steel, where used,
shall be in accordance with ASTM B-456-79.
5. Hardware: hardware having component parts which are exposed shall be of
aluminum, stainless steel, or other noncorrosive material compatible with aluminum.
Cadmium or zinc plated steel, where used, must be in accordance with ASTM
Specifications A 164-71 or A 165-71.
6. Weatherstripping: All window units shall be weatherstripped with a jacketed foam
type weatherstripping or pile type weatherstripping with center fin so that there is no
metal-to-metal contact betweeri the master frame and the operating sash. All
weatherstripping shall be installed in specially extruded parts and secured to prevent
movement, shrinkage, or loss when removing sash for either cleaning or repair and
during normal sash operation. Jacketed foam weatherstripping, where used, must
conform to AAMA Specification 701-2.
B. Construction:
1. Assembly: The windows shall be assembled in a workmanlike manner to perform as
herein specified and to assure neat and weathertight construction.
2. Main Frame: All joints of the main frame shall be butt type construction and secured
by means of two (2) screws in each comer anchored in integral screw ports. The
main frame at the junction of the sill and jamb shall be sealed on the outside with a
good grade of sealant meeting the requirements of AAMA 803.3. A continuous
stainless steel roller track is used at the operating sash. Frame sill shall have
minimum height of 2 W' with a minimum of two weep slots for proper water
drainage.
08520-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Sashes: Sash members shall be of butt type joined at comers with screws in integral
screw ports which can be easily removed for repair or reglazing. The meeting rails
of both sash shall interlock in the closed position. Brass roller assemblies are used
at the sill of each sash.
4. Glazing Material: Glass shall be set in channel type vinyl gaskets. Vinyl shall be of
materials compatible with aluminum which will not promote corrosion and shall be
resistant to deterioration by all forms of weathering and shall be suitably retained to
maintain a watertight seal between the glass and its surrounding frame. Flexible
vinyl, where used, shall be equal to commercial Standard CS230-60.
5. Hardware: Locking arrangement at meeting rail shall be a device that provides for
positive locking. All latching arrangements at the meeting rail shall be easily
replaced and repaired without disassembly of each members. Any window over 37
inches in height shall come standard with two locking devices at the meeting rail.
All windows shall meet AAMA Specification 1302 and ASTM specification F 588
for forced entry requirements. Locking arrangement on the meeting rails shall be of
the carn action type, pulling sash together.
6. Interior Trim: Interior trims, closures, angles, etc. shall be of extruded shapes with
a waIl thickness of no less than 0.050" and of6063-T5 aluminum alloy and temper.
Snap trim dimensions will be in accordance with dimensions as furnished in the
architectural details. On all interior trim, no exposed fasteners shall be allowed.
7. Manufacturer: Window shall be equal to #4000 by Allenco Commercial Division or
accepted equal.
2.02 FIXED WINDOWS
A. Aluminum Fixed Windows: shall conform to AAMA-F-50 HC.
B. Manufacturer: Window shall be equal to #615F by Allenco Commercial Division or accepted
equal.
2.03 GLASS AND GLAZING
A. Glass shall be as specified in Section 08800.
2.04 FINISH
A. Shall be a Kynar finish, color as selected.
08520-5
60-954.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Coordination And Measurements: Measurements shall be taken at the building to assure
proper erection of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking in the field all
dimensions, whether or not shown on the Drawings, upon which the accurate fitting together
and build-in of this work may depend, or which would affect the proper installation of the
work.
B. Dissimilar metals shall be insulated against electrolysis or galvanic action. All concealed
surfaces of aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry shall be painted with black
asphaltum.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Windows shall be securely anchored into place in properly prepared openings. The openings
must be square, plumb and level to prevent distortion of windows. The window frames shall
not be distorted by erection screws or fittings and shall not interfere with the operating
mechanism.
B. Caulking shall be as specified in Section 07920 Caulking and Sealants.
C. Windows shall be suitable for field glazing as specified in Section 08800 Glass and Glazing,
with snap-in rolled aluminum glazing beads furnished by the manufacturer of the aluminum
windows. Installation of bead in field shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Metal surfaces of windows shall be cleaned on both the inside and outside of all mortar,
plaster, paint and other foreign matter to present a neat appearance and prevent fouling of
weathering surfaces, weatherstripping or the operation of hardware. In addition, windows
shall be washed offwith a stiff fiber brush, soap and water, and thoroughly rinsed with clear
water. Where aluminum windows have become stained, or discolored, they shall be cleaned
or have finish restored in accordance with recommendations of the Architectural Aluminum
Manufacturer's Association. Stained, discolored or abraded windows that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired shall be replaced with new windows at no additional cost to the
Owner.
END OF SECTION
08520-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
P ART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all finish hardware as herein specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, schedules, samples, etc., in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General
Conditions.
B. Before ordering any hardware, submit samples of every different item of Finish Hardware
for inspection as to quality, finish and design, and obtain written approval for each item
before delivering any hardware. In case the samples are disapproved, submit other samples
until satisfactory samples are approved.
C. Submit complete schedule of Finish Hardware for approval, with each item listed being in
accordance with the approved samples. Identify each item with respect to manufacture,
brand, catalog number, materials, finish, dimensions and operation, as well as location,
operation and use in the buildings. The Hardware Schedule will be checked for quality and
types only. Correct any errors, omissions and nonconformance with the hardware
requirements.
D. Templates: Promptly following approval of the Hardware Schedule, furnish and deliver
template information to the fabricators of items of metal work to which finishing hardware
is to be applied, and make such deliveries in ample time to avoid delays in such work of said
fabricators. Provide drawings, schedules and detailed information to other trades as
necessary for them to accommodate and prepare their work to receive the finishing.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store finish hardware, packed in approved manufacturer's containers, complete
with trimmings, bolts, screws, washers, etc., as required for application and securement, each
bearing a suitable label stating the quantity and kind of contents of said container, as well as
identifying marks relating to the approved Hardware Schedule and its location in the
building.
08710-1
60-954.00
08710-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hardware shall be uniform in color, free of imperfections affecting serviceability or
appearance.
B. Hardware furnished in connection with doors and frames requiring fire rated labels shall be
approved for such use, and bear such labels, as required.
C. Hardware shall meet the requirements of the Standard Building Code, all applicable labeling
authorities and requirements of Division 8, Doors.
D. Provide items not specifically listed, but incidental to or required for completion ofproject,
conforming in class, quality and type as required for particular use or as specified in like and
similar locations. Provide all fastenings, templates and all accessory items scheduled and/or
required to complete project.
E. Coordinate all requirements of the Contract Documents for items that affect the work of this
Section, including the coordination of finish hardware and electronic equipment with related
trades. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings for work of other trades and provide
hardware templates to such trades.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Except overhead closers, furnish the manufacturer's guarantee in writing against failure due
to defective materials and workmanship for a period of one year commencing on the date of
final acceptance, and in the event of such failure, promptly repair or replace with no
additional costs to the Owner.
B. Furnish the manufacturer's guarantee in writing for overhead closers against failure due to
defective materials and workmanship for a period of three years commencing onthe date of
final acceptance, and in the event of such failure, promptly repair or replace at no additional
costs to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following products manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Butts: Hager, Stanley, Lawrence
2. Locks: Best Lock Company only.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Cylinders: As specified.
4. Closers: LCN, Yale, Corbin
5. Stop and Holders: Ives, Quality, Glynn-Johnson
6. Miscellaneous Items: Cipco, Ives, Quality, Baldwin
7. Thresholds: Pemko, Zero, Reese
2.02 BUTT HINGES
A. Stanley three knuckle design, plain and concealed bearing as specified, with NRP
(nonremovable pin) feature. Use stainless steel for interior and exterior locations. Unless
otherwise scheduled, use hinges of the following weight, size and hinge type:
1. Butt hinges required per door leaf:
a. Doors 60" to 90" in height - 1-1/2 pairs
b. Doors 90" to 120" in height - 2 pairs
2. Sizes and weight requirements:
a. Doors up to and including 36 inches in width.
CB1960 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 - US32D
2.03 LOCKSETS
A. Best Series design "30H" with Lever #7 (finish US32D stainless steel), heavy duty
commercial, Grade 1.
B. Lock Strikes: US32D finish with lip lengths not to exceed 1/8-inch beyond trim of door or
frame.
2.04 KEYS AND KEYING
A. Furnish all locks with removable core. Furnish temporary cores and/or cylinders as required
during construction.
B. Furnish minimum 6 pin keyway system, keyed as determined by the Owner and Engineer,
allowing for maximum future expansion.
08710-3
60-954.00
C. Provide two change keys for each lock and cylinder, one master keys for each master key set,
one construction master keys and two extractor keys.
2.05 DOOR CLOSER
A. LCN 4040 series, cast iron cases, full rack and pinion design, adjustable spring power, with
independent valves for latching speed, backcheck and backcheck position, with maximum
2-1/4 inch project, with sprayed aluminum finish.
B. Size all closers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Furnish closers, 4040 CUSH series, at exterior outswinging doors requiring a closer.
D. Furnish 1 O-year warranty for all closures.
E. Where possible, install closers out of public view, or as determined by Engineer.
2.06 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Where a door is not indicated to swing to a wall, provide stops as follows:
1. Exterior doors: Corbin No. 1885 series, US26D.
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Thresholds and Weatherstripping: As manufactured by Pemko and as detailed on the
Drawings and indicated in the hardware schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine equipment and surface on which finish hardware is to be installed, for conditions
that will adversely affect the quality of the installation. Do not proceed with the installation
until adverse conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install finish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's templates and
instructions. Fit hardware accurately and properly then fasten fixed parts securely for
smooth, trouble-free and nonbinding operation. Fit faces of mortised parts snugly and flush.
08710-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Install operating parts for free and smooth operation without binding, sticking or excessive
clearance. Make maximum use of concealed fastenings for security.
B. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in Recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware, published by the National Builders' Hardware Association, except as otherwise
specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
C. Set items level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
anchors and fasteners in accordance with industry standards.
E. Locks: Install locks to engage in strike.
F. Closers: Do not mount closers on public side of doors. Carefully adjust closers to operate
evenly and noiselessly.
G. Hinges and Stops: Coordinate the sizing and placement of regular and wide-throw hinges
and door stops so that all doors can open and be held 170 degrees open, or 90 degrees open
where a wall intervenes.
3.03 ADmSTING AND CLEANING
A. Examination Requirements: After installation, examine in place to assure complete and
proper installation.
B. Adjusting and Lubrication: Adjust and lubricate bearing surfaces of moving parts. Adjust
latching and holding devices for proper function and operating force and door control devices
for speed and power.
C. Cleaning Requirements:
1. Remove protective materials and thorougWy clean exposed surfaces of hardware.
2. Prior to final cleaning for the Engineer's acceptance, check hardware for surface
damage. Replace damaged items.
08710-5
60-954.00
3.04
Pair Hinges
Deadlock
Pull Plate
Push Plate
Closer
Kick Plate
Wall Bumper
Threshold
Set Weatherstripping
Door Shoe
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HW-l (Jan., Elec., Stor. and Chlorine Rooms)
1-1/2 Pair Hinges A5111 x 630 x NRP
1 Lockset F07
1 Threshold 168A
1 Set Weatherstripping 303A V
1 Door Shoe 217 A
lA: Add 3 pairs of hinges for double doors
HW-2 (Restroom)
1-1/2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A5111 x 630 x NRP
F17 x 630
J405 x 630
1301 x 630
C020 11
1102 x 630
L02251
168A
303A V
217A
HW-3 (Office, Cashier Areas)
1-1/2
1
1
1
1
1
Pair Hinges
Lockset
Closer
Threshold
Set Weatherstripping
Door Shoe
A5111 x 630 x NRP
F08
C020 11
168A
303A V
217A
HW-4 (Interior Door)
1-1/2 Pair Hinges
1 Lockset
A5111 US26D
F04
HW-5 (Gate)
1
Dead Lock
F17 x 630
08710-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
, I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK. INCLUDED
A. Provide glass and glazing as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of the Standard Building Code with respect to wind pressures and
infiltration and with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association's (FGMA)
Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.
B. Determine actual sizes to which glass must be cut from measurements taken at the job site.
Any trimming or edge nipping of glass after shipment will not be permitted.
C. Use glass conforming to ASTM C1048 for Heat-Treated Flat Glass, ASTM C1172 for
Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples, etc. in accordance with Article 6.11 of the
General Conditions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for glass, indicating glass type and thickness for each
piece of glass.
C. Samples:
1. Glass: 12 inches x 12 inches, with protected edges.
2. Glazing Accessories: Each type, material, size and configuration.
D. Product Data: Materials manufacturer's printed installation instructions for the specified
glazing gaskets, compounds, sealants and accessories including descriptions of required
equipment, procedures and precautions to be observed.
08800-1
60-954.00
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver glass to site in containers that will protect material from the weather and breakage
and store carefully in a safe place to reduce breakage. Deliver materials in unopened
containers bearing manufacturer's names and brand identification. Each unit of glass shall
bear manufacturer's factory applied label. Labels shall remain intact until fmal clean-up.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not install glazing materials when precipitation is occurring or when water or dampness
is visible on the surfaces to be glazed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TEMPERED GLASS
A. Tempered glass shall be kind FT fully tempered transparent flat type, Class I-clear,
condition, A, uncoated surface, Quality q3, conforming to ASTM C 1048. Color shall be
clear; thickness l/4-inch or as otherwise shown.
2.02 SHATTERRESISTANT GLASS
A. Shatter resistant glass: fabricate from Type I, Class 1, Quality 3q glass with polyvinyl butyral
plastic interlayer, 0.060-inch thick, betweeen the layer of glass, with an overall thickness of
l/2-inch. The glass shall comply with CPSC 16 CFR 120, Category II.
2.03 GASKET GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Neoprene, vinyl, or rubber, as recommended by the glass manufacturer to the particular
condition. Channels for shatter-resistant glass shall be synthetic rubber, ASTM C 864, not
less than 1I4-inch thick and sufficiently resilient to accommodate expansion and contraction
while maintaining a vapor tight seal between glass and frame.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 STANDARDS OF PERFORMANCE
A. Glazing Standard: Comply with the Flat Glass Marketing Association's (FGMA) Glazing
Manual except as indicated otherwise or as specifically recommended otherwise by the glass
and glazing materials manufacturers.
08800-2
60-954.00
I
,I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Inspection: Examine each piece of glass and eliminate any glass with edge damage or face
imperfection.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing sash and other framing members indicated to receive glass. Remove coatings
which are not firmly bonded to the substrate.
3.03 ADmSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, scratched or damaged in any
way.
B. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction.
C. Remove labels and wash and polish glass on both faces immediately prior to fInal acceptance
of the work. Use cleaning materials as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
08800-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09111
METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed metal stud framing at interior locations.
B. Metal furring.
C. Framing accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C645 - Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Rigid Furring
Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
B. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
Wallboard.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Metal stud framing system for interior walls.
B. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction
of wind acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with the Standard
Building Code -latest edition.
C. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 11360 span.
D. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural
members, and clearances of intended openings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01300.
1. Product Data: Provide data describing standard framing member materials and finish,
product criteria, load charts, limitations, and manufacturer's installation instructions.
09111-1
60-954.00
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C754.
B. Maintain one copy on document on site.
1.06 QUALIFICA nONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years
documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
B. United States Gypsum Co.
C. Approved Equal.
2.02 STUD FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Studs: ASTM A645, non-load bearing rolled steel, channel shaped, punched for utility
access, size and spacing as indicated on drawings.
B. Runners: Of same material and thickness as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs.
Ceiling Runners: With extended leg retainer.
C. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs; size and spacing as indicated on
drawings.
D. Fasteners: GA 203. Self drilling, self tapping screws.
E. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.
F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20, zinc rich.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Studs, Tracks, Headers, and Accessories Galvanize to G60 coating class.
09111-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches o.c. or as otherwise shown.
B. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall
studs.
C. Align stud web openings horizontally.
D. Secure studs to tracks using clip and tie method.
E. Stud splicing not permissible.
F. Fabricate comers using a minimum of three studs.
G. Double stud at wall openings not more than 2 inches (50 rom) from each side of openings.
H. Brace stud framing system rigid.
1. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames.
J. Blocking: Secure steel channels to studs.
END OF SECTION
09111-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09200
PLASTER AND STUCCO
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: The work covered in this Section consists of plaste work, including the following
items:
1. Stucco on exterior concrete, masonry and as otherwise shown.
2. Cement plaster on metal lath on suspended ceiling system.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's product data for cementitious materials, lath, metal support
components, and accessories in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
B. - Material Certificates:
1. Submit producer's certificate for each kind of plaster aggregate indicated evidencing
that materials comply with requirements.
2. Provide design calculations for all metal support systems indicating load calculations,
sizing of members, and anchorages for review.
C. Provide sample panels 2 feet x 2 feet of each finish to match design shown.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered in original packages, containers or bundles bearing name of
manufacturer and brand. All cementitious materials shall be kept dry until ready to be used, shall
be kept off the ground, under cover and away from sweating walls or other damp surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sand: Sand shall be clean and sharp silica sand, free from alkali, salt or organic matter, shall
be graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to ASTM C 35.
09200-1
60-954.00
09200-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Water: Water shall be free from organic materials, strong acids or alkalis.
C. Hydrated Lime: Hydrated lime shall conform to Federal Specification SS-L-351, TypeF, regular
grade.
D. Portland Cement: Portland cement shall conform to ASTM Designation C-150, Type I, domestic
manufacture.
E. Metal Lath: Shall conform to Fed. Spec. QQ-L-101, heavy duty with 3/8-inch self-furring
galvanized with waterproof paper equal to Stucco-Rite by K-Lath or Unimast, Inc. or equal.
F. Waterproofing: Waterproofing shall be Stearox, Master Builders or approved equal.
G. Bonding Agent: Bonding agent shall be equal to U. S. Gypsum Company "Bondcrete" or Lambert
Corporation "Bonderite Liquid".
H. Comer Beads: Comer beads shall be zinc.
1. Striplath And Cornerite: Stripla.th and cornerite shall be U. S. Gypsum Company, National Gypsum
Company, or approved equal copper alloy diamond mesh, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
J. Metal Stucco Accessories:
1. Metal stucco stops shall be U. S. Gypsum Company, No. 66 square expanded flange type.
2. Double V expansion joint by U.S. Gypsum Co. or equal.
3. And as otherwise indicated.
4. All exterior accessories shall be made of zinc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Plastering Or Stuccoing On Concrete And Masonry:
1. Concrete surfaces shall be brush-cleaned of all dust, loose particles or other foreign
materials. Alllaitance and efllorescence shall be removed by washing with a 10 percent
solution of commercial muriatic acid and water, then rinsed well with clear water. Grease
or form oil shall be removed by wiping with naphtha spirits, and bonding agent shall be
applied to all concrete surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Masonry surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and lightly wetted immediately before
plastering.
3. Base coat plaster stucco shall be one part cement, three parts sand and not over one-fourth
part hydrated lime, measured by volume. Mix shall be applied with sufficient pressure to
form good bond and then uniformly scratched. Base coat shall develop a thickness of
3/8-inch minimum.
4. Brown coat plaster stucco shall be one part by volume portland cement, 3/4 to 1-112 parts
by volume hydrated lime and 3 to 5 parts sand (volume of sand per sum of cement lime).
Brown coat shall develop a thickness of2/8-inch minimum.
5. Finish coat stucco shall be one part cement, two parts sand, not over one-fourth part
hydrated lime by volume and one quart ofSec No.1 waterproofing per bag of cement Finish
coat shall be applied not less than 1I8-inch thick for three coat work and 2/8-inch thick
for two coat work no sooner than 4 days after application of base coat. Base coat shall be
uniformly wet, but not saturated, before applying finish coat. Finish coat shall be
floated to a true and even surface and kept surface damp for at least two days before
allowing to dry out.
a. Exterior areas to receive stucco: Provide finish to match sample panel.
6. Concrete and masonry surfaces should have sufficient roughness to provide proper bond.
If the surface is not rough, it shall be hacked or bushhammered, or a dash coat of cement
grout, composed of one part cement to one and one-half parts sand, mixed to a mushy
consistency, shall be used prior to application of the base coat.
B. Plaster On Metal Lath:
1. Scratch coat shall be one part cement, three parts sand and not over one-fourth part
hydrated lime by volume and shall be applied with sufficient pressure to form good bond and
then uniformly scratched. Install at a thickness of 118 inch.
2. Brown coat shall be of the same mix as scratch coat and applied not less than 24 hours after
application of scratch coat. It shall be floated and rodded to a thickness of at least
3/8-inch straight and true.
3. Finish coat shall be one part cement, two parts sand, not over one-fourth part of hydrated
lime by volume. Finish coat shall be not less than lI8-inch thick and finish surface shall
be allowed to draw for a few minutes and then it shall be well trowelled with water to a
smooth finish, free from blemishes or irregularities. Trowelling shall be continued until
the finish sets.
09200-3
60-954.00
09200-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Where finished surfaces such as tile, metal frames, or metal windows have been installed prior to
completion of plaster work, the finished surfaces shall be protected from damage during
plastering. Protection shall consist of covering with a nonstaining kraft paper or polyethylene
sheet and joints sealed with tape or adhesive. Metal frames may be protected with a removable type
of masking tape, or an approved type of nonstaining petroleum jelly mixed in accordance with
manufacturer's directions. Protection shall be maintained in place during plastering and removed
when plaster work is completed.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09205
FURRING AND LATHING
(INTERIOR PLASTER)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 37
(1995) Gypsum Lath
ASTM C 841
(1990) Installation ofInterior Lathing and Furring
ASTMC 1063
(1995; Rev. A) Installation of Lathing and Furring to
Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based
Plaster
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a Lath
b. Accessories
c. Access panels
2. Certificates
a Lath
b. Accessories
B. Submit certificates attesting that the materials meet the requirements specified.
09205-1
60-954.00
1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unbroken packages or containers that are
labeled plainly with the manufacturer's names and brands. Store materials in dry locations
with adequate ventilation, free from water, and in such a manner to permit easy access for
inspection and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LAm
A. Metal Plastering Base (Lath): Provide the type(s) and weight(s) required for the type and
spacing of supports shown for the kind of plaster indicated and specified.
1. For Portland Cement-Based Plaster (Interior): ASTM C 1063, flat rib, 3/8 inch rib
sheet woven wire metal lath weighing not less than 2.75 pounds per square yard.
Equal to Unimast 4-mesh, 2-rib lath by Unimast, Inc.
B. Accessories: ASTM C 1063 and ASTM C 841. Provide galvanized steel or rigid poly (vinyl
chloride) (PVC) plastic or clear plastic coated aluminum accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that framing, furring and accessories are securely attached and of proper sizes and
spacing necessary to provide a suitable substrate to receive lath. Do not proceed with work
until framing, furring and accessories are acceptable for application of lath.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Lathing Materials and Accessories: Install in accordance with ASTM C 1063 for portland
cement-based plaster work, except where indicated or specified otherwise herein.
1. Metal Plastering Base: Install on furring and similar framing members for plastered
ceilings.
2. Control (Expansion and Contraction) Joints:
a. For portland cement-based plaster (ceilings and walls), install to create panels
no larger than 100 square feet with no dimension exceeding 10 feet.
09205-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Install where indicated, where ceiling framing or furring changes direction.
Terminate lath at each side of joint and fasten joints securely to lath.
3.
Unrestrained Ceilings: Furred or suspended ceilings constructed with portland
cement-based plaster shall be unrestrained. Isolate ceiling lath and plaster from
ceiling intersecting vertical surfaces with casing beads, control joints, or similar
devices designed to keep the ceiling isolated from the adjacent vertical surfaces
(walls, partitions, beams, and columns). Do not use comer reinforcement at the
internal angle between the ceiling and the vertical surfaces.
4.
Plastering Beads: Install edge trim (casing bead) at the edges of plaster which abuts
or adjoins an unplastered surface, on each surface at the internal angle formed by
load bearing and non-load bearing walls and partitions abutting structural walls,
columns, on each side of the joint between walls or partitions constructed of
dissimilar materials which require plastering. Fill voids formed in comers with
sealant. Install comer beads at all vertical external comers of plaster walls.
END OF SECTION
09205-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope: The work included in this Section consists of furnishing and installing gypsum
wallboard as indicated on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wallboard:
1. Standard gypsum wallboard shall conform to ASTM C-36 and shall be 5/8-inch
thick, tapered edges.
2. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Gold Bond, U.S. Gypsum or Domatar.
B. Joint Tape: Reinforcing tape and joint cement shall be U.S. Gypsum Company
"Perf-A- Tape" and "Perf-A- Tape" joint cement or Gold Bond "Joint System" or approved
equal.
C. Metal Accessories: Metal accessories, comer reinforcement shall be U.S.G. No. 100
"Perf-A-Bead" or approved equal. Metal casing or trim shall be U.S.G. No. 301
"Perf-A- Trim".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Wallboard Edges: All ends and edges of all gypsum wallboard shall occur over nailing
members, except when joints are at right angles to framing members as in horizontal
application or when the end joints are to be back-blocked.
B. Joints: To minimize end joints, wallboard shall be of maximum practical lengths. Boards
shall be brought into contact, but shall not be forced into place. Where ends or edges abut,
09250-1
60-954.00
they shall be neatly fitted. End joints shall be staggered. Joints on opposite sides of a
partition shall be so arranged as to occur on different studs.
C. Fasteners: Wallboard shall be attached to framing supports by Standard Single Nailing
Method. Fasteners shall be spaced not less than 3/S-inch from edges and ends of wallboard.
Fasteners on all framing members shall be spaced S-inches o.c. Nails shall not be staggered
on adjoining edges or ends.
D. Fastening Procedure: While the fasteners are being driven, the wallboard shall be held in firm
contact with the underlying support. Attachment shall proceed from central portion of the
wallboard toward ends and edges. Nails shall be driven home with the heads slightly below
the surface of the gypsum wallboard, in a dimple formed by the crowned face of the driving
tool striking the last blow. A nail set shall not be used, and care shall be taken to avoid
breaking the paper face.
E. Cutting And Trimming: When necessary to cut ends, edges, scribe or make cutouts within
the field of the wallboard, it shall be done in a workmanlike manner.
F. Jointing: All joints, screw head and other depressions in the surface of exposed wallboard
shall be treated in the recommended manner with USG Perf-A- Tape, Joint System. All "V"
grooves formed by abutting wrapped eased edges of Sheetrock SW Wallboard, and ceiling
angles, shall be prefilled with Durabond "90" Joint Compound in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
G. Metal Trim: All internal and external angles formed by the intersection of either wallboard
surfaces or other surfaces shall be treated with USG metal trim.
H. Metal Bead: All vertical or horizontal external comers shall have Perf-A-Bead applied in
accordance with manufacturer's directions.
END OF SECTION
09250-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09780
SPECIAL FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes application of non-skid epoxy seamless flooring system over concrete floors
where scheduled.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Federal VOC emission requirements.
B. Comply with manufacturer's safety and application instructions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
B. Product Data: Product description and characteristics, technical data, test results, if any,
showing compliance with requirements and performance record.
C. Submit color samples for selection by the Architect.
D. Application instructions, safety and health hazard information, precautionary procedure
recommendations.
E. After application is complete, submit a certificate signed by a duly authorized representative
of the manufacturer stating that the application was made by an approved applicator and the
coverage is adequate to provide the required results.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work with concrete installation to ensure wet curing methods only in areas to be
sealed. Do not use curing compounds unless specifically approved in writing by the sealer
manufacturer. Do not use the sealer-hardener as a curing membrane.
09780-1
60-954.00
B. Do not apply material until concrete is thoroughly dry and has cured a minimum of28 days,
and until construction activities that may cause excessive traffic, soiling or damage to the
floor have been completed.
C. Do not apply the material when air temperature has been less than 600 F within the last 6
hours or is expected to be less than 600 F within 8 hours after the application is completed.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. Provide written guarantee by the sealer manufacturer to provide sufficient equal material to
repeat the treatment in areas that show signs of dusting as a result of wear and abrasion
within 5 years after the original application, provided it was made by an experienced
applicator and a certificate of coverage was issued and signed by a duly authorized
representative of the manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dur-A-Quartz epoxy flooring is a combination of color quartz aggregate fused during
application into a seamless surface with specially formulated high quality clear 100% solid
epoxy binder and top coat with slip resistant properties, and a 4-inch cove base.
B. Product shall be as manufactured by Dur-A-Flex or accepted equal.
C. Color shall be as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Verify that surface is clean, dry, and free of loose dirt, dust, oil, sealers or curing compounds,
droppings or adhesions from construction activities. Correct defective conditions before
starting the application. Starting the work signifies acceptance of the surface and
responsibility for required results.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Follow protective measures recommended by the manufacturer to ensure the safety and
protection of workers and applicators.
09780-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Protect adjacent materials that may be damaged by contact with the material during
application.
B. Apply the epoxy coating in 3/16-inch thickness and with 4-inch high wall base and radius
cove detail, in conformance to manufacturer's recommendations. Distribute evenly for
coverage rate recommended by the manufacturer. Decrease the cover area if recommended
by the manufacturer or directed by the Engineer. Mop up excess solution or puddles.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. After application is completed, protect the floor against excessive traffic, soiling or
defacement until acceptance by the Owner.
B. Before final inspection and acceptance, clean the floor and touch up abraded or porous areas.
Leave the entire surface clean and showing a uniform color and texture.
END OF SECTION
09780-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
P ART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to provide a coating system
for the surfaces indicated and as specified herein.
B. The work includes painting and finishing of interior items and surfaces such as ceilings,
walls, miscellaneous metal, doors and frames, equipment and all other work obviously
required to be painted unless otherwise specified herein or on the Drawings. Omission of
minor items in the schedule of work does not mean that such items, where they come within
the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein, may be excluded.
C. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions,
enamels, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate
or finish coats.
D. Do not paint or paint over the following items:
1. Any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or
any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates.
2. Windows unless otherwise indicated.
3. Products with polished chrome, aluminum, nickel or stainless steel finish.
4. Plastic switch plates and receptacle plates.
5. Signs and nameplates.
6. Finish hardware.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by
approved paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's
identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable.
09900-1
60-954.00
09900-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Provide paint prime coats that are compatible with and produced by the same manufacturer
as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only
within recommended limits.
C. Use only experienced specialized painters familiar with all aspects of surface preparations
and applications required for this project.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data and samples as indicated below in time to provide adequate
review by the Engineer and in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
B. Samples of Paint and Painting:
1. Submit full color chip line for each type of paint specified for color selection by the
Engineer. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of
the Contractor.
2. Submit samples of each finish and color for review before any work is started.
3. Prepare and submit samples of special finishes, when required by the Engineer, so
that an area of each sample indicates the appearance of the various coats. For
example, where three coat work is specified, divide the sample into three areas - one
showing the application of one coat only, one showing application of two coats and
one showing all three coats. Finish work not matching or meeting the standard of
such samples, when approved, will be rejected.
4. Resubmit rejected samples until approved.
1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label. Deliver only containers carrying manufacturer's label bearing
the following information:
1. Name or title of material
2. Fed. Spec. number if applicable
3. Manufacturer's stock number and color
4. Manufacturer's name
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Generic type
6. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents
7. Application instructions
B. Provide containers that are clearly marked to indicate any hazards connected with the use of
the paint and steps which should be taken to prevent injury to those handling the product.
C. Handle and store all containers in such a manner as to prevent damage or loss of labels or
containers.
D. Store and mix all painting only in the designated areas. Comply with the requirements of
pertinent codes and fire regulations. Provide proper containers outside of the building for
painting wastes. Do not use plumbing fixtures for this purpose.
E. Remove used rags from the buildings every night and take every precaution against
spontaneous combustion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide paint manufactured by one of the following: Sherwin-Williams (S- W), Pratt &
Lambert, PPG Industries, Inc., Benjamin Moore, Bruning, Glidden, Devoe, M.A. Bruder &
Sons, Carboline, Tnemec, Olympic or Rustoleum. Submit to the Engineer requests for
approval of other paint manufacturers and materials other than those specified.
B. The following coating systems list products by name to establish a standard of quality but
other products of the same generic types may be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
When other than the specified coating system is proposed, submit on a typewritten list giving
the proposed coatings, brand name, trade name, generic type and catalog number of the
proposed system for approval.
C. Use only paint produced by the same manufacturer in successive field coats. In the first field
coat over shop painted or previously painted surfaces use paint that is compatible with and
will cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to the underlying paint.
D. Ensure that emulsion and alkyd paints contain a mildewcide and that both the paint and
mildewcide conform to OSHA and Federal requirements, including Federal Specification
TT-P-19.
09900- 3
60-954.00
09900-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Do not use paint containing lead. Use only pure boiled linseed oil.
F. Use only clean painters' rags, completely sterilized.
G. Paint colors, if not specified in the Finish Schedule or elsewhere on the Drawings or
Specifications, will be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard color chart
and factory mixed.
2.02 COATING SYSTEMS
A. Class 1 Exposures - Metal (Exterior):
1. Class 1 Surfaces: Exterior metal surfaces that are exposed to the weather including
the following:
a. Metal doors and door frames
2. Class 1 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Wire brush, sandblast or pickle to remove mill scale and
rust. Completely degrease all metal surfaces by solvent cleaning in
compliance with SSPC-SPl.
b. Prime Coat: Galvanized Metal: S- W Galvite Paint, B50W3, 2.0 mils dry.
c. First Coat: Alkyd: S- W SWP Gloss House & Trim, A2 Series, 2.0 mils
dry
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat.
B. Class 2 Exposures - Stucco and Concrete Surfaces (Exterior):
1. Class 2 Surfaces: Stucco and concrete surfaces of new buildings not included in
other coating systems.
2. Class 2 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Fill cracks, voids and other surface imperfections.
Remove mortar droppings.
b. Prime Coat: Stucco: Acrylic Primer
S- W Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer,
A24W300, 3.0 mils dry
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
First Coat:
Acrylic Latex: S-W A-IOO Latex House & Tri, A6 Series
Flat, 1.3 mils dry
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat
C. Class 3 Exposures - Wood (Exterior)
1. Class 3 Surfaces: Exterior wood surfaces, including the fascia, outlooker and trim:
2. Class 3 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Sand finished surfaces. Surface scrape, clean and give
a coat of knot sealer to small dry seasoned knots before application of the
prime coat. After priming, fill all holes and imperfections in finished
surfaces with putty or plastic wood filter.
b. Prime Coat: Alkyd: S-W A-IOO Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer, Y24W20,
2.2 mils dry.
c. First Coat: Alkyd: S- W SWP Gloss House & Trim, A2 Series, 2.0 mils
dry.
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat.
D. Class 4 Exposures - Metal (Interior)
1. Class 4 Surfaces: Interior metal surfaces including the following:
a. Metal doors and door frames
b. Exposed surfaces of electric panels, conduit, etc.
2. Class 4 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Wirebrush, sandblast or pickle to remove mill scale and
rust. Completely degrease all metal surfaces by solvent cleaning in
compliance with SSPC-SPI.
b. Prime Coat: Galvanized Metal: S-W Galvite Paint, B 50 W3, 2.0 mils dry
c. First Coat: Alkyd: S- W ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel,
B34 W200 Series, 1.7 mils dry
09900-5
60-954.00
09900-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat
E. Class 5 Exposures - Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard (Interior):
1. Class 5 Surfaces: Gypsum wallboard surfaces of the walls and plaster ceilings of the
building.
2. Class 5 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Fill cracks, voids and other surface imperfections with
patching paste
b. Prime Coat: Plaster: Alkyd: S-W Wall & Wood Primer, B49W2, 2.0
mils dry
c. Prime Coat: Gypsum Wallboard: Alkyd: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Wall
Primer, B28W200, 1.1 mils dry
d. First Coat: Alkyd: S-W ProMar 200 Alkyd Flat Wall Paint, B32W201,
2.0 mils dry.
e. Second Coat: Same as First Coat.
F. Class 6 Exposures - Masonry and Concrete (Interior):
1. Class 6 Surfaces: Exposed interior masonry, and concrete surfaces of new buildings
not included in other coating systems.
2. Class 6 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Fill cracks, voids and other surface imperfections.
Remove mortar droppings.
b. Prime Coat: Concrete: Acrylic Primer
S- W Heavy duty Block Filler
10 mils dry
Concrete Block: Acrylic Primer
S- W Heavy Duty Block Filler
10 mil dry/coat
c. First Coat: Polyamide Epoxy: S- W Tile-Clad High Solids Epoxy, 1.5
mils dry
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Class 7 Exposures - Wood (Interior) (Varnish)
1. Class 7 Surfaces: Bi-fold wood door surfaces to have a natural finish, including trim.
2. Class 7 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Dry, sand smooth and clean the surfaces to be coated.
Pick up all sanding dust with a tack cloth.
b.
First Coat:
S-W Oil Base Gloss Varnish, A66V91, 1.0 mils dry, reduce
with 1 pint mineral spirits per gallon.
c. Second Coat: S-W Satin Varnish, A66F90, 1.0 mils dry.
H. Class 8 Exposures - Wood (Interior)
1. Class 8 Surfaces: Wood door surfaces to have a paint finish.
2. Class 8 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Surface Preparation: Sand finished surfaces. Surface
scrape, clean and give a coat of knot sealer to small dry seasoned knots before
application of the prime coat. After priming, fill all holes and imperfections
in finished surfaces with putty or plastic wood filter..
b. Prime Coat: Alkyd: S- W ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater, B49W
200, 2.0 mils dry.
c. First Coat: Alkyd: S-W ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, B34W
200, 1.7 mils dry.
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. In addition to the aforementioned preparations, remove all dirt, rust, scale, splinters, loose
particles, disintegrated paint, grease, oil and other deleterious substances from all surfaces
which are to be coated.
09900- 7
60-954.00
09900-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces,
plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in contact with painted surfaces and not to be
painted prior to surface preparation and painting operations.
C. Before commencing work, make certain that surfaces to be coated are in acceptable
condition. The application of paint will be held as an acceptance of the surfaces and working
conditions and the Contractor will be held responsible for the results reasonably expected
from the materials and processes specified.
D. Program the cleaning and painting so contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall
onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.
E. Prepare surfaces of gypsum wallboard surfaces to be painted by removing all dust and dirt.
F. Clean ferrous substances, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose
mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. Grind and sand
smooth all welds, blisters, etc.. Fill all pits and dents and correct all imperfections so as to
provide a smooth surface for painting.
3.02 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and directions and closely match the selected colors, stirring materials
before and during application to maintain a mixture of uniform density, free offilm, dirt and
other foreign materials.
B. Use no thinners except those specifically mentioned and only in such quantity as directed by
the manufacturer. Ifthinning is used, apply sufficient additional coats to assure the required
dry film thickness is achieved. Use only the manufacturer's recommended thinner or cleanup
solvent for all clean-up and apply by brush, spray, airless spray or roller as recommended by
the manufacturer for optimum performance and appearance.
3.03 APPLICATIONS
A. Paint all exposed surfaces in rooms scheduled for painting whether or not colors are
designated in schedules, except where the natural finish of material is obviously intended and
specifically noted as a surface not be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically
mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is
not designated, the Engineer will select these from standard colors available for the materials
systems as specified.
B. Use only skilled and experienced craftsmen and provide only the highest quality
workmanship.
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for the type of material being applied.
D. Use all paint at room temperature and ensure the surfaces to be painted are dry and clean.
E. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final
coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
F. Apply paint in a neat manner with finished surfaces free of runs, sags, ridges, laps and brush
marks. Apply each coat in a manner that will produce an even film of uniform and proper
thickness.
G. . Paint surfaces behind moveable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat
only.
H. Finish interior and exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as the exterior
faces, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Omit the first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up
painted, unless otherwise specified.
J. Retouch existing painted surfaces damaged by modification work or other operations of the
Contractor, to conform to the above coating systems and blend in with the new and existing
work. Repaint damaged surfaces with not less than 2 coats, and other existing surfaces that
are listed with the coating system specified.
K. The prime and intermediate coats as specified for the various coating systems may be applied
in the shop by the manufacturer. The shop coats shall be of the type specified and shall be
compatible with the field coat or coats. Give such items as pumps, motors, equipment,
electrical panels, etc. at least one touch up coat with the intermediate coat material and one
complete finish coat in the field.
3.04 APPLICATIONS RESTRICTIONS
A. Apply coatings only on properly prepared surfaces as herein specified, and only in dry
weather. Remove and redo any surface coating damaged by moisture or rain to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Do not apply paint to surfaces which show a moisture content greater than 15 percent.
09900-9
60-954.00
09900-10
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.05 MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS
A. Apply coatings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in the film
thickness recommended for each coat and for the total coating system.
B. Apply a prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not
been prime coated by others.
C. Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due
to insufficient sealing.
3.06 FINISHES
A. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces to provide an opaque, smooth
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
B. Complete Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish
or repaint work not in compliance with specific requirements.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide the necessary properly calibrated gauges for the Engineer to check the completed
surfaces. Check nonferrous surfaces for number of coats and thickness by use of a Tooke
gauge. Check ferrous surfaces for film thickness by use of an Elcometer or Micro-Test
magnetic dry film gaug~ properly calibrated.
B. Remove and refinish or otherwise correct to the satisfaction of the Engineer all work which
peels, crazes, blisters, fails to adhere or otherwise fails to properly serve the intended
purposes at no additional cost to the Department.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. While painting equipment? piping, etc., protect all other surfaces that are not to receive the
same paint.
B. Provide protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings, and
accessories throughout the painting operation. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware,
etc., before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery nameplates
and all machined parts not to receive paint. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is
being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.09 CLEANING
A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of debris and rubbish and remove all scaffolding,
paint cloths, paint, and brushes from the building when completed.
B. Cleaning: Remove all paint brushed, splattered, spilled or splashed on any surface not
specified to be painted.
3.10 EXTRA STOCK
A. Upon completion of painting work, furnish to the Owner at no additional cost, one gallon of
each type and color of finish paint for touching up. Paint container labels shall be complete
with manufacturer's name, generic type, number, color and location where used.
END OF SECTION
09900-11
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide glass and glazing as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of the Standard Building Code with respect to wind pressures and
infiltration and with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association's (FGMA)
Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.
B. Determine actual sizes to which glass must be cut from measurements taken at the job site.
Any trimming or edge nipping of glass after shipment will not be permitted.
C. Use glass conforming to ASTM C1048 for Heat-Treated Flat Glass, ASTM C1172 for
Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples, etc. in accordance with Article 6.11 of the
General Conditions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for glass, indicating glass type and thickness for each
piece of glass.
C. Samples:
1. Glass: 12 inches x 12 inches, with protected edges.
2. Glazing Accessories: Each type, material, size and configuration.
D. Product Data: Materials manufacturer's printed installation instructions for the specified
glazing gaskets, compounds, sealants and accessories including descriptions of required
equipment, procedures and precautions to be observed.
08800-1
60-954.00
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver glass to site in containers that will protect material from the weather and breakage
and store carefully in a safe place to reduce breakage. Deliver materials in unopened
containers bearing manufacturer's names and brand identification. Each unit of glass shall
bear manufacturer's factory applied label. Labels shall remain intact until final clean-up.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not install glazing materials when precipitation is occurring or when water or dampness
is visible on the surfaces to be glazed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TEMPERED GLASS
A. Tempered glass shall be kind FT fully tempered transparent flat type, Class I-clear,
condition, A, uncoated surface, Quality q3, conforming to ASTM C 1048. Color shall be
clear; thickness 1/4-inch or as otherwise shown.
2.02 SHATTER RESISTANT GLASS
A. Shatter resistant glass: fabricate from Type I, Class I, Quality 3q glass with polyvinyl butyral
plastic interlayer, 0.060-inch thick, betweeen the layer of glass, with an overall thickness of
1/2-inch. The glass shall comply with CPSC 16 CFR 120, Category II.
2.03 GASKET GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Neoprene, vinyl, or rubber, as recommended by the glass manufacturer to the particular
condition. Channels for shatter-resistant glass shall be synthetic rubber, ASTM C 864, not
less than 1I4-inch thick and sufficiently resilient to accommodate expansion and contraction
while maintaining a vapor tight seal between glass and frame.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 STANDARDS OF PERFORMANCE
A. Glazing Standard: Comply with the Flat Glass Marketing Association's (FGMA) Glazing
Manual except as indicated otherwise or as specifically recommended otherwise by the glass
and glazing materials manufacturers.
08800-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
! I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Inspection: Examine each piece of glass and eliminate any glass with edge damage or face
imperfection.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing sash and other framing members indicated to receive glass. Remove coatings
which are not fIrmly bonded to the substrate.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, scratched or damaged in any
way.
B. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction.
C. Remove labels and wash and polish glass on both faces immediately prior to fInal acceptance
of the work. Use cleaning materials as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
08800-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09111
METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed metal stud framing at interior locations.
B. Metal furring.
C. Framing accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C645 - Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Rigid Furring
Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
B. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
Wallboard.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Metal stud framing system for interior walls.
B. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction
of wind acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with the Standard
Building Code - latest edition.
C. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1/360 span.
D. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural
members, and clearances of intended openings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following under the provisions of Section 01300.
1. Product Data: Provide data describing standard framing member materials and finish,
product criteria, load charts, limitations, and manufacturer's installation instructions.
09111-1
60-954.00
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C754.
B. Maintain one copy on document on site.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years
documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
B. United States Gypsum Co.
C. Approved Equal.
2.02 STUD FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Studs: ASTM A645, non-load bearing rolled steel, channel shaped, punched for utility
access, size and spacing as indicated on drawings.
B. Runners: Of same material and thickness as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs.
Ceiling Runners: With extended leg retainer.
C. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs; size and spacing as indicated on
drawings.
D. Fasteners: GA 203. Self drilling, self tapping screws.
E. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.
F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20, zinc rich.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Studs, Tracks, Headers, and Accessories Galvanize to G60 coating class.
09111-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches o.c. or as otherwise shown.
B. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall
studs.
C. Align stud web openings horizontally.
D. Secure studs to tracks using clip and tie method.
E. Stud splicing not permissible.
F. Fabricate comers using a minimum of three studs.
G. Double stud at wall openings not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from each side of openings.
H. Brace stud framing system rigid.
I. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door frames.
J. Blocking: Secure steel channels to studs.
END OF SECTION
09111-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09200
PLASTER AND STUCCO
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Description: The work covered in this Section consists of plaste work, including the following
items:
1. Stucco on exterior concrete, masonry and as otherwise shown.
2. Cement plaster on metal lath on suspended ceiling system.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's product data for cementitious materials, lath, metal support
components, and accessories in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
B. Material Certificates:
1. Submit producer's certificate for each kind of plaster aggregate indicated evidencing
that materials comply with requirements.
2. Provide design calculations for all metal support systems indicating load calculations,
sizing of members, and anchorages for review.
C. Provide sample panels 2 feet x 2 feet of each finish to match design shown.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered in original packages, containers or bundles bearing name of
manufacturer and brand. All cementitious materials shall be kept dry until ready to be used, shall
be kept off the ground, under cover and away from sweating walls or other damp surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sand: Sand shall be clean and sharp silica sand, free from alkali, salt or organic matter, shall
be graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to ASTM C 35.
09200-1
60-954.00
09200-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Water: Water shall be free from organic materials, strong acids or alkalis.
C. Hydrated Lime: Hydrated lime shall conform to Federal Specification SS-L-351, Type F, regular
grade.
D. Portland Cement: Portland cement shall conform to ASTM Designation C-150, Type I, domestic
manufacture.
E. Metal Lath: Shall conform to Fed. Spec. QQ-L-IOl, heavy duty with 3/8-inch self-furring
galvanized with waterproof paper equal to Stucco-Rite by K-Lath or Unimast, Inc. or equal.
F. Waterproofing: Waterproofing shall be Stearox, Master Builders or approved equal.
G. Bonding Agent: Bonding agent shall be equal to U. S. Gypsum Company "Bondcrete" or Lambert
Corporation "Bonderite Liquid".
H. Comer Beads: Comer beads shall be zinc.
1. Striplath And Comerite: Striplathand comerite shall be U. S. Gypsum Company, National Gypsum
Company, or approved equal copper alloy diamond mesh, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
J. Metal Stucco Accessories:
1. Metal stucco stops shall be U. S. Gypsum Company, No. 66 square expanded flange type.
2. Double V expansion joint by U.S. Gypsum Co. or equal.
3. And as otherwise indicated.
4. All exterior accessories shall be made of zinc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Plastering Or Stuccoing On Concrete And Masonry:
1. Concrete surfaces shall be brush-cleaned of all dust, loose particles or other foreign
materials. Alllaitance and efflorescence shall be removed by washing with a 10 percent
solution of commercial muriatic acid and water, then rinsed well with clear water. Grease
or form oil shall be removed by wiping with naphtha spirits, and bonding agent shall be
applied to all concrete surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Masonry surfaces shall be thorougWy cleaned and lightly wetted immediately before
plastering.
3. Base coat plaster stucco shall be one part cement, three parts sand and not over one-fourth
part hydrated lime, measured by volume. Mix shall be applied with sufficient pressure to
form good bond and then uniformly scratched. Base coat shall develop a thickness of
3/8-inch minimum.
4. Brown coat plaster stucco shall be one part by volume portland cement, 3/4 to 1-112 parts
by volume hydrated lime and 3 to 5 parts sand (volume of sand per sum of cement lime).
Brown coat shall develop a thickness of2/8-inch minimum.
5. Finish coat stucco shall be one part cement, two parts sand, not over one-fourth part
hydrated lime by volume and one quart ofSec No.1 waterproofing per bag of cement Finish
coat shall be applied not less than 1I8-inch thick for three coat work and 2/8-inch thick
for two coat work no sooner than 4 days after application of base coat. Base coat shall be
uniformly wet, but not saturated, before applying finish coat. Finish coat shall be
floated to a true and even surface and kept surface damp for at least two days before
allowing to dry out.
a. Exterior areas to receive stucco: Provide finish to match sample panel.
6. Concrete and masonry surfaces should have sufficient roughness to provide proper bond.
If the surface is not rough, it shall be hacked or bushhammered, or a dash coat of cement
grout, composed of one part cement to one and one-half parts sand, mixed to a mushy
consistency, shall be used prior to application of the base coat.
B. Plaster On Metal Lath:
1. Scratch coat shall be one part cement, three parts sand and not over one-fourth part
hydrated lime by volume and shall be applied with sufficient pressure to form good bond and
then uniformly scratched. Install at a thickness of 118 inch.
2. Brown coat shall be of the same mix as scratch coat and applied not less than 24 hours after
application of scratch coat. It shall be floated and rodded to a thickness of at least
3/8-inch straight and true.
3. Finish coat shall be one part cement, two parts sand, not over one-fourth part of hydrated
lime by volume. Finish coat shall be not less than 1I8-inch thick and finish surface shall
be allowed to draw for a few minutes and then it shall be well trowelled with water to a
smooth finish, free from blemishes or irregularities. Trowelling shall be continued until
the finish sets.
09200-3
60-954.00
09200-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Where finished surfaces such as tile, metal frames, or metal windows have been installed prior to
completion of plaster work, the finished surfaces shall be protected from damage during
plastering. Protection shall consist of covering with a nonstaining kraft paper or polyethylene
sheet and joints sealed with tape or adhesive. Metal frames may be protected with a removable type
of masking tape, or an approved type of nonstaining petroleum jelly mixed in accordance with
manufacturer's directions. Protection shall be maintained in place during plastering and removed
when plaster work is completed.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09205
FURRING AND LATHING
(INTERIOR PLASTER)
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 37
(1995) Gypsum Lath
ASTM C 841
(1990) Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring
ASTMC 1063
(1995; Rev. A) Installation of Lathing and Furring to
Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based
Plaster
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a Lath
b. Accessories
c. Access panels
2. Certificates
a Lath
b. Accessories
B. Submit certificates attesting that the materials meet the requirements specified.
09205-1
60-954.00
1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unbroken packages or containers that are
labeled plainly with the manufacturer's names and brands. Store materials in dry locations
with adequate ventilation, free from water, and in such a manner to permit easy access for
inspection and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LATH
A. Metal Plastering Base (Lath): Provide the type(s) and weight(s) required for the type and
spacing of supports shown for the kind of plaster indicated and specified.
1. For Portland Cement-Based Plaster (Interior): ASTM C 1063, flat rib, 3/8 inch rib
sheet woven wire metal lath weighing not less than 2.75 pounds per square yard.
Equal to Unimast 4-mesh, 2-rib lath by Unimast, Inc.
B. Accessories: ASTM C 1063 and ASTM C 841. Provide galvanized steel or rigid poly (vinyl
chloride) (PVC) plastic or clear plastic coated aluminum accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that framing, furring and accessories are securely attached and of proper sizes and
spacing necessary to provide a suitable substrate to receive lath. Do not proceed with work
until framing, furring and accessories are acceptable for application of lath.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Lathing Materials and Accessories: Install in accordance with ASTM C 1063 for portland
cement-based plaster work, except where indicated or specified otherwise herein.
1. Metal Plastering Base: Install on furring and similar framing members for plastered
ceilings.
2. Control (Expansion and Contraction) Joints:
a. For portland cement-based plaster (ceilings and walls), install to create panels
no larger than 100 square feet with no dimension exceeding 10 feet.
09205-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b.
Install where indicated, where ceiling framing or furring changes direction.
Terminate lath at each side of joint and fasten joints securely to lath.
3.
Unrestrained Ceilings: Furred or suspended ceilings constructed with portland
cement-based plaster shall be unrestrained. Isolate ceiling lath and plaster from
ceiling intersecting vertical surfaces with casing beads, control joints, or similar
devices designed to keep the ceiling isolated from the adjacent vertical surfaces
(walls, partitions, beams, and columns). Do not use comer reinforcement at the
internal angle between the ceiling and the vertical surfaces.
4.
Plastering Beads: Install edge trim (casing bead) at the edges of plaster which abuts
or adjoins an unplastered surface, on each surface at the internal angle formed by
load bearing and non-load bearing walls and partitions abutting structural walls,
columns, on each side of the joint between walls or partitions constructed of
dissimilar materials which require plastering. Fill voids formed in comers with
sealant. Install comer beads at all vertical external comers of plaster walls.
END OF SECTION
09205-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope: The work included in this Section consists of furnishing and installing gypsum
wallboard as indicated on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wallboard:
1. Standard gypsum wcllboard shall conform to ASTM C-36 and shall be 5/8-inch
thick, tapered edges.
2. Acceptable manufacturers shall be Gold Bond, U.S. Gypsum or Domatar.
B. Joint Tape: Reinforcing tape and joint cement shall be U.S. Gypsum Company
"Perf-A-Tape" and "Perf-A-Tape" joint cement or Gold Bond "Joint System" or approved
equal.
C. Metal Accessories: Metal accessories, comer reinforcement shall be U.S.G. No. 100
"Perf-A-Bead" or approved equal. Metal casing or trim shall be D.S.G. No. 301
"Perf-A- Trim".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Wallboard Edges: All ends and edges of all gypsum wallboard shall occur over nailing
members, except when joints are at right angles to framing members as in horizontal
application or when the end joints are to be back-blocked.
B. Joints: To minimize end joints, wallboard shall be of maximum practical lengths. Boards
shall be brought into contact, but shall not be forced into place. Where ends or edges abut,
09250-1
60-954.00
they shall be neatly fitted. End joints shall be staggered. Joints on opposite sides of a
partition shall be so arranged as to occur on different studs.
C. Fasteners: Wallboard shall be attached to framing supports by Standard Single Nailing
Method. Fasteners shall be spaced not less than 3/8-inch from edges and ends of wallboard.
Fasteners on all framing members shall be spaced 8-inches o.c. Nails shall not be staggered
on adjoining edges or ends.
D. Fastening Procedure: While the fasteners are being driven, the wallboard shall be held in firm
contact with the underlying support. Attachment shall proceed from central portion of the
wallboard toward ends and edges. Nails shall be driven home with the heads slightly below
the surface of the gypsum wallboard, in a dimple formed by the crowned face of the driving
tool striking the last blow. A nail set shall not be used, and care shall be taken to avoid
breaking the paper face.
E. Cutting And Trimming: When necessary to cut ends, edges, scribe or make cutouts within
the field of the wallboard, it shall be done in a workmanlike manner.
F. Jointing: All joints, screw head and other depressions in the surface of exposed wallboard
shall be treated in the recommended manner with USG Perf-A- Tape, Joint System. All "V"
grooves formed by abutting wrapped eased edges of Sheetrock SW Wallboard, and ceiling
angles, shall be prefilled with Durabond "90" Joint Compound in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
G. Metal Trim: All internal and external angles formed by the intersection of either wallboard
surfaces or other surfaces shall be treated with USG metal trim.
H. Metal Bead: All vertical or horizontal external comers shall have Perf-A-Bead applied in
accordance with manufacturer's directions.
END OF SECTION
09250-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09780
SPECIAL FLOORING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes application of non-skid epoxy seamless flooring system over concrete floors
where scheduled.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Federal VOC emission requirements.
B. Comply with manufacturer's safety and application instructions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
B. Product Data: Product description and characteristics, technical data, test results, if any,
showing compliance with requirements and performance record.
C. Submit color samples for selection by the Architect.
D. Application instructions, safety and health hazard information, precautionary procedure
recommendations.
E. After application is complete, submit a certificate signed by a duly authorized representative
of the manufacturer stating that the application was made by an approved applicator and the
coverage is adequate to provide the required results.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work with concrete installation to ensure wet curing methods only in areas to be
sealed. Do not use curing compounds unless specifically approved in writing by the sealer
manufacturer. Do not use the sealer-hardener as a curing membrane.
09780-1
60-954.00
B. Do not apply material until concrete is thoroughly dry and has cured a minimum of 28 days,
and until construction activities that may cause excessive traffic, soiling or damage to the
floor have been completed.
C. Do not apply the material when air temperature has been less than 600 F within the last 6
hours or is expected to be less than 600 F within 8 hours after the application is completed.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. Provide written guarantee by the sealer manufacturer to provide sufficient equal material to
repeat the treatment in areas that show signs of dusting as a result of wear and abrasion
within 5 years after the original application, provided it was made by an experienced
applicator and a certificate of coverage was issued and signed by a duly authorized
representative of the manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dur-A-Quartz epoxy flooring is a combination of color quartz aggregate fused during
application into a seamless surface with specially formulated high quality clear 100% solid
epoxy binder and top coat with slip resistant properties, and a 4-inch cove base.
B. Product shall be as manufactured by Dur-A-Flex or accepted equal.
C. Color shall be as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Verify that surface is clean, dry, and free of loose dirt, dust, oil, sealers or curing compounds,
droppings or adhesions from construction activities. Correct defective conditions before
starting the application. Starting the work signifies acceptance of the surface and
responsibility for required results.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Follow protective measures recommended by the manufacturer to ensure the safety and
protection of workers and applicators.
09780-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. Protect adjacent materials that may be damaged by contact with the material during
application.
B. Apply the epoxy coating in 3/16-inch thickness and with 4-inch high wall base and radius
cove detail, in conformance to manufacturer's recommendations. Distribute evenly for
coverage rate recommended by the manufacturer. Decrease the cover area if recommended
by the manufacturer or directed by the Engineer. Mop up excess solution or puddles.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. After application is completed, protect the floor against excessive traffic, soiling or
defacement until acceptance by the Owner.
B. Before fmal inspection and acceptance, clean the floor and touch up abraded or porous areas.
Leave the entire surface clean and showing a uniform color and texture.
END OF SECTION
09780-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to provide a coating system
for the surfaces indicated and as specified herein.
B. The work includes painting and finishing of interior items and surfaces such as ceilings,
walls, miscellaneous metal, doors and frames, equipment and all other work obviously
required to be painted unless otherwise specified herein or on the Drawings. Omission of
minor items in the schedule of work does not mean that such items, where they come within
the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein, may be excluded.
C. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions,
enamels, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate
or finish coats.
D. Do not paint or paint over the following items:
1. Any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or
any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates.
2. Windows unless otherwise indicated.
3. Products with polished chrome, aluminum, nickel or stainless steel finish.
4. Plastic switch plates and receptacle plates.
5. Signs and nameplates.
6. Finish hardware.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by
approved paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's
identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable.
09900-1
60-954.00
09900-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Provide paint prime coats that are compatible with and produced by the same manufacturer
as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only
within recommended limits.
C. Use only experienced specialized painters familiar with all aspects of surface preparations
and applications required for this project.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data and samples as indicated below in time to provide adequate
review by the Engineer and in accordance with Article 6.11 of the GeneraJ Conditions.
B. Samples of Paint and Painting:
1. Submit full color chip line for each type of paint specified for color selection by the
Engineer. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of
the Contractor.
2. Submit samples of each finish and color for review before any work is started.
3. Prepare and submit samples of special finishes, when required by the Engineer, so
that an area of each sample indicates the appearance of the various coats. For
example, where three coat work is specified, divide the sample into three areas - one
showing the application of one coat only, one showing application of two coats and
one showing all three coats. Finish work not matching or meeting the standard of
such samples, when approved, will be rej ected.
4. Resubmit rejected samples until approved.
1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label. Deliver only containers carrying manufacturer's label bearing
the following information:
1. Name or title of material
2. Fed. Spec. number if applicable
3. Manufacturer's stock number and color
4. Manufacturer's name
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Generic type
6. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents
7. Application instructions
B. ,Provide containers that are clearly marked to indicate any hazards connected with the use of
the paint and steps which should be taken to prevent injury to those handling the product.
C. Handle and store all containers in such a manner as to prevent damage or loss of labels or
containers.
D. Store and mix all painting only in the designated areas. Comply with the requirements of
pertinent codes and fire regulations. Provide proper containers outside of the building for
painting wastes. Do not use plumbing fixtures for this purpose.
E. Remove used rags from the buildings every night and take every precaution against
spontaneous combustion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide paint manufactured by one of the following: Sherwin-Williams (S- W), Pratt &
Lambert, PPG Industries, Inc., Benjamin Moore, Bruning, Glidden, Devoe, M.A. Bruder &
Sons, Carboline, Tnemec, Olympic or Rustoleum. Submit to the Engineer requests for
approval of other paint manufacturers and materials other than those specified.
B. The following coating systems list products by name to establish a standard of quality but
other products of the same generic types may be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
When other than the specified coating system is proposed, submit on a typewritten list giving
the proposed coatings, brand name, trade name, generic type and catalog number of the
proposed system for approval.
C. Use only paint produced by the same manufacturer in successive field coats. In the first field
coat over shop painted or previously painted surfaces use paint that is compatible with and
will cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to the underlying paint.
D. Ensure that emulsion and alkyd paints contain a mildewcide and that both the paint and
mildewcide conform to OSHA and Federal requirements, including Federal Specification
TT-P-19.
09900- 3
60-954.00
09900-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Do not use paint containing lead. Use only pure boiled linseed oil.
F. Use only clean painters' rags, completely sterilized.
G. Paint colors, if not specified in the Finish Schedule or elsewhere on the Drawings or
Specifications, will be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard color chart
and factory mixed.
2.02 COATING SYSTEMS
A. Class 1 Exposures - Metal (Exterior):
1. Class 1 Surfaces: Exterior metal surfaces that are exposed to the weather including
the following:
a. Metal doors and door frames
2. Class 1 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Wire brush, sandblast or pickle to remove mill scale and
rust. Completely degrease all metal surfaces by solvent cleaning in
compliance with SSPC-SP1.
b. Prime Coat: Galvanized Metal: S-W Galvite Paint, B50W3, 2.0 mils dry.
c. First Coat: Alkyd: S- W SWP Gloss House & Trim, A2 Series, 2.0 mils
dry
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat.
B. Class 2 Exposures - Stucco and Concrete Surfaces (Exterior):
1. Class 2 Surfaces: Stucco and concrete surfaces of new buildings not included in
other coating systems.
2. Class 2 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Fill cracks, voids and other surface imperfections.
Remove mortar droppings.
b. Prime Coat: Stucco: Acrylic Primer
S- W Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer,
A24W300, 3.0 mils dry
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
First Coat:
Acrylic Latex: S-W A-IOO Latex House & Tri, A6 Series
Flat, 1.3 mils dry
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat
C. Class 3 Exposures - Wood (Exterior)
1. Class 3 Surfaces: Exterior wood surfaces, including the fascia, outlooker and trim:
2. Class 3 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Sand finished surfaces. Surface scrape, clean and give
a coat of knot sealer to small dry seasoned knots before application of the
prime coat. After priming, fill all holes and imperfections in finished
surfaces with putty or plastic wood filter.
b. Prime Coat: Alkyd: S-W A-IOO Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer, Y24W20,
2.2 mils dry.
c. First Coat: Alkyd: S- W SWP Gloss House & Trim, A2 Series, 2.0 mils
dry.
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat.
D. Class 4 Exposures - Metal (Interior)
1. Class 4 Surfaces: Interior metal surfaces including the following:
a. Metal doors and door frames
b. Exposed surfaces of electric panels, conduit, etc.
2. Class 4 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Wirebrush, sandblast or pickle to remove mill scale and
rust. Completely degrease all metal surfaces by solvent cleaning in
compliance with SSPC-SPl.
b. Prime Coat: Galvanized Metal: S-W Galvite Paint, B 50 W3, 2.0 mils dry
c. First Coat: Alkyd: S- W ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel,
B34 W200 Series, 1.7 mils dry
09900-5
60-954.00
09900-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat
E. Class 5 Exposures - Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard (Interior):
1. Class 5 Surfaces: Gypsum wallboard surfaces of the walls and plaster ceilings of the
building.
2. Class 5 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Fill cracks, voids and other surface imperfections with
patching paste
b. Prime Coat: Plaster: Alkyd: S- W Wall & Wood Primer, B49W2, 2.0
mils dry
c. Prime Coat: Gypsum Wallboard: Alkyd: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Wall
Primer, B28W200, 1.1 mils dry
d. First Coat: Alkyd: S-W ProMar 200 Alkyd Flat Wall Paint, B32W201,
2.0 mils dry.
e. Second Coat: Same as First Coat.
F. Class 6 Exposures - Masonry and Concrete (Interior):
1. Class 6 Surfaces: Exposed interior masonry, and concrete surfaces of new buildings
not included in other coating systems.
2. Class 6 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Fill cracks, voids and other surface imperfections.
Remove mortar droppings.
b. Prime Coat: Concrete: Acrylic Primer
S- W Heavy duty Block Filler
10 mils dry
Concrete Block: Acrylic Primer
S- W Heavy Duty Block Filler
10 mil dry/coat
c. First Coat: Polyamide Epoxy: S- W Tile-Clad High Solids Epoxy, 1.5
mils dry
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Class 7 Exposures - Wood (Interior) (Varnish)
1. Class 7 Surfaces: Bi-fold wood door surfaces to have a natural finish, including trim.
2. Class 7 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Dry, sand smooth and clean the surfaces to be coated.
Pick up all sanding dust with a tack cloth.
b.
First Coat:
S-W Oil Base Gloss Varnish, A66V91, 1.0 mils dry, reduce
with 1 pint mineral spirits per gallon.
c. Second Coat: S-W Satin Varnish, A66F90, 1.0 mils dry.
H. Class 8 Exposures - Wood (Interior)
1. Class 8 Surfaces: Wood door surfaces to have a paint finish.
2. Class 8 Coating System:
a. Surface Preparation: Surface Preparation: Sand finished surfaces. Surface
scrape, clean and give a coat of knot sealer to small dry seasoned knots before
application of-the prime coat. After priming, fill all holes and imperfections
in finished surfaces with putty or plastic wood filter..
b. Prime Coat: Alkyd: S- W ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater, B49W
200, 2.0 mils dry.
c. First Coat: Alkyd: S-W ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, B34W
200, 1.7 mils dry.
d. Second Coat: Same as First Coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. In addition to the aforementioned preparations, remove all dirt, rust, scale, splinters, loose
particles, disintegrated paint, grease, oil and other deleterious substances from all surfaces
which are to be coated.
09900- 7
60-954.00
09900-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Remove, mask or otherwise protect hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces,
plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in contact with painted surfaces and not to be
painted prior to surface preparation and painting operations.
C. Before commencing work, make certain that surfaces to be coated are in acceptable
condition. The application of paint will be held as an acceptance of the surfaces and working
conditions and the Contractor will be held responsible for the results reasonably expected
from the materials and processes specified.
D. Program the cleaning and painting so contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall
onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.
E. Prepare surfaces of gypsum wallboard surfaces to be painted by removing all dust and dirt.
F. Clean ferrous substances, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose
mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. Grind and sand
smooth all welds, blisters, etc.. Fill all pits and dents and correct all imperfections so as to
provide a smooth surface for painting.
3.02 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and directions and closely match the selected colors, stirring materials
before and during application to maintain a mixture of uniform density, free of film, dirt and
other foreign materials.
B. Use no thinners except those specifically mentioned and only in such quantity as directed by
the manufacturer. If thinning is used, apply sufficient additional coats to assure the required
dry film thickness is achieved. Use only the manufacturer's recommended thinner or cleanup
solvent for all clean-up and apply by brush, spray, airless spray or roller as recommended by
the manufacturer for optimum performance and appearance.
3.03 APPLICATIONS
A. Paint all exposed surfaces in rooms scheduled for painting whether or not colors are
designated in schedules, except where the natural finish of material is obviously intended and
specifically noted as a surface not be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically
mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is
not designated, the Engineer will select these from standard colors available for the materials
systems as specified.
B. Use only skilled and experienced craftsmen and provide only the highest quality
workmanship.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for the type of material being applied.
D. Use all paint at room temperature and ensure the surfaces to be painted are dry and clean.
E. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final
coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
F. Apply paint in a neat manner with finished surfaces free of runs, sags, ridges, laps and brush
marks. Apply each coat in a manner that will produce an even film of uniform and proper
thickness.
G. Paint surfaces behind moveable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat
only.
H. Finish interior and exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as the exterior
faces, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Omit the first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up
painted, unless otherwise specified.
J. Retouch existing painted surfaces damaged by modification work or other operations of the
Contractor, to conform to the above coating systems and blend in with the new and existing
work. Repaint damaged surfaces with not less than 2 coats, and other existing surfaces that
are listed with the coating system specified.
K. The prime and intermediate coats as specified for the various coating systems may be applied
in the shop by the manufacturer. The shop coats shall be of the type specified and shall be
compatible with the field coat or coats. Give such items as pumps, motors, equipment,
electrical panels, etc. at least one touch up coat with the intermediate coat material and one
complete finish coat in the field.
3.04 APPLICATIONS RESTRICTIONS
A. Apply coatings only on properly prepared surfaces as herein specified, and only in dry
weather. Remove and redo any surface coating damaged by moisture or rain to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Do not apply paint to surfaces which show a moisture content greater than 15 percent.
09900-9
60-954.00
09900-10
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.05 MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS
A. Apply coatings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in the film
thickness recommended for each coat and for the total coating system.
B. Apply a prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not
been prime coated by others.
C. Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no bum-through or other defects due
to insufficient sealing.
3.06 FINISHES
A. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces to provide an opaque, smooth
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
B. Complete Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish
or repaint work not in compliance with specific requirements.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide the necessary properly calibrated gauges for the Engineer to check the completed
surfaces. Check nonferrous surfaces for number of coats and thickness by use of a Tooke
gauge. Check ferrous surfaces for film thickness by use of an Elcometer or Micro-Test
magnetic dry film gauge properly calibrated.
B. Remove and refinish or otherwise correct to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer all work which
peels, crazes, blisters, fails to adhere or otherwise fails to properly serve the intended
purposes at no additional cost to the Department.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. While painting equipment, piping, etc., protect all other surfaces that are not to receive the
same paint.
B. Provide protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings, and
accessories throughout the painting operation. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware,
etc., before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery nameplates
and all machined parts not to receive paint. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is
being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.09 CLEANING
A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of debris and rubbish and remove all scaffolding,
paint cloths, paint, and brushes from the building when completed.
B. Cleaning: Remove all paint brushed, splattered, spilled or splashed on any surface not
specified to be painted.
3.10 EXTRA STOCK
A. Upon completion of painting work, furnish to the Owner at no additional cost, one gallon of
each type and color of finish paint for touching up. Paint container labels shall be complete
with manufacturer's name, generic type, number, color and location where used.
END OF SECTION
09900-11
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 10170
SOLID PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS
P ART - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Toilet partitions and urinal screens, vanity tops and sill, complete with
hardware.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method
for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. National Bureau of Standards (NBS): Test Method Comparison of Combustion Product
Toxicity, PRO/MT, NBS-TOX, 48.1.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
B. Product Data: Indicate details of construction, assembly and anchorage to building
construction; manufacturer's specifications including description of hardware; maintenance
instructions. Include test reports confirming Class C and toxicity requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit 6 sets, indicating dimensioned partition plans, elevations, details,
swing of doors, color, location of hardware items, and required wall blocking. Label
components and fully describe anchorage devices and substrates. Show relationship to
plumbing fixtures.
D. Samples: 6 inch by 6 inch sample of panel material in both stock and custom colors. Include
sample of fastener and shield for wall bracket anchorage.
E. Copy of manufacturer's standard ten-year warranty submitted with shop drawings,
guaranteeing against material defects or faulty fabrication, assembly and installation.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certification: Provide certification that solid plastic partitions, hardware, headrail, and wall
brackets delivered to site comply with requirements of NFP A -101 for Class C interior
10170-1
60-954.00
10170-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
finishes, or better, and toxicity not greater than burning wood when tested in accordance with
NBS- TaX, 48.1.
B. Installer Certification: Provide documentation from the toilet partition manufacturer that
installers have been factory-trained in the installation of these partitions.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Ship components with protective wrap. Store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of installation submit warranty for ten-years starting at date of project
acceptance by Owner stating that failed product or installation shall be replaced at no
additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER'S
A. Solid Plastic Toilet Partitions, sills and lavatory tops:
1. Sana- Tec Industries, Inc.
2. Santana Products Co., 1001 Series Poly-Marble HD - #525.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Panels, pilasters, urinal screens and doors of 1 inch thick seamless high-density polymer.
resin compound, with Pro-304, Plasti-Glaze 280, or approved equivalent protective finish.
All edges shall be machined to a 0.250 inch radius. Phenolic resin construction is not
acceptable.
1. Plastic material shall comply with the following:
a. Flame Spread of 76-200 and Smoke Developed of 0-450 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84.
b. Products of combustion of "no more toxic" than those from burning wood
when tested in accordance with NBS- TOX, 48.1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. Integral color shall be uniform throughout panel and all panels shall match.
B. Hardware: Provide solid plastic hardware when available.
1. Headrails shall be extruded 6061- T6 aluminum alloy with a clear anodized finish;
anti-grip design. Headrail brackets shall be stainless steel.
2. Hinges, door latches, and door strikes shall be stainless steel. Integral hinges with
nylon door pivots are acceptable.
3. Wall brackets shall be full length and shall be plastic, to match type and color of
plastic panels. Through-bolt brackets to panels and pilasters with sex bolts. Wall
brackets shall be used for panel and pilasters, pilaster to wall and panel to wall
connections.
4. Shoes and fasteners shall be plastic, same type and color as plastic panels. Use
theftproof stainless steel screws.
5. Door pulls and door stops shall be heavy chrome-plated zamac, or stainless steel.
6. Provide clear anodized aluminum bars fastened to bottom edge of panels and doors
with theft-proof countersunk screws. Bars shall be flush with faces of panels.
7. Finish of exposed portion of screws, bolts and nuts shall match finish of attached
hardware item. Sex bolts shall be plastic barrel nut and shoulder screw design with
tamperproof head. Color to match bracket.
C. Anchorages:
1. Connection to wall shall provide a rigid and durable anchorage to wall construction.
Use plastic shields, expansion bolts or "butterfly" type bolts. Finish of exposed
portions shall match finish of wall brackets.
2. Plastic shields will not be accepted unless partition manufacturer can demonstrate
that they will not work loose in wall or cause a less than rigid and durable anchorage
and further, be guaranteed by the partition manufacturer and the partition installer
against pullout or loosening.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate compartments to the following configuration. Dividing panels and doors shall be
55 inches high and with bottom edge 14 inches from the floor. Pilasters shall be 82 inches
high and fastened to 3 inch high shoes of same material as pilaster.
10170-3
60-954.00
10170-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Using template provided by toilet accessories manufacturer, provide cutouts for recessed
items.
C. Compartments for handicapped shall be fabricated in accordance with the latest code
requirements for accessibility.
2.03 VANITY TOPS
A. Fabricate vanity tops with integral base of polymer resin compound with same finish as toilet
partitions. The size and thickness shall be as shown.
2.04 SILL
A. Fabricate of polymer resin compound with same finish and color as toilet partition, thickness
as shown.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Check areas to receive partitions, vanity tops and sills for correct dimensions, plumbness of
substrate and soundness of substrate surfaces that would affect installation of these items.
Verify that blocking is installed to receive partition anchorages.
B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures to assure compatibility with installation of partitions.
C. Do not begin installation of these items until conditions are satisfactory.
D. Provide supports as detailed for vanity tops and sills.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb and level. Follow partition manufacturer's printed
installation instructions and final approved shop drawings.
B. Provide uniform clearance of not more than 1 inch between panels and walls, and clearance
of not more than 1/4 inch at vertical edges of doors uniform from top and bottom.
C. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints
wherever possible.
D. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Set both in and out-swinging door hinges to hold doors open at 30 degrees from closed
position when unlatched.
B. Perform final adjustments to leveling devices and hardware.
C. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings and accessories. Avoid soiling other
adjacent finishes. Follow partition manufacturer's printed cleaning instructions.
END OF SECTION
10170-5
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 10201
LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK. INCLUDED
A. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing and installing louvers where
indicated on the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
1. Shop drawings for louvers, shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication of
these items.
2. Samples of finishes shall be submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Louvers:
1. Aluminum louvers shall be stationary, extruded aluminum with horizontal blades
(with water baffles and drainable mullions) and shall be equal to Airolite Company,
Type K 638, Construction Specialties, Inc., Model 4115 or approved equal.
2. Frames and blades shall be 6063-T5 alloy, .08 I-inch thick extruded aluminum and
all connections shall be welded
3. Louvers shall be equipped with II2-inch mesh aluminum bird screen mounted in
extruded aluminum rewirable frames attached to interior face with sheet metal
screws. Mullions shall be as shown on the Drawings.
4. Aluminum louvers shall be thoroughly cleaned and given a Kynar finish, color as
selected.
10201-1
60-954.00
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Insofar as possible, fabricated material shall be fitted and shop assembled ready for erection.
Welding and equipment shall conform to American Welding Society's Code for Welding in
Building Construction, latest edition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis and where aluminum will
contact concrete, mortar or plaster, the contact surface of the metals shall be separated using
not less than one coat of zinc chromate primer and one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented
asphalt paint on each surface; or where deemed necessary by the Engineer, not less than one
course of asphalt saturated cotton fabric cemented to both metals with flashing cement, shall
be used. Finished works shall be cleaned and excess cement removed.
B. All work shall be square, plumb and true, accurately fitted with tight joints and intersections.
All work shall be adequately anchored in place at proper elevations, planes and locations.
Exposed work shall be finished smooth with welds ground smooth.
END OF SECTION
10201-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A Section Includes: Provide labor and materials required for installation of signage for
restrooms.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data.
B. Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature before commencing work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Provide informational/symbol signs oflaminated materials including necessary accessories.
1. Restrooms: One sign minimum per each entrance, ADA compliant signs
a. Sign shall be fiber glass with engraved symbols and copy raised 1/32" and
Grade 2 braille and minimum 5/8" copy for ADA compliance, size 6" x 8".
b. Equal to Model No. HC 300A by Best Sign Systems or accepted equal.
2. Use finish schedule name for each room for message content for the signage.
Type face: Helvetica medium; type size 314-inch.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: AR.K. Ramos Architectural Signage System, Southwell Co. or
Best Sign System.
10400-1
60-954.00
10400-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion ofthe work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting of Signs:
1. Mount ADA signs on door with centerlines 5'-0" above the finish floor with tamper
proof fasteners and pre drilled holes.
2. Mount message sign 2-inch above ADA sign.
a. Signage shall be left clean and without any rough edges. Signage and frame
shall be left without any defects concerning installation from plumb and
level, concerning material quality or any other discrepancy in mounting.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 10500
LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included in this Section consists of furnishing and installing lockers where
indicated on the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings or catalog sheets and color charts shall be submitted for approval and color
selections on lockers in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Lockers:
1. General: Lockers shall be Republic and Storage Company or approved equal, double
tier, single door lockers, 12-inches wide x 12-inches deep x 36-inches high mounted
on closed base as indicated and shall have perforated or louvered doors. Lockers
shall be equipped with two single prong hooks, hat shelf and aluminum number
plates. Handle shall include provision for padlocking.
2. Locker Construction: Lockers shall be fabricated of 24 gauge steel, cold rolled and
free from surface imperfections. Bolts shall be cadmium plated. Vertical comers
shall be flanged to provide double thickness. Door frame shall be 16 gauge formed
steel channels and vertical member shall have an additional flange to form
continuous door stops. Comers shall be lapped and welded into a rigid assembly.
Bottom cross members shall have a tang at each end which fits through slot in rear
flange of upright flange to prevent twisting out of alignment. Top and bottom cross
members shall provide support for front edge of locker top and locker bottom. Door
jambs shall have welded reinforcement at three locations on each side, all equipped
with rubber silencers.
3. Locker Doors: Doors shall be one piece, 16 gauge steel having perforations 112-inch
in diameter, 1 3/4-inch o.c. horizontally and 7/8-inch o.c. vertically. Vertical edges
10500-1
60-954.00
shall be formed into channel shaped reinforcements. Top and bottom shall be
flanged at 90 angle. Hinges shall be not less than 2-inches high, 0.50-inch steel, five
knuckle, full-loop forming double thickness on each leaf and there shall be three
hinges per leaf. Hinges shall be set in slot in door and in frame and projection
welded to frame and bolted to door with two bolts at each hinge. Hinge pin shall be
nonremovable.
4. Locks: Locking device shall engage at three points, shall be channel shaped and
operate within channel reinforcement of the door. Locking device shall be
pre locking so mechanism can be locked in open position with door locking
automatically when closed. Handle shall be chrome plated and latching lift fully
protected by fixed handle case. Padlock attachment shall be integral part of lift
which shall be attached directly to locking bar.
5. Finish: Steel parts shall be thoroughly cleaned, given a bonding and rust inhibitive
phosphate treatment and then electrostatically sprayed with a heavy coat of high
quality enamel. Enamel shall be baked at 300 and must withstand a rigid hammer
test without chipping or flaking. Color shall be #89 Cork.
6. Closure Panels: Sloping top sections and comer closure panels shall match lockers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Units and materials shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with
manufacturer's printed directions. Finished installation shall be rigidly secured, plumb, level
and true to line.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Finished installations shall be protected from damage until date of fmal acceptance of the
project.
END OF SECTION
10500-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide toilet and bath accessories as shown on the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, installation instructions, samples, certifications, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. See plans for model numbers of accessories.
B. Acceptable manufacturers for toilet accessories:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company
2. American Dispenser Co., Inc.
3. Hall Mack
C. Acceptable manufacturers for baby changing station:
1. Safe-Strap (surface mounted type)
2. Rubbermaid Commercial Products (surface mounted type)
3. Brocad Products, Inc. (surface mounted type)
10800-1
60-954.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Protect until final acceptance.
10800-2 60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 13150
SWIMMING POOLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and
Division 1 of Specifications Sections, apply to work of this Section.
B. The following Divisions contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Mechanical/Electrical/Equipment Coordination: Division 1.
2. Earth Work and Pool Excavation: Division 2.
3. Concrete Deck Work: Division 2.
4. Mechanical: Plumbing Systems - Division 15
HV AC Systems and Equipment - Division 15 & 16.
5. Electrical: Divisiont6.
C. Applicable requirements of the following Specifications and Codes apply to Work
of this Section:
1. National Spa and Pool Institute (NSPI):
a. Minimum Standard for Public Swimming Pools.
2. All local building and health codes.
3. National Electrical Code (NEC).
4. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): Seal of approval program.
5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Specifications
referenced herein.
6. Department of Public Health.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Layout of pools; bench mark and exact location supplied by the General
Contractor.
13150-1
60-955.00
13150-2
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Excavation and stone fill as required for pool tank structure and pipe trenching.
Refer to Division one and two for any special conditions.
3. Reinforced concrete pool tank structures, as detailed on Contract Drawings and
shop drawings.
4. Pool mechanical systems, including piping, recirculation system, filtration
system, slide mechanical systems, and water chemical treatment system.
5. Heating System for swimming pool. Coordinate all interlocking and control
wiring for pool heaters with HV AC contractor.
6. Drop slide and water activity mechanical systems including all piping.
7. Pool subsurface underdrain and site sump system.
8. Interior pool finish, including plaster finish, tile, and grouting.
9. Pool deck equipment and accessory equipment shown and/or specified, except
furnish only anchorage's embedded within the pool deck for installation by the
deck Contractor.
10. Coordinate all electrical interlocking and control wiring for related pool
equipment.
B. Definitions:
1. The term "pool" as used in this Section shall refer to the following:
a. Multi-sectional Pool: Combination zero-depth entry/leisure, and lap
sWImmmg.
2. The term "concrete" as used in this Section shall refer to concrete for swimming
pool construction only.
3. The term "Architect/Engineer" as used in this section shall refer to the
swimming pool design only.
C. Applicable Codes and Permits:
1. State Department of Public Health by Owner.
2. County and Local Departments of Public Health by Contractor.
3. Any others by Contractor.
D. Related Work Not in Section 13150 Specified Elsewhere:
1. Pool deck construction, including finishes, caulking, drains, etc., installation of
anchors for deck equipment; anchors supplied by Pool Contractor.
I
I
I
I
I
I
, I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Potable water or fresh water: Fresh water connection to auto fill (see Contract
Drawings) and waste water receptor/sewer for filter backwash as shown on
drawings.
3. Pool Electrical Work: All electrical connections shall be by the Division 16
contractor. The Pool Contractor shall provide the filter pumps, motors,
solenoids, relays, water level probes (with housing), motorized valves, etc. as
shown on Contract Drawings and required by pool systems equipment
manufacturer. The electrical Contractor shall install and wire all electrical
equipment furnished by the Pool Contractor and shall provide all motor starters
and disconnect switches as indicated or required by Codes. The Electrical
contractor shall provide grounding per NEC Articles 250 and 680.
4. Heating system for pools, heater and controls by the Pool Contractor.
5. Concrete for pool: see Division 3 for reinforced concrete specifications.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Pool Contractor: Work of this section shall be performed by a
contractor who has a minimum of five (5) projects with a proven five (5) year
record of competence and experience in the construction of similar facilities of this
size and complexity. Prequalification is required prior to bid. This must be received
by the Architect 7 days prior to the bid date on the appropriate AlA 305 form.
B. Performance Criteria: Certain sections of the specifications contain performance
criteria rather than product descriptions. It shall be the obligation of the Pool
Contractor to insure that all criteria are satisfied and the burden or proof of
conformance shall rest with the Pool Contractor. The Architect/Engineer shall
require complete calculations, past performance records and, if required, inspection
trips of similar facilities to substantiate conformance with these criteria. The
Architect/Engineer shall be sole judge of conformance and the Pool Contractor is
cautioned that he will be required to bid and provide a finished product meeting all
stated criteria and meeting or exceeding Department of Public Health requirements.
1.04 TESTING\FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
This section requires the following tests be performed during construction of the
project. Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
A. Testing and Flushing of Piping
1. Contractor shall be responsible for discovering leaks and making necessary
repaIrs.
a. Pressure piping: After the piece is laid, the joints completed, and the
trench partially backfilled leaving joints exposed for examination, subject
new lines to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 50 pounds per square
inch. Joints shall remain watertight under this pressure for a period of two
hours. All air must be expelled from pipes prior to testing.
13150-3
60-955.00
13150-4
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Gravity lines: A water test shall be applied to all gravity drain piping
system, either in their entirety or in sections. All openings shall be tightly
plugged and each system filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot
head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion
under test, for at least 15 minutes before the inspection starts. System shall
be water tight at all joints.
c. Provide test results to the Architect/Engineer before covering pipes with
concrete.
2. Leaks shall be repaired and tested repeatedly until leakage or infiltration is
approved.
B. Water Treatment
1. Obtain a chemical analysis of the source/pool make-up water supply and submit
to ArchitectlEngineer. Include the following:
a. Total alkalinitylPPM.
b. Calcium hardness/PPM.
c. ChlorinelPPM.
d. pH.
e. Iron.
f. Copper.
2. Provide a list of required chemicals and an estimate of quantities required to the
owner in sufficient time to allow the owner to purchase chemicals.
3. Treat and balance pool water prior to turnover of pool to the Owner (using
chemicals provided by the Owner).
4. Pool water: balance to establish a total alkalinity level of60-125 PPM and
calcium hardness level of 180-375 PPM (3 times alkalinity level).
5. Stabilize pool water to 30 ppm with cyanuric acid.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Required.
1. Refer to Division 1 for number required.
2. Refer to Section 13150, Parts 2 and 3 for submittal required.
B. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's/Installer's written installation instructions.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. The Contractor shall submit for approval to the Architect/Engineer complete
lists, including descriptions, catalogs, cuts, etc. and where applicable
dimensioned shop drawings of all material, fixtures and equipment to be
furnished and installed under this specification. Submittals shall adequately
and completely describe the equipment, including where necessary or requested
complete construction and installation dimensions, complete capacity and
performance data, all accessory and auxiliary equipment, and all pertinent
details of manufacture. Shop drawings for equipment shall be submitted and
approval of shop drawing shall be obtained before proceeding with fabrication.
Shop drawings shall not be "doctored" reproducibles of Architects/Engineers
drawings.
C. Certificates: Submit in duplicate a certificate from the manufacturer, properly
attested, stating the material and construction comply with the requirements of the
drawings and specifications. Certificates shall be furnished before the installation of
the equipment.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings as required by Parts 2 and 3 of this Section.
2. The drawings accompanying this specification are essentially diagrammatic in
nature and show the general arrangement of all equipment, piping, ductwork,
services, etc. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to
show all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. The
Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions of all
his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing all fittings, pipe
and accessories that may be required to meet such conditions. Where
conditions necessitate a rearrangement, the Contractor shall obtain the
Architect/Engineer's approval. Locate all valves for maximum operation
accessibility.
E. Samples: Submit tile samples, and other samples of materials, finishes, and trim as
may be requested by the Architect/Engineer.
F. Valve Charts: Submit two copies of valve charts for each piping system, consisting
of Isometric Drawings, or piping layouts showing and identifying each valve and
describing its function to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
1. Upon completion of the Work, one copy of each chart sealed to rigid backboard
with clear lacquer placed under glass and framed, shall be hung in a
conspicuous location in the equipment room.
G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Submit to the Architect/Engineer (4) copies at substantial completion of the
project.
H. Furnish to the Architect/Engineer the following:
1. Submittals:
13150-5
60-955.00
I
a. Concrete Mix Design. I
b. Non-Shrink Grouts.
c. PVC Waterstop. I
d. Expansion/Construction Joint Materials.
e. Caulking. I
f. Pumps and Strainers. I
g. Heaters.
h. Chemical Controllers, Feeders and Storage Tanks. I
1. Valves. I
Gauges, Thermometers and Flow Meters.
J.
k. Main Drain Grating, and Gutter Grating. I
1. Inlets. I
m. Piping Materials.
n. Wall Sleeves And Seals For Piping. I
o. Tile Setting Materials and Joint Fillers.
2. Shop Drawings: I
a. Water Activities. I
b. Filters.
c. Tile Gutter and Grating. I
d. Surge Tank and Pump Pit Pipe Penetrations. I
3. Test Results:
a. Concrete Testing. I
b. Compaction. I
c. Piping Pressure Testing.
4. Samples: I
a. Paints Factory And Field Applied.
I
131 50-6 60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Tile.
c. Gratings.
5. Guarantees/Warranties:
a. Standard (1) Year.
b. Special (2) Year On Concrete Structure.
c. Special Equipment.
6. Close Out Documents:
a. 0 & M Manuals.
b. As Built Drawings.
c. Owners Certification Of Instruction.
d. Extra Materials.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Division 1 of the Specifications for additional requirements.
B. Deliver all materialsand equipment to the work site in original packages fully
identified, with manufacturer's label. Store off ground and protect from weather
with a suitable covering.
C. Deliver cementitious materials to work site in manufacturer's standard packages.
Immediately upon delivery to work site, store in waterproof sheds, sheds required
shall be provided by the Pool Contractor. No cementitious or other material that has
become caked or hardened will be permitted in the work.
D. Protect plastic pipe from exposure to chemicals (aromatic hydrocarbons,
halogenated hydrocarbons and other esters and keytones) that might attack the
material. Protect all pipe from mechanical damage and long exposure to sunlight
during storage.
1.07 WARRANTIES
A. Warranty: Provide one (1) year warranty covering all pool workmanship, materials,
and equipment. Refer to Division 1 of the Specifications for additional
requirements.
B. Special Project Warranty on Concrete Structure: The Pool Contractor shall
guarantee for two (2) years repair of the concrete pool structure covering any
defects, cracks, and/or leaking in the pool shell.
C. All standard manufacturer's warranties shall apply to all equipment and products
provided by this contractor.
13150-7
60-955.00
13150-8
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GUN GRADE SEALANTS
N. Just prior to installing the joint sealant, the joint cavity shall be cleaned by
sandblasting or power wire brushing. Install bond breaker tape per manufacturer's
instructions.
O. After the joints have been prepared as described above, the joint sealant shall be
applied. The primer, if required, and joint sealant shall be applied only with the
equipment and methods recommended by the joint sealant manufacturer.
P. Submerged Sealants: Sika 221, manufactured by Sika Chemical Company,
Lyndhurst, New Jersey, or approved equal.
2.02 SWIMMING POOL FILTRATION SYSTEM
2.3 FIBERGLASS FILTER
A. FIL TER TANK
1. The equipment described herein shall be products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the fabrication of fiberglass pressure vessels for at least 15 years.
2. The filter tank shall be no less than 36" diameter with a 187.75" length, suitable
for 50 psi working pressure and hydrostatically tested to 75 psi.
3. Saddle style bases (2) shall be provided for tank support. Systems which
incorporate stacked tanks shall include similar bases and mounting saddles for
the uppervessel. Access to the tank shall be provided by a 14" x 18" manhole
with two (2) fiberglass curved yokes. Manhole seal shall be complete with a one
piece 1/4" neoprene gasket and positioned so that internal pressure from the filter
will augment the seal. No additional hardware or through bolts will be allowed.
4. Drain out system shall consist of one (1) 3/4" coupling mounted to the tank
bottom. One (1) 3/4" coupling shall be provided for the air relief connection.
5. Each filter tank shall be equipped with the necessary flanges and connections for
the internal and external piping. Connections shall be comprised of fiberglass
flanges and schedule 80 PVC flanges.
6. The resin used shall be a commercial grade, premium corrosion resistant vinyl
ester that has been evaluated in a laminate by test in accordance with ASTM C-
581 in service comparable to the intended service and recommended for this
service by the manufacturer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. A thixotropic agent that does not interfere with visual inspection of laminate
quality shall only be added for viscosity control in resins that are not to be used in
the inner corrosion barrier, interior layers, interior secondary layers, and interior
top coats.
8. Resin pastes used to fill crevices may contain thixo-tropic agents provided that all
such areas are subsequently covered with a full corrosion resistant barrier
laminate.
9. Ultraviolet absorbers shall be added to the exterior surface for improved exterior
resistance.
10. Chopped strand mat shall be constructed form commercial grade E-type glass
strands bonded together using a binder. The strands shall be treated with a sizing
that is chemically compatible with the resin system used.
11. Continuous roving shall be a commercial grade of E-type glass fiber with a sizing
that is chemically compatible with the resin system used. Continuous roving for
chipping in spray-up process shall be principally silane furnished with as little
chrome compounds as practical to achieve chipper performance while maintaining
visual laminate clarity requirements.
12. Woven roving shall be in accordance with ASTM Specification D-2150.
13. The laminate comprising the structural tank (cylindrical shell) shall consist of a
corrosion-resistant barrier comprised of an inner surface, interior layer and a
structural layer.
14. The inner surface exposed to the chemical environment shall be a resin rich 0.010
to 0.030 inches thick, reinforced with 1 ply of continuous glass fiber surface mat
such as Regina/OCF C3/33 or approved equal.
15. The inner surface exposed to the corrosive environment shall be followed with a
layer composed of resin, reinforced only with non continuous glass fiber strands
applied to a minimum thickness of 0.100 inches. The combined thickness of the
inner surface and interior layer shall be 0.110 to 0.130 inches and in no case less
than 0.100 inches.
16. The glass content of the inner surface and interior layer combined shall be 27% &
5% by weight.
17. Resin used in these layers shall be Hetron 922 incorporating a CobaltIMEKP cure
system as recommended by the manufacturer.
18. The degree of cure shall be such as to exhibit a Barcol hardness on the inner
surface of at least 90% of the resin manufacturer's minimum specified hardness
for the cured laminate with a continuous glass surface mat.
13150-9
60-955.00
13150-10
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
19. Subsequent reinforcement shall be continuous strand roving in accordance with
1.2.2, that in combination in 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 is needed to satisfy the design
requirements. Glass content of this filament-wound structural layer shall be 50 to
80% by weight. Only those constructions evaluated for design properties shall be
used.
20. Subsequent reinforcement shall be comprised of 1.5 oz./ft. chopped strand mat or
equivalent weight of chopped roving, or shall be comprised of chopped strand mat
or chopped roving and such additional number of alternating plies of 24 oz./yd.
woven roving to a thickness as required to meet the physical properties that are
used for the design. Each successive ply or pass of reinforcement shall be well-
rolled prior to the application of additional reinforcement. Where woven rovings
are used, chopped strand glass reinforcement shall be used as alternating and final
layers. All woven roving and chipped strand shall be overlapped. Laps in
subsequent layers shall be staggered at least 2.25 inches from laps in the preceding
layer.
21. Resin used in the structural layer shall be the same as used in the inner surface and
interior layers. Other generic types of resin such as isophthalics or general
purpose resins shall not be used.
22. Filter shall carry a fifteen (15) year limited non-prorated warranty.
2.4 WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
A. Provide a water treatment system as shown and scheduled on Contact Drawings.
All in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Furnish Owner with written water treatment program complete with written basic
water chemical analysis and verbal instructions as to operation of system.
2.5 PUMPS
A. Pumps
1. Furnish and install End Suction Centrifugal Pumps as specified on the Contract
Drawings or as pre-approved by the ArchitectlEngineer.
2. The contractor shall insure that the pumps and motors are properly installed
with no pipe strain transmitted to the pump casing.
3. To assure a properly integrated and compatible system, all equipment described
in this section shall be furnished by the Pump Manufacturer, who shall assume
full responsibility for the proper operation of the pumps and associated
equipment.
4. The Contractor shall arrange for the Pump Manufacturer to provide a factory-
trained representative as required for the purpose of supervising installation,
start-up, final field acceptance testing, and providing instruction to the owner's
operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment
in this section.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. The work in this section is subject to the requirements of applicable portions of
the following standards:
a. Hydraulic Institute Standards.
b. IEEE Standards.
c. NEMA Standards.
d. OSHA Rules and Regulations.
6. The pumps shall be horizontal close-coupled end suction pumps, Aurora, or
approved equal such as Paco or ITT Marlowe.
7. All wetted ferrous parts shall be epoxy coated.
8. Materials of Construction
a. Casing - Cast Iron (ASTM A48).
b. Impeller - Bronze (ASTM B584).
c. Shaft - Stainless Steel (AISI 316).
d. Case Wear Ring - Bronze (ASTM B62).
e. Shaft Sleeve - Bronze (ASTM B62).
9. Casing
a. The casing will be of the end suction design with tangential discharge
outlet. For suction piping diameters of2" or greater, the suction inlet shall
be a flat-faced flange connection and the discharge outlet shall be a bolt
through flange connection. Flange connections shall be ANSI 125# rated.
b. The casing shall have tapped and plugged holes for priming and draining.
The casing bore shall be large enough to allow "back pullout" of the
impeller without disturbing the casing or suction and discharge piping.
The casing shall be supported by the driving unit.
10. Impeller
a. The impeller shall be of the enclosed type, vacuum cast in one piece. It
shall be finished all over, the exterior being turned and the interior being
finished smooth and cleaned of all burrs, trimmings, and irregularities. The
impeller shall be dynamically balanced. The impeller will be keyed to the
shaft, and fastened with as washer, gasket and cap screw.
11. Case Wearing Ring
13150-11
60-955.00
13150-12
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. The pump casing shall be fitted with a case wear ring to minimize abrasive
and corrosive wear to the casing. The case wear ring shall be of the radial
type, press fitted into the casing.
12. Stuffing Box
a. The stuffing box shall be integrally cast with a mounting bracket, and shall
provide an adequate area for internal recirculation of the pumped fluid
around the sealing medium.
13. Mechanical Seal
a. Shaft sealing shall be accomplished by means of a mechanical seal with a
Ni-Resist seat, carbon washer, Buna-N elastomers, and stainless steel metal
parts.
14. Shaft
a. The impeller shall be direct-coupled to the motor shaft. The motor shaft
shall be machined to provide a key. way, and drilled and tapped to accept
the impeller fastener. Stub shafts are not acceptable.
15. Shaft Sleeve
a. The pump shaft shall be fitted with a shaft sleeve to minimize shaft wear.
The sleeve shall be sealed to the impeller hub by an O-ring, and shall be
positively driven by a pin to the key way. The use of adhesive compounds
to fasten the sleeve to the shaft shall not be accepted.
16. Motor
a. The motor shall be a NEMA Type 4 (water tight) in accordance with the
latest NEMA Standards, and shall be totally enclosed fan cooled.
b. Each motor shall have a sufficient horsepower rating to operate the pump
at any point on the pump's head-capacity curve without overloading the
nameplate horsepower rating of the motor, regardless of service factor.
The motor shall have a service factor of at least 1.15. The service factor is
reserved for variations in voltage and frequency.
17. Inspection and Factory Tests
a. Each centrifugal pump furnished under these specifications shall be tested
at the factory to verify individual performance (VIP). Certified copies of
all test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to
shipment. Each unit shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with the
Hydraulic Institute Standards.
18. Installation and Acceptance Tests
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. The pumping units shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of
the manufacturer and as shown on the drawings by the pool engineer.
b. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial
operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2.6 STRAINERS
A. Furnish and install pump strainers where called for on Drawings equal to those
manufactured by Mer-Made Filter (fiberglass) or Neptune Benson (stainless steel).
Provide each strainer with two strainer baskets. Lid shall allow view of strainer
without opening.
2.7 GAUGES
A. Furnish and install compound gauges where called for on Drawings and as required
by Code. Compound gauges shall be Trerice 700 LFB Liquid Filled, 30 Hg to 60
PSI with gauge cock and snubber.
2.8 FLOWMETERS
A. Furnish and install Signet flow meters where called for on the Drawings and as
required by Code on main lines and on branch lines of flow ranges indicated.
2.9 POOL VALVES AND PIPING MATERIALS
A. Work Included:
1. Butterfly valves.
2. Check valves.
3. Flexible expansion connectors.
4. PVC ball valves.
5. Underwater service operators.
6. Extension handles:
7. Float valves.
8. Piping, hangers and supports - Refer to Section 13150, Part 3.
9. Eccentric & Concentric reducers.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Submit detailed shop drawings (refer to General Requirements, Division 1)
clearly indicate make, model, location, type, size, pressure rating, and type of
servIce.
13150-13
60-955.00
13150-14
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Products
1. Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible and practical.
2. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on
outside of body.
D. Valve Connections
1. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe
joint. Use pipe size valves.
E. Use of Valves
1. Pipe sizes 3" - 12" - Butterfly.
2. Miscellaneous valves 1/2" - 2 1/2" - PVC True Union Ball Valves.
3. All chemical lines and equipment - PVC True Union Ball Valves.
F. Butterfly Valves
1. Butterfly valves 3" - 12" shall be wafer or lug bodies and shall be suitable for
use between ANSI 125 or 150 lb. flanges.
2. Bodies of the flangeless design shall be provided with at least two (2) bolt
guides to center the valve in the pipeline.
3.
a. All valves 3" and larger shall be wafer valves with a cast iron - epoxy
coated body, ductile iron-nylon II coated disc, one piece 416 stainless steel
shaft with Buna-N or EPDM seat minimum, 150 PSI rating.
b. All butterfly valves 3" - 6" shall have 1 0 position locking handle, butterfly
valves 8" - 12" shall have gear operators and chain operators as required
unless drawings indicate otherwise.
4. All valves shall be as manufactured by Bray Valve (713) 894-5454 or equal as
approved by the Architect/Engineer.
5. All bolts and nuts shall be corrosion resistant zinc plated steel with plated
washers to be used when secured to PVC flanges.
G. Ball Valves
1. PVC True Union Ball Valves, Eslon, Assahi, or equal.
H. Check Valves
1. W' thru 2 W' shall be PVC body, true union, ball type, seal material Buna-N as
manufactured by Eslon, Asahi or equal as indicated on Contract Drawings.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. 3" thru 12" shall be cast iron epoxy coated body, bronze split disc, stainless
steel fitted and Buna N seal material. Check valve shall be the CVXX style as
manufactured by the Metraflex Company, model 5050 manufactured by Techno
Corporation or equal.
1. Modulating Float Valves
1. Shall be used in the surge tank as specified on the Contract Drawings. The
valves shall be constructed with stainless rod and PVC floats allowing 20%
maximum flow when fully closed. As manufactured by Sta-Rite Industries,
EPD, Neptune-Benson or equal as approved by the Architect! Engineer.
J. Submerged Service Operators
1. Use only approved service operators for the valve requiring underwater
operation in the surge tank or in manhole used for pool draining.
K. Valve Operator Extension
1. Provide extension lengths as necessary to operate submerged or below surface
valves and the appropriate valve box access cover. Extensions shall be by same
manufacturer as valve manufacturer.
L. Drainage Valves
1. Provide min. 3/4" True Union Ball valve on all piping at such a location to
allow complete drainage of system.
M. Eccentric and Concentric Reducers
1. Use Eccentric reducers on pump suction lines only, and concentric reducers on
pump discharge lines only.
2. Stainless steel body and flanges, T304 materials, ANSI 125# rated flanges.
3. Neptune Benson, 15-CNS/15ECS series "or equal".
2.10 POOL HEATING SYSTEMS
A. Pool Heaters
1. Provide gas fired heaters for pools, as scheduled on Contract Drawings
complete with controls.
2. Heaters must be A.S.M.E. Coded and labeled by manufacturer. Provide and
install per all State and Local Codes, including State Boiler Code control and
safety device package.
3. Furnish and install thermometers in inlet and outlet piping to heater and
downstream in the blended water stream. Thermometers shall be Trerice,
13150-15
60-955.00
13150-16
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
adjustable angle, 9" scale, A40 series, insertion length to accommodate pipe
size, separable brass socket.
4. Furnish and install a pressure relief valve for each heater and pipe to within 6"
of floor.
5. Furnish and install a flow switch per heater manufacturer's specification.
2.11 POOL FITTINGS, DECK, MAINTENANCE AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. Provide and install the following equipment and the equipment scheduled on the
drawings. The equipment shall be the manufacturer and model number listed or a
pre-approved equal. Although unit quantities are shown for value engineering
purposes, it is the installing contractor's responsibility to verify actual quantities
required.
1. Pool Fitting and Deck Equipment:
QTY. DESCRIPTION MAKE MODEL
3pr. Grab Rails KDIParagon California Style, 1.900" OD. x .1 09 wall, #30402
2 Ramp Hand Rails KDIParagon Custom fabricated, see drawings, 1.900" OD. x .145
wall, 3 bend
:3 Stair Hand Rails KDIParagon Custom fabricated, see drawings, 1.900" OD. x .145
wall, 3 bend
Anchor Sockets KDIParagon Cast bronze, 4-114" long, accepts 1.900" OD. tubing,
#28102
Escutcheon Plates KDIParagon Standard, stainless steel stamping,# 28302
Stanchions KDIParagon 1.900" OD. x .1 09 wall x 8'-0", provide sliding collar, wi
eye bolt, #38104
is Stanchion Sockets KDIParagon stainless steeL wi slitrfit cap and removal tooL #38210
i2. Backstroke Pennants KDIParagon 12" x 18" flags, coordinate colors wi architect/owner,
#40102
Floor Inlets Sta - Rite Swimquip, adjustable flow, molded ABS, Nlite
Starting Block Anchors KDIParagon Paraflyte anchors
Main Drain Frame & PurexTriton 18" x 18", Nlite cycolac, stainless steel hardware
Grate
4 Hydrostatic Relief Sta - Rite Swimquip, 2" valve and tube
Valves & Collection
Tubes
[14- Rope Cups & Eye Bolts Frost roood chrome plated brass anchor and stainless steel eye
bolt
2. Specialty Equipment (See Alternates for all of these items.)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
QTY.
1
1
3
1
1.1
DESCRIPTION
Raindrop
Front Frog Slide
MAKE
Sonar International, 202-588-1111
New Braunfels General Store, NBGS International
210-620-4000
Lemon Drop, Sonar Intema1ional202- 588-1111
Natural Structures, 800-252-8475, Model 301-1628, stainless steel
model.
Deck Spray
Drop Slide
3. Safety Equipment (Owner Furnished and Installed)
4. Maintenance Equipment (Owner Furnished and Installed)
FINISHES
A. Plaster Finish (Marcite Plaster - Base Bid, see Section 01030)
1. Materials
a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I white portland cement.
b. Aggregates for Pool Plaster Finish Coat: White marble dust uniformly graded
within following limits, all passing the No. 30 sieve:
c. Percentage Retained (by Weight Plus or Minus 2%) on Each Sieve
Sieve Size
No. 30
No. 50
No. 100
No. 200
Minimum
o
25
75
90
Maximum
o
50
90
100
Water: Clean, fresh, from domestic potable source.
2. Proportions and mixing
a. Materials are specified on a volume basis and shall be measured in
approved containers which will insure that the specified proportions will
be controlled and accurately maintained during the progress of the work.
Measuring materials with shovels ("shovel count") is not permitted.
b. White Marble Pool Plaster Finish Coat: Mix finish in proportion of one
part by volume of white portland cement to not more than two parts by
volume of aggregates (specified white marble dust).
3. Preparation of surfaces
13150-17
60-955.00
a. Clean base surfaces of projections, dust, loose particles, grease, bond
breakers, and foreign matter; make sufficiently rough to provide a strong
mechanical bond. Wash entire concrete pool shell with acidic solution
within 24 hours of plastering. Do not apply plaster directly to the
surfaces of masonry or concrete that are coated with any acidic solution
compound or similar agent until compound or agent is completely
removed by water blasting. Thoroughly wash entire surface with 2,000
psi high pressure water immediately prior to plastering. Wet cementitious
base surfaces with a fine fog water spray to produce a uniformly moist
condition and check screeds, pool equipment, and accessories for correct
alignment before plastering is started. Do not apply plaster to base
surfaces containing frost. Install temporary coverings as required to
protect adjoining surfaces from staining or damage by plastering
operations.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
Application of plaster
a. General: Apply finish plaster to minimum 1/2 inch thickness at any
location. Apply finish plaster by hand or machine. If plastering machine
is used, control fluidity of plaster to have a slump not exceeding 2-112
inches when tested using a 2" by 4" by 6" high slump cone. Do not add
additional water to the mix subsequent to determining water content to
meet this slump. Perform slump test according to following procedure:
1). Place cone on level, dry non-absorptive base plate.
2). While holding cone firmly against base plate, fill cone with plaster
taken directly from hose or nozzle of plastering machine, tamping
with a metal rod during filling to release all air bubbles.
3). Screed off plaster level with top of cone. Remove cone by lifting it
straight up with a slow and smooth motion.
4). Place cone in a vertical position adjacent to freed plaster sample
suing care not to jiggle base plate.
5). Lay straightedge across top of cone being careful not to vibrate cone;
measure slump in inches from bottom edge of straightedge to the top
of slumped plaster sample.
b. Workmanship: Apply finish plaster in two coats by "double-back"
method with second coat applied as soon as first coat is tamped and
initially floated. Apply plaster with sufficient pressure to provide a good
bond on bases. Work plaster to screeds at intervals of from 5 feet to 8
feet on straight surfaces. Apply smooth trowel finish without waves,
cracks, trowel marks, ridges, pits, crazing, discoloration, proj ections, or
other imperfections. Form plaster carefully around curves and angles,
well up to screeds. Take special care to prevent sagging and consequent
drooping of applications. Produce surfaces free of visible junction marks
in finish coat where on day's work adjoins another.
13150-18
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
, I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. Curing: Curing plaster with fine fog water spray applied to finish coat as
frequently as required to prevent dry-out of plaster. Keep plaster damp
until pool is filled. Prevent damage or staining of plaster by troweling or
cunng.
d. Patching, Pointing, and Cleaning Up: Upon completion, cut out and
patch loose, cracked, damaged, or defective plaster; patches matching
existing plaster in texture, color, and finish, flush with adjoining plaster.
Perform pointing and patching of surfaces and plaster work abutting or
adjoining any other finish work in a neat and workmanlike manner. If 10
percent or more of the pools plaster finish is found to be defective, the
plaster shall be removed and replaced complete from all surfaces. Leave
plaster droppings or spatterings from all surfaces. Leave plaster surfaces
in clean, unblemished condition ready for pool filling. Remove protective
coverings from adjoining surfaces. Remove rubbish and debris from the
site.
B. Special Aggregate Finish (Alternate Bid - See Section 01030)
1. Work Included:
a. Prepare all pool surfaces to receive special aggregate finish and bonding
agent. All floors shall have a non-slip finish.
I). A bonding agent is required prior to special aggregate finish
application.
b. Delivery, Storage and Handling
1). If material is stored, it must be in a cool, dry area, protected from the
elements.
c. Submittals
1). Submit specification for Special Aggregate Finish and bonding agent
40 days prior to use.
2). Provide (3) 3'x3' onsite mock-ups of va ring grades ofcourseness for
Owner's approval
d. Environmental Requirements
1). Special aggregate may not be applied to frozen or frost laden surfaces
or when temperature is 40 degrees F or due to fall to 40 degrees within
24 hours.
e. Products
1). Acceptable manufacturers.
13150-19
60-955.00
13150-20
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a). Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc., 1502 SW 2nd Place, Pompano
Beach, FL 33060, Phone (800) 641-9247.
b). Pebblecrete Systems, Inc., 3420 Westview Drive, Naples, FL
33942, Phone (800) 338-6766.
f. Inspection and Preparation
1). Inspect surfaces to insure that they are clean and free of dirt, films,
oils, protective coatings, latency, etc.
2). Insure that surfaces are reasonably rough to provide a good mechanical
bond. Apply bonding agent to all surfaces. If walls of pool are placed
by forming (cast-in-place), the contractor shall use rough lumber in the
forms, acceptable to the Architect/Engineer, or shall sandblast surfaces
to provide a rough surface prior to application of special aggregate.
g. Mixing
1). Base cement shall cure as required by the special aggregate.
manufacturer.
2). Spray surfaces to receive special aggregate with water prior to
application.
3). Apply bonding agent.
4). Apply a tight, thin coat of special aggregate over the surface of the
pool to be covered. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturers
specifications. Build to a thickness of 3/8 inch.
5). Finish special aggregate in a workmanlike fashion. Trowel surface
smooth. Proceed with application to natural breaks.
6). Apply special aggregate so that it is flush with the pool gutter and
edging the tank expansion joints as detailed in the plans.
h. Experience
1). Contractor shall furnish to Architect/Engineer, past experience record
using this product, prior to application, for approval. A minimum of
(5) five installations are required.
C. Cushioned Seamless Flooring Systems (4'-0" x 6'-0" pad)
1. Scope
a. Provide and install Vitriturf System at the Kiddie Slide.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. This does not contain all the requirement for the use of Vitriturf Systems.
For complete information, refer to the Manufacturer's long form version of
the specification.
2.
Description
a. Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install the Vitriturf
system.
3.
Quality Assurance
a. Qualifications
1). Vitricon shall have marketed this system in the United States for at
least five years.
2). The applicator shall be trained and registered by Vitricon.
b. Design and Detailing
1). Substrate and Substrate Systems.
a). Check application manual for specific instruction on substrate.
b). Acceptable Substrate for the Vitriturf System include asphalt,
concrete and compacted stone.
c). Other Substrates shall be approved by Vitricon prior to
application.
d). The trained applicator shall verify that the proposed substrate is
acceptable with application of the Vitriturf System.
e). Substrate Systems shall be engineered with regard to structural
performance.
f). Follow Vitricon's published details with specific
recommendations for this project.
4.
Delivery Storage And Handling
a. Deliver all material in original unopened packages with labels intact.
b. Store all materials protected from weather and at temperature not less than
400F (40C).
5.
Job Conditions
a. Ambient air temperature shall be 400F (4 OC) or greater and rising at the
time of installation of the Vitriturf System and shall remain at 400F (4 OC)
or greater for at least 76 days after application.
13150-21
60-955.00
b. Adjacent materials and the Vitriturf System shall be protected during
installation while curing and/or unattended from weather and other
damage.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.
Alternates And Allowances
a. System to be considered equal to those specified herein shall be approved
by the Architect/Engineer, in writing, at least ten working days prior to the
project bid date.
7.
General
a. All components of the Vitriturf System shall be obtained form Vitricon or
its authorized distributors. No substitutions of, or additions of, other
materials shall be submitted without prior written permission from
Vitricon.
8.
Materials
a. VitriturfPrimer: A single component moisture cured polyurethane primer.
b. VitriturfBinder: A proprietary, elastic Polyurethane Pre-Polymer, MDI
based, Extremely low odor, capable of excellent weathering and binding
characteristics. Binder shall contain no more than 0.2% TDI Monomers.
c. Vitriturf Black SBR: Shall be recycled SBR Rubber
1). Shall be cryongenically processed.
2). Shall be chopped to 1-3mm or 3/8" shredded granules and contain less
than 4% dust.
3). Shall be packed in suitable bags to protect SBR from moisture.
d. VitriturfEPDM Rubber: A man-made rubber containing minimum of30%
EPDM and having a density of 1.5-0.05.
1). Is available in assorted colors.
2). Is available in three sizes: 1-3mm, 0.5-1.5mm and OAO-08mm (dust).
e. Vitriturf Line Markers: A two component polyurethane utilized to stripe
lines or demarcate specific areas.
f. Thinner C: Use for cleaning tools.
g. The VitriturfPlayground System.
1). Shall have been tested for shock attenuation under ASTM-F-1292 and
HIe.
2). Shall have been tested for non-slip characteristics under ASTM-E-303.
13150-22
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3). Shall have been tested for east of ignition under BS-5696 and ASTM-
D-2859.
9. Mixing And Preparation
a. Mixture ofbinder/EPDM or binder/SBR will be determined by the system
which is specified. Check Vitriturf application manual for specific
detailing.
10. Inspection
a. Prior to application ofVitriturf System the substrates shall be examined for
compliance with the contract documents of Vitricon specifications. The
general contractor and Architect/Engineer shall be advised of all
discrepancies. Work shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
11. Installation
a. VitriturfPlayground Systems
1). Vitriturf Primer: Apply primer with a short nap roller at a rate of 300
sq. ft. per gallon.
2). Vitriturf SBR Base Mat
a). Mix SBR to VitriturfBinder in a ration of 82/18.
b). Spread evenly at specified thickness.
c). Compact and allow to dry for a minimum of 24 hours.
3). VitriturfPrimer: Apply VitriturfPrimer at the rate of 300 sq. ft. per
gallon.
4). VitriturfWearing Course
a). Mix EPDM to Vitriturf Binder in a ration of 82/18
b). Apply with a steel trowel
(i). For compacting: Lubricate trowel with diesel fuel or soapy
water.
(ii). For finishing: Spray a light mist of water on surface and
trowel smooth.
b. Application Instructions
1). Storage ofVitriturf
a). All Vitriturf material must be stored indoors, in cool dray storage.
13150-23
60-955.00
13150-24
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~-
(i). VitriturfPrimer and Binder: Must be protected from
moisture and heat. Store at 400F to 800F and out of direct
sunlight.
(ii). Vitriturf Granules: Must be protected from moisture - store
out of sunlight.
b). Handling ofVitriturfcomponents: All components are factory
labeled by batch number. Check batch number prior to use.
NOTE: VitriturfBinder and VitriturfPrimer have a shelflife of
six (6) months. Check all granules of similar colors to ensure they
are exactly the same prior to use. Read material safety data sheets
carefully prior to opening containers. Wear protective clothing
and eye gear.
2). Mixing:
a). Vitriturf Binder with SBR shredder granules for Base Mat.
(i). VitriturfBinder is mixed with the SBR shredded granules at
the ratio of 82/18 by weight. This equates to approximately
one (1) gallon of Vitriturf binder to one (1) bag of SBR
shredded granules.
(ii). Depending on the size of the project, you may mix the
Binder/SBR mix either in a trough with a ,hoe or a mechanical
drum mixer. Be sure the SBR shredded granules are
thoroughly coated.
b). VitriturfBinder with EPDM Granules
(i). VitriturfBinder is mixed with the EPDM Granules at the ratio
of 82/18 by weight. This equates to approximately 1.25
gallons ofVitriturfBinder to one (1) bag ofEPDM granules.
(ii). Depending on the size of the project, you may mix the
granule mix either in a trough with a hoe or a mechanical
drum mixer. Be sure that the granules are thoroughly coated.
3). Application ofVPS
a). VitriturfPrimer
(i). Apply primer by spray or short nap roller at the rate of 300
square feet per gallon. Do not over saturate substrate. Allow
to tack out (approximately 20 minutes) prior to application of
Vitriturf SBR shredded granules (Base Mat). NOTE: Do not
use Vitriturf Primer over compacted stone.
b). Vitriturf Base Mat
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(i). Apply mixed Binder/SBR at desired thickness using a screed
bar.
(ii). Using a steel pool trowel even Binder/SBR mixture. Be sure
to continuously lubricate trowel with kerosene, diesel fuel or
soapy water. Do not saturate surface with these lubricants.
(iii).As the mixture is leveled apply a downward pressure onto the
surface so that the mixture compacts tightly.
(iv). Check surface to be level.
(v). With a water bottle apply a spray mist of clean cool water to
the surface and float the trowel over the lubricated surface.
(vi). Allow to dry for a minimum of 24 hours.
c). VitriturfPrimer:
(i). Once the Base Mat has dried apply VitriturfPrimer by spray
of short nap roller at the rate of 300 square feet per gallon.
Do not over saturate Base Mat. Allow to tack out
(approximately 20 minutes) prior to application ofVitriturf
wearmg course.
d). VitriturfWearing Course
(i). Apply mixed Binder/Granule at desired thickness using a
screed bar.
(ii). Using a steel pool trowel even Rubber/Granule mixture. Be
sure to continuously lubricate trowel with kerosene, diesel
fuel or soapy water. Do not saturate surface with these
lubricants.
(iii).As the mixture is leveled apply a downward pressure onto the
surface so that the mixture compacts tightly.
(iv). Check surface to be level.
(v). With a water bottle apply a spray mist of clean cool water to
the surface and float the trowel over the lubricated surface.
(vi). Allow to dry for a minimum of 48 hours prior to usage.
e). Cleanup
(i). Clean all tools and surface spotting immediately with Thinner
C or diesel fuel prior to drying. NOTE: Once binder has
dried it will be extremely difficult to remove from tools or
surfaces or hands.
13150-25
60-955.00
13150-26
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f). General Precautions
(i). Wear protective clothing and eye gear.
(ii). All substrates must have a minimum of 1 % slope to provide
positive drainage.
(iii).Ambient air temperature shall be 400F (40C) or greater and
rising at the time of installation of the Vitriturf System and
shall remain at 400F (4 OC) or greater for at least 7 days after
application.
(iv). Protect from rain for a minimum of 48 hours after
application.
(v). Read all MSDS sheets very carefully. If you do not
understand them, contact the manufacturer immediately prior
to application.
(vi). If binder accidentally comes in contact with eyes,
immediately rinse with water and contact a physician.
2.17 TILE AND TILE SETTING MATERIALS
A. Work Included
1. Pool
a. Furnish and install tiles as shown on the drawings and as listed in this
Section.
B. Submittals
1. Submit shop drawings for approval before ordering tile. (Refer to General
Requirements, Division 1) Include the following:
a. Plan, elevations, and sections of pool tank and deck.
b. Plans of all tile marking showing exact locations and positions of
individual tiles.
C. Product Handling
1. Deliver all products to job in manufacturer's unopened containers with grade
seals unbroken and labels intact.
2. Keep tile cartons dry.
D. Environmental Conditions
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Maintain temperature at 50 degrees F minimum during tilework and for 7 days
after completion or furnish protection as approved by the Architect! Engineer.
E. Extra Stock
1. Supply extra 5% of each color of flat and trim in clean marked cartons for
Owner's use.
F. Ceramic Tile
1. Furnish all ceramic tile required as follows. Colors shall be as selected by
Owner and ArchitectlEngineer.
2. Furnish all tile required for special markings and lettering in conformance with
the drawings and applicable Codes, including depth markings and no diving
markers.
3. Racing lane tile edges shall be installed flush with finish pool floor.
4. Target tile shall be installed flush with finish pool wall.
5. Use surface bullnose on pool edge where required for proper trim and as
directed on the drawings.
6. Pool Tile:
a. Schedule:
POOL AREA SIZE TYPE
Racing Lanes & Targets 2''x2'' Keystone Non-
slip, 7 ~%
abrasive tile
Gutter lip 2" x 2" C-701 hand hold
Field tile at gutter & grating
2" x 2"
Keystone Non-
slip 7 ~%
abrasive
Step Holes, Stair Nosing;, Ramps and
"No Diving" warning signs
l"xl"
Keystone Non-
slip, 7 ~%
abrasive
Non-Slip
Deck Depth Markers
Wall Depth Markers
8"x8"
6"x6"
Non-Slip
Fence Depth Markers (at fence or
building at location as directed by
Architect direct out from pool
12" x 12"
Plastic
Laminate
Engraved
13150-27
SUGGESTED
MFG. OR EQUAL
DAL-11LE, porcelain
cernmic mosaic tile
DAL-11LE, porcelain
cernmic mosaic tile,
non-slip 7 ~ %
abrasive
DAL-11LE, porcelain
cernmic mosaic tile
DAL-11LE, porcelain
cernmic mosaic tile
Inlays Tile (414) 498
9556
Inlays Tile (414) 498
9556
Provide depth marker
signage attached to
fence with 2 stainless
STOCK
#/COLOR
As selected by
Architect from DK
Series
Contrasting color as
selected by Architect
(cobalt blue to be
used for pricing)
White tile in pooL
others as selected by
Architect from DK
senes
As selected by
Architect from DK
Series
White/Black
White/Black
Match color of
building signage.
60-955.00
13150-28
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
depth markers) steel 9 ga wires.
MOlmt 48" above
grade. Provide
signage by same mfr.
as Div. 10 Signage
for building.
b. Setting and Grouting Materials:
1). Portland Cement: ASTM ClS0, Type 1.
2). Hydrated lime: ASTM C206, 7 Type S.
3). Sand: ASTM C144.
4). Water: Clean and potable.
5). Dry-set mortar: Multi-cure as manufactured by the C-Cure chemical
company, used with latex additive or Kerabond with Kerolastic
additive or PCI-USA Non-Sag mortar and PCI Lastoflex waterproof
membrane.
c. Grout:
1). Commercial sanded Portland cement type with latex additive.
2). Flex grout by PCI-USA.
d. Setting Methods:
1). Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin-Set) on concrete using a
minimum leveling bed.
a). Follow ANSI AI08.S (Reference TCA).
B. Acceptability of Surfaces
I. Before tiling, check area to be tiled for acceptability as follows:
b. Surface medium-rough texture.
c. All surfaces to be tiled shall be free of dust, rust, paint, from oil or other
release coatings.
d. Provision for ladders and other embedments at proper locations.
e. Concrete true to line, level, plumb and curvature.
f. Width, depth and length will permit finished accuracy of markings and
dimensions.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Layout
1. Align all joints to give straight uniform grout lines.
2. Observe exact minimum length per dimensions shown on Contract Drawings.
3. Observe maximum width tolerance of 1" over dimensions shown in Contract
Drawings.
4. Observe +/- 1/16" maximum finish elevation tolerance on all gutter edges.
5. Provide one (1) expansion joint minimum at center of each straight run oftile.
D. Workmanship
1. Supply first-class workmanship in all tile work.
2. Use all products in strict accordance with recommendations and directions of
manufacturer.
3. Proportion all mixes in accordance with latest ANSI Standard Specifications.
4. Smooth all exposed cut edges.
5. Gutter edges shall not vary from level or true plane more than 1/16" of pool
static water level. Contractor shall provide written verification to
ArchitectlEngineer prior to filling pool with water.
E. Cleaning
1. Clean tile surface as thoroughly as possible on completion of grouting.
2. Before acid cleaning, saturate with clean water all grout joints in areas to be
cleaned.
3. Use 1 part muriatic acid to 9 parts water for cleaning off grout film.
4. As soon as cleaning is done, hose down thoroughly to completely remove all
traces of residual acid.
F. Protection of Tilework
1. Protect all newly tiled areas.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Work Included:
1. Pipe, fittings, connections, wall penetrations, hangers and supports, equipment
bases and supports, excavation and backfill.
13150-29
60-955.00
13150-30
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. References
I. ANSIIASTM D2564 - Solvent cements for polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic
pipe and fittings.
2. ANSI/ASTM DI785 - Standard specification for polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic pipe schedules 40, 80 and 120, NSF seal for potable water.
3. ASTM B88 - Seamless copper water tube.
4. ASTM D2855 - Practice for making solvent cemented joints with PVC pipe and
fittings.
5. Eslon Engineering Manual for plastic piping systems.
C. Placement and use:
I. Use the prescribed pipe type in the following areas. All plastic pipe flanges
shall be schedule 80 PVC with neoprene gaskets where required.
2. All pool gutter lines shall be schedule 40 solvent weld, conforming to ASTM
D1785176. All gutter lines shall drain by gravity to the surge tank.
3. All buried filter return lines, main drain lines, PVC schedule 80, solvent weld.
4. All buried supply lines for miscellaneous play activities, schedule 80, solvent
weld.
5. All above grade piping inside the pool mechanical room, schedule 80 PVC,
solvent weld.
6. All chemical piping, schedule 80 PVC, solvent weld.
7. Pool heater connections shall be Type "L" copper piping, with wrought copper
or cast brass fittings, 95/5 solder, on heater influent and effluent lines from the
bypass to the heater.
D. Hangers and Supports
I. All mechanical room piping must be properly supported using the schedule
indicated on the drawings as a guideline.
2. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to properly support piping at all valves,
pumps, equipment, overhead areas, etc.
3. Use of the proper hanger for the conditions is essential. All piping must be
supported laterally as well as vertically hung.
4. All hangers, pipe supports, threaded rod, hardware, etc. shall be zinc plated or
galvanized steel.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. All piping connections and support hardware shall be stainless steel inside
surge tanks and gutters.
E. Pool Pipe Excavation and Backfill
1. Excavation for all pool systems and related piping.
a. Comply with Division 1 and Division 2.
2. Special backfill and bedding materials.
a. Existing subsoil materials shall not be used for pipe bedding.
b. All piping shall be bedded with a minimum of 6" clear stone material and a
minimum of2'-0" clear stone material top cover. The balance may be
existing site material, provided no organic material, clay or topsoil is used.
F. Piping
1. Piping must be laid on a grade so it will drain completely by gravity. In all
instances where gravity drainage is not provided, the contractor shall install
drain valves so that all lines can be drained completely. Shop drawings will be
required on any such installation.
2. Cut all pipe with mechanical cutter without damage to pipe.
3. Placing and laying: Inspect pipe for defects before installation. Clean the
interior of pipe thoroughly of foreign matter and keep clean during laying
operation. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are
unstable. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the pipe is installed. When
Work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed
so that no trench water, earth or other substance will enter the pipes or fittings.
4. Threaded joints: After cutting and before threading, the pipe shall be reamed
and shall have burrs removed. Screw joints shall be made with graphite or inert
filler and oil or with an approved graphite compound applied to male threads
only. Threads shall be full-cut and not more than 3 threads on the pipe
remained exposed. Use Teflon II tape on the male threads of all threaded pipe
joints. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be
permitted. Unions shall be provided where required for disconnection of
exposed piping. Unions will be permitted only where access is provided.
5. Solvent welded joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions and the following minimum standards:
a. All fittings shall fit easily on the pipe before applying cement. The outer
surface area of pipe and inner wall of fitting shall be dry and clean.
Cleaner is to be applied to the outer surface of the pipe and to the inner
surface of the fitting. Cement is to be applied to the outer surface of the
pipe, or on the male section of fittings only. When the outside surface area
of the pipe is satisfactorily covered with cement allow ten (10) seconds
13150-31
60-955.00
13150-32
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
open time to lapse before inserting pipe end into fittings. After full
insertion of pipe into fitting, turn fitting about the pipe end approximately
1/8 to 1/4 of a turn. Wipe off excess cement at the joint in a neat cove
bead. Follow manufacturer's instructions on solvents.
b. All joints shall remain completely undisturbed for a minimum of 10
minutes from time of jointing the pipe and fitting. If necessary to apply
pressure to a newly made joint, limit to 10% of rated pipe pressure, during
the first 24 hours after the joint has been made.
c. Full working pressure shall not be applied until the joints have set for a
period of 24 hours.
d. Make provisions for expansion and contraction by way of swing joints or
snaking.
e. Protect plastic pipe from exposure to aromatic hydrocarbons, halo-genated
hydro-carbons, and most of esters and keytones that attack the material.
Protect all pipe from mechanical damage and long exposure to sunlight
during storage.
f. PVC welding is not allowed without prior approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
6. No installation shall be made that will provide a cross connection or inter-
connection between distribution supply for drinking purposes and the
swimming pool that will permit a backflow of water into the potable water
supply. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.
Equipment and pool fittings shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt,
water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of work the
fittings, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly clean and adjusted for
proper operation.
G. Pipe Identification
1. Provide identification on all piping located in mechanical equipment, chlorine,
acid rooms, heater courts, etc.
2. Identify the contents and direction of flow.
3. Mark at least once on each line and at 5 ft. intervals minimum. Consult Health
Department Code for minimum marking requirements.
4. Color code per Health Department requirements. If code does not identify
color coding requirements consult Architect/Engineer.
5. Brady, B-946, custom legend, self sticking markers and arrows or equal.
3.02 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Provide for major equipment, reinforced concrete housekeeping bases poured
directly on structural floor slabs (as required by equipment manufacturer) 4 inches
thick minimum; unless noted otherwise on plans, extended 4 inches minimum
beyond machinery bedplates. Provide templates, anchor bolts, rubber vibration
isolators and accessories required for mounting and anchoring equipment.
Anchorage system shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's
specifications. Consult with equipment manufacturer for length and installation of
anchor bolts.
3.03 SLEEVES AND WALL PENETRATIONS
A. Pipes penetrating all water tight walls shall use "Link Seal" Century line sleeves in
combination with link seals having stainless steel service designation. Patch
exterior side of wall penetrations with non-shrink grout as specified in Section
13150-3.01.L. Other methods of water tightness shall be pre-approved by the
ArchitectlEngineer.
B. Provide shop drawings on proposed location of all pipes penetrating water tight
walls. These should indicate how contractor proposes to operate and drain the
systems.
3.04 DECK, CLEANING AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. Incorporate pool steps, ladders, and/or recessed stair wells into the pool as shown on
the Contract Drawings.
B. Install all deck, cleaning, and safety equipment in compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations; as required by Department of Public Health, and as approved by
ArchitectlEngineer.
3.05 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. The Pool Sub-contractor shall supply the services of an experienced swimming pool
operator instructor for a period of not less than three days (two (2) full days
operations and start-up, one (1) full day shut-down assistance) after the pool has
been filled and initially placed in operation. During this period the Owner's
designated representatives shall be thoroughly instructed in all phases of the pool's
operation. Contractor shall provide videotape cassette of complete start-up and
shut-down operations.
1. Prior to this instructor leaving the job, he shall obtain written certification from
the Owner's designated representative acknowledging that the instruction period
has been completed and all necessary operating information provided. Pool
Contractor shall, in his contract, include the cost of three more days of
instruction and operational checkout by a qualified representative of the
contractor during the first years operation. Written reports of each of these
three visits outlining the pool's operation, competence and performance of the
pool's operating personnel and other pertinent comments shall be submitted to
the Owner and ArchitectlEngineer within one week after each visit.
13150-33
60-955.00
13150-34
60-955.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Pool Contractor shall deliver four complete sets of operating and maintenance
instructions for the swimming pool structures, finishes and all component
equipment to the Architect/Engineer. Including, but not limited to the following:
I. Bound together in a complete manual and three ring binder.
2. All equipment cut sheets.
3. Accurate parts lists.
4. Pool start-up and pool emptying instructions.
5. Narrative on the pool operation through all sequences.
6. All valves must be permanently plastic tagged along with valve legend and
explanation.
7. Trouble shooting information.
8. A schematic of piping as installed providing elevations and dimensions.
9. All piping in Mechanical Room to be labeled with description of line and
arrows indicating direction of flow.
3.06 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION
A. After work of this section has been completed, clean up work area and remove all
equipment, excess materials, and debris. Protect pool from damage until time of
final completion. Remove and replace finishes which are chipped, cracked,
abraded, improperly adhered, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 13152
SWIMMING POOL UMBRELLA
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide swimming pool umbrella as shown on the Drawings, complete with all fittings, as
specified herein and as shown.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, etc., in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General
Conditions.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect swimming pool umbrella during transit and storage by wrapping to prevent drainage,
soiling and deterioration.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide a one-year warranty on the umbrella structure and five-year warranty on
the fabric.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide one 20-foot umbrella with removable crank: handle, 4-inch diameter aluminum
center pole, fabric covering and aluminum ground sleeve equal to Funfrella by Anchor
Industries, Inc., 1100 Burch Dr., Evansville, IN 47733, tel. 812-867-2421, equal product
Permabella by Waterloo Trent and Tarp Company, Inc., 1029 Commercial Street, Waterloo,
IA 40702, tel. 800-537-1193.
13152-1
60-954.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Verify that surface is clean, dry, and free of loose dirt, dust, oil, sealers or curing compounds,
droppings or adhesions from construction activities. Correct defective conditions before
starting the installation. Starting the work signifies acceptance of the conditions and
responsibility for required results.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install anchor and aluminum ground sleeve in concrete hole. Aluminum sleeve shall be
protected from contact with concrete with a coat of bituminous paint or asphalt varnish.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. After installation is completed, protect from soiling or defacement until acceptance by the
Owner.
B. Before final inspection and acceptance, clean and touch up abraded areas. Leave the entire
surface clean.
END OF SECTION
13152-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Drawings and Specifications shall be considered as complementary, one to the other, so
that materials and work indicated, called for, or implied by the one and not by the other shall
be supplied and installed as though specifically called for by both. The Drawings shall be
considered diagrammatic, not necessarily showing in detail or to scale all of the equipment
or minor items. Items not shown on the Drawings and not specifically mentioned in the
Specifications but obviously necessary for a complete working installation shall be provided
as part of the work. In the event of discrepancies between the Drawings and the
Specifications, or between either of these and any regulations or ordinances governing
mechanical work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in ample time to permit revisions.
1.02 SITE INVESTIGATION
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to visit the site of the work and become
familiar with all available information regarding the location of existing facilities. Failure
of the Contractor to fully inform himself of all existing conditions will not be cause for
additional compensation.
1.03 FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits for work under this Contract and shall pay all
expenses in conjunction therewith. He shall also procure and deliver to the Engineer all
certificates issued by the authorities having jurisdiction.
B. The work will be inspected by the Engineer during the course of construction. Provide for
inspection by others having jurisdiction during the proper phases.
1.04 NEW EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. All equipment and materials used in this installation shall be new, of approved quality and
manufacture and, unless otherwise noted, shall be standard catalog items of the various
manufacturers. Each component of the work shall be complete, connected and capable of
satisfactory functional operation.
15010-1
60-954.00
B. Piping systems shall be complete with pipe, pipe fittings, valves, strainers, expansion joints,
flexible pipe connections, hangers, supports, anchors, guides, sleeves, and accessories
required to ensure proper operation for the purpose intended, as shown and specified. Piping,
valves and accessories shall be suitable for the system pressure, temperature and circulating
liquid.
1.05 STANDARDS
A. The codes and standards covering mechanical work include, but are not limited to:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
4. American Welding Society (A WS)
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
6. National Electrical Manufacturers Associations (NEMA)
7. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
8. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)
9. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
10. Southern Standard Building Codes
11. Department of Environmental Regulation (DER)
12. Codes, Regulations, Ordinances, etc., of the State, County, and/or Municipality, in
which the construction is located, and any political division having jurisdiction over
this work.
B. These codes, society and association recommendations constitute minimum requirements and
no reductions from design requirements will be permitted, even if allowed by the applicable
codes, without expressed written permission of the Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated or
approved, the applicable editions of the referenced codes and standards shall be those current
on the date of the Advertisement For Bids.
15010-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.06 SPACE AND ACCESS
A. All equipment shall fit the allotted space and shall leave reasonable access room for servicing
and repairs. Greater space and room required by substituted equipment shall be provided by
the Contractor and at his expense and meeting the approval of the Engineer.
2. If the Contractor discovers any discrepancies between equipment dimensions and space
allotments therefor, he shall notify the Engineer in writing and shall not proceed with the
work until he has received written instructions from the Engineer.
1. Field verification of all dimensions on Drawings is required. Actual locations,
distances and levels shall be governed by field conditions.
2. The Contractor shall check grading, drainage, and construction details of all units of
work to avoid installation conflicts. Should changes from the Drawings be necessary
to resolve conflicts, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, and secure written
approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started.
C. If the Contractor performs work knowing it to be contrary to good practice, to the Contract
Documents, or to governing codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations, without giving notice
to the Engineer, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such work and shall bear
the attributable costs for rectifying the work.
1.07 CDITING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting in existing work is not contemplated and work shall be sequenced so that cutting and
patching of new work is not required.
B. Where interferences occur, and departures from indicated arrangements are required, the
Contractor shall coordinate the mechanical work with the other trades involved and make a
determination as to changed locations and elevations of ductwork and/or piping and shall
obtain approval from the Engineer for the proposed changes.
C. The Contractor shall do no cutting that may impair strength of building construction. No
holes, except for small screws, may be drilled in beams or other structural members without
obtaining prior approval of the Engineer. Where cutting is necessary, holes shall be cut or
core drilled in walls, beams, columns or structural slabs, after ascertaining the location of
reinforcement and tendons before coring. If the cutting tool comes in contact with
reinforcement, move to a location where steel will not be cut and patch the partly cut hole
to provide the specified concrete coverage over the reinforcement. Finish patching shall be
done according to the specifications for each finish, by mechanics skilled in each type of
finish.
15010-3
60-954.00
D. Holes shall be cut in structural steel and concrete only after coordination with the structural
design and as approved by the Engineer as to number, size and location, and approved shop
drawings.
E. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for cutting and patching that is
necessitated by ill-timed, defective or non-conforming installations.
1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. In addition to the components specified and shown on the Drawings and necessary for the
specified performance, the Contractor shall incorporate in the design and show on the shop
drawings all the safety features required by the current codes and regulations, including but
not limited to those of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and Amendments
thereto.
1.09 DRIVES AND BEL TGUARDS
A. The Contractor shall provide for each V -belt drive or rotating shaft a protective guard
securely bolted to the apparatus. The guard shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and
be constructed to comply with all safety requirements. Hinged access doors not less than
6-inches x 6-inches shall be provided for access to motor and fan shaft for test purposes. For
double in-let fans, the belt guard shall be arranged so as not to restrict the air flow into the
fan inlet. Guards shall not interfere with lubrication of equipment.
1.10 BALANCING ROTATING EQUIPMENT
A. All rotating equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Unless otherwise
specified, the vibration allowance in the units shall not exceed the upper limits as established
by the equipment manufacturer.
1.11 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all electrical work associated with mechanical equipment,
including electrical controls, disconnects, switches, contactors and starters for all equipment
items requiring same. All electrical work shall conform in all respects to the requirements
of the applicable provisions of Division 16 and current National Electrical Code.
1.12 METAL FASTENERS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, metal fasteners and related parts shall be of aluminum or
stainless steel and shall be of adequate strength for the purpose intended.
15010-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.13 PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYSIS
A. Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis and where aluminum will
contact concrete, mortar or plaster, the contact surface of the metals shall be separated using
not less than one coat of zinc chromate primer and one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented
asphalt paint on each surface; or where deemed necessary by the Engineer, not less than one
course of asphalt saturated cotton fabric cemented to both metals with flashing cement, shall
be used. Finished works shall be cleaned and excess cement shall be removed.
1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General
Conditions. Each drawing shall be indexed and/or referenced to the Drawings and
Specifications. No work upon the manufacture or fabrication of any equipment shall be
performed prior to the Engineer's review. Certified data shall indicate actual test
performance of units furnished. The Contractor shall submit, with the certified performance
data, shop drawings, layout drawings showing exact installation, piping and foundation
details for the installations being submitted. The various Sections in the Specifications
specify additional requirements for shop drawings with which the Contractor shall comply.
1.15 FACTORY TESTS
A. When equipment is required to be factory tested, the results of the tests shall be submitted
to the Engineer for review before shipment of the equipment.
1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with Section 01720 and
before final acceptance of the project and shall include the following as a minimum
requirement:
1. Utility surveys indicating the underground work performed under this Section and
giving dimensions from fixed reference points.
2. Ductwork: Drawings showing routing of ductwork, indicating locations of balancing
dampers, splitter dampers, fire and smoke dampers, access doors, and fans and other
items needing periodic maintenance.
3. Piping: Drawing showing routing of piping, indicating valves, cleanouts, and access
panels.
15010-5
60-954.00
1.17 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall clean, oil and grease fans, motors, and other
running equipment and apparatus and mechanisms which he installs and shall make certain
such apparatus and mechanisms are in proper working order and ready for testing.
1.18 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Bound Instructions: In compliance with Section 01730 and before final payment is made, the
Contractor shall furnish bound operation and maintenance manuals to the Engineer. The
manuals shall consist of catalog cuts, bulletins, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, schedules,
parts lists, procedures and other data showing the equipment installed and shall include, but
not limited to, the following:
1. System layout showing piping, valves and controls.
2. Approved wiring and control diagrams, with data to explain the detailed operation
and control of each component.
3. A control sequence describing startup, operation and shutdown.
4. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment, including
lubrication instructions.
5. Parts lists and recommended spare parts.
6. Other data and instructions as specified under the various Sections.
B. All data furnished shall conform to the installation as constructed. Cuts showing other
equipment and data not applicable to the installation shall be crossed out and where practical
shall be omitted from the manual. The assembly of the manual shall be in a logical manner
and each section shall be indexed in the Table of Contents.
C. Each manufacturer shall outline a maintenance procedure for his equipment installed and the
Contractor shall then compile these procedures in a logical manner to provide a procedure
for the operating personnel of the Owner to follow in their day to day operation of the
facility .
1.19 FIELD INSTRUCTIONS
A. Upon completion and testing of the work and at a time designated, the Contractor shall
provide the services of one or more project engineers to work in conjunction with the service
engineers and suppliers' representatives in instructing the Engineer and Owner's personnel
15010-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. The project engineer(s) shall also
be required to start up and operate the equipment under normal working conditions. These
field instructions shall cover all the items contained in the bound instructions. The
instruction period shall be given at the time the equipment is operating under normal
conditions. In addition to these requirements, the Contractor shall provide field instructions
as specified under the various Sections of the Specifications.
1.20 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work, materials, equipment, etc. against defects for a
period of one year from the date of the final acceptance, that all the equipment has the
capacity specified and that it will operate without excess noise or vibration caused by
improper installation. In addition to the guarantee, the Contractor shall provide the
performance warranties as specified for the equipment in the various sections. Guaranties
and warranties shall conform to the applicable provisions with requirements of Article 13.5
of the General Conditions.
END OF SECTION
15010-7
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
SECTION 15094
SUPPORTS AND HANGERS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work covered in this Section consists of furnishing and installing pipe hangers and
supports to rigidly support pipes, maintain the necessary pitch, prevent vibration, and to
allow expansion and contraction of the types and in the locations shown on the Drawings and
specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's literature and catalog cuts, in accordance with Article 6.11 of the
General Conditions, prior to starting work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Supports and hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Co., Fee & Mason Mfg. Co., or
equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Overhead Hangers: Hangers and rods shall be proportioned for the weight of pipe supported
and shall be as follows:
1. For pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller: Adjustable cast malleable or wrought
iron split ring type, clevis type or Auto-Grip, all galvanized, except copper plated
type for copper pipes.
2. Threaded hanger rods: Galvanized steel rods suspended from galvanized inserts in
concrete.
B. Pipe Saddle Supports:
1. Provide 18 gauge galvanized steel x 12" long saddles at all points where insulated
lines bear on hangers.
15094-1
60-954.00
C. Sleeves: Removable plastic inserts in masonry and concrete. Where necessary, sleeve beams
in the middle third of height with specific approval obtained from Engineer on each sleeve.
D. Wall and Column Supports (all galvanized):
1. Welded steel brackets with anchor chairs.
2. Install additional wall bearing plates where required for wall brackets.
E. Supports shall be generally capable of maintaining the installed load plus 500#.
F. Miscellaneous Hangers: As shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
Plumber's strap, chain, wire or perforated bar shall not be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install hangers or supports at all changes in direction and at the end of piping runs.
2. Install all hangers, supports, rods, inserts, clamps, bolts and other supporting devices
of sizes and spacings to prevent loads from exceeding the manufacturer's maximum
recommended loading with a safety factor of 5, to adequately secure pipe in position
and to maintain proper pitch, to prevent vibration and to permit expansion and
contraction.
3. Secure hangers to beams or approved concrete insert where possible. Obtain
approval of locations of concrete inserts before proceeding with the work.
4. When piping is installed on structural steel supports, provide blocking of pipe rolls
to prevent lateral pipe movement.
5. Secure pipes supported by trapeze hangers and not mounted on pipe rolls to trapeze
with pipe clamps or U-bolts.
6. Do not support piping from other pipes or from stairs and walk-ways.
7. Set all inserts before the concrete is placed.
15094-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. For insulated piping, provide hangers with a diameter large enough to include
insulation and protective shield or saddle.
B. Expansion and Contraction:
1. Rigidly support all piping with adequate provisions for expansion and contraction.
2. Firmly anchor horizontal runs over 50 feet in length at the midpoint of the runs to
force expansion equally toward the ends.
3. Provide hangers for PVC pipe to allow for contraction and expansion.
C. Spacing:
1. Install hangers and supports at sufficiently close intervals to maintain alignment and
prevent sagging.
2. Maximum spacing of hangers and supports for horizontal piping shall be as follows:
Maximum Spacing-Feet
Pipe Size
(inches)
USE...
Copper
Steel Pipe
1 & smaller
1-114 to 2
2-1/2 to 3
4 and larger
N/A
5
5
5
4
6
10
N/A
6
9
11
14
Note: 1.
PVC piping - one half the maximum spacing for steel pipe.
D. Supporting Vertical Piping:
1. Support at each floor level.
2. . Support at all points necessary to insure rigid installation with adequate provisions
to allow expansion and contraction and prevent vibration. Support vertical no hub
pipe with two supports per length of pipe.
3. Support by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests.
15094-3
60-954.00
E. Supporting PVC Piping:
1. Support in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for the conditions of operation temperature and size of pipe.
2. Support in a manner which will prevent subsequent visible sagging of the pipe
between supports due to plastic deformation.
F. Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping: Support by adjustable hangers.
G. Valves, Fittings & Specialties: Independently support pipe connected to equipment and
piping systems.
H. Temporary Pipe Supports:
1. Layout each section of pipeline and make connections while the pipe is held in
temporary supports.
2. After the completion of connections in each section of pipeline, hold the section in
place with temporary clamps.
3. Do not remove the temporary clamps until the piping is correctly installed on the
permanent supports.
END OF SECTION
15094-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15100
PIPING AND SPECIAL TIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment for plumbing piping systems complete including
soil, waste and vent piping systems, storm water and interior building drainage systems,
domestic hot and cold water systems, plumbing connections and all fittings, specialties,
auxiliary materials and accessories as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic and do not show every bend, off-set, elbow or
other fittings which may be required in the piping for installation in the space allotted.
Careful coordination of the work of this Section with that of other trades is necessary to
avoid conflicts.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide new materials free from defects and of American manufacture, and clearly marked
with manufacturer's name and weight, classification, or working pressure of pipe and fitting.
B. Comply with local building/plumbing codes.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit, in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions, manufacturer's technical
product data and shop drawings, including dimensions for roughing in, wall, floor and
ceiling/roof penetrations and support points, before any work is commenced.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps
through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate
dirt from inside of pipe and tube.
B. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from weather. Where necessary to
store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable, water- proof wrapping.
15100-1
60-954.00
C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by
packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pipe Fittings:
Material
Services
1.
Copper tube ASTM B-88
type K, L & M
Domestic hot and cold water piping
3" and smaller. Type K below
grade, L above ground and Type M for
water heater drains and P&T relief
branches.
2.
Service weight cast iron tar-coated
inside and out, Hub and Spigot
ASTM A74, Hubless CISPI 301.
All DWV piping, stormwater lines.
Hub-type below grade, hubless
above grade. All condensate lines
under slab or underground.
3.
Brass pipe or tube chrome plated.
All exposed-to-view plumbing, piping,
accessories and equipment.
4.
Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40.
Low pressure gas piping down-stream
of the meter.
B. Pipe Fittings:
1. Wrought Copper: Elbows, tees, reducers, couplings, etc., solder ends 150 PSIG
WSP, conforming to ANSI B 16.22. Fittings manufactured by Mueller Brass Co.,
Chase Brass, and Copper Co. Do not use solder containing lead for potable water
service. Bronze unions for 2 W' pipe and smaller, bronze flanged connections, 150
pound class, for 3" and larger
2. Dielectric Unions: Dissimilar pipe metals shall be electrically insulated from each
other by couplings, unions, or flanges commercially manufactured for that purpose
and rated for the service pressure and temperature. Use of steel or cast-iron fittings
in a copper piping system is prohibited, except where specifically noted. Threaded
unions shall be as manufactured by Epco.
15100-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Steel Pipe, Galvanized, 3" and Smaller: Fittings, banded malleable iron, threaded
type, conforming to ANSI B 16.3; 150 lb. Fittings manufactured by Walworth Co.,
Crane Co., Grinnel Co., galvanized as specified for service intended.
4. Unions: 1/4" through 212" nominal pipe size malleable iron, ground joint, bronze to
iron seat, minimum 300 WSP. For 3-inches and larger, use bronze flanged
connections, 150 pound class. Unions manufactured by Walworth Co., Crane Co.
Use galvanized unions for galvanized piping.
5. Fittings Not Permitted: Reducers, elbows, tees, and laterals shall not be fabricated
from pipe. Bushings are not permitted.
6. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: Provide fittings of same weight and manufacture as pipe,
drainage type. Pack with oakum, fill with a minimum of one inch of lead in one
pouring, caulk solid. Hubless fittings with clamp assembly per requirements of the
Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute's Standard 301.
7. Reducing fittings shall be used where size transition is required. Bushings or close
nipples are not permitted.
C. Specialties:
1. Escutcheons:
a. Stainless steel, or chromium plated brass, either one piece or split patterns,
stamped or solid as applicable.
b. Unless otherwise noted, provide escutcheons securely in place on exposed
pipes where they pass through walls, partitions, floors and ceilings or finished
areas.
c. For interior walls, partitions and ceilings, escutcheons shall be stainless steel.
d. F or floors and exteriors walls, escutcheons shall be solid cast brass, rough
chrome plated or cast nickel bronze alloy.
D. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Provide for pipe passing through walls or floors before pouring concrete. Plastic
sleeves as manufactured by PROSET or equal are permitted.
15100-3
60-954.00
2. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow full thickness of insulation through sleeves
for insulated piping, and for two layers of 30 lb. felt wrapping around un-insulated
plpmg.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Line and Grade:
1. Install gravity lines at uniform grade to low point after field verification of low point
invert.
2. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the structure and work into place
without springing or forcing. Run piping parallel with the lines of the structure
unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top,
bottom, or side of main using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural
or installation conditions.
3. Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work
and other services to permit not less than I-inch between finished covering and other
work, and not less than ~-inch between finished covering on the different services.
4. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing type fittings. Do not use
bushings.
5. Change in direction shall be made with standard fittings, except that bending of
copper pipe will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends
are formed. Center-line radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe.
Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be
acceptable.
6. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe lines.
Branch connections shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain
on fittings, or short pipe lengths. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch
runouts to provide for expansion and contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be
provide by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will spring enough
to allow for expansion without straining.
15100-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Place all sleeves for piping prior to the pouring of the concrete or in time to set in
place as the masonry walls are erected.
2. After piping is installed through the sleeves, complete with insulation or wrapping,
the sleeves shall be sealed water-tight with an approved mastic or caulking
compound.
C. Jointing Pipe:
1. Threaded Pipe: Ream all pipe after cutting and before threading. Use non-
hardening pipe compound "Tite-Seal" on male threads only.
2. Copper Tube: Ream all pipe after cutting and polish end to be soldered.
3. Provide nipples of same material and weight as pipe used. Part of standard weight
nipples is less than 1-1/2 inches.
4. Provide reducing fittings where changes in pipe sizes occur.
5. Provide isolation bushings between copper and steel piping and between brassware
and steel.
6. Provide unions or flanges in all service lines at each piece of equipment, specialty,
valves or at other locations required for ready disconnect.
7. Provide all necessary drain piping from the low point of each of the systems,
compressor tank drains, and other miscellaneous piping required by the various
systems to make a complete installation. Drains shall not be smaller than connection
at equipment and no drain shall be smaller than WI.
D. Pipe Protection:
1. Spirally wrap all pipe lines embedded in concrete with two layers of 30 lb. felt.
2. All exposed threads on galvanized steel pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned, degreased
and protected with two coats of zinc chromate after assembly.
3. All concealed metallic pipe and supports and gas piping not in building shall be
coated with two coats ofbitumastic.
4. No piping shall be back filled or covered prior to inspection.
15100-5
60-954.00
5. All underground piping shall have thirty inches minimwn cover.
E. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Provide hangers and supports as specified in Section 15094.
F. Air Chambers: For each riser and fixture supply provide an air chamber not less than 18
inches long and one size larger than supply to fixture but not less than 3/4 inch diameter.
G. Escutcheons: Fit and firmly secure escutcheons to pipes passing through finished floors,
ceilings and walls. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to cover sleeved
openings.
H. Valves: Provide valves to isolate each cold water riser, branch line, hose bibbs, and where
indicated on plans and specified in Section 15400.
I. Equipment Connections:
1. Make all required connections between equipment and the piping systems as shown
and specified.
2. Make connections between any piece of equipment and any piping system by means
of unions, flange joints or other fittings which permit equipment to be disconnected
and removed for maintenance.
3. Install valves or cocks in the connections to each piece of equipment on system side
of union connection.
3.02 TESTS
A. Apply a water pressure test to all parts of the water supply systems before the piping is
concealed and before fixtures and equipment are connected. Use a hydrostatic pressure of
not less than 125 psig applied to the system for a period of four hours. There shall be no
leaks at any point in the system at this pressure.
B. After installation ofDWV piping, and before pipe is concealed or fixtures installed, cap or
plug the ends of the system and fill all sanitary lines to the top of vents above the roof and
fill all roof drainage piping up to the roof drain. When testing the drainage piping by
sections, the minimwn height of water column shall be 10 feet.
C. Leave concealed work uncovered until required tests have been completed, but if necessary
to make tests on portions of the work, those portions of the work may be concealed after
being inspected and approved. Repair defects that are discovered as a result of inspections
or tests with new materials. Caulking, peening or soldering of screwed joints, cracks, or
holes will not be accepted. Repeat tests after defects have been corrected.
15100-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03 CLEANING
A. Sterilization: As soon as the water piping has been thoroughly flushed out, sterilize the lines
by introducing into them a solution of calcium hypochlorite or chloride of lime. Open and
close all valves while system is being chlorinated. After the sterilizing agent has been
applied for 24 hours, test for residual chlorine at the ends of the lines. If less than 10 parts
per million is indicated, repeat the process. When the tests show at least 10 parts per million
of residual chlorine, flush out the system until all traces of the chemical used are removed.
Make necessary connections to sterilize piping.
END OF SECTION
15100- 7
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15160
EQUIPMENT PADS AND VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide concrete bases, structural steel, and vibration control products required to support
equipment and piping not specifically shown on structural and architectural plans.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide new materials, free from defects, of American manufacture and designed specifically
for service for which it is intended.
B. Vibration control products shall be the products of firms regularly engaged in manufacture
of units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years and which shall provide field
supervision and inspection to ensure proper installation and performance. Except as
otherwise indicated, obtain vibration isolation units of the same type from a single
manufacturer. Obtain pipe and duct connections as recommended by manufacturer of
vibration isolation units for use with work or system specified. Select and install isolation
in accordance with the isolator manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Vibration control products shall be installed by personnel with at least 3 years of successful
installation experience on projects utilizing vibration isolation units similar to those required
for this Project.
D. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to fabrication,
installation and construction of HV AC vibration control products, and with applicable
requirements of local codes and standards enforced by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions, manufacturer's technical
product data and design data where required before any work is commenced. Submittal shall
indicate scope of vibration isolation work and locations of units and flexible connections.
15160-1
60-954.00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide vibration control products as manufactured
by one of the following:
1. Consolidated Kinetics Corp.
2. Mason Industries, Inc.
3. Korfund Dynamics Corp.
4. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.
2.02 ISOLATION MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS
A. Neoprene Pad Type Isolators: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard
hardness and cross-ribbed pattern, designed for neoprene-in-shear-type vibration isolation,
and in the thickness required. Isolators shall have molded mount shaped elements with bolt
holes for bolting to equipment bases and shall be mounted on bottom steel plates for bolting
to foundations. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered and shall have friction pads
both top and bottom.
B. Spring-Neoprene Suspension Isolators: Shall be a combination of elastomer and free
standing stable spring element contained within a structurally rigid one-piece hanger box.
C. Flexible Duct Connectors: Laminated flexible sheet of cotton duct and sheet elastomer
(butyl, neoprene or vinyl), reinforced with steel wire mesh where required for strength to
withstand duct pressure indicated. Form connectors with full-faced flanges and accordion
bellows to perform as flexible isolation unit, and of manufacturer's standard length for each
size unless otherwise indicated. Equip each unit with galvanized steel retaining rings for
airtight connection with ductwork.
D. Provide miscellaneous structural steel frames, pipe stands, legs, etc., for each item of
equipment requiring supports. Each support shall be sized to support the equipment safely,
and shall be firmly and securely anchored and bolted to floor, building structure or concrete
base as required.
15160-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment pads and vibration isolation products in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and with applicable industry standards.
B. Static Deflections: Comply with the minimum static deflections recommended by
ASHRAE, including the definitions of critical and noncritical locations, for the selection and
application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.
C. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials
and units.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Vibration Isolation Qualities: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION CONTROLS
A. Install vibration control products where indicated, as specified herein, in accordance with
manufacturer's published installation instructions, in accordance with the Drawings,
Schedules, and shop drawings, and conform with ASHRAE and recognized industry
practices to insure that vibration controls comply with requirements and serve intended
purposes.
B. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and
load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to insure that units have
equal deflection, do not exceed rated operating deflections, do not bottom out under loading,
and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove spacer blocks and
similar devices intended for temporary support during installation.
C. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent
displacement by normal forces.
D. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units
as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly.
E. Locate isolation hangers as near the overhead support structure as possible.
15160- 3
60-954.00
F. Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight
connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage.
G. Comply with ASHRAE requirements for installation of vibration controls and install work
as specified herein, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products serve intended function and as necessary for complete and operable installations.
Provide necessary accessories to properly complete installations.
H. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no
dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.
3.04 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
A. Compressors: Bolt and grout each pump with its driving motor to a concrete base reinforced
as required. Concrete base thickness shall be a minimum of 12-inches.
END OF SECTION
15160-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide nameplates, labeling, and identification methods for mechanical equipment,
components and products as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Painting
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
B. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve
manufacturer's name and model number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Allen Systems, Inc.
B. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.
C. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
D. Seton Name Plate Corp.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform with ANSI/ASME A13.1.
15190-1
60-954.00
B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved dark letters on light
contrasting background color.
C. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved dark letters on light contrasting
background color. Tag size minimum 1-112 inch diameter.
D. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-112 inch diameter with smooth
edges.
E. Stencil Paint: In accordance with Section 09900, semi-gloss enamel.
F. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around
pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and fluid being
conveyed.
G. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive
backing and printed markings.
H. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape
of not less than 6 inch wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09901 for stencil painting.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Plastic Nameplates: Install with corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive.
B. Tags: Install with corrosive-resistant chain.
C. Stencil Painting: Apply in accordance with Section 09901.
D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Install complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
15190-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Install 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above
buried pipe.
G. Equipment: Identify all equipment, tanks, and devices with plastic nameplates. Small
devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with metal tags.
H. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic
nameplates.
I. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. Fasten tags to valves with brass
chains.
J. Piping: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Tags may be used
on small diameter piping. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view
and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not more than 20 feet apart on straight
runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee at each side of penetration of
structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
K. Ductwork: Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify as to ventilation fan unit
number, and area served. Locate identification at unit, at each side of penetration of structure
or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
3.03 VALVE CHART AND SCHEDULE
A. Provide valve chart and schedule in aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. Install at
location as directed and insert copy in operation and maintenance manual. Valve chart shall
show valve locations, valve service and valve number.
END OF SECTION
15190- 3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULA nON
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORKINCLUDED
A. Provide mechanical insulation to the extent required as indicated on Drawings and schedules,
and as specified herein. The work includes insulation of piping and ductwork systems and
equipment insulation.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Painting
B. Hangers and Supports
C. Piping and Specialties
D. Mechanical Identification
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical
insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 3 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Mechanics with at least 5 years successful installation experience
on projects with mechanical insulation similar to that required for this project.
C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets,
coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFP A 255) method.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions,
manufacturer's technical product data and installation recommendations for the products
specified, indicating thermal conductivity (K factor), density, fire and smoke ratings, as
applicable, for the various materials and composites.
15250-1
60-954.00
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type
of mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation, covering, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with
manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.
B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install
damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Armstrong W orid Industries, Inc.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH
4. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Piping Insulation:
1. Closed Cell Polyolefm Foam Pipe Insulation.
2. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated.
3. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation
manufacturer for applications indicated.
15250-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C921, Type I for piping with temperatures
below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be
used for all piping at installers option. Use factory made aluminum jackets
conforming to B209 Specifications for exterior piping. Encase pipe fittings
insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Ductwork Insulation:
1. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C553, Type I, Class B-4.
2. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C921, Type I for ductwork with
temperatures below ambient.
3. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors,
comer angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer
for applications indicated.
4. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers,
protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation
manufacturer for applications indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine area and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable
to installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Plumbing Piping System Insulation:
1. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for
handicap fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flow
regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or
tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre- insulated equipment.
2. Cold Piping Application Requirements: Insulate stormwater piping and plumbing
vents in ceiling space within building with either 1/2- inch thickness of closed-cell
flexible polyelefin foam pipe insulation.
15250-3
60-954.00
B. HV AC Piping System Insulation: Insulate refrigerant piping and condensate drain piping
with closed cell polyolefin foam insulation.
C. Ductwork System Insulation: Insulate the following cold ductwork with flexible fiberglass,
2-inch thick:
1. HV AC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HV AC unit discharge, and room
terminal outlet.
2. Insulate neck and bells of supply outlets.
3. HV AC return ductwork between room terminal inlet and return fan inlet, or HV AC
unit inlet.
4. HV AC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined.
D. Installation of Piping Insulation:
1. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its
intended purpose.
2. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting,
testing, and acceptance of tests.
3. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous
run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete
run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.
4. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together
to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
5. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent
puncture or other damage.
6. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent
thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install
factory molded, precut units except where specific form or type is indicated.
7. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping
penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
15250-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3
inches wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet
coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3 inches wide
vapor barrier tape or band.
E. Installation of Ductwork Insulation:
1. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its
intended purpose.
2. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.
3. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to
ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
4. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent
puncture and other damage.
5. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar
ductwork penetrations.
3.03 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with
vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.
B. Protection: Protect insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid
damage and deterioration.
END OF SECTION
15250-5
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15400
VALVES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide valves of the various types as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Piping and Specialties
B. Mechanical Identification
C. Mechanical Insulation
D. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment
E. HV AC Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit detailed shop drawings indicating make, model, location, type, size, pressure rating
and electrical requirements where applicable in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General
Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURE
A. Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible.
B. Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside of
body.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Valve Connections:
15400-1
60-954.00
1. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints.
Use pipe size valves.
2. Thread pipe for sizes 2 inches and smaller.
3. Solder or screw to solder adaptors for copper tubing.
2.03 VALVES
A. Gate Valves: For 2" and smaller use Class 125,200 psi non-shock water, bronze, screw-in
bonnet, non-rising stem, solid wedge, with threaded or soldered ends as manufactured by
Crane, Hammond, Stockham, Milwaukee or equal.
B. Globe and Angle Valves: For 2" and smaller use Class 125, bronze body, screw-in bonnet,
rising stem, integral seat, renewable disc with threaded or soldered ends as manufactured by
Crane, Hammond, Stockham, Milwaukee. or equal.
C. Plug Valves:
1. 2" and Smaller: 150 psi, bronze body, straightaway pattern, square head, threaded
ends as manufactured by Lunkenheimer, or equal.
2. 2W' and Larger: 175 psi, lubricated plug type, semi-steel body, single gland, wrench
operated, flanged ends, as manufactured by Walworth, Powell, Nodstrom or equal.
D. Ball Valves:
1. 1" and Smaller: 150 psi, bronze body, standard port, bronze trim, 2-piece
construction, TFE seats and seals, with threaded or soldered ends as manufactured
by Crane, Stockham, Watts, Hammond or equal.
2. 1" to 2": 150 psi, bronze body, standard port, 3-piece body, TFE seats with bronze
trim, with threaded or soldered ends as manufactured by Crane, Hammond, Watts,
Milwaukee or equal.
E. Check Valves:
1. 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, horizontal swing, regrinding type,
Y -pattern, renewable disc, with threaded or soldered ends as manufactured by Crane,
Hammond, Stockham, Milwaukee, or equal.
15400-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves: ASME adjustable bronze spring and diaphragm
type combination pressure and temperature relief, with test leveler and automatically
reseating thermostatic element.
1. Minimum discharge capacity equal to input capacity of equipment.
2. 125 psi pressure and 2100F temperature relief settings.
3. Constructed, rated and tested under ANSI Z21.22.
4. Provide one valve for each tank type water heater with size of discharge pipe and
disposition location as per applicable code requirements.
5. Accepted Manufacturer: Warts, Ashton or equal.
2.04 PRESSURE RATINGS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, use valves suitable for 125 minimum psig WSP and 450 degrees
F and maximum 200 psig and 250 degrees F.
2.05 VALVE OPERATORS
A. Provide suitable handwheels for levers or wrenches for each valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
B. Install gate valves for shut-off and isolating service, to isolate equipment, part of systems,
or vertical risers.
C. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, and low points of piping and apparatus.
D. Provide access panels as required for access to concealed valves, shock absorbers, etc., for
proper operation and maintenance.
E. Provide spring-loaded check valves on discharge of pumps, as required and as indicated on
Drawings.
15400-3
60-954.00
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Valve Adjustment: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before
final testing, adjusting, and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace
packing to stop leaks, replace valve if leak persists.
B. Valve Identification: Tag each valve in accordance with Section 15190, Mechanical
Identification.
C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
15400-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide plumbing fixtures and equipment as shown on the Drawings and sp_ecified herein,
including the following:
1. Lavatories.
2. Urinals.
3 . Water Closets.
4. Electric Water Coolers.
5. Hose Bibbs.
6. Floor Drains.
7. Mop Basin.
8. Shock Arrestors.
9. Trap Primers.
B. Separate grab bars and toilet accessories not an integral part of plumbing fixtures are
specified in Section 10800.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Supports and Hangers
B. Piping and Specialties
C. Mechanical Insulation
D. Valves
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing fixtures
of type, style and configuration required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 3 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
15440-1
60-954.00
1. Plumbing Fixture Standards: Comply with applicable portions of Southern Standard
Building Codes. Accessibility Requirement Manual and National Standards
pertaining to materials and installation of plumbing fixtures.
2. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to plumbing
fixtures and systems.
3. PDI Compliance: Comply with standards established by PDI pertaining to plumbing
fixture supports.
4. Federal Standards: Comply with applicable FS WW-P-54I-Series sections
pertaining to plumbing fixtures.
5. UL Compliance: Construct water coolers in accordance with UL Standard 399,
Drinking-Water Coolers, and provide UL label.
6. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate water coolers in accordance with ASHRAE
Standard 18, Method of Testing for Rating Drinking Water Coolers with
Self-Contained Mechanical Refrigeration Systems.
7. ARI Compliance: Construct and install water coolers in accordance with ARI
Standard 1010, Drinking-Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically-Refrigerated
Drinking-Water Coolers, and provide Certification Symbol.
8. ANSI Compliance: Construct and install barrier-free plumbing fixtures in
accordance with ANSI Standard AII7.1 Specifications for Making Buildings and
Facilities Accessible To and Usable By Physically Handicapped People.
C. Unless otherwise specified, comply with applicable Federal Specification WW -P-54I- Series
sections pertaining to plumbing fixtures, fittings, trim, metals and finishes. Comply with
requirements of WW-P-541 specification relative to quality of ware, glazing, enamel,
composition and finish of metals, air gaps, and vacuum breakers, even though some
plumbing fixtures specified in this section are not described in WW-P-541.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data for approval, including rated capacities of
selected model clearly indicated, furnished specialties and accessories, certifications and
installation instructions, in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver plumbing fixtures and equipment individually wrapped in factory containers.
15440-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Handle plumbing fixtures and equipment carefully to prevent breakage, chipping and scoring
fixture finish. Do not install damaged plumbing fixtures; replace and return damaged units
to equipment manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide factory-fabricated fixtures and equipment of type, style and material indicated. For
each type fixture, provide fixture manufacturer's standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as
indicated by their published product information; either as designed and constructed, or as
recommended by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation. All fixtures of
same type must be furnished by single manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise indicated,
provide fixtures complying with governing regulations.
B. Provide materials which have been selected for their surface flatness and smoothness.
Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting seam marks, roller marks, foundry sand holes, stains,
decoloration, or other surface imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
C. Where fittings, trim and accessories are exposed or semi-exposed, provide bright
chrome-plated brass or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not
exposed. No flexible connections will be permitted.
D. Stainless Steel Sheets: ASTM A167, Type 302/304, hardest workable temper with No.4,
bright, directional polish finish on exposed surfaces.
E. Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A591, coating Class C, galvanized-
bonderized.
F. Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enamel Finish: ASTM A424, commercial quality, Type I.
G. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A526, except ASTM A527 for extensive forming; ASTM
A525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment.
H. Aluminum: ASTM B209/B221 sheet, plate and extrusions, as indicated; alloy, temper and
finish as determined by manufacturer, except 0.40 mil natural anodized finish on exposed
work unless another finish is indicated.
I. Vitreous China: High quality, free from fire cracks, spots, blisters, and pinholes; glaze
exposed surfaces, and test for crazing resistance in accordance with ASTM C554.
J. Synthetic Stone: High quality, free from defects, glaze on exposed surfaces, stain resistant.
15440-3
60-954.00
K. Plumbing Fittings, Trim and Accessories:
1. Water Outlets: At locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote
control), provide commercial quality faucets, valves, or dispensing devices, of type
and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated. Include manual shutoff
valves and connecting stem pipes to permit outlet servicing without shut-down of
water supply piping systems. At all exposed locations, provide chrome plated
fittings and pipe with chrome plated escutcheons at wall penetrations, including those
locations inside cabinets.
2. Vacuum Breakers: Provide with flush valves where required by governing
regulations, including locations where water outlets are equipped for hose
attachment.
3. P-Traps: Include removable P-traps where drains are indicated for direct connection
to drainage system.
4. Carriers: Provide single or double unit carrier for each wall hung fixture.
5. Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fixture bolt caps
finished to match fixture finish.
6. Aerators: Provide aerators of types approved by Health Department having
jurisdiction.
2.02 FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
A. The major plumbing fixtures and equipment are specified in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule
on Plumbing Drawings.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS FIXTURES AND APPURTENANCES
A. Shock Arrestor: Stainless steel shell, hydro-pneumatic cushion of argon gas and pure
glycerine, elastomer bellows, stainless steel adaptor and male threaded plug, Josam Series
75000 Absorbotron II.
B. Backflow Preventers: Protect against backflow and back-siphonage in accordance with
requirements of the applicable codes. Reduced pressure principle, double check valve,
atmospheric (nonpressure) type vacuum breaker, and pressure type vacuum breaker
assemblies in accordance with the Manual for Cross-Connection Control, of a type tested,
approved, and listed by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control of Hydraulic Research
as an approved backflow prevention device. Coordinate with Section 02660.
15440-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine roughing-in work of potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. Also examine floors and
substrates, and conditions under which fixture work is to be accomplished. Correct any
incorrect locations of piping, and other unsatisfactory conditions for installation of plumbing
fixtures. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment:
1. Install plumbing fixtures and equipment of types indicated where shown and at
indicated heights; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, roughing-in
drawings, and with recognized industry practices. Ensure that plumbing fixtures
comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Comply with applicable
requirements of South Florida Building Code pertaining to installation of plumbing
fixtures and equipment.
2. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to indicated supports or building structure, and
ensure that fixtures are level and plumb. Anchor and secure plumbing supply lines
behind or within wall construction so as to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push
movement.
3. Protect installed fixtures and equipment from damage during remainder of
construction period.
B. Floor Drains:
1. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in
locations indicated.
2. Coordinate flashing work with work ofwaterproofmg and adjoining substrate work.
3. Install drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops
of drains flush with finished floor.
4. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
5. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
15440-5
60-954.00
6. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with
construction materials and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and
construction work.
C. Shock Arrestors: Install in upright position, in locations and of sizes in accordance with PDI
Standard WH-201, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Trap Primers: Install trap primers as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions. Pitch piping towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8" per foot (1 %).
Adjust trap primer for proper flow.
E. Cleanouts:
1. Wall Cleanouts: Place at foot of each soil and waste stack in sanitary system. Place
cleanouts in horizontal runs not to exceed 75 feet apart. Flush cleanouts with
recessed sockets (with access plate) may be used in non-fInished areas such as
equipment room, storage rooms, etc., if top of hub is installed in level position and
top of cleanout plug is flush with concrete floor.
2. Floor Cleanout: Provide pipe cleanouts with bodies of standard pipe size and
caulking ferrules conforming in thickness to that required for pipe and fitting of same
metal and full pipe size up through 4 inches. Provide removable cleanout plugs of
brass with screw thIeads, extending no less than 1/4 inch above pipe hub, and having
raised nut, except where flush with floor, provide recessed socket.
F. Backflow Prevention: Install no plumbing fixture, equipment, or pipe connection that will
provide a cross connection or interconnection between a potable water supply and any source
of nonpotable water. Install and locate the backflow prevention device so that no part of the
device will be submerged and is accessible for maintenance and testing. Provide standard
commercial units.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of plumbing fIxtures and after units are water pressurized,
test fIxtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible,
correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,
remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.
B. Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match fInish to
original at site to the satisfaction of the Engineer; otherwise, remove fixture and replace with
new unit. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with new units.
15440-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.04 ADmSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean plumbing fixtures, trim, and strainers of dirt and debris upon completion of
installation.
B. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to
provide proper flow stream and specified gpm.
C. Adjust or replace washers to prevent leaks at faucets and stops.
3.06 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish to Owner with receipt, special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing
plumbing fixtures and trim. Furnish one device for every 10 units.
END OF SECTION
15440-7
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15770
HV AC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide HV AC equipment complete with control systems, tested and ready for proper
operation, as shown and scheduled on the Drawings and as specified herein, including
factory-built components, factory-built units and related accessories. .
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Specifications:
1. AMCA, Standard 210.
2. ASHRAE.
B. Design Criteria: In the procurement of products, fabrication and installation, include
reliability and serviceability as design factors for equipment, subassemblies, motors, starters,
relays, parts and accessories. Provide guards for belts, pulleys, couplings, projecting set
screws, keys and other rotating parts such that a person can safely come into close proximity
thereto.
C. Wiring: Control system wiring shall be UL listed and labeled for the specific use. Cables
installed in return air plenums without conduit shall be specifically listed for such use. All
exposed wiring shall be in conduit. All electrical wiring shall comply with the National
Electrical Code and shall be installed by licensed electricians in compliance with the
provisions of Division 16.
1.03 SUBMITI ALS
A. Before ordering or commencing work, submit manufacturer's technical product data and shop
drawings and operating and maintenance data in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General
Conditions.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Complete catalog information and shop drawings, including descriptive literature
indicating construction, material, physical dimensions and complete operating data
15770-1
60-954.00
for components and accessories, and including wiring and schematic control
diagrams and associated sequence of operations.
2. AMCA certified performance test reports for capacities as indicated.
C. Operations and Maintenance Data: Prepare, for inclusion in the Operations and Maintenance
Manual, all data for air conditioning system and record interconnection wiring diagrams or
wire lists of the complete field-installed system with properly identified ordering number of
each system component and device in accordance with Section 01730.
D. Maintenance Materials and Spare Parts: Furnish spare parts and maintenance materials and
deliver to locations designated by the Engineer, including the following for each air
conditioning system:
1. Set of belts, where applicable.
2. Bearing Lubricants: Not less than one pint of each type, as recommended by
manufacturer.
3. One pint container of manufacturer's touch-up paint.
E. Submit copies of field test results.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Furnish warranty for each complete air conditioning system, and, in addition, furnish
warranty of compressors for four years.
1.05 MANUFACTURER
A. Units of the Carrier Co. have been used in design. Units of similar quality and capacity as
manufactured by Trane and York are acceptable provided they can be installed in available
spaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
A. Provide factory assembled self-contained, air cooled condensing units, complete with
compressor section, integral condenser, all necessary controls and interconnecting refrigerant
pIpmg.
15770-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Unit compressor section above 5 tons nominal capacity shall have multiple compressors, or
reciprocating accessible hermetic type, with force fed lubricating systems, squirrel cage
induction motors designed for suction gas cooling, complete with magnetic starters and
crankcase heaters. Provide time delay relay to prevent simultaneous starting of compressor
on multiple compressor units.
C. Unit condensing section shall be formed, convection type air cooled condenser, complete
with extended surface coils heresite coated, receivers, safety relief valves, fans, motors, V-
belt drives and magnetic starters. All components shall be protected against corrosion and
shall be mounted in a steel casing of 14-gauge panels with steel angle framing and adequate
access panels for inspection and maintenance.
D. Provide all piping valves fitting required to properly interconnect all system components.
Provide all necessary controls for fully automatic fail-safe operations of each unit. Provide
cylinder unloading type capacity control. Safety controls to include high and low pressure
controls, oil pressure limit control for each compressor and a thermal cut out for each
compressor.
2.02 AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. General: Unit size shall be of arrangement and type shown on plans with design capacities
as scheduled. Central station air handlers shall be ARl certified and complete with fans and
all accessories as herein specified.
B. Casing:
1. Casing walls shall be fabricated of continuous galvanized steel or black steel
phosphatized and coated with baked enamel finish not lighter than 18 gauge.
Removable panels shall provide access to the interior of the unit.
2. Fan and coil sections shall be internally insulated with I-inch thick, 3 lb. density
neoprene coated fiberglass. Insulation shall be secured to the casing with waterproof
adhesive and permanent fasteners. Casing insulation and adhesives shall meet
NFP A-90A requirements.
C. Fan Section:
1. Fan section shall encase double-inlet, double-width fanes), suitable for static
pressures indicated. Fan wheel shall be forward curved type, non-overloading, and
keyed to the shaft. Fan wheel shall be dynamically and statically balanced at factory.
15770-3
60-954.00
2. Fan shaft shall be solid or hollow, ground and polished steel and coated with rust
inhibitor. V -belt driven fan shall have variable-pitch motor sheaves and drives shall
be designed for 50 percent overload capacity.
3. Fan bearings shall be grease lubricated, self-aligning type. Bearings shall be
designed for a minimum of200,000 hours average life. Provide extended lubrication
lines with external grease fittings.
D. Coil Section:
1. Coil section shall encase cooling and/or heating coils and drain pan. Coils shall be
arranged for vertical air flow. Provide intermediate drain pans for multiple coils
installation. Coil headers, valves and all piping shall be completely enclosed within
the insulated casing with connections extended through the base of the cabinet.
Cooling coils shall be direct expansion type.
2. Tubing for coils shall be copper. Fins shall be aluminum mechanically bonded by
tubing expansion with a maximum spacing of 10 fins per inch. Coils shall be tested
by subjecting each coil to a minimum air pressure of 350 psig with the coil
submerged in water.
3. Drain pan shall be galvanized steel, double pan construction with the inner pan
covered with a heavy coat of mastic and thermally isolated from the exterior casing
with I-inch thick fiberglass insulation.
E. Filter Section: Filter section shall be of same construction as unit casing and shall be
designed to hold throwaway filters. Section shall have flanged inlet and outlet connections
and side access doors.
2.03 VENTILATING FANS
A. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fans: Fans shall be centrifugal type, direct drive or V-belt drive as
specified on the equipment schedule. Housings shall be weatherproof, constructed of heavy
gauge spun aluminum, non-overloading, centrifugal design, statically and dynamically
balanced. Drive shall be pre-lubricated, ball bearing type. Drive and motor shall be mounted
in a compartment isolated from exhaust air stream. Motor compartment shall be force-
cooled. Motor and fan assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolators. Electric motor
shall be prewired to junction box. External aluminum wiring post shall be provided for
electrical conduit. Bird screen shall be constructed of 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch galvanized steel
mesh.
15770-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment and control systems in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations and with approved shop drawings.
B. Perform all work in a neat and workmanlike manner.
C. Verify all space limitations before starting installation of the equipment.
D. Mechanical systems piping shall be adequately and properly labeled after installation.
3.02 SYSTEM START-UP AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall start up the system and perform all
necessary testing. An acceptance test in the presence of the Engineer and the Owner shall
be performed. When the system performance is deemed satisfactory and accepted by the
Owner, the system parts will be placed under warranty.
B. Where required, the Contractor shall modify, alter, add or replace parts of the system, or
related accessories until acceptable performance of the system has been established.
END OF SECTION
15770-5
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide low pressure ducts and ductwork accessories as shown on the Drawings and
specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Mechanical Insulation.
B. Air Distribution Devices.
C. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ofHV AC Systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork in accordance with NFP A 90A standards.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE - Handbook Fundamentals; Chapter 33 - Duct Design.
B. ASHRAE - Handbook Equipment; Chapter 1 - Duct Construction.
C. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
D. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process.
E. ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming
Quality.
F. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
15890-1
60-654.00
G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
H. NFP A 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
I. SMACNA - HV AC Duct Construction Standards.
J. SMACNA - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards.
K. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required
for this project in accordance with Article 6.11 of the General Conditions. Include layout
drawings including locations of motor, fans, filters, and other devices and connections.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products in a manner to prevent denting, wetting and crushing the
ducts and ductwork materials.
B. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All supply, return, fresh-air, and exhaust ducting shall be low pressure type, constructed of
galvanized sheetmetal unless otherwise noted.
B. Galvanized Sheetmetal Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet,
lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance
with ASTM A90.
C. Flexible Insulated Ductwork: Lightweight duct with core of corrosion resistant reinforcing
wire helix permanently bonded within fabric, insulated with 2" thick R6 fiberglass flexible
insulation and covered with a vapor barrier of aluminum metalized polyester film laminated
to glass mesh, elastomer back coated. Duct shall meet NFP A 90A requirements and be listed
as Class 1 Air Duct Material, UL Standard 181.
15890-2
60-654.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. V olume Control Dampers:
1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HV AC Duct Construction Standards, and
as indicated. Provide metal sleeves of 22 ga. sheet metal at all damper locations to
prevent blades from damaging duct materials.
2. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either
direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches.
3. Fabricate splitter dampers of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure
blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod
in self aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with set screw.
4. All dampers shall be multi-blade type, of opposed blade pattern. Assemble center
and edge crimped blades in galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.
5. Provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings on all dampers.
6. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
7. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases,
or adapters.
B. Air Turning Devices:
1. Air Extractors: Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting :frame and
bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap.
2. Turning Vanes: Multi-blade, air-foil type devices with double thickness blades
attached to steel or aluminum frames.
C. Flexible Duct Connections:
1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HV AC Duct Construction Standards, and
as indicated.
2. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFP A 90A,
minimum density 36 ounce per square yard, approximately 2 inches wide, crimped
into metal edging strip.
15890-3
60-654.00
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HV AC Duct Construction Standards or SMACNA
Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards, and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated.
B. All rectangular elbows and tees shall be provided with air-foil type turning vanes.
C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible.
Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream
shall not exceed 45 degrees.
D. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate, install and support all ducting in strict compliance with the SMACNA HV AC
Duct Construction Standards or SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction S.taridards.
B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to 'accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can
with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in
insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide balancing dampers on HV AC supply, return, and exhaust systems where required
for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust.
To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be
harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
B. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be
harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access
into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
END OF SECTION
15890-4
60-654.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15936
AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide air distribution devices, including grilles, registers, wall and door louvers as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test
Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate performance oflouvers in accordance with AMCA 500.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ANSIINFP A 90A.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.
B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
C. ANSIINFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
D. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
E. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
F. SMACNA - HV AC Duct Construction Standard.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for manufactured products and assemblies in accordance with Article
6.11 of the General Conditions.
B. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise
level.
15936-1
60-954.00
C. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to
submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets.
D. Submit manufacturer's certificates attesting that the products conform to the specified
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products shall be as manufactured by Titus, Metalaire, Krueger or equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. As specified on the mechanical drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and recognized industry
practices.
B. Install outlets to ductwork with air tight connection. Install supporting members, fastenings,
framing, hangers, bracing, brackets, straps, bolts and angles as required to connect the work
and to hold all components firmly in line.
C. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to outlets, regardless of whether dampers are
specified as part of the diffuser assembly.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test operate installed outlets to demonstrate compliance with requirements, including throw,
drag, velocity traverse, and noise.
B. Corrections or adjustments shall be made as necessary to produce required conditions and
assure complete, functional installations as specified, scheduled, and intended.
C. Repair or replace outlets found deficient during test, and repeat test until the entire
installation is acceptable.
END OF SECTION
15936-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADmSTING AND BALANCING OF HV AC SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide testing, adjusting and balancing of Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
(HV AC) systems installed.
B. Contractor shall provide all labor, engineering, and test equipment required to adjust and
balance all systems hereinbefore specified. All personnel involved in the execution of the
work shall be experienced and factory trained specifically in the total balancing ofHV AC
systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a prerequisite to final inspection, all construction, testing, adjustments, balancing, starting
and instruction will have been completed.
B. All system testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed by an independent agency
regularly engaged in this work for not less than 6 years and in accordance with AABC
Balancing Procedures.
C. Control manufacturer, after adjustment and calibration of controls, shall attest in writing that
the system is operating as intended.
D. After completion, furnish three certified copies of test report to the Engineer. The Contractor
shall provide a representative, tools, and instruments so that all submitted data may be
verified at final inspection.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
1. Applicable AABC test procedures, specifying the following:
a. Type of instruments to be implemented.
b. Method of instrument application.
15990-1
60-954.00
c. Flow direction, velocity corrections, effective area in relation to each size and
type of air terminal and density corrections.
2. Manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended procedures for testing fans and
outlets.
3. Test reports in accorance with specified requirements.
4. Copies of laboratory certified instrument calibration accuracies.
PART2-NOTUSED'
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine systems prior. to testing and balancing, and verify that systems are in proper
condition. Do not begin work until conditions detrimental to proper testing and balancing
have been corrected.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Balancing:
1. Adjust and balance the complete HV AC system as hereinafter specified.
2. Record all test data on a sepia made from the latest available revised set of plans and
submit four copies upon completion of the balancing work.
3. At the completion of the balancing, instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper
operation and maintenance of each piece of equipment.
B. Testing:
1. Test equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. All instruments will have been
calibrated recently and verification of calibration shall be provided with submittal
data.
2. Measure supply air volumes at main trunks by means of the duct traverse methods,
taking a minimum of sixteen readings. Upon completion, seal duct access holes with
plugs. The use of duct tape to seal access holes will not be permitted.
15990-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Traverse each main and branch duct after the longest straight run of each
duct.
b. Traverse using a Pitot tube and manometer where velocities are over 700
FPM, and using either a hook gauge and Pitot tube or a recenlty calibrated
hot wire anemometer for velocities up to and including 700 FPM.
3. Adjust balancing dampers for required branch duct air quantities.
4. Adjust registers and diffusers to within 10% of individual requirements specified.
5. The total air delivery in any particular fan system shall be obtained by adjustment of
the particular fan speed. The drive motor of each fan shall not be loaded over the
correct full load amperage rating of the motor involved.
6. Any changes that are required for the fmal balancing results as determined by the
balancing personnel shall be provided for by the Contractor. Such changes may
encompass, but are not necessarily restricted to the changing of pulleys, belts,
dampers, or adding dampers or access panels.
C. Systems Report shall include the following data:
1. Equipment:
a. Manufacturer, Size and H.P.
b. Amperage (Nameplate, Corrected Full Load and Final Operating).
c. Motor Current Characteristics, Starter Size.
d. RPM (Design and Final Operating).
e. Brake Horsepower.
f. Fan CFM (Design and Final Operating).
g. Fan Suction and Discharge Static Pressure (Design and Final Operating).
h. Discharge and Suction Pressures.
1. Method by which CFM and Amperage was determined.
2. System External to Fan Test Data:
a. Grille and Diffuser Reference Number and Manufacturer.
b. Location.
c. Design Velocity and CFM.
d. Flow Factor.
e. Final Condition of Balance.
f. Method Used to Determine Air Quantities.
END OF SECTION
15990-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work included consists of all supervision, labor, materials, equipment, facilities and
installation required for the complete, satisfactory and approved electrical systems as
indicated on the Drawings and called for in these Specifications, or as may be reasonably
implied by either, for the installation of complete electrical systems.
B. The Contractor shall install, complete and operating, electrical systems consisting of the
following:
1. Complete distribution for power and lighting as shown on plans, including switches
and circuit breakers, feeders, subfeeders, grounding, panelboards, branch circuits,
switches and receptacles and all other equipment shown on drawings.
2. Contractor shall make all [mal connections to equipment furnished by other trades.
3. Connection of all motors, electrically operated equipment and controls.
4. All conduits, sleeves and support systems required for all systems.
5. Temporary electrical power and lighting shall be furnished, installed and maintained
for all trades.
6. Miscellaneous items obviously required for a complete and operating system but not
specifically called for on the drawings or in the specifications shall be provided by
the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner (nuts and bolts, masonry anchors,
conduit and equipment supports, drilling, welding, scaffolding, crane service, etc.).
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Reference within these Specifications to standards, codes or reference specifications implies
that any item, product, or material so identified must comply with all minimum requirements
as stated therein, unless indicated otherwise. Only the latest revised editions are applicable.
B. The Specifications, codes and standards listed below form a part of these Specifications:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFP A)
16010-1
60-954.00
3. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
6. Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.)
7. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
8. Standard Building Code (SBC)
9. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
11. Additionally, designs, work practices and conditions must conform with the
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA)
C. Where materials and equipment are available under the continuing inspection and labeling
ofUL, provide such material and equipment. Listing by Underwriters' Laboratories shall be
evidenced by the label.
1.03 DRAWINGS
A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangements of equipment and wiring
systems. If any departures from the Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
details of such departures and reasons therefor shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval within 30 days after award of the Contract. No such departures shall be made
without the prior written approval of the Engineer. All items not specifically mentioned in
the Specifications or noted on the Drawings but obviously necessary to make a complete
working installation shall be included.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each package of shop drawings shall be bound as a unit and shall contain a first sheet with
the project name, location, date submitted, name and address of the Contractor, name and
address of the equipment supplier and a list of the contents. Opposite each type of equipment
or system shall be the manufacturer's name. The equipment data sheets shall appear in the
same order as they are listed in the table of contents.
B. The submittal drawings shall include complete specifications for every item, including
materials, finish, dimensions, fabrication details, installation instructions, standards
compliance and UL approval. Where a data sheet contains details covering various sizes or
ratings of equipment, clearly mark the items applicable to the project.
1.05 EQUIPMENT MANUAL AND OWNER INSTRUCTIONS
A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer three
complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals for each electrical, signal, control and
special system installed. Manual shall consist of detailed drawings or catalog sheets for each
16010-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
component, replacement parts lists, wiring diagrams, maintenance instructions and
description of system operation.
B. The operation and maintenance manuals shall include the name, address, and phone number
of the supplier and nearest manufacturer's representative and shall contain a complete parts
list for each system.
1.06 RULES OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES
A. Rules of local Utility Companies shall be complied with. Before submitting his bid,
Contractor shall check with the Utility Companies supplying service to this installation and
shall determine equipment, etc., he will be required to install and shall include cost of same
in Bid. No extra payment will be made for the installation of such items, except in cases
where the requirements of the Utility Companies change after the Contractor has submitted
his Bid.
1.07 COORDINATION WITH OTHER UTILITIES
A. Installation of underground ducts and conduits for power and telecommunications services
shall be thoroughly coordinated with other utilities on the site. Duct and conduit sizes and
material types shall be as shown on the Drawings. Details of routing, burial depth, size of
bends and termination at each end of service shall be verified on the job site.
1.08 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The Contractor shall plan and layout the electrical work in order to be compatible with the
building structure, the HV AC system and the plumbing system. Where failure to coordinate
the work with other trades results in equipment having to be removed and relocated, the
Contractor shall perform such removal and relocation at no cost to the Owner. Where
equipment has to be moved, the Engineer shall determine which equipment has to be moved
regardless of which equipment was installed first.
1.09 STORAGE
A. All material shall be stored in a safe, orderly manner. Materials shall not be stored directly
on the ground or floor and shall be kept clean, dry and free from damage or deteriorating
elements. Damaged or rusted materials shall not be installed.
1.10 MATERIALS
A. All equipment, materials and components shall be new, of standard current products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and be the
manufacturer's latest design. All components by same manufacturer shall be mechanically
16010-3
60-954.00
and electrically compatible with rating of apparatus in which installed. All materials shall
bear the label of Underwriters Laboratory for the intended use in all cases where this
labeling is available or shall be materials reviewed by the code enforcing authorities and
Engineer. All exterior electrical equipment shall be rated for a marine environment.
Equipment of a similar nature shall be identical. Example: All panelboards shall be of the
same manufacturer and of the same style.
1.11 ACCESSORIES
A. All hardware and accessory fittings shall be of a type designed, intended or appropriate for
the use, and complement the items with which they are used, and shall have corrosion
protection suitable for the atmosphere in which they are installed. All such hardware shall
be U.S. standard sizes.
1.12 INSTALLATION
A. All materials shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings and in accordance
with the specific manufacturer's recommended installation methods.
B. All equipment shall be set level, at the correct heights, properly aligned and where in
sections, shall be bolted together. Install indoor surface mounted equipment, including
panelboards, safety switches, individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers, motor starters,
etc., on metal framing support system (continuous slot metal channel system).
C. Secure all materials and equipment firmly in place. Do not weld electrical materials for
attachment and/or support.
D. All screws, bolts, nuts, clamps, fittings or other fastening devices shall be made up tight.
E. All materials and equipment shall be installed complete, including screws or bolts, covers,
plates, fittings, etc.
F. Follow the installation directions and recommendations of the materials and equipment
manufacturers.
G. Cutting, welding, or other weakening of building structure to facilitate electrical equipment
and materials installation shall not be permitted.
H. Light fixtures are intended to be supported by the ceiling support system, however, where
additional supports are required they shall be provided by the Contractor.
I. Provide all required wire, conduit and fittings for connection of HV AC system controls.
16010-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J. Use of manufacturer's name and catalog number: In some instances specified reference has
been made to one manufacturer's name and catalog number. Such use does not necessarily
mean that the equipment is an "off the shelf' item. Variances may be required for finish,
material or other modifications. The Contractor shall assure that all such required
modifications are made.
K. In the case of panelboards, terminal cabinets and other equipment requiring wire and cable
terminations, the Contractor shall ascertain that wiring gutter sizes are as required by NEC
Tables 373-6(a) and 373-6(b).
L. Working clearance around equipment shall meet or exceed code requirements as per NEC
Tables 1 IO-I6(a).
1.13 INTERFERENCES
A. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor shall coordinate the electrical
work with the work of other trades so that interferences between conduits, piping, equipment,
architectural, and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets in raceways, fittings,
etc., required to properly install the work shall be furnished so as to take up a minimum
space and all such offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish this shall be furnished and
installed by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner. In the event of conflict,
the Engineer will decide which equipment, piping, etc., must be relocated. Cutting and
patching required to relocate work shall exactly match original finish, and shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
1.14 IDENTIFICATION
A. Electrical equipment shall be clearly and permanently labeled with a securely fastened
nameplate. Nameplates shall be 1/16 inch thick engraved laminated plasti~ and shall have
1/4 inch high white letters on a black background. Plates shall be provided for all switches
and disconnects, starters, panelboards, and lighting contactors.
B. Color coding tape shall be moisture, flame and abrasion resistant vinyl plastic tape equal to
Scotch No. 35. Colors shall be as specified elsewhere.
C. All emergency equipment, including disconnect ahead of main panel, shall have red
nameplates. These pieces of electrical equipment such as emergency battery lights, etc., shall
be labeled as described in A. above.
D. Nameplate information shall include voltage, current rating (if any) and number of phases
of the item labeled besides its designation. Also, the nameplate shall provide the panel and
circuit number from which the equipment is fed, and the item it controls.
160 I 0-5
60-954.00
E. All conductors shall be permanently tagged at terminal boxes, equipment and control stations
to indicate their control function. Feeders shall be identified at every accessible point with
a permanent tag indicating circuit nwnber. Conductor tags shall be non-conductive.
F. Major conduits shall be identified at wireways, panels, pull boxes, cabinets and similar
locations to assist in future circuit tracing. Use adhesive markers, Dymo Labels or other
approved methods.
G. All circuits and equipment shall be identified to correspond with drawings and specifications.
A Nameplate List shall be submitted to the Owner for review.
H. All panelboards shall contain a typewritten directory behind a plastic cover, located on inside
of door, indicating the location and the type of load being served.
I. All conduit stub ups shall be identified with a stamped non-ferrous tag attached with
stainless steel wire. Nwnbers as shown on drawings.
J. Install equipment identification nameplate at the center top of the equipment, using a rubber
base adhesive.
1.15 CONNECTION
A. Make all connections for air conditioning and ventilation equipment, controls, individually
mounted starters, thermostats, firestats and other control devi:ces. Install and connect starters,
contactors, and controls, including exact wiring requirements as determined in accordance
with control wiring diagrams furnished for the equipment.
1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All openings through walls, ceilings, roadways and floor slabs required for the installation
of electrical equipment shall be provided as required. The Contractor shall be held
responsible for any damage done in the process of providing such openings. The Contractor
shall patch and refinish the existing surface after making such required openings.
1.17 TESTING
A. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall energize, start-up and test operate all the
systems and equipment in the presence of the Engineer and Owner. All testing and
measuring instrwnents and equipment required to test each system shall be provided by the
Contractor. Any defects or variances from standard or specified conditions found during
these tests shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The following tests
shall be performed:
16010-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. The main service and all feeders and branch circuits shall be energized from the
normal power source. Ammeter and voltmeter readings shall be made and recorded
as follows:
a. Phase to phase and phase to ground voltage at each utility transformer
(primary and secondary), at the service connection to each building, at each
panel board, and at each 3 phase motor.
b. Line and neutral current on each phase at each utility transformer (incoming
and outgoing on each primary leg), each building secondary service, each
panelboard feeder, at primary and secondary of each dry type transformer
and each 3 phase motor.
c. These voltage and current readings shall be recorded, dated and signed by the
Contractor and furnished to the Owner and Engineer.
2. All circuit breakers shall be manually tripped and reset.
3. Insulation resistance test shall be made on each 208 Volt feeder conductor before and
after installation. Test shall be made with a 500 Volt DC megger. Readings shall be
recorded and test reports furnished to the Owner and Engineer.
4. All defective lamps found during test shall be immediately replaced.
5. All receptacles and light switches shall be tested to verify they are connected
properly.
6. All HV AC motors and controls shall be checked to verify correct connection and
operation.
7. All panel boards shall be inspected prior to installing covers to verify correct sizes
and color coding.
B. At completion of work, clean all fixtures and lenses.
C. Prior to the final test, continuity tests and insulation, resistance tests shall be performed to
assure there are no shorts or unintentional grounds in the entire electrical system. Test
readings shall be recorded and given to the Owner and Engineer.
1.18 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit all test reports as specified.
16010-7
60-954.00
B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer two weeks prior to commencement of all testing
except for megger tests.
C. The Contractor shall maintain a written record of all tests showing date, personnel making
test, equipment or materials tested, tests performed, and results.
1.19 PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide the following:
1. Qualified personnel to conduct all testing.
2. The services of the equipment manufacturer's representative to assist in testing their
equipment, when the service is specified.
3. The services of the equipment manufacturer's representative to assist the Contractor
in repair or trouble-shooting their equipment, in the event that said equipment fails
to pass all tests.
4. All labor, temporary power, lighting, and wiring, and all materials required for
testing.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all test equipment, which shall include the following:
1. Wet and dry bulb thermometer.
2. A 500-Volt megger by James G. Biddle Co., or Associated Research Inc., or equal.
3. Battery powered portable telephone sets and portable radios.
4. A Simpson Model 260- Volt Ohm Milliammeter, or equal.
5. A phase sequence and rotation meter, 60-300 Volts 30-60 Hz. by Knopp Inc., or
equal.
C. The Contractor shall furnish and use safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets,
protective screens and barriers, danger signs, etc., to adequately protect and warn all
personnel in the vicinity of the tests.
1.20 TOOLS
A. Use only tools designed for the particular operation. Tools shall be kept in good condition.
Wom or broken tools shall not be used.
16010-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Special tools and spare parts provided with any equipment shall be turned over to the
Owner's authorized personnel and the Contractor shall obtain signed and dated receipts for
them.
1.21 CLEAN-UP AND PAINTING
A. After all systems and equipment have been installed, the Contractor shall clean-up all
electrical equipment inside and outside the enclosures. All grease, dust, rust and chipped
plaster and concrete shall be removed from the installed equipment. Each piece of
equipment shall be thorougWy cleaned and left in brand new condition. Special attention
shall be given to the interior of panelboards and other similar equipment. All light fixture
lenses and reflectors shall be thorougWy cleaned. The project will not be accepted as being
finished until all such dirt and contamination has been removed. The Contractor shall
provide touch-up painting where finished surfaces have received minor scratches during
installation. Where electrical equipment with painted surfaces has been installed in fInished
areas, any such damage to the painted surfaces that cannot be corrected with minor touch-up
painting shall be refinished at the factory at no cost to the Owner. Equipment installed in
finished areas having noticeable damage to the finished surface will not be accepted.
1.22 FINAL INSPECTION
A. On completion of final. inspection the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner the Certificate
of Final Inspection from the local authority having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION
16010-9
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install raceways for electrical and control wiring as shown on the Drawings and
specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Size of raceways shall be not less than NEC requirements but in no case shall be less than
indicated on the Drawings. Drawings are diagrammatic and routing of conduits shall be
made by the Contractor to avoid interferences with other work.
B. Materials shall bear UL labels.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02221 - Trenching and Backfilling for Utilities Systems.
B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature: Submit for review, properly identified
manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving materials, finishes, dimensions, weights
and standards compliance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rigid Conduit:
1. Steel: Hot dipped zinc coated, galvanized, threaded rigid steel conduit conforming
to ANSI C80.1, Fed. Spec. WW-C-581 and UL Standard 6. Conduit shall be as
manufactured by Triangle, Republic Steel Corp. or Robroy.
16110-1
60-954.00
2. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Hot dipped zinc coated, galvanized, threaded
intermediate rigid steel conduit conforming to ANSI-C80.1 and UL Standard 1242
to be manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Corp or equal.
3. Plastic: Rigid, Schedule 40-90 degrees C, UL rated PVC plastic conforming to UL
651, Fed. Spec. W-C-I094 and NEMA TC-2. Fittings shall conform with UL 514
and NEMA TC-3. Plastic conduit and fittings shall be as manufactured by Carlon,
Sedco or Robroy.
4. Couplings, Elbows and Nipples for Rigid Steel Conduit: Couplings, elbows and
nipples shall be galvanized steel, threaded.
B Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
I. Zinc coated steel electrical metallic tubing conforming to ANSI C80.3, UL 797 and
Fed. Spec. WW-C-563. Tubing shall be as manufactured by Triangle, Republic Steel
Corp., Robroy or equal.
2. Couplings and connectors for EMT shall be steel compression type.
C. Flexible Metal Conduit:
I. Standard: Flexible zinc coated conduit conforming to UL I.
2. Liquid-Tight: Flexible zinc coated conduit with liquid-tight flexible plastic sheath,
conforming to UL 360 Standard. Conduit shall be as manufactured by Triangle,
Robroy, Anaconda or equal.
3. Fittings For Flexible Conduit: Fed. Spec. W-R-406B and UL 514, as manufactured
by Midwest or Robroy.
D. Fittings for Rigid Steel Conduit and EMT:
I. Conform to ANSI C80A.
2. Provide all required couplings, connectors and adapters of materials and finish
matching conduit or EMT.
3. Conduit Coating: (Metallic Conduit Underground) Koppers Bitumastic No. 50.
E. Straps and Fastenings for Conduit and EMT:
1. Straps: Formed zinc coated steel straps sized for conduits and tubing.
16110-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Fastenings: Zinc coated steel screws, bolts, toggles and expansion anchors as
required.
F. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:
1. Hot dip galvanized code gauge sheet steel, complete with knockouts, enclosures and
removable screw covers unless indicated as hinged. Units shall be as manufactured
by Square "D", Hoffman, Keystone.
2. Exterior locations shall have accepted weathertight gasketed covers and joints and
UL listed raintight.
3. Conform to UL 870.
G. Concrete Encased Non-Metallic Ducts (Duct Bank Ducts): Refer to Section 16405.
H. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings:
1. Shall have internal grounding means.
2. Shall maintain constant inside diameter in any position and shall provide a smooth
wireway for protection of wire insulation.
3. Shall be made watertight by a neoprene outer jacket that shall also protect the
grounding means and the attachment points of the hubs. Jacket shall be secured by
stainless steel straps.
4. Shall accommodate the following movements without collapsing or fracturing the
conduit and damaging the wires it contains:
a. Axial expansion or contraction of not less than 3/4 inches in either direction.
b. Angular misalignment of the axis of coupled conduit runs in any direction of
not less than 30 degrees.
c. Parallel misalignment of the axis of coupled conduit runs in any direction of
not less than 3/4 inch.
1. Pull Wires: 16 gauge galvanized steel wire or 200 pounds tensile strength plastic rope.
J. Fire Stopping Material/Sealing Compound:
1611 0-3
60-954.00
1. Material shall maintain its dimension and integrity while preventing the passage of
flame, smoke, water and gases under conditions of installation and use when exposed
to the ASTM E119 time-temperature curve for a time period equivalent to the rating
of the assembly penetrated. Cotton waste shall not ignite when placed in contact
with the non-fire side during the test. Fire- stopping material shall be
noncombustible as defmed by ASTM E136; and in addition for insulation materials,
melting point shall be a minimum of 1850 degrees F for 2-hour protection.
2. Seal for floor, exterior wall, and roof shall also be watertight.
3. Sleeves: Plastic or 16-gauge sheet steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide metal conduits, tubing, wireways, auxiliary gutters and electrical ducts where
indicated in accordance with NEC, subject to following provisions:
1. Route feeders, home runs and conduits where indicated, except that minor deviations
will be permitted.
2. Raceways shall be concealed in all finished areas. Raceways shall be exposed in
mechanical and electrical rooms only.
3. Conduits, tubing or raceways shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from
outlet to cabinet, junction box or pull box.
4. When field cutting conduit, thread and carefully ream or file conduit and raceway
ends to remove rough edges that might injure insulation of conductors. Cold
galvanize field made threads.
5. Changes in directions of raceway runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast
metal fittings. Field made bends and offsets shall be made with a hickey or conduit
bending machine specifically for size and type of conduit used. Minimum radius
shall be 6 times conduit diameter for rigid metal conduit. Form thin wall tubing
bends of proper radius. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be used. Use
factory formed fittings for surface raceways.
6. Conduit shall be sized as shown on the Drawings. Minimum size of conduit shall be
3/4 inch with the following exceptions:
1611 0-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Conduit down to light switch box shall be 1/2 inch.
b. Flexible conduit to a light fixture shall be 3/8 inch. (Maximum length six
feet).
c. Other sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings.
7. Take care to prevent lodgement of plaster, dirt, or trash in raceways, boxes, fittings
and equipment during course of construction. Clogged raceways shall be entirely
freed of obstructions or shall be replaced.
8. Conduits passing through walls shall be installed in sleeves.
9. Except where boxes, panels and other equipment have threaded openings, make
conduit connections as follows:
a. Double locknuts, one inside and one outside.
b. Provide malleable iron or steel bushing with Bakelite liner molded and
bonded into the bushing.
c. Place bushing on end of conduit in addition to locknuts.
B. Exposed Conduits: Install parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members or to
intersections of vertical planes and ceilings. Install horizontal raceways close to ceiling or
ceiling beams and above water piping and other piping wherever possible.
C. Location and Use of Each Type of Conduit:
1. Galvanized threaded rigid steel conduit shall be used:
a. Where installed exposed.
b. Where subject to abuse.
c. Wherever specifically called for on plan.
2. Intermediate threaded conduit may be used as an option, but the base bid shall be
based on Rigid Galvanized Steel, cost savings of this option shall be indicated as a
separate line item and so qualified.
3. Plastic conduit shall be used:
a. Where installed in concrete slabs or underground below slabs on grade, or in
poured concrete walls.
b. For underground work beyond the building.
16110-5
60-954.00
c. Trenches for direct buried PVC conduit shall be free of rocks and other
material that may damage the conduit.
4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be used indoors for all branch circuit wiring
installed in hung ceilings and partition walls only.
5. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connections to rotating or vibrating
equipment such as motors, transformers and devices on piping and ductwork.
Flexible conduit may be used for short connections to control devices, recessed
fixtures and similar items. Connection between structure and first point of
attachment to vibrating equipment shall be flexible. Provide not less than 24-inch
length except for recessed lighting fixtures.
6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for connections to rotating or
vibrating equipment in wet and damp locations and exterior locations. Install
liquid-tight flexible metal conduit so that liquids run off surface and drain away
from fittings. Provide not less than 24-inch length.
D. Installing Galvanized, Rigid or Intermediate Steel Conduit Below Slabs on Grade or in
Ground:
1. Coat underfloor and underground metal conduits including fittings with two coats of
specified conduit coatings.
2. Factory applied plastic resin or epoxy coated metal conduit and fittings may be used,
provided that abrasions to coating are repaired with compatible mastic.
E. Conduits Passing Through Waterproof Membranes:
1. Conduits Penetrating Waterproof Membranes Under Floor Slabs on Grade:
Coordinate installation of conduits prior to installation of waterproof membrane.
Membrane shall be sealed waterproof to conduits prior to pouring of slab over
membrane. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for conduits
penetrating floor slabs.
2. Conduits Penetrating Waterproof Membranes on Walls: Provide properly
coordinated Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for conduits in concrete forms.
Membrane shall be sealed waterproof to conduits.
3. Sealing of joints between conduits and pipe sleeves shall be as specified
hereinbefore.
16110-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Expansion Joints: Conduits crossing expansion joints in building structure shall be provided
with expansion fittings.
G. Fire Stopping: Provide UL listed mineral fiber packing and fire retardant sealer in joints
around conduits penetrating fire rated floors and fire rated walls.
H. Fastening Conduits to Boxes, Cabinets, Wireways and Gutters:
1. Fasten conduit to boxes, cabinets, wireways and gutters with two locknuts, one each
side and bushing on the inside as per NEC-373-6(c).
2. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be of threadless type reviewed for
conditions encountered.
1. Raceway Fastenings and Supports:
1. Supports:
a. Secure support and fasten in place raceways at intervals of not more than
eight feet, within 3 feet of any bend and every outlet or junction box. This
shall apply on vertical runs as well as horizontal runs.
b. Support individual horizontal conduits not larger than 1-1/2 inches in
diameter by means of one-hole pipe straps or individual pipe hangers.
c. Support individual horizontal conduits larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter
by individual pipe hangers.
d. Space conduits, installed against concrete surfaces, not less than 1/4 inch
away from the surfaces by clamp backs or other approved means.
e. In dry locations, spring steel fasteners, clips, or clamps specifically designed
for supporting exposed single conduits may be used in lieu of pipe straps or
pipe hangers.
f. Hanger rod used in connection with spring steel fasteners, clips, and clamps
shall be either not less than 1/4 inch in diameter galvanized steel rods or, if
concealed above a suspended ceiling, galvanized perforated steel strapping.
g. Support parallel conduits at the same elevations on trapeze-type multiple
conduit hangers or channel inserts. Secure each conduit to the pipe hanger
or channel insert member, by a V-bolt, one-hole strap, or other specifically
16110- 7
60-954.00
designed and approved fastener suitable for use with the pipe hangers or
channel inserts.
h. Installation of supporting devices shall be done in a neat and workmanlike
manner and care shall be taken that at no time shall any portion of the
building structure be overloaded. Should the building structure sustain
damage through carelessness or through failure of the Contractor to properly
support and install the electrical equipment, the Contractor shall bear all costs
involved in repairing or replacing such installation.
2. Fastenings:
a. To Wood: Wood screws, sheet metal screws or screw type nails.
b. To Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or expansion bolts as required. Holes not
used shall be filled with mortar.
c. To Concrete or Solid Brick Masonry: By expansion bolts. Holes drilled to
a depth of more than 1-112 inch in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth of
more than 3/4 inch in concrete joists shall avoid cutting the main reinforcing
bars. Holes not used shall be filled with mortar.
d. To Steel Work: Machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring- tension
clamps. Raceways or pipe straps shall not be welded to steel structures.
e. To Light Steel Construction Partitions: Sheet Metal screws. Bar hangers
may be attached with saddle ties of 16 gauge double strand zinc-coated steel
WIre.
f. Nail-type nylon anchors or threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and
provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in lieu of expansion bolts
or machine screws.
g. Threaded C-clamps shall not be used.
3. Suspended Ceiling Construction: Above ceiling branch circuit raceways shall be
supported independently of the ceiling support system. Wherever possible, they shall
be fastened to the underside of the slab above.
4. Surface Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: Use fastenings appropriate for surface.
J.
Empty Raceways for Telephone and Signal Systems: Where empty conduit or tubing is
indicated for wiring to be installed in future by utility company or by separate contract,
16110-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
install conduit or tubing in accordance with previous requirements therefor, together with the
following additional requirements:
1. Minimum 3/4 inch conduit or tubing size.
2. No length of run shall exceed 75 feet for 3/4 inch size and 150 feet for 1 inch or
larger sizes.
3. Raceways shall contain not more than two 90 degree bends or equivalent.
4. Additional pull or junction boxes shall be installed to comply with above limitations
whether or not indicated.
5. Inside radii of bends in conduits of 1 inch or larger shall be not less than 10 times
nominal conduit diameter.
6. Provide conduit with plaster covers or outlets as indicated on the Drawings.
7. Provide all required backboards and power outlets as indicated on the Drawings.
8. Pull Wires: Insert one pull wire, free of splices, in all telephone and signal system
raceways for future wiring. Allow 10 inches minimum slack at each end of pull wire
and securely caulk in place.
9. All public telephone outlet boxes shall be mounted at 54-inches above finished floor.
K. Sleeves:
1. Install where conduit passes through concrete floors, walls, ceilings or as indicated.
2. Provide 112-inch minimum clearance around conduit. Extend sleeve through full
thickness of concrete.
3. Secure sleeves to concrete forms to prevent displacement during placing of concrete.
4. Filling of Openings: Wherever slots, sleeves, or other openings are provided in
floors or walls for the passage of raceways, fill such opening, to prevent fire spread,
passage of water or spread of products of combustion, as follows:
a. Install the specified sealing compound.
16110-9
60-954.00
b. Where conduits passing through openings are exposed in finished rooms, use
filling material that matches, and is flush with, the adjoining finished floor,
ceiling or wall.
L. Raceway Seals:
1. Seal with the specified sealing compound raceways through which moisture may
contact energized live parts.
2. Underground Raceways Entering a Building: Seal the end entering the building with
the specified sealing compound to prevent the entrance of moisture or gasses.
M. Install sealing compound in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as
follows:
1. Opening or Empty Conduit: Install nonflammable material, to stop flow of sealant,
leaving not less than two-inch length of conduit to be filled with the sealant.
2. Conduit with Wires: Separate wires so that sealant can penetrate between wires, and
between wires and conduit.
END OF SECTION
16110-10
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16120
WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install wires, cables and connectors for electrical and control circuits as shown
on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Materials to bear UL labels.
1.03 SUBMIrr ALS
A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving
wire size, insulation type, rated voltage and temperature and NEC designation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.2.01 MATERIALS
A. Conductors (600 Volts and below):
1. Conductors shall be rated at 600 Volts and conform to NEMA WC-7 and IECA
S-61-402.
2. Conductors shall be composed of98 percent annealed copper only, stranded in size
#8 A WG and larger. Furnish conductor sizes for circuits as shown on drawings.
Minimum size shall be #12 A WG except as otherwise specified for control wiring.
3. All conductors shall be 600 Volt minimum, type TIllINffHWN, rated 90 degrees C.
maximum conductor temperature with polyvinyl chloride insulation, and shall
comply with UL standard for thermoplastic insulated wire.
4. All conductors shall be plainly marked on outer braid at least every two feet with
name of manufacturer, size and grade of insulation.
16120-1
60-954.00
5. Conductors shall be as manufactured by General Cable, Phelps Dodge or General
Electric Company.
B. Color code all service, feeder and branch circuit wire as follows:
1. 120/208 Volt System:
White - Neutral
Black - Phase A
Red - Phase B
Blue - Phase C
2. Bonding conductor - green.
3. Solid colored insulation shall be used on all conductors #10 A WG and smaller and
colored vinyl tape banding over black insulation at all accessible locations for #8
A WG and larger.
C. Control Wiring:
1. All control wiring conductors shall be 600 Volt type TW. Minimum size shall be
#14 AWG.
2. Conductors for control wiring shall be color coded, using different color coding than
for the power conductors specified above. Multiple-conductor control cables color
coding shall conform to NEMA WC 5 and ICEA.
D. Conductor Bundling Straps:
1. Form from self-extinguishing nylon having a temperature range of plus 30 degrees
F to plus 250 degrees F.
2. Equip each strap with a locking hub or head with a locking barb on one end and a
taper on the other end.
3. Make wire and cable ties for installation outdoors and in exposed locations of black,
ultraviolet resistant, nylon material.
E. Site Luminaire Lead Connector:
1. Ratings: 600 Volts, Amps. as indicated.
2. Conductors to be connected: Copper.
16120-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Jacket: Neoprene or rubber, waterproof without the use of additional taping or
sealing.
4. Type: Plug and receptacle, fused for phase conductors, unfused for the neutral
conductor.
5. Fuses: Buss KTK as manufactured by Bussman Manufacturing Division,
McGraw-Edison Company, St. Louis, Missouri 63107 or Economy MCL as
manufactured by Federal Pacific Electric Company, 150 Avenue L, Newark, New
Jersey 07101. Size as indicated.
6. Configuration: In-line or wye, as needed.
7. Size: As recommended by the manufacturer for the outside diameter of the
conductors being connected.
F. Connectors, Terminals and Splices:
1. Provide connectors, terminals and splices for all power and lighting circuits using
600- V olt wire and cable as follows:
a. Provide connectors, terminals, and splices, for all wire, cable, and equipment
and bus connections, that are designed and approved for the specific type and
size of conductors being connected.
b. Connectors and terminals shall be designed and UL approved for use with the
associated conductor material, and shall provide a uniform compression over
the entire contact surface. Solderless terminal lugs shall be used on all
stranded conductors.
c. Pressure-crimp type connectors, terminals and splices shall be applied with
a mechanical or hydraulic tool with proper size crimpling dies for making
each connection. The tool shall be of the type that will not release until the
correct pressure has been applied.
d. Splices and taps in wire #10 A WG, and smaller, shall be made with
approved, wire-nut-type, patent spring connectors. Connectors for outdoors
and interior open type buildings shall be of the silicone-filled type, U.L.-
Listed 486C and 486D as manufactured by King Technology, Inc. Use 3M
Scotchlocks or equal for indoor/interior locations.
e. Provide Burndy, type Y A V box, or equal, pressure-crimp ring-tongue
terminals for termination of No. 8 stranded cable.
16120-3
60-954.00
2. .
f. Provide Burndy type YSV box butt splices, or equal, for splicing #8 A WG
stranded cable.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
g. For termination and splicing of cable of #6 A WG or larger, provide
long-barrel, type Y A pressure-crimp lugs and type YS tubular pressure-crimp
splices by Burndy or equal. Use long-barrel pressure-crimp lugs wherever
space conditions permit. Use long-barrel pressure crimp splices exclusively
for splicing. Where space is inadequate for use of long-barrel lugs, provide
Burndy Type Y A-L, pressure-crimp, short barrel lugs, or equal. Use 2 hole
lugs on cable of 250 MCM and larger.
h. For tap off #8 A WG cable and larger, provide Burndy type KS Split-bolt
copper connectors (bugs), with Burndy type SC one-piece plastic split- bolt
covers, or equal. Other types of connectors for tapping may be used subject
to prior approval by the Engineer.
1. Use proper size bronze bolts, nuts, washers, and lock washers of Burndy
Durium alloy, or equal, for bolting cable terminations to equipment terminals
and bus bars.
J. Termination of solid wires of#lO A WG and smaller at terminal blocks shall
be made by forming the wires in a ring to fit under a screwhead, thus
requiring no terminal lug.
Provide terminals and splices and make connections ill control, alarm and
instrumentation system as follows:
a. For stranded wiring provide type TP, vinyl-insulated, ring-tongue terminals
by Burndy, or equal, for all terminations.
b. In locations where splicing of stranded wire is indicated or permitted by
specifications, use type SP vinyl-insulated, butt splices by Bumdy, or equal.
c. Wire terminals shall be installed with pressure tools equal to those
manufactured by American Pamcor, one of which is No. 59072, which
obliges the Contractor to apply the correct pressure required to produce a
tight connection before the tool is released. Use a pressure tool designed for
the specific size of connector and wire being terminated.
d. Taps in stranded wire may be made with 3M, Scotchlock wire nut, or equal,
except that the conductor being tapped shall not be cut, and shall be twisted
together with the tap conductor before wire nut application.
16120-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conductors shall not be pulled into conduit until all mechanical work is complete.
B. Pulling lubricants shall be of the type accepted for the particular cable insulation and as
recommended by the cable manufacturer.
C. Conductors in panelboards, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc., shall be formed, grouped and
taped to present a neat and orderly appearance.
D. Leading end of each conductor pulled shall be carefully examined for damage to jacket. If
damaged, cable shall be extended and further checked for damage with good cable only to
remam.
E. At each outlet, allow not less than 6 inches slack for connection to load.
F. Wire and Cable Supports:
1. Provide support for all conductors within vertical raceways at intervals as required
by, and using one or more of the support methods of, Article 300-19 of the NEC, and
as follows:
a. For insulating wedge supports as described in (b)(1) ofNEC Article 300-19,
and where indicated, provide OZ Company, or equal, Type R, plug-type,
canvas-bakelite cable supports of proper duct or conduit size, and number of
holes.
b. Cable ties, where required, shall be Panduit Corporation Pany- Ty, or equal,
nylon cable ties.
c. Except where otherwise indicated or specified, support for conductors shall
be as per paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(3) ofNEC Article 300-19.
2. Provide Kellems Grip supports for wire and cable where indicated.
3. Support wire and cable within all enclosures and at each connection so that any strain
on the wire or cable shall not be transmitted to the connection as follows:
a. With nylon cable ties.
16120-5
60-954.00
b. With insulated cable clamps sized per a.D. of cable or wire bundle and
bolted to equipment enclosure.
c. With Kellems grips where indicated.
G. Taping: Tape all connections in 600-Volt wire and cable as follows:
1. In dry locations, tape all connections, splices, taps and exposed barrels of terminal
lugs with half-lapped layers of 3M Scotch 33, vinyl plastic tape, or equal, applied to
a thickness equal to the conductor insulation.
2. In damp or wet locations, tape connections per paragraph G.l above, and in addition,
apply at least two half-lapped layers of 3M Scotch 88 vinyl plastic tape over the first
layers of tape, and water proof the taped connection with a final overall application
of an electrical varnish or sealer.
3. Insulated splices and wire-nut connections, in dry locations, and where not subject
to vibration, need not be taped.
H. Wire and Cable Marking:
1. Identify each phase of all three phase feeder conductors with 3M Scotch 35, or equal,
vinyl plastic marking tape. Use color groups, with three distinct colors in each
group, for phase identification of feeders of different system voltage as per 2.02B
above.
2. All feeders and branch circuit conductors, and all control, alarm and instrumentation
wires, shall be identified at all terminations, junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes
and manholes as follows:
a. Use Brady Company, or equal, self-sticking vinyl cloth, wire markers for all
wire and cable identification.
b. Except as otherwise indicated, identify each feeder with name of panelboard
it feeds.
c. Branch circuit conductors from panel boards shall be each marked with
panelboard name, and circuit number.
d. Identify all conductors of control, alarm and instrumentation systems with
wire numbers or terminal letters as indicated on the Drawings. Where
markings are not indicated, the Contractor shall assign his own markings, and
indicate them on the "Record Drawings" set of construction drawings.
16120-6
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Installation of 600- V olt Wire and Cable:
1. Install wire and cable in conduits, ducts, wireways, cable trays and other enclosures
as indicated. Install an equipment grounding conductor in all conduit runs.
2. Except as otherwise indicated or specified, all wire and cable shall be installed in
continuous runs between terminal points without splicing.
3. Make splices and taps only in junction boxes, from terminals in terminal boxes, in
manholes, in handholes and other accessible enclosures.
4. Do not splice wire and cable in ducts or conduits.
5. Except as otherwise indicated, or specified, do not splice or tap control, alarm or
instrumentation wiring in underground manholes and handholes.
6. When pulling wire or cable, do not subject the wire or cable to a tension greater than
50 percent of the yield strength of the conductor. Pulling lugs shall be attached to the
conductor with a sleeve or grip over the cable sheath to prevent slipping the
insulation.
7. Use a UL approved lubricant to decrease friction when pulling cable in ducts and
conduits.
8. Do not subject cable to a bending radius less than 8 times the cable outside diameter
during or after installation.
9. In wet locations, make splices first as for dry locations, then encapsulate them in an
epoxy resin sealing and potting compound. Encapsulation of compression sleeve
splices shall be with preformed molds.
10. Pulling of wires and cable into conduits shall be done in a manner which will in no
way injure the insulation.
11. All wires in conduit shall be continuous between pull points without splices. No
joints or splices in the conductors shall be permitted except at outlet or accessible
junction boxes.
12. Sufficient lengths of wire shall be left at pull boxes for connecting to equipment and
apparatus without straining.
16120-7
60-954.00
13. All wires passing through pull boxes shall have enough slack in each box so they
may be pulled out of the box a distance of no less than 6 inches across the entire
length of the box.
14. Pull together cables to be installed in a single conduit.
1. Wire Sizes: Drawings indicate wire and conduit sizes for typical equipment. If sizes shown
on the Drawings are not appropriate for the equipment chosen by the Contractor, wires and
conduit shall be sized for the proper current-carrying capacity in accordance with the NEC,
at no extra cost to the Owner.
K. Terminations:
1. Terminate solid conductors on screw terminals or mechanical connectors furnished
on devices and equipment.
2. Terminate stranded conductors on mechanical connectors furnished on equipment.
Where no connectors are included, provide suitable mechanical connectors.
3. Termination of stranded conductors on screw terminals will not be permitted.
Provide suitable size compression or mechanical type connector with spade tongue.
3.02 TESTING
A. Continuity tests and insulation-resistance tests shall be performed to assure there are no
shorts or unintentional grounds. The insulation resistance shall be measured with a 500- Volt
DC megger (conductor to conductor and conductor to ground) and should read greater than
one megohm. Test readings shall be recorded and a certified copy given to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
16120-8
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16130
OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide outlet, pull and junction boxes as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Materials shall bear UL labels.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature, and shop drawings giving
materials, finishes, accessories and installation directions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Outlet Boxes:
1. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel and shall conform to Federal Specifications
WC-583 and ANSI-C33.65.
2. Outlet boxes for switches and receptacles in finished walls shall be one piece gang
boxes, with separators if required, and shall have comers with rectangular opening
of proper size and shape. Minimum box size: 4 inch x 4 inch x 1-1/2 inch, unless
otherwise noted on Drawings and/or as required.
3. Outlet boxes for all other devices shall be of suitable type and size in accordance
with recommendations of manufacturer of equipment.
4. All outlet boxes shall be drip proofwith screw attached covers. Each box shall have
a turned-in lip. Lip shall be drilled and tapped for 1/8 inch or 3/16 inch round head
screws, symmetrically placed.
5. Lighting fixture outlet boxes, where used, shall be square or octagonal.
16130-1
60-954.00
6. Exterior outlet boxes and boxes for exposed conduit runs shall be cast, rust resisting
metal with full threaded hubs, with rubber gasket and screw type covers.
7. Outlet boxes shall be as manufactured by National, Steel City, Appleton or
equivalent.
B. Pull and Junction Boxes:
1. Pull and Junction Boxes shall conform to Federal Specifications WJ-800 and shall
be of all steel construction, seam welded at joints and hot dip galvanized after
fabrication. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A386.
2. All boxes shall be drip proof with screw attached covers. Each box shall have a
turned-in lip which shall be welded at joint to develop full strength. Lip shall be
drilled and tapped for 1/8 inch or 3/16 inch round head screws, symmetrically placed.
To provide adequate length of thread, nuts shall be tack welded on inside oflip, or
lip shall be made double thickness. Cover shall be drilled to match.
3. Pull and junction boxes shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand moderate twisting
strains. Steel boxes of 100 cubic inches or less shall be of No. 14 gauge steel;
between 101 and 8500 cubic inches shall be No. 12 steel; large boxes shall be No.
10 gauge steel. Barriers and angles shall be supplied as required.
4. Outdoor pull and junction boxes shall be cast steel and gasketed with screw cover
mounting on outward-turned flanges of boxes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes:
1. Boxes for surface mounted ceiling and interior bracket lighting fixtures shall have
fixture studs. Studs shall be in center boxes and strongly anchored.
2. Maximum number of conductors in a box shall comply with NEC - Table 370- 6(a).
3. Boxes and supports shall be fastened as follows:
a. To concrete or brick with bolts and expansion shields.
b. To hollow masonry with toggle bolts.
c. To steel work with machine screws or welded studs.
16130-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
All outlet, pull and junction boxes shall be of adequate size to accommodate
installation of conductors without excessive bending of conductors which would
damage insulation.
Outlet, pull and junction boxes shall be surface or flush mounted as required.
Pull and junction boxes shall be provided at such location as required to reduce
length of cable pull or reduce number of elbows between outlets.
Provide blank covers for all outlet boxes when devices or wiring has been removed
or not installed.
Install boxes for light switches located near doors on the lock side, even where the
symbols are indicated on the hinge sides.
Surface Mounted: Install cast-iron alloy hub-type outlet boxes and conduit bodies
up to eight feet above interior floors.
Wet Locations: Install cast-iron alloy hub-type outlet boxes and conduit bodies with
gaskets.
Unless otherwise indicated, flush mount outlet boxes with the front edges of the
boxes or plaster covers attached thereto flush with the finished wall or ceiling.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide boxes in plastered walls and ceilings with plaster
rings. Do not install plaster rings until the finished plaster line is determined for the
particular location.
The indicated mounting height ofa wall-mounted outlet box means the height from
the finished floor to the horizontal centerline of the cover plate.
END OF SECTION
16130-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16140
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide switches and receptacles as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature giving material, finishes,
accessories and installation directions where required.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. Materials shall bear UL labels.
B. All wiring devices shall be installed In strict accordance with manufacturer
recommendations.
C. All wiring devices shall conform to NEMA WD-l, UL 20 and UL 498.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wall switches shall be of the quiet type and of the totally enclosed tumbler type for
non-public areas and of the lock type for public areas, with bodies of phenolic compound.
Wiring terminals shall be of the screw type or of the solderless pressure type having suitable
conductor-release arrangement. No more than one switch shall be installed in a single-gang
position. Switches shall be single pole, double pole, three way and four way rated 20-Amp.
l20-Volt or 277 Volt for use on alternating current only. Switches shall conform to Federal
Specifications WS-5896E.
B. Receptacles shall be 20 Amp., 125 Volt, AC, 2-pole, 3-wire, single or duplex, U- slotted
grounding type. Bodies of 20 Amp. receptacles shall be of phenolic compound supported
by a mounting yoke having plaster ears. Receptacles shall conform to Federal Specifications
WC-596D.
16140-1
60-954.00
C. Locking-type receptacles shall be of the type as shown on the Drawings and shall conform
to NEMA WD 5, "Specific-purpose wiring devices"; one plug shall be furnished with each
locking receptacle.
D. Receptacles rated larger than 20 Amp. shall be the type, rating, and number of poles
indicated on the Drawings or as required for the intended use and shall conform to Federal
Specifications WC-596 and NEMA WD-l.
E. Receptacles for clock outlets shall be recessed and provided with hanger hooks.
G. Dimmers for incandescent lighting, when not remote controlled, shall be solid state and as
manufactured by Lutron "Specifier Series" or equivalent. Dimmers shall be rated at 1200
watts, with a slide type handle finished in white.
H. Cover plates shall conform to Federal Specifications WP-455, and shall be stainless steel
Type 302, satin finish. US32D. Receptacles installed in public areas shall be provided with
lockable key type cover plates, Catalog No. WPH-8L for duplex convenience receptacles,
Catalog No. WP-26L for GFIC receptacles as manufactured by Sierra Electric.
I. All switches and receptacles shall be white.
J. Duplex Receptacles With Ground Fault Interrupter shall be an integral unit suitable for
mounting in a standard outlet box and conform to UL 943.
1. Ground fault interrupter, shallbe hospital grade and consist of a differential current
transformer, solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. It shall be
rated for operation on a 60 Hz., 120 Volt, 20 Amp. branch circuit. Device shall have
nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of five milliamperes and shall function
to interrupt the current supply for any value of ground leakage current above five
milliamperes on the load side of the device. Device shall have. a minimum nominal
tripping time of 1/30th of a second.
2. Receptacle shall be rated at 20 Amps., 125 Volts for indoor use and shall be the
standard 2-pole, 3-wire grounding type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights:
1. Duplex Receptacles: 18 inches AFF to centerline unless otherwise indicated.
16140-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Lighting Switches: 4'-0" AFF to centerline unless otherwise indicated.
3. Dimmers: 3'-5" AFF to centerline unless otherwise noted, below light switches.
4. Special Purpose Receptacles: 18 inches AFF to centerline unless otherwise noted.
5. Telephone Outlets: 18 inches AFF or 54 inches AFF to centerline, as indicated on
symbol legend and drawings, unless otherwise noted.
6. Clock Receptacles: 7'-0" AFF to centerline unless otherwise noted.
7. Prior to rough-in of outlet boxes and conduit, locations of wiring devices shall be
checked with architectural drawings for door swings and furniture details. Duplex
receptacles in finished areas shall be mounted vertically. Particular attention shall
be given to changes authorized by change order.
B. Dimmers:
1. Dimmers shall be installed in a two-gang box 2-1/2 inches deep. Two side-by- side
dimmers shall be installed in a five gang box. Refer to factory instructions for proper
installation. In no case shall the dimmer rating be less than its load.
2. Where a three-way dimmer.. is shown on Drawings, Contractor shall provide a
dimmer and a three way switch. Three way switch shallbe ganged at 48 inches with
other switches.
C. Boxes mounted back to back will not be permitted.
D. Receptacles, switches and other devices shall be ganged and provided with a single
multi-gang cover plate.
E. Receptacles in outdoor locations shall be installed in exposed FS non-metallic outlet boxes
with gasketed weatherproof non-metallic coverplates or lockable key type cover plates.
F. Stainless steel cover plates shall be installed with tamper proof screws.
END OF SECTION
16140-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16150
MOTOR AUXILIARIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide motor disconnect switches, controllers and other motor auxiliaries as indicated on
the Drawings and specified herein.
B. The horsepower ratings indicated on the Drawings are shown for the benefit of the
Contractor and do not limit equipment size.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials shall bear UL labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Motors:
1. Each motor shall be provided with a disconnecting means meeting the requirements
of NEC Article 430, Part H. For single-phase fractional horsepower motors, a
single-or double-pole toggle switch, rated for alternating current will be acceptable
provided the ampere rating of the switch is at least 125 percent of the motor rating.
Enclosed safety switches shall be horsepower rated. Switches shall be the
quick-break type, and shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
2. Each motor shall be provided with a suitable controller and devices that will perform
the functions as required for the respective motors. Automatic control devices such
as thermostats, float or pressure switches may directly control the starting and
stopping of motors up to 1/4 horsepower, provided the devices used are designed for
the purpose and have an adequate horsepower rating. When the automatic control
device does not have such a rating, a magnetic starter shall be used, with the
automatic control device activating the pilot-control circuit. Manual controllers for
motors larger than 1/4 horsepower shall be specifically designed for the purpose and
shall have a horsepower rating equal to the motor involved.
16150-1
60-954.00
3. When combination manual-and-automatic control is specified, and the automatic
control device operates the motor directly, a double-throw, 3- position tumbler or
rotary switch shall be provided for the manual control. When the automatic control
device actuates the pilot-control circuit of a magnetic starter, the latter shall be
provided with a 3-position selector switch marked "manual-off-automatic".
Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only the normal automatic
regulatory control devices will be by- passed when the switch is in the "manual"
position. All safety control devices such as a low or high pressure cutout,
high-temperature cutout, and motor overload protective devices shall be connected
in the motor control circuit in both the "manual" and the "automatic" positions of the
selector switch.
4. All motor-control circuits shall operate at 120 Volt. Control circuitry power shall be
obtained from the load side of the motor-disconnect means from a 2- wire, 120 Volt
grounded circuit obtaining its source from the same circuit feeding the motor. If the
motor circuit is more than 120 Volt to ground, the control circuit shall be energized
from a 2-winding transformer having its 120 Volt secondary winding grounded.
Overcurrent protection shall be provided in the ungrounded secondary conductor
only and shall be properly sized for the load.
5. Each motor of 1/8 horsepower or larger shall be provided with thermal- overload
protection. The overload-protection device shall be provided either integral with the
motor or controller or mounted in a separate enclosure. Unless otherwise specified,
the protective device shall be of the manual-reset type. All3-phase motor controllers
shall provide overload protection and a set of contacts in each phase. The
overload-relay heater elements shall be the size recommended by the manufacturer
for the full-load rated current of the motor and the rating shall be based on the actual
motor nameplate full-load current.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Motor Connections: All motors shall be connected to the conduit system by means of a short
section (24 inches minimum) of flexible metal conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
B. The Contractor shall check direction of rotation of all motors and reverse connections if
necessary .
END OF SECTION
16150-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16160
PANELBOARDS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide panel boards as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Materials shall bear UL labels.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
- A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving
panelboard type, phase, voltage, ampacity, mounting, dimensions, interrupting rating and
data on all included circuit breakers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Square D or Westinghouse.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Panelboards shall be dead front, safety type construction and shall conform to Federal
Specification WP-115, NEMA PB 1, ANSI C33.38 and UL 67.
B. Solderless lugs, or connections, in the correct number and sizes for conductors, shall be
provided on mains, on the load side of each branch circuit and on neutral bars.
C. All buses shall be 98 percent copper and sized as indicated on the Drawings.
D. The enclosure shall be "bonderized" or equal and primed and finished inside and outside to
resist rusting and corrosion and to present a pleasing appearance.
E. All panelboard cabinets shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet steel and be
completely galvanized for corrosion protection.
16160-1
60-954.00
F. All panelboards shall have flush chromium plated combination type cylinder lock and latch.
Panels shall be keyed alike.
G. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps and be complete with door, surface or
flush mounted, as indicated on Drawings.
H. Panelboards cabinets, interior and fronts shall be finished with manufacturer's standard gray.
Panel board enclosures shall be NEMA 1. f
I. Panel boards shall be circuit breaker type as scheduled on Drawings and supplied with copper
buses including neutral bus and ground bus with 1/8 inch or larger terminal screws and with
neutral terminals stamped with number corresponding to branch circuit numbers.
J. Panelboard circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type with quick make, quick break mechanism,
and have interrupting capacity as shown on the Drawings. Each circuit breaker shall have
a thermal magnetic trip device with trip ratings as shown on Drawings.
K. Any two single pole circuit breakers shall be replaceable by one two pole circuit breaker and
any three single pole breakers shall be replaceable by a three pole circuit breaker. Handle
ties will not be accepted.
L. All panels shall have a circuit directory card mounted on the frame with plastic cover
mounted on the inside of the door and all directory cards shall be filled in by the Contractor,
using a typewriter, and indicating areas and/or devices served by each circuit.
M. Branch circuit breakers minimum interrupting ratings shall be 14,000 Amp. for 277 Volts
systems and 10,000 Amp. for 120 Volt systems.
N. Panelboards for lighting and receptacles shall be a minimum of20 inches wide, 5-3/4 inches
deep. Side gutters shall be 4 inches minimum width and top and bottom gutters shall be 6
inches minimum height, to adequately accommodate conduit, wires and cables entering and
leaving.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Panelboards shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. No panel shall be installed that has a capacity to receive more than 42 overcurrent devices.
If design conditions dictate the use of more than 42 overcurrent devices, two or more
panelboards shall be installed.
16160-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Panelboards shall not exceed 78 inches in length and shall be so mounted that the height
from the floor to the top operating handle is not greater than 6 feet.
D. Numbering on panelboard circuits shall be by spaces and not be by breaker units.
Panelboards with spaces in two columns shall have odd-numbered spaces on the left and
even-numbered spaces on the right. Numbering shall be from top to bottom and shall be
permanently attached.
E. Panelboard cabinets shall be provided with suitable lugs for mounting, and be provided with
dead-front shields arranged to provide access to wiring gutters with front removed.
F. Panelboards shall be mounted where shown on Drawings.
G. Provide black and white laminated plastic nameplate for each panelboard.
H. Provide a typewritten directory for each panelboard. Locate directory on inside of cover.
I. Neatly route, harness and support conductors in gutters, wiring spaces and compartments.
Conductor bending radius shall not be less than the minimum recommended by the
conductor manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
16160-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16170
DISCONNECTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide disconnect switches as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Materials shall bear UL labels.
1.03 SUBMIIT ALS
A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's catalog sheets giving type, ampacity,
number of poles, HP rating, fusing, voltage and type enclosure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Safety switches shall conform to Fed. Spec. W-S-865, NEMA KSl and ANSI C33.64, and
shall be of heavy duty type, enclosed, of quick-make, quick-break construction. Rating shall
be as indicated on Drawings. All switches shall be horsepower rated, UL listed and so
labeled.
B. Safety switch operating handle shall be of the insulated, box mounted type that directly
drives the switch mechanism and shall be suitable for padlocking in OFF position.
C. Defeatable, front accessible, "coin-proof' interlocks shall be provided to prevent opening of
cover when switch is in ON position, and prevent turning switch ON when door is open.
Securely fastened metallic nameplate shall include highly visible "ON- OFF" indication.
D. Motor Disconnect Means: Provide each motor with a local disconnect switch whether shown
on the Drawings or not.
E. Provide fuses for all disconnect switches as indicated. Fuses shall be dual element type as
specified in Section 16181.
16170-1
60-954.00
F. Safety switch enclosure shall be NEMA I for indoor and NEMA 4X reinforced fiberglass
for outdoor use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All switches shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer recommendations,
where shown on Drawings and in compliance with NEC.
B. Safety switches indoors shall be installed with top 5 feet 6 inches above floor, shall be rigidly
and securely attached to building and shall not depend upon conduit for support.
C. Each switch shall be labeled with the name of the equipment is serves.
D. Switches which are specified to contain class RK5 fuses shall be furnished with rejection
type fuse clips.
END OF SECTION
16170-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16180
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide overcurrent protection devices as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Materials shall bear UL labels.
1.03 SUBMIrr ALS
A. Submit for review properly identified manufacturer's literature giving materials, finishes,
accessories and installation directions where required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Circuit Breakers:
1. Circuit breakers shall conform to Fed. Spec. WC-375, UL 489 and NEMA ABl, and
shall be a circuit interrupting device which shall operate both manually, for normal
switching functions, and automatically under overload and short circuit conditions.
It shall provide circuit and self protection when applied within its ratings.
2. Provide at voltage, phase, number of poles and amps indicated, with symmetrical
amperes interrupting rating equal to or larger than that shown on Drawings or
specified. Control and signaling function may be incorporated by use of accessories.
3. Operating mechanism shall be entirely trip-free so that contacts cannot be held close
against an abnormal over-current or short circuit condition.
4. Operating handle of circuit breaker shall open and close all poles of a multi- pole
breaker simultaneously. These breakers shall meet applicable NEMA AB-l and UL
specifications.
16180-1
60-954.00
5. Each circuit breaker shall have a trip unit to provide overload and short circuit
protection. Trip element shall operate a common trip bar which shall open all poles
in case of an overload or short circuit through anyone pole. Two-pole and three-pole
circuit breakers shall have a common trip bar. Handle ties will not be accepted.
6. Contacts shall be of non-welding silver alloy and ampere rating shall be clearly
visible.
7. Circuit breakers for use in switchboards, lighting and power panel boards, distribution
panel boards and individually enclosed shall be 1, 2, or 3 poles as indicated on
Drawings.
B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Molded case circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type, mounted in distribution, lighting
and power panelboards and individually enclosed units.
2. Molded case circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break action.
3. Molded case circuit breakers for panelboards shall have the following minimum
ampere interrupting capacities (RMS):
a.
b.
120 Volts
240 Volts
- 10,000 AlC for branch circuit breakers
- 100,000 AlC for the main circuit breakers
4. Each molded case circuit breaker shall have a thermal magnetic trip device with trip
ratings as shown on Drawings.
C. Separately enclosed circuit breakers shall be of the handle through cover type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Circuit breakers shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Separately enclosed circuit breakers shall be in NEMA 1 enclosures when installed indoors,
and NEMA 4X reinforced fiberglass enclosures when installed outdoors.
C. Separately enclosed circuit breakers shall be identified with a black and white phenolic
nameplate with 1/2 inch high letters.
16180-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. All overcurrent protective devices in the electrical power distribution system shall be
selectively coordinated to avoid tripping of devices other than those which would isolate a
fault within the system.
END OF SECTION
16180-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16181
FUSES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide fuses as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. Fuses shall bear UL labels.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review properly identified manufacturer's literature for each type of fuse
specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fuses shall conform to Fed. Spec. WF-791, NEMA FU-l and ANSI C33.42.
B. Fuses shall have a label on the barrel giving the manufacturer's name, UL classification,
current and voltage ratings and interrupting capacity.
C. Fuses for motor circuits shall be UL Class RK-5.
D. Dual element fuses shall have low resistance and relatively low operating temperatures.
Fuses shall be provided with thermal protection against damage from poor contact. Fuse
shall open when temperature at thermal cutout reaches 280 degrees F, preventing damage to
clips and switches before fuse opens.
E. Dual element fuses shall combine high interrupting capacity (100,000 Amp. RMS
symmetrical) with time delay, holding 500 percent load for a minimum often seconds.
F. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Bussman or equivalent.
16181-1
60-954.00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fuses shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install fuse labels facing out, such that the label is readable.
C. Fuse shall be installed firmly and completely covered by its fuse clip.
D. Provide fuses for all fusible equipment regardless of which trade has furnished such
equipment.
E. The time-current characteristic and ratings shall be such that positive selective coordination
is assured.
F. Fuses 601 amperes and larger, shall conform to UL Class L standard and be Bussman "Hi
Cap" or equivalent.
G. Fuses 600 amperes and lower, where applied to general feeder and branch circuit protection,
shall conform to UL Class RK-5 standards and be Bussman "Low Peak" or equivalent.
H. Individual motor circuit fuses shall be sized at approximately 150 percent of motor full load
current, actual fuse rating shall be as per equipment manufacturer recommendations.
I. Fuses, where required for circuit breaker back-up protection, shall conform to UL Class R
K-I standards and be Bussman "Limitron" or equivalent.
J. Provide 10 percent spares (minimum of three) of each size and type of fuse furnished,
including fuses for starters and lighting contactors control voltage. Spare fuses shall be
placed in a wall-mounted cabinet which shall be located in the main electrical room.
END OF SECTION
16181-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16190
EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide metal framing support system for installation of surface mounted equipment.
B. Provide all hangers, supports and braces, and metal framings where required for the proper
installation of conduits, cable trays, panelboards, starting and control equipment as well as
all other electrical equipment installed under this Contract.
C. Properly support cabinets, outlet and pullboxes in an approved manner, and independent of
the conduits.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving
materials, finishes, accessories and installation directions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Conduit and Equipment Supports:
1. Provide material for conduit and equipment supports in conformance with the
following referenced standards:
a. ASTM A123
b. ASTM A307
c. ASTMA611
d. ASTM A668
2. Provide galvanized steel conduit clamps, sized for the specific conduit size, to
support all exposed metallic conduit. Provide non-magnetic clamps to support all
non-magnetic conduits.
16190-1
60-954.00
3. Where not buried underground, embedded in concrete or masonry, or where
otherwise indicated, all conduits shall be supported by supports fabricated of
galvanized structural steel or galvanized framing members equal of "Unistrut"
P-3000 series. Provide all necessary rods, anchors, inserts, clamps, spacers, shims,
bolts and miscellaneous steel as required for each support.
4. In outdoor areas and in damp interior or corrosive areas, paint all field cuts in
galvanized support members with one coat of Rustoleum, or equal, aluminum paint.
5. Where exposed to the weather or high humidity, use nuts, bolts, washers, shims, and
other small materials of noncorrosible metal or galvanized or cadmium-plated.
6. Conduit clamps, all fittings and light fixtures where required to be fastened to
masonry, cast and pre-cast concrete, shall be fastened by means of bolts and
expansion shields in holes made by a rotary drill.
7. Provide conduit support, at spaced intervals, as required by the NEC for the type of
conduit being installed, but not more than eight feet on center.
8. Construct all supports with sufficient rigidity to hold all mounted equipment and
material in permanent and neat alignment.
9. Construct equipment supports so as to provide 1/4 inch space between equipment
housings and walls upon which they are mounted.
10. Provide special conduit and equipment supports as indicated.
B. Metal Framing (Continuous Slot Metal Channel System):
1. Standard: Conform to NEMA ML 1.
2. Configuration: Single channel, or two single channels welded together, as indicated,
with continuous 7/8 inch slot and to accept spring-held steel nuts.
3. Single Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches, 12 gauge.
4. Double Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inches by 3-1/4 inches, 12 gauge.
5. General Fittings Dimensions for Flat, Angular and U shapes: 1/4 inch thick by 1-5/8
inches wide unless otherwise indicated.
16190-2
60-954.00
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Channel, Pipe Clamps and General Fittings Finish: Hot dip galvanized after
fabrication conforming to ASTM A386 or A153, as applicable. Minimwn weight of
coating shall be 2.0 ounces per square foot.
7. Nuts, Bolts and Screws Finish: Electro-galvanized.
C. Threaded Hanger Rods:
1. Hot rolled steel conforming to ASTM A575 and ASTM A576.
2. Not less than 3/8 inch diameter, threaded either full length or for a sufficient distance
at each end to permit at least 1-1/2 inches of adjustment.
3. Finish of Rods and Couplings: Electroplated.
4. Carrying Capacities:
Nominal Rod
Diameter in
Inches
Maximwn Safe Load in
Pounds, at Rod Temperature
of 650 Degrees F
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
610
1130
1810
2710
D. Trapeze-Type Multiple Conduit Hangers:
1. Fabricate of two or more galvanized steel hanger rods, a steel horizontal member and
V-bolts, clamps, and other attachments necessary for securing hanger rods and
conduits.
2. Horizontal Member: Continuous slot metal channel single or double, as indicated or
as required.
3. Design:
a. Capable of supporting a load equal to the sum of the weights of the conduits
and wires, the weight of the hanger itself, plus 200 pounds.
b. Maximwn deflection: 1/240 of the span between supports.
E. Continuous and Spot Concrete Inserts:
16190-3
60-954.00
1. Standards: Conform to NEMA ML1.
2. Continuous Insert:
a. Configuration and Dimensions: Single channel, 1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches,
12 gauge with continuous 7/8 inch slot to accept springheld steel nuts and
with concrete anchors.
b. Loading: 2000 pounds per foot. Minimum safety factor 3.
c. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication ASTM A386 or A153 as
applicable. Minimum weight of coating shall be 2.0 ounces per square foot.
3. Spot Insert:
a. Configuration and Dimensions: Deep drawn metal cup 1-5/8 inches high by
3-3/4 inches maximum width, 12 gauge with knockout openings to accept
either square or rectangular nuts.
b. Loading: 800 pounds with a minimum safety factor of 3.
c. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
4. Concrete inserts shall be provided with the channel interior filled with expanded
polystyrene or covered by other approved means to prevent seepage of concrete into
the channel interior during placing of concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install items rigid, secure, plumb, level and in true alignment with related and adjoining
work. Do not weld electrical materials for attachment or support.
B. Provide anchor bolts and anchorage items as needed for a rigid support, and field check to
ensure proper alignment and location. Provide templates, layout drawings, and supervision
at the job site to ensure correct placing of anchorage items in concrete. Check embedded
items for correctness of location and detail before concrete is placed.
C. Install supporting members, fastenings, framing, hangers, bracing, brackets, straps, bolts and
angles, as needed to connect rigidly to the work.
16190-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Control erection tolerances so as not to impair the strength, safety, serviceability, or
appearance of the installations. Determine exact location of conduits. Route conduit parallel
to building grid lines.
E. Hanger rods shall be fastened to concrete inserts set flush with surface. Install a reinforcing
rod through the opening provided in the concrete inserts.
F. Inserts:
1. Channel Inserts: Install embedded channel inserts with the slotted face flush with the
finished concrete surface.
2. Spot Inserts:
a. Install with the insert face flush with the finished concrete surface, firmly
embedded, with no evidence of movement.
b. Test overheadiiiserts selected by the Engineer, by suspension of 800 pounds
of weight from the insert. If there is evidence of failure, replace the inserts
in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
16190-5
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide a grounding system complete as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials shall bear UL label.
B. Grounding system shall conform to ANSI C33.8, IEEE-81, IEEE-142.
C. The electrical system and equipment shall be grounded in accordance with the requirements
of the National Electrical Code and as specified.
D. Grounding system installation shall conform to NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
E. Grounding system shall be installed as shown on Drawings.
F. Install in all conduit runs an insulated, green, equipment grounding conductor and bond in
accordance with the NEC.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving
materials, finishes, accessories, dimensioned drawings and installation directions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The grounding conductor shall be an insulated copper wire of size indicated. Where not
indicated, the conductor shall be in accordance with the requirements of the National
Electrical Code except that minimum size shall be No. 12. Inaccessible connections shall
be made with the exothermic welding process using equipment manufactured by Bumdy or
Erico Products. Accessible connections shall be made with multiple bolt silicon bronze
connectors specifically designed and approved for the connection to be made. Connectors
16450-1
60-954.00
shall be as manufactured by Burndy or O.Z. Gedney Electric. Grounding jumpers shall be
provided across metal parts which are separated by non-conducting materials or joined so
that there is a high resistance at the joints. Grounding cable shall not be buried directly in
concrete, but a conduit sleeve shall be provided where cable passes through concrete.
Grounding cable buried in earth shall be tinned. Refer to electrical drawings for additional
grounding.
B. Grounding Source:
1. The ground source shall consist of ground rods as shown on Drawings, and a
connection to the metal cold water main.
2. Maximum resistance to ground shall be limited to 25 Ohms. Two additional ground
rods shall be driven if required to maintain this level. Maximum ground resistance
to each of individual rods shall be 25 Ohms.
C. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel not less than 3/4 inch in diameter, 10 feet long, driven full
length into the earth. Maximum ground resistance shall not exceed 25 Ohms under normal
dry conditions.
D. Cold Water Pipe:
1. External building ground shall be connected to the building steel and shall also be
grounded to main metal cold water pipe at point of entrance of the metallic water
service with copper conductor in conduit.
2. Connection to cold water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp.
3. If flanged pipes are encountered, connections shall be made with the lug bolted to the
street side of the flange connections.
F. Parts To Be Grounded: Panelboard frames, fittings, fixtures and devices, cable sheaths,
boxes and raceways, motor frames, street lighting standards, non-current carrying parts of
appliances and devices, and all other parts and equipment as required by NEC. Neutral wire
shall never be used as grounding means.
G. Conductor: All grounding cable shall be green insulated copper stranded cable, soft drawn
or annealed, sized as indicated on Drawings.
16450-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All connections to equipment, bus or conduit shall be made with approved type of solderless
connector and shall be unpainted and thoroughly cleaned before connection is made to insure
a good metal contact.
B. All connections which will be inaccessible after completion of project shall be made by
exothermic weld process.
C. The lighting fixture shall be grounded by means of a conductor between the outlet box and
fixture.
D. Provide a bonding wire in all flexible conduits and connect to the boxes at each end in an
approved manner.
E. J:>rovide a ground rod driven near each pole base and weld a #6 A WG wire or as indicated
in Drawings, to the top of the rod and extend the wire to a grounding lug in the base and
'"bond the anchor bolts.
F. Ground receptacles to their outlet boxes by means of a grounding conductor from the green
terminal on the receptacle to a grounding screw in the outlet box.
END OF SECTION
16450-3
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART I-GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide interior lighting complete as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials shall bear UL label.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving
materials, finishes, accessories, dimensioned drawings and installation directions and
complete manufacturer's descriptions, catalog data and information on each lighting fixture,
lamps and lighting poles, including complete details on each fixture with dimensions,
photometric data, characteristic curves and electrical testing laboratories report, description
of finish trim and complement of lamps, fixture mounting accessories and hardware and all
other pertinent information necessary to assure that the fixture is equal to the one specified.
B. A sample of each fixture proposed for use shall be submitted to the Owner for review, if
requested.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fixtures shall be integrally ballasted and shall be furnished complete with all necessary
wiring, fused ballasts, starting' aids, lamp-holders, lamps, reflectors, glassware, bases,
pendants and mounting accessories as required and all other appurtenances and auxiliaries
necessary for installation.
B. Components of the same type, size, rating, functional characteristics and make of similar
interior lighting fixture shall be interchangeable.
C. Provide lamps as specified on lighting fixture schedule.
16510-1
60-954.00
D. Fluorescent Ballasts: Ballasts shall be of the electronic type as indicated on the Lighting
Fixture Schedule. Ballasts shall have C.B.M. - E.T.L. Labels. Provide separate, in-line
fuse (external to the ballast case) for each ballast. Fuse size shall be as directed by
manufacturer.
E. HID ballasts shall be of the auto regulated constant wattage type, high power factor,
encapsulated construction and with in-line fuse. HID dimming ballast shall be UL listed as
dimming ballasts.
F. The schedule and details of lighting fixtures, appearing on the Drawings, indicate the type,
construction, appearance, quality and performance of the fixtures required. Any proposed
deviation from the fixtures specified must equal or be superior to the item specified under
these headings. Proposed substitute lighting fixtures will be judged on overall quality of
construction and on the basis of laboratory tests by the Electrical Testing Laboratory or
similar independent testing facility. The fixture manufacturers products scheduled are
considered acceptable. Upon request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish for review,
fabrication drawings, photometric curves and a physical sample of every specific type
offered.
G. All materials used in the manufacture offixtures shall be new and the best of their respective
kind, and shall be formed and assembled in a neat, accurate and workmanlike manner. Sheet
metal shall be of sufficient thickness or shall be ribbed, flanged or otherwise reinforced so
that all lighting fixtures and their component parts will withstand the stresses of normal
handling and installation and service without undue distortion of shape. Plastering or other
installation procedures shall not be relied on to reinforce lighting fixtures or their component
parts.
H. Painted sheet steel shall be processed with Bonderize or equal phosphate treatment or shall
be Paintlok or Galvanneal; unpainted sheet steel shall be Galvanneal, both as manufactured
by Republic Steel, or equivalent. Springs shall be of full hard temper stainless steel.
Fasteners of ferrous metal shall be cadmium plated or zinc plated with chromate. Screws
mounting fixture housing in plaster ring shall be minimum #10, pointed to facilitate
installation, or type A. Plaster frame rings shall be of sufficient strength to withstand
deformation during installation, and of suitable materials and/or finish to prevent corrosion
from ceiling plasters and mortars. The Contractor shall furnish the fixture manufacturer a
complete list of fixtures that will be installed in acoustical plaster ceilings with type and
quantities. All painted finishes shall be baked epoxy, acrylic of fully equivalent finish
suitable for the service required including temperature and shall be to the acceptance of the
Engineer.
I. All fixtures shall be complete with canopies, suspensions of proper lengths, hickeys, casing,
sockets, holders, lamps, reflectors, hardware, and shall be completely wired and assembled.
16510-2
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Furnish suitable plaster rings or plaster stops for fixtures which are to be set in plaster
ceilings. Consult the Finish Schedules on Drawings for locations and extent of plaster
ceilings. Coordinate the mounting methods of all recessed fluorescent lighting fixtures with
ceiling suspension system and ceiling trades.
K. Fluorescent ballasts and lampholders shall be readily and simply replaceable without
demounting the fixture. Bottom and one side of ballast shall be in full contact with metallic
fixture surfaces for maximum heat conductance. Exposed lamp fluorescent sockets shall be
provided with lamp retainers or telescoping type sockets.
L. Plastic lenses and diffusers used on fluorescent fixtures shall be 100% prime virgin acrylic
as manufactured by KSH, Carolite or accepted equivalent and shall be furnished with
destaticised treatment. Injection molded lenses shall be as manufactured by Holophane or
equivalent.
M. Where fixture type is not indicated on Drawings, fixture type used in similar locations shall
be installed, as accepted by the Engineer.
N. Components of the same type, size, rating, functional characteristics and make of similar
interior lighting fixtures shall be interchangeable. All fixture stems shall be furnished by the
manufacturer of the fixture specified or as shown on the Drawings. Fixtures for use outdoors
or in wet areas shall be suitably gasketed to prevent access of moisture or insects into fixture
or diffuser. All metal parts of fixtures for use in damp locations that are specified as
requiring painting shall be painted with suitable weather and moisture resistant paints
exhibiting moisture resisting qualities equal to epoxy based coatings. All aluminum parts
of fixtures for use in damp locations that are specified as requiring an unpainted finish shall
be anodized.
O. Incandescent lamps shall be suitable to operate on 120 Volts, 60 Hz. supply, with the
following requirements:
1. Wattage rating as shown on fixture schedule.
2. Type of lamp as shown on fixture schedule.
3. Lamps shall be inside frosted unless noted otherwise.
4. Unless noted otherwise lamps shall be extended service type with rated life of2,500
hours minimum.
P. High intensity discharge lamps shall be suitable to operate with specified ballasts on 120
Volts, 60 Hz. supply with the following requirements:
16510-3
60-954.00
1. Wattage ratings and lamp designation shall be as shown on fixture schedule.
2. Lamp base shall be mogul base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
B. Exit Signs: Wall, ceiling or bracket mounted as shown on Drawings. Contractor shall install
directional arrows as shown on Drawings or in fixture schedule.
C. All required mounting and support hardware for light fixtures shall be provided by the
Contractor.
D. Verify the exact architectural treatment and type of ceiling finish in each area in order to
insure that all required equipment and materials for each area is supplied by the fixture
manufacturer in the initial order. See Room Finish Schedule on architectural Drawings.
E. Install "Lay-In" type fixtures with 6 foot length of flexible conduit to enable fixture
relocation with minimum inconvenience.
F. Fixture Supports: Support each fixture securely. Each recessed fluorescent fixture shall be
secured at four points t6 the building structure or ceiling suspension system. Where pendant
fixtures are mounted in continuous rows, the number of hangers shall equal the number of
4 foot lengths, plus 1. Do not support fixtures to plaster or drywall ceilings. Furnish and
install all steel members and supports to fasten an.d suspend fixtures.
G. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Rooms: In the mechanical and electrical equipment
rooms certain lighting fixtures shall be installed on ceilings or walls after all piping ductwork
and equipment therein are installed. Exact location and switching for such fixtures shall be
determined at the job site during the course of the work. Fixtures shall be located so as to
give maximum illumination to items of equipment requiring servicing, and moving
machinery. Any lighting fixtures blocked, inaccessible or improperly located shall be
relocated at no extra cost.
END OF SECTION
16510-4
60-954.00
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PBS&J ADMIN TPMP~
ID:813-282-97E7
OCT 30'97
15:37 NO.ooa P.O)
"
ADDENDUM NUMBER 1
Clearwater B~uch Family Aquatic Center
Clearwater, Florida
October 30, 1997
Listcd below lire cluriticutiuns, modifications and revisions t.;> the Bidding Documents for the
referenced project.
Drawings
Drawing <:-1. Site Plan - The gate referenced as being "removed and l'docated", refers to the
removal of the existing double gate near the comer oftne same fence line and the relocati('ln to
the approximate mid-point of the fence line (refer lO location on plan).
I)rawjpg A-3, Bulldln~ Elevatious - Window" labeled as "B" in the floor Plan and shown 011
the Building Elevations do not agree with the Window Types shown 011 ShooL A-5. Type "B"
window inuicatcd in thc Window Schedule on Sheet A-5, shall be changed to have the same
design as window type HC", but aU glass lights shall be fixed.
Drawing 8.2, Foundation Plait - The indication ofWF24 for the foundalion Jocatoo where
Section 2/S-2 is referenced shall be a type "WF30" foundation. The Lypc WF30 foundation shall
be provided for the all the walls in tIle Bquipmenl Compound.
Drawing 8-2, Seetion B/S-l - Reference to type "W f24" shall be changed to WF30 (see Footing
Schedule on Sheet 8-3 for reinforcing).
Drawing S-2, Roof Framiui: aud 11'oawdation Plans - The Section Cut "C" on Lhe plans points
to the len. TIus section cut shoukl be changed to point to the right to be consistent with Section
CIS-2 shown on the sume ~heel.
Drawing E-2, LIghtill2 Plan - Lighting Fixtures over lavatories in the Men's and Women's
Rcstrooms shall be type "j3" (refer to fixture schedule on sheet 8-3).
Drawing };-2, "ower Plan - Llght switch in Room 106 - Chlorine Room, shall he locatod on the
outside wall (next to the latch jamb) and shall be a weatherproof type.
Unwing E-3, Riser DiaJ:ram Notca - Note 2 shall be deleted.
Drawing E-3, PHn~1 hp" Schedule. Circuits 38, 40 and 42 shall be indicated as "spares".
^ddeodul11 ~o )
3o.Oct-97
. PES&J ADMIN TAMPA
ID:81~-282-9767
CCT 30'37
15:37 NO.004 P.J~
Addendum Number 1 (continued)
Clearwater Beach Family Ayu4Itic Ccnter
Drawin~ K-3, Panel "P" Sclu.~dule - The combination Slurter, Disconnect and Wiring related to
the lOBI' Actiyities Pump (ckt P- 8,10, ] 2) shown 011 sheet E-2 is part of Alternate Number 1.
Base Bid shall only include the circuit breaker at Panel P and empty condult to the pump
location.
Drawing I'lA.OO, Pool Equipment Lbt, Item 2 - (Clarification) The Activity Pump, (item 2
011 the Pool Equipment Li5t-PL4.00-2 and Hquipll1cnt Layout ~ PL4.00-1) is for the Raindrop.
Thi~ pump is a pRrl oflhe Alternate for the Raindrop. The piping is part or the Base Bld. The
other aetivitie!'> hid as altcmates (Frog Slide. Drop Slide and Lcnlon Drop Spruys) arc supplied by
the Filtrution Pump. The piping for these activities is olso a pal1 of the ba..c hid. For the Lemon
Drops, cap the piping heluw the concrete and tile support, For the Drop Sl1dc and Frog Slide,
lerminate the piping in a baJJ valve in a new valve box constructed from a skimmer lid and
extension collar.
Drawin2 PL4.00, Pool Equipment List, Item 7 .. The Autofill valve ~hall he equipped with a
meter to measure the volume of water added to the system.
Drawilll: PL4.00, Pool Equipment List, Item 9 - Chlorinator shall changed to bc the equivalent
model as manufactured by Capitol Controls.
Specifications
Section 0] 030, PllI'agraph 1.02.C - The description of Altcmate 3 shall be revised to include the
specification of the type of material for the drop slido as "stainless steel",
Sectl()1I 01030, Paral:raph L01.F - The description of Altemate 6 shall be revised to read:
"Provide'spccial aggregate plaster in lieu of Marcite plaster for pool finish". (Refer to Section
13150, Parclgraph 1.\.A & B on pages 13JSO-li through 13150-20).
Section 01] OO,PnJpulll" Forlnt Paee 5 (15a) . '11,e included Qualification Fom) for )loot
Contruclors is roquired to be submitted as a part of the proposal, however) this qualification is
not required to be approved prior to bidding, as stated in Section 13150, Paragraph I.03.A.
Stction 07410, Sbeet Metal Roofing, Page 1, 1.04, A - Delete in it!'! entirety and add as [oHows.
"A. Standing seam design with machine closing of the seams, clips and lastencrs for a concealed
and weather tigllt instullation."
Addend\ltn No 1
2
30.oc:.97
",
PES&J ADMIN TAMPR
ID:S13-28:2-9?67
OCT 30'97
15:38 NJ.004 P.04
Addendum Number I (contil~ucd)
Clearwater Beach F.lmily Aquutil; Center
Sectioll 07410, Sheet Metal Roofing, PRge 3, 2,01, A. Ddete Max-Rib by McElroy and inSC11
Standing Seam (1-1/2-iuch high Seam with IG.jl1ch panel ....-idtb) By Utra Seam Systems. Delete
last sentence
S~tiOJl131S0, Paragraph - The f)ontcnce referring to "pre-quaJification" shall bl) changed to
read: "The Pool Contractor's qualifications sha\l he submitted by the Contractor. for approval by
the Owncr~ as a pali (lfthc General Conlrclctor'S Bid Proposal as indicated in Section 01100,
Proposal Form, page 5 (15<1).
Replo.ct! 0.1/~" ~I d~i~s PL 1.00 Tht'O"h PL ~3 f1.tJ-
p.~ ~ptt;(,fl pteli...uhOtV'1 WJf ~f iJiel- with o..-Ht>tJ.UI d~'''':J' tJCl,~
",itk ':!*" f~~'
Nan::
Aodc;nd"11l Nu I
3
:\1)-~1-l)7